JP7692882B2 - heating cooker - Google Patents

Description

The present disclosure relates to a cooking device that heats an object to be heated, such as a pot, placed on a top plate.

Cooking appliances are broadly divided into three types based on the environment in which they are used.
One of them is the so-called "built-in type" which is installed inside kitchen furniture such as a kitchen counter. The second type is the "free-standing type" which is placed in a specific position on kitchen furniture like a gas stove (also called a "gas-burning table"). The third type is the small and portable "tabletop type" which is placed in a desired position on a dining table, etc.

Many "built-in" cooking appliances are equipped with multiple heat sources and are popular for their ability to handle a variety of cooking methods. However, because they are installed inside kitchen furniture, the external dimensions must be designed to match the standards of general kitchen furniture, meaning there is much less freedom in design compared to "freestanding" or "tabletop" appliances, and it is difficult to turn them into practical products.

A typical built-in cooking appliance has multiple heating ports arranged on the top of the main body, which perform induction heating, and a grill chamber (also called an "oven chamber" or "heating chamber," but hereafter referred to collectively as the "heating chamber") inside the main body, in which microwaves from a microwave heating source are introduced to cook (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Appliances equipped with multiple heating sources with different heating principles like this are called composite cooking appliances.

JP 2022-117570 A (page 1, FIG. 29) JP 2015-158345 A (Page 1, FIG. 15) JP 2019-053950 A (page 3, FIG. 1) JP 2013-213663 A (page 10, FIG. 7)

As proposed in the above-mentioned Patent Document 1, in the case of a combined heating cooker, the number of heating means and input operation units increases to a plurality, and the task of the user individually setting one cooking menu becomes more complicated.
In view of this, it has been proposed to transmit recipe data from a smartphone (communication terminal) to each heating source of a cooking appliance and cook using the recipe data, as disclosed in Patent Document 2.
However, in order to set recipe data in a cooking device via a communication terminal, the user must consider and select the timing of communication between the cooking device and the communication terminal and the heating source to be used each time. In addition, in the case of a cooking menu in which multiple heating means are used in combination to perform one cooking, it is assumed that there will be multiple cooking steps, so there is a concern that the user may be confused in operating the input operation unit. However, the above-mentioned Patent Documents 1 and 2 do not yet provide sufficient measures to address these issues. This may lead to confusion for the user and may also lead to failure of data communication for the cooking menu. In other words, it is necessary to notify the user in a timely manner depending on the state of cooperation between the cooking device and the communication terminal.

In addition, in the cooking system described in Patent Document 3, when the communication terminal and the cooking appliance are within a communication range, the communication state is automatically connected. Therefore, even if there is no intention to use the cooking appliance, if a person with a communication terminal capable of transmitting information for controlling the cooking appliance enters the communication range, there is a risk that the control information for the cooking appliance will be unintentionally transmitted to the cooking appliance.
Furthermore, in Patent Document 4, a configuration is proposed in which, for two of the cooking procedures (steps), setting information is sent from a communication terminal (information terminal) to a heating appliance at each stage, and the display unit of the communication terminal displays that it is time to send the setting information. However, even in Patent Document 4, the cooperation relationship between the cooking appliance and the communication terminal is not fully taken into consideration, and there is still room for improvement in terms of the configuration of the cooking appliance and the method of providing the setting information.

A first object of the present disclosure is to provide a highly convenient cooking device and cooking system that allows a user to set various cooking menus in the cooking device from a communication terminal by improving operability.
In addition, a second object of the present disclosure is to provide a heating cooker that does not compromise safety or usability by allowing the user to intentionally accept setting information for heating cooking control from an external communication device (terminal device, etc.).

The cooking device according to the first disclosure includes:
An input operation unit;
A heating means driven in at least one of cooking step 1 and cooking step 2;
A communication unit that wirelessly communicates with an external device;
A notification means;
A control device that acquires setting information A of the cooking process 1 and setting information B of the cooking process 2 via the communication unit;
having
The control device sequentially acquires the setting information A and the setting information B,
The control device proceeds to a step of acquiring the setting information A when a specific input key A of the input operation unit is operated,
proceeding to a step of acquiring the setting information B when a specific input key B of the input operation unit is operated;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

The cooking device according to the second disclosure is
A plurality of input operation units;
A notification means;
A communication unit that acquires recipe data relating to one cooking object from an external device;
A control device that controls a cooking process according to the recipe data acquired via the communication unit;
having
When the recipe data includes setting information for a plurality of cooking steps, the control device sequentially acquires the recipe data divided for each cooking step, for each cooking step;
the control device, when acquiring the recipe data for each of the cooking steps, operates specific input keys arranged for each of the input operation units in an order determined by the recipe data;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

The cooking system according to the third disclosure includes:
A cooking device having a plurality of input operation units and a communication function;
a communication terminal connected to the cooking appliance via wireless communication;
The communication terminal includes:
(1) A first screen and a second screen are sequentially displayed on a terminal display unit;
(2) The first screen displays recipe data for the selected food in the order of a first display portion for cooking step 1 and a second display portion for cooking step 2;
(3) when the first display portion displayed on the first screen is selected, switching the display to the second screen displaying advance notice information 1 that identifies the input operation unit to be used in the cooking process 1;
(4) The second screen displays input keys for transmitting setting information A of the cooking process 1 of the recipe data,
(5) When the input key is operated, the setting information A selected on the first screen is transmitted to the cooking device;
When the cooking device receives a command to start the cooking process 1 after receiving the setting information A, the cooking device starts the cooking process 1 and ends the receiving process of the setting information A.
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

The cooking device according to the fourth disclosure is
A first unit incorporating a heating means;
a second unit that can be heated by the heating means in a state where the second unit is placed on the first unit,
The first unit includes a main control device that controls the heating means, a communication unit that performs wireless communication with an outside, and a first operation unit that allows input operation in a state where the second unit is placed on the first unit,
The second unit includes a second operation unit capable of performing an input operation in a first state placed on the first unit, and a sub-controller that receives an input from the second operation unit,
The main control device has a function of acquiring setting information A related to a cooking process 1 and setting information B related to a cooking process 2 of a specific cooking menu via the communication unit,
The main control device includes:
(1) proceeding to a step of acquiring the setting information A for using the first unit alone when a specific input key A of the first operation section is operated;
(2) after the cooking step 1 is completed, when a specific input key B of the second operation section is operated in the first state, proceeding to a step of acquiring the setting information B for using the second unit;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

The cooking device according to the fifth disclosure is
A first unit incorporating a heating means;
a second unit that can be heated by the heating means in a state where the second unit is placed on the first unit,
The first unit includes a main control device that controls the heating means, a communication unit 526 that performs wireless communication with the outside, and a first operation unit that can perform an input operation without placing the second unit thereon,
The second unit includes a second operation unit and a sub-controller that can perform an input operation while the second unit is placed on the first unit,
The main control device has a function of acquiring setting information A related to a cooking process 1 and setting information B related to a cooking process 2 of a specific cooking menu via the communication unit,
The main control device includes:
(1) in a state where the second unit is placed on the first unit, when a specific input key B of the second operation section is operated, the step proceeds to a step of acquiring the setting information A for using the second unit in the cooking step 1;
(2) after the cooking step 1 is completed, when a specific input key A of the first operation unit is operated, proceeding to a step of acquiring the setting information B for using the first unit in the cooking step 2;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

According to the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a cooking device that can be used in conjunction with a communication terminal to handle a wide variety of cooking methods, contributes to improving the efficiency of input operations and reducing the input load on the user, and a cooking system that uses the cooking device.

FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram of a heating and cooking system according to a first embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the installed state of the cooking device shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 3 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . FIG. 3 is a schematic plan view of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is an enlarged plan view of a central display unit and a central operation unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2. 3 is an enlarged plan view of a left display unit, a left heating power display unit, and a left operation unit of the cooking appliance shown in FIG. 2. 3 is an enlarged plan view of a right display unit, a right heating power display unit, and a right operation unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2. 3 is an enlarged plan view of a central display unit, a central operation unit, and a central heating status display unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2. 3 is an enlarged plan view showing an example of operation of the central display unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2; FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of a control device of the cooking appliance shown in FIG. 2 and an input operation unit (central operation unit). 3 is an explanatory diagram showing all the types of control menus that can be selected by a central operation unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2; 3 is a classification table of control menus for the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a storage structure of various cooking control menus for a coordinated cooking mode and a combined cooking mode in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 and a correspondence relationship between input keys. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of a central display unit in a combined cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2 . FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the input operation unit and the central display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 in a composite cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the input operation unit and the central display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation section and the central display section in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 in a composite cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation unit and the central display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 in a coordinated cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation unit and the central display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation section and the central display section in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 of a modified example showing the display contents of the input operation unit and the central display unit in the cooperative cooking mode of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display contents of the input operation unit and the central display unit in the cooperative cooking mode of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2, and a display example of the cooperative cooking menu. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the central display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 in a coordinated cooking mode; 3 is a table showing the correspondence between various cooperative cooking menus and specific input keys in the cooperative cooking mode of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram showing a first operation example of the coordinated preheating cooking mode among the coordinated cooking modes shown in FIG. 25 . FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation example 2 of the coordinated preheating cooking mode among the coordinated cooking modes shown in FIG. 25 . FIG. 26 is a step explanatory diagram showing the operation of the coordinated cooking mode shown in FIG. 25 . 26 is a flowchart showing the operation of the coordinated cooking mode shown in FIG. 25 . 3 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions and determination results before transitioning to a coordinated cooking mode in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is a flowchart 1 showing an operation of acquiring recipe data from an external source in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is a flowchart showing main input steps for three cooking modes after the main power is turned on in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process after the main power is turned on in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2. 34 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process in the case of a coordinated cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 33 . 34 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process in the case of a combined cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 33 . 34 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process in the case of a single cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 33 . 3 is a flowchart showing main input steps when cooking is performed by acquiring recipe data for three cooking modes after the main power is turned on in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 34 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data from an external source in the cooking device shown in FIG. 33 . 34 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data from the outside in the cooking device shown in FIG. 33 . 34 is a flowchart showing a basic operation of a control device in a voice input mode in the cooking appliance shown in FIG. 33 . 34 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the initial standby screen of the central display unit at the time of start-up in the cooking appliance shown in FIG. 33 . FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram of the left display section showing the state before cooking by the first heating means is started in the cooking device shown in FIG. 33 . FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the operation steps of the control device of the cooking device from the time recipe data is acquired until cooking process 2 is completed. FIG. 1 is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation unit and the central display unit when recipe data is acquired and cooking is performed in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation unit and the central display unit when recipe data is acquired and cooking is performed in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation unit and the central display unit when recipe data is acquired and cooking is performed in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing a chronological relationship between cooking steps of a coordinated cooking menu and operations of an input operation unit when recipe data is acquired from an external device in the heating cooker of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing a chronological relationship between cooking steps of an integrated cooking menu and operations of an input operation unit in the heating cooker of the first embodiment. 1 is a time chart 1 for explaining a period during which recipe data can be acquired in a coordinated cooking mode and a control operation up to the start of cooking step 1 in the cooking device of embodiment 1. 1 is a time chart 1 for explaining a heating pause period and control operations up to the start of cooking step 2 in the heating cooker of embodiment 1. 1 is a time chart 1 for explaining the entire recipe data obtainable period and control operation in a composite cooking mode in the cooking device of the first embodiment; 50 is a time chart showing a first modified example of the time chart shown in FIG. 49 . FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation unit and the central display unit when recipe data for the cooperative cooking mode is acquired in the cooking device of the first embodiment. 50 is a time chart showing a second modified example of the time chart shown in FIG. 49 . 11 is a flowchart showing the operation of displaying food ingredients and nutritional components before transitioning to a heat cooking operation in the linked cooking mode using recipe data acquired from an external source. 2 is a block diagram showing the main internal configuration of a communication terminal (information processing terminal device) used in the heating and cooking system of embodiment 1. FIG. 57 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal device) shown in FIG. 56. 57 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal device) shown in FIG. 56. 57 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking device after receiving data from the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 56. FIG. 57 is an operational explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the recipe data display screen and cooking steps of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 56. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal device) shown in FIG. 56. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal device) shown in FIG. 56. 3 and 4 showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 56. 1 is a time chart 1 showing the coordinated operation between a communication terminal (information processing terminal device) and a cooking device in the cooking system of embodiment 1. 4 is a time chart 2 showing the coordinated operation between the communication terminal (information processing terminal device) and the cooking device in the cooking system of the first embodiment. 4 is a time chart 3 showing the coordinated operation between the communication terminal (information processing terminal device) and the cooking appliance in the cooking system of embodiment 1. 4 is a time chart showing the operation of the cooking appliances in a coordinated cooking mode in the cooking system of the first embodiment. 13 is an enlarged plan view of the central display unit, central operation unit, and central heating status display unit of a cooking device used in the cooking system of embodiment 2. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing the display contents on the terminal display unit of the communication terminal used in the heating and cooking system shown in Figure 68. A block diagram explaining the relationship between the control device and the central operating unit of the cooking device shown in Figure 68. A plan view of the central display unit, central operating unit, left and right operating units, and central heating status display unit of the cooking device shown in Figure 68. An enlarged plan view of the central display unit, central operation unit, and central heating status display unit of the cooking device shown in Figure 68. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display on the cooking device that indicates that recipe data for one cooking menu is being received from a communication terminal. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display on the cooking device that indicates that recipe data for one cooking menu is being received from the communication terminal; FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents on the terminal display unit of a communication terminal used in the heating and cooking system shown in FIG. 68. FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing a modified example of the display content on the terminal display unit shown in FIG. 75. FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display contents on the terminal display unit shown in FIG. 75. FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents on the terminal display unit shown in FIG. 75. 13 is a timing chart showing the operation between a cooking appliance and a communication terminal used in the cooking system of the third embodiment in a chronological order. 80 is an enlarged plan view showing the operating state of the central display unit, central operation unit, and central heating status display unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 79. 80 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking device shown in FIG. 79. FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal device) shown in FIG. 79. 8 is a time chart showing the operation of the cooking device shown in FIG. 79 in chronological order. 80 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking device shown in FIG. 79 in chronological order. FIG. 13 is a configuration diagram of a heating and cooking system according to a fourth embodiment. A longitudinal cross-sectional view of the center of a cooking device used in the heating system of Figure 85. FIG. 86 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a first unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 85. FIG. 86 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a second unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 85 . FIG. 86 is an enlarged view of the input operation section and display section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 85, viewed from the front (front) side. FIG. 86 is a plan view of the cooking device shown in FIG. 85 viewed from above. A time chart showing basic operating steps and usage states from the start of the heating cooker shown in Figure 85. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the usage modes (first state and second state) of the cooking device shown in FIG. 85 and the cooking process. 86 is a time chart 1 showing the operation of the cooking device and the communication terminal used in the heating system of FIG. 85 in chronological order. Time chart 2 showing the operation of the cooking appliance and the communication terminal used in the heating system of Figure 85 in chronological order. FIG. 87 is a plan view of the cooking device shown in FIG. 86 viewed from above. FIG. 87 is a plan view of the cooking device shown in FIG. 86 viewed from above. FIG. 87 is an enlarged explanatory diagram of the input operation section and the display section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 86, viewed from the front (front) side. FIG. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the center of a cooking device used in a cooking system according to a fifth embodiment. Time chart 1 showing the operation of the cooking appliance and the communication terminal used in the heating system of Figure 98 in chronological order. 13 is a time chart showing the operation of a cooking device in a multiple heating cooking mode in the heating cooking system of embodiment 5. Time chart 2 showing the operation of the cooking appliance and the communication terminal used in the heating system of Figure 98 in chronological order.

The cooking system according to the present disclosure will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following description, directional terms (e.g., "up," "down," "right," "left," "front," "rear," etc.) are used to facilitate understanding, but these are for explanatory purposes only. In addition, in each drawing, the same reference numerals are used to denote the same or equivalent items, and this is common throughout the entire specification.

Furthermore, in the following description, a composite cooking device having a plurality of types of heating means will also be simply referred to as a "cooking device."
In addition, a cooking device with a cooking space such as an inner pot, such as a rice cooker with one heating means (e.g., an induction heating coil or a sheath heater), is also called a heating cooker. For example, even if such a rice cooker has only one heating means, it can cook multiple types of food such as regular white rice and porridge, and may also have several or more ways of cooking rice. Such rice cookers are equipped with multiple input keys (touch keys, push button keys, etc.) that can select various food items and cooking modes, and improving the operability for users US is one of the issues.

In the following explanation, when we say "a heated object placed on the top plate," it means that it includes both cases where the heated object, such as a pot, is placed directly on the top surface of the top plate 3 (described below) and heated, and cases where the heated object is placed on a supporting member, such as a trivet, that is arranged above the top plate, such as a gas burner, and heated.

In the first embodiment, the "second heating means" HM2 refers to a heat source for heating the food placed inside the heating chamber 6, which will be described later. It may also be one that uses radiant heat or steam.

In the first embodiment, a magnetron is used as the microwave heating source, but there is no limitation on the microwave oscillation principle or method, and it may be a microwave oscillator using a semiconductor element. In addition, multiple heating sources may be provided.

In this embodiment 1, the "third heating means" HM3 is called "third" to indicate the difference from the second heating means HM2, but does not imply a superiority/inferiority relationship.
In addition, in embodiment 1, a heat source using a radiant electric heat source (such as a sheath heater, mica heater, carbon heater, ceramic heater, infrared heater, radiant heater, etc.) is used, but a heat source that generates heat in other forms or methods may also be used.

The third heating means HM3 refers to a means capable of cooking in one heating chamber 6. It may be a form in which multiple heating sources with different heating principles are used in combination, such as a heating source composed of an electric heater and a gas burner (burner). An induction heating source may also be used as a heating source for heating the heating chamber 6. It may also be a steam generator (boiler) (not shown) that supplies high-temperature steam (such as superheated steam).

Furthermore, the third heating means HM3 may be either a heat source that heats the wall surface of the heating chamber 6 from the outside, or a heat source that is installed in the internal space of the heating chamber 6 and heats the atmosphere in the internal space to a high temperature.
In addition, a heat-generating member that becomes hot by induction heating may be placed in the heating chamber, and this heat-generating member may heat the wall surface of the heating chamber 6 from the outside, or may heat the air inside the heating chamber 6.

A typical example of the induction heating coil (IH coil) referred to in this embodiment 1 is one made by bundling about 30 thin copper or aluminum wires of about 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm, twisting several of these bundles together and winding them into a spiral shape. Alternatively, there is also one made by winding about 1000 to 1500 wires of about 0.05 mm. There is also a proposal to make it out of a ring-shaped conductor made of a flat conductive material. All of these forms correspond to the "IH coil" that is the main part of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source).

In the following description, "coordinated cooking" refers to cooking that uses two or more heating sources that heat a single cooked item (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.) in different locations and whose heating operation conditions can be set independently (see embodiments 1 to 3).

In the following explanation, "multiple heating cooking mode" refers to cooking in which the heating locations or heating environments (containers or heating chambers that hold the food) are different for one cooked item (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.) and the same heating source is used more than once. For example, first, only the vegetables and meat are placed in a pot and pre-cooked by adding seasonings, etc., and then the cooked item containing the vegetables and meat is combined with another ingredient (e.g. rice) and placed in a sealed container or inner pot for cooking rice and heated (in this case, the cooked item is also called "seasoned rice").

The above-mentioned "coordinated cooking" refers to the use of multiple heating means with a time lag. For example, in the process of completing a single dish, after preheating with a microwave heating source, the food to be cooked is moved to another location, where it is heated with an induction coil to complete the dish, which is a type of "coordinated cooking" as referred to here.

Another type of "cooperative cooking" is to heat the food inside the heating chamber 6 with a gas burner (burner), and then move the food onto the top plate 3 and heat it with the gas burner (burner) or an induction heating source to improve the cooking quality.

The "voice input mode" refers to a control mode in which the user US inputs by speaking, without touching or pressing the buttons or operation surfaces of the input switches (input keys).
The types of "voice input mode" include "voice input mode 1" and "voice input mode 2".

The "voice input mode 1" is selected by operating an input key (hereinafter referred to as a "combined key") that supports both voice input and touch (including pressing) input.
The "voice input mode 2" is selected by operating an input key 180 dedicated to voice input (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "voice input dedicated key"), which will be described later.

When an input operation unit has multiple input keys, including the "dual-purpose key," and the mode is changed to "voice input mode 1" using the dual-purpose key, there are two cases: one in which the input functions of (some of) the input keys (e.g., 156M) other than the dual-purpose key are temporarily disabled (this control pattern is called "voice input mode 1A"), and one in which they are not disabled (this control pattern is called "voice input mode 1B"). Either case corresponds to "voice input mode 1" as referred to here.

In one input operation unit, when the "dedicated voice input key" 180 is pressed during touch input using an input key (e.g., 153M or 153L), "voice input mode 2" is selected. In this case, after the selection of this voice input mode 2, there are two cases: one in which the input functions of (some of) the input keys (e.g., 156M) other than the dedicated voice input key 180 are temporarily disabled (this control pattern is called "voice input mode 2A"), and one in which they are not disabled (this control pattern is called "voice input mode 2B"). Either case corresponds to "voice input mode 2" as referred to here.

In the first embodiment, the input operation units 15 include three units in total: a central operation unit 15M, a left operation unit 15L, and a right operation unit 15R.
The central operation unit 15M may be referred to as a "shared operation unit." The left operation unit 15L and the right operation unit 15R may be referred to as "individual operation units."

The specific input key refers to an input means (selection means) that generates a specific signal (selection information 202) described below, and corresponds to a touch-type input key, a push-button switch, a non-contact switch, a dial switch, etc.
The individual operation units 15L and 15R are respectively provided with first specific input keys 152L and 152R which form part of the specific input keys.
The shared operation section 15M has a second specific input key 153M. In the first embodiment, the input key 154M is also set as the second specific input key, but it is sufficient to provide at least one specific input key in one input operation section (the shared operation section 15M in this case).

In the following description, the "setting information" refers to information that is provided to the cooking device 1 (400) to set the control contents (of the heating means) according to recipe data CD, which will be described later.
The setting information for the cooking process 1 may be referred to as “setting information A.” The setting information for the cooking process 2 may be referred to as “setting information B.”

Among the specific input keys for obtaining "setting information" for cooking steps 1 and 2 in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the key operated for inputting information for cooking step 1 may be referred to as a "specific input key A."
Similarly, the input operation for cooking step 2 may be called the "specific input key B."

Of the specific input keys for obtaining "setting information" for cooking steps 1 and 2 in the multiple heating cooking mode KMM, the key operated for inputting for cooking step 1 may be referred to as "specific input key A".
Similarly, the input operation for cooking step 2 may be called the "specific input key B." The specific input key A and the specific input key B of the combined cooking mode KM1 and the multiple heating cooking mode KMM may be the same or different.

When each of the three specific input keys (152L, 152R, and 153M) is operated, it generates individual selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C) corresponding to the specific input key. In other words, since each of the three specific input keys (152L, 152R, and 153M) generates different selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C), it is possible to uniquely identify which specific input key has been operated in the input key identification section 15A of the input operation section 15. For example, the selection information of the specific input key 152L is 202A. The selection information of the specific input key 152R is 202B.
This allows the control device 40 to determine which specific input key (152L, 152R, and 153M) has been operated, based on the input information from the input operation unit 15. If the specific input key itself does not have the function of generating unique selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C), the input operation unit 15 on which the specific input key is located may assign a unique identification number (code) to each specific input key and transmit the identification information of each specific input key to the control device 40.
In the following description, the selection information A will be represented by the symbol 202. In other words, the symbol 202 encompasses all of the selection information 202A to 202C, and may refer to any one of them.

When "recipe data" CD (described later) is acquired and the individual operation units 15L, 15R are operated to perform heating cooking, the first specific input keys 152L, 152R are selected to select a first cooking program from the storage device 42 of the control device 40 (described later). This "first cooking program" drives the first heating means HM1 to perform induction heating cooking.
Each cooking menu belonging to the first cooking program is displayed on the left display section 16L and the right display section 16R. As described later, the first specific input keys 152L and 152R also serve as keys to be pressed when selecting a control menu to be implemented by the left and right heating ports 4L and 4R. However, the first specific input keys 152L and 152R may be changed to other input keys (e.g., 153R and 153L) and also serve as input keys to select the left and right heating ports 4L and 4R. The first specific input keys 152L and 152R may also serve as input keys 154L, 154R, 155L, and 155R to instruct the increase or decrease of the heating time, heat, etc.

When recipe data CD is acquired and heating is performed by operating the common operation unit 15M, the second specific input key 153M (154M) is selected to select a second cooking program from the memory device 42 of the control device 40 described later.
This "second cooking program" performs cooking by driving two groups, the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the third heating means HM3, in combination. Specifically, each cooking menu belonging to the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1, which will be described later, can be performed. This cooperative cooking mode KM1 has two or more cooking steps. The cooking menu can be selected using the central operation unit 15M while looking at the central display unit 16M. Note that, before starting cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, input keys other than the second specific input key 153M are also used to set control conditions (heat power, heating time, etc.).
By selecting and operating the second specific input key 153M, a second cooking program is selected from the memory device 42 of the control device 40, and identification information 167 such as the name of a cooking menu that can be executed by the second cooking program can be displayed on the display unit 16.

The "second cooking program" also includes a program in which the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the third heating means HM3 are each driven independently to perform cooking. For example, it is also possible to perform induction heating at a specific heating port (central heating port 4C), or to perform cooking using only microwave heating in the heating chamber 6.

In the following description, "recipe data" CD refers to data used in controlling the cooker 1 to cook one food item.
One form of recipe data CD is instructions that include all of the data specifying the heating means, the data defining the heating process and order, and the control conditions during heating (including but not limited to heat power, target temperature, heating and cooking time, etc.), and is also a computer program for realizing those instructions.

Another form of the recipe data CD does not include data specifying a heating means or data defining the heating steps or order, but includes only a portion of the data required to execute a cooking menu (e.g., hamburger steak).
For example, when cooking using the collaborative cooking mode KM1 described below, it does not include information specific to the heating means that executes one cooking menu (including information indicating the attributes of the heating means and information about the heating port, etc.), information about the cooking process, information indicating the order in which the heating means are driven, etc.
In this case, the data mainly consists of instructions and data (hereinafter referred to as "commands" or "command data") that determine control conditions such as heating capacity and heating time. In this case, if the recipe data CD held by the cooking device 1 is configured on the premise of cooking one serving of food, for example, the cooking device may be adapted to two or four servings by changing the control conditions (for example, one parameter called heating time) by a built-in program in response to an external command.

Furthermore, in the following description, the recipe data CD for the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is mainly composed of two steps, a cooking step 1 and a cooking step 2, for example.
For example, in the case where the first heating means HM1 is used in cooking process 1, the heating cooker 1 acquires recipe data in two stages: a first part M1 that sets the operation content of cooking process 1 to be used in cooking process 1, and a second part M2 that sets cooking process 2 that uses the second heating means HM2.
That is, it is composed of two parts, a first part M1 for setting cooking process 1 using the first heating means HM1, and a second part M2 for setting cooking process 2 using the second heating means HM2. Even in the case where the second heating means HM1 is used in cooking process 1, the cooking device 1 similarly acquires the setting information for cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 separately.

In the following embodiment, the above-mentioned recipe data CD form will not be particularly distinguished from the other forms described above. In addition, in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, a case in which there are two cooking steps will be described, but there may be three or more cooking steps.

The "display screen" in the following embodiments includes a liquid crystal display screen using a liquid crystal display element (liquid crystal panel) and a display screen using other light-emitting methods (such as an organic EL panel).
It also includes "pop-up screens" that automatically appear on the display screen. A "pop-up" is a separate window that automatically appears (is launched and begins to display) on the screen of an Internet browser (also called a "Web browser").
For example, in the terminal display unit (display screen) 216 of the communication terminal 200 described later, a first screen 216A and a second screen 216B will be described, but these may be configured as pop-up screens.

Embodiment 1.
(1. Configuration of the Heat Cooking System)
A first embodiment according to the present disclosure is shown in FIGS.
Referring to FIG.
The cooking system of the present embodiment 1 includes a cooking appliance 1, a smartphone 200 (also called a high-function communication terminal, but in the following description, called a "communication terminal") having a function of wirelessly communicating with the cooking appliance 1, and a cloud server 300. The communication terminal 200 may be other than a smartphone, and may be, for example, a tablet terminal or a personal computer with a communication function. In the present embodiment 1, all of these devices are referred to as the communication terminal 200.

The communication terminal 200 performs wireless communication using a communication method such as WiFi (registered trademark) with a wireless router 340 (FIG. 2) installed in a house (not shown) in which the cooking appliance 1 is used.

The cooking appliance 1 can acquire at least recipe data CD1 through wireless communication 330 with the communication terminal 200. Note that recipe data CD2 acquired by the cooking appliance 1 via a cloud server (to be described later) will be described later.
The communication terminal 200 performs wireless communication 330 with the cooking appliance 1 using a communication method such as Bluetooth (registered trademark).

The communication terminal 200 accesses the cloud server 330 in an external space via the wireless router 340 (FIG. 2) and a network NW such as the Internet. The cloud server 300 has at least one recipe data providing server 301.

The recipe data providing server 301 is equipped with a recipe DB (database) 302 that holds data on recipes for performing various cooking methods, and the communication terminal 200 accesses a recipe providing site operated by the recipe data providing server 301 and acquires (downloads) various recipe data CD1 from the recipe DB 302.

The recipe data CD1, which will be described in detail later, includes commands (command data) that specify the heating means and control conditions (including, but not limited to, at least one of heat, heating time, temperature, etc.) so that a specific food item (e.g., "hamburger steak") can be cooked in the cooking device 1. However, as described above, it may be just unique data that identifies one recipe data CD1 for executing a specific cooking menu.

In the following explanation, recipe data may be described with reference numbers such as CD1, CD2, etc., but the contents of the recipe data do not necessarily differ depending on the reference number, and may even be the same. These reference numbers (CD1, CD2) are used to make it easier to understand by referring to the sender of the recipe data. When using a unified reference number for recipe data, "CD" is used.

The cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 1 includes a first heating means HM1 arranged below a top plate 3 (described in FIG. 2 and subsequent figures) that covers the upper surface of the cooking device 1, a second heating means HM2 that supplies microwaves to the inside of a heating chamber 6 (see FIG. 3) formed inside the cooking device 1, and a third heating means HM3 that is located inside or outside the heating chamber 6 and raises the temperature of the internal space of the heating chamber 6 to heat it.

If the upper surface of the top plate 3 is defined as the "first location," then the first heating means HM1 is an induction heating means for heating the object to be heated (a magnetic metal pan) placed in this first location. Alternatively, a gas combustion device equipped with a gas burner for heating a pan made of magnetic metal or non-magnetic metal corresponds to the first heating means HM1.

If a closed space located away from the first location is defined as a "second location," then the interior of the heating chamber 6 (see Figure 3) is the second location.

The cooking device 1 has a function of executing an "independent cooking mode" KM3 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven independently.

The cooking device 1 has a function of executing a "composite cooking mode" KM2 in which the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 are driven simultaneously, or one of them is driven first and the other is automatically driven later, as a method of cooking one food item. Even when the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 are driven simultaneously, both cases in which the heating ends at the same time and cases in which they end at different times are one operation pattern belonging to the "composite cooking mode" KM2.

The "combined cooking mode" KM2 has at least a pattern (RG control mode 1) in which the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 are driven simultaneously from the beginning, a pattern (RG control mode 2) in which the third heating means HM3 is driven after the second heating means HM2, and a pattern (RG control mode 3) in which the third heating means HM3 is driven first and then automatically switched to the second heating means HM3. In these RG control modes 1 to 3, switching between the heating means is performed automatically when cooking begins in the heating chamber 6 (see FIG. 3).

The "composite cooking mode" KM2, unlike the linked cooking mode KM1 described below, does not have a "cooking menu" that corresponds to a specific food to be cooked (e.g., hamburger steak). In other words, a "control menu" is prepared for each pattern for driving the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3. One control pattern can accommodate multiple food to be cooked (e.g., thawing meat and boiling vegetables, etc.).

For example, one of the "control menus" is the "RG control mode 1." In the RG control mode (RG composite cooking mode), various foods can be cooked. One of the "control menus," for example, the "RG control mode 1," is controlled by recipe data that defines the control mode, but is not set for each specific food to be cooked.

In other words, the operation pattern in which two or more heating sources (the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3) are operated in a predetermined sequence is the composite cooking mode KM2, which has multiple "control menus."

In contrast to this, the cooperative cooking mode KM1 having a cooperative cooking menu applies recipe data (corresponding to specific foods) to heat and cook foods placed inside the heating chamber 6 and above the top plate 3 in a predetermined order.
In other words, the contents of the recipe data are different between the composite cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

In the following description, when a type of control mode, such as a driving (energization) pattern of a heat source, is indicated, it is called a "control menu." For example, "thawing" is one of the control menus.
On the other hand, when specifying foods that can be cooked by heating, names of dishes, etc., they are called "cooking menus." For example, "hamburger steak" is one of the cooking menus.

The cooking device 1 has a function of executing a "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven with a time difference determined depending on the operation of the user US.

The "combined cooking mode" KM1 has a pattern in which cooking process 1 is performed by the first heating means HM1, and a pattern in which cooking process 1 is performed by the second heating means HM2.
For example, in order to move to cooking step 2 after cooking step 1 by the first heating means HM1, the food to be cooked is moved to the heating chamber 6, and then the drive of the second heating means HM2 is started, so there is a "heating pause period P3" (transition period TR) during which no heating operation is performed between cooking step 1 and cooking step 2. This heating pause period P3 will be described with reference to Figures 47 and 48.

In this "cooperative cooking mode" KM1, the recipe data CD is prepared for each specific food to be cooked (e.g., hamburger steak, roast beef, gratin).
The recipe data CD specifies the heating means to be used, the order in which the heating means are driven, and the control conditions of the heating means (including at least one of heat, heating time, temperature, etc.) for cooking step 1 (first part M1) and cooking step 2 (second part M2). In other words, setting information for cooking step 1 and setting information for cooking step 2 are transmitted to the cooking appliance 1.

The recipe data CD is stored in both the cooking appliance 1 and the recipe DB 302. The type of recipe data CD in the recipe DB and the type of recipe data CD stored in the cooking appliance 1 do not have to be the same. For example, the recipe DB 302 may be configured such that new recipe data CD for the linked cooking mode KM1 is added sequentially, and the recipe data CD for the composite cooking menu is accumulated sequentially.

When the cooking appliance 1 acquires the recipe data CD for executing the cooperative cooking mode KM1 from the communication terminal 200, the data is one cooking menu unit selected by the user US on the communication terminal 200. In other words, it is one type of cooking unit. This is not limited to the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1, but is also common to the "combined cooking mode" KM2 and the "single cooking mode" KM3.

In other words, in the heating cooker 1, for example, a control menu called "warm" can be selected in the composite cooking mode KM2, but the recipe data CD provided to the heating cooker 1 from the communication terminal 200 is not on a control menu basis, but on a cooking menu basis.
Therefore, although there are various control menus such as "warm", "manual microwave", "parboil leafy vegetables", "parboil root vegetables", and "thaw meat" in the control menu for microwave heating, the communication terminal 200 does not provide recipe data CD on a control menu basis. For example, in the case of thawing, recipe data (including identification information) such as "thawing XX" that specifies the object to be heated is provided from the communication terminal 200.

As described above, the communication terminal 200 requests the recipe data providing server 301 to provide recipe data CD for the desired food to be cooked, and downloads the recipe data CD1 corresponding to the desired recipe (see FIG. 1).

The communication terminal 200 is capable of transmitting recipe data CD2 corresponding to one recipe, which is generated by and acquired from the recipe data providing server 301, to the cooking appliance 1 (see FIG. 1).
In order to utilize such recipe data acquisition function, a user US of the cooking appliance 1 accesses a recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) and installs an application for recipe selection (hereinafter referred to as the “recipe selection app”) on the communication terminal 200.

When the user US installs the recipe selection app, the user US performs an operation to register identification information, such as the model name of the cooking appliance, as the initial setting. This registration allows the user US to obtain recipe data CD corresponding to the rated specifications of the cooking appliance 1 (such as the heating capacity of each of the heating means HM1 to HM3) from the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301).

The user US also uses the recipe selection app to pair the communication terminal 200 with the cooking appliance 1, and establishes direct wireless communication 330BT between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking appliance 1. Note that this wireless communication 330BT may use a near field communication (NFC) method.

330WF shown in FIG. 2 indicates wireless communication between the communication terminal 200 and the wireless router 340. The communication method of the wireless communication 330T between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking appliance 1 uses Bluetooth (registered trademark), which is one of the short-range wireless communication standards. Also, the wireless communication 330WF between the communication terminal 200 and the wireless router 340 uses a wireless LAN communication method such as WiFi (registered trademark).

Although not shown in FIG. 1, in the cooking system of this embodiment 1, the recipe data CD (corresponding to one recipe) created by the user US can be sent to a recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) by the communication terminal 200, temporarily stored in the recipe DB 302, and then provided to the cooking appliance 1. In other words, even if the communication terminal 200 is located far away from the house in which the cooking appliance 1 is installed (e.g., when outside), the recipe data CD of the communication terminal 200 can be conveniently stored in the recipe data providing server 301.

A wireless router 340 (see FIG. 2) may be interposed between the cooking device 1 and the cloud server 300.

In the first embodiment, the recipe data CD may be described as being "acquired" or "restricted from being acquired." This point will be described.
The explanation of "restricting acquisition" does not mean that recipe data (specific information constituting all or a part of it) CD from the outside cannot enter the inside of the cooking appliance 1 at all via the communication unit 51 described later. In the cooking appliance 1, the communication unit 51 once receives the recipe data CD from the outside and temporarily stores it in an appropriate storage area in the storage device 41 (described in FIG. 10). At that time, the contents of the data (attributes, presence or absence of identification information 167, etc.) are analyzed. However, if the data is data transmitted from the outside during the "period during which acquisition is restricted" as described above, it will not be used in the subsequent process of executing the cooking menu (i.e., the cooking process) and will be automatically erased within a short period of time (at least when the main power switch 20 is turned off).

In the following explanation, when describing networks such as the Internet lines mentioned above, the unified symbol "NW" will be used.

The "device identification information" of the cooking appliance 1 is unique information for identifying the cooking appliance 1. Specifically, it is important information required when performing information communication, and includes the MAC address, the manufacturer name of the cooking appliance 1, the type name (model name), the model number, the serial number, etc.

The cloud server 300 has a function of acquiring information regarding the current status of the cooking appliance 1, such as operation, stop, and standby state, via the network NW.
The cloud server 300 is connected to the target cooking appliance 1 using the device identification information.

In addition to the recipe database 302, the cloud server 300 also has an information server (not shown) inside, which transmits useful information to the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal 200. The cooking appliance 1 executes a process of performing wireless communication with the cloud server 300 periodically (e.g., repeatedly at 5- or 10-minute intervals) in addition to wireless communication with the communication terminal 200. If an abnormality is found or determined to exist in the "status information" (described later) on the cooking appliance 1 side during the periodic communication, this is used as a trigger to perform a process of notifying or inquiring the cloud server 300 each time to obtain information for maintaining appropriate operation. If no abnormality is found, the process automatically returns to the process of repeatedly executing the periodic communication, and continues until the main power switch 20 is opened.

The information server (not shown) may be, for example, a server installed by an external organization such as an earthquake information organization or an electric power company in a specific region, or may be a server provided by the manufacturer of the cooking appliance 1.

The cloud server 300 stores and remembers control application software that enables remote control of the cooking appliance 1. The communication terminal 200, which will be described in detail later, can access the cloud server 300 and download (read) the control application software to realize the remote control.

The communication terminal 200 in the present embodiment 1 has a function of transmitting and receiving signals by short-range communication while being located within a few centimeters of (or may be in contact with) the input/output unit of the cooking appliance 1. Note that this short-range communication is an international standard technology for wireless communication known as Near Field Communication (abbreviation: NFC).

In this NFC communication, a so-called wireless tag (NFC tag) is embedded in the induction heating cooker 1 .
On the other hand, it is also possible to send control data from the communication terminal 200 to the NFC storage unit of the cooking appliance 1 and control the cooking appliance 1 in accordance with the control data.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
Reference numeral 600 denotes kitchen furniture in which the cooking device 1 and the like are installed. Reference numeral 600D denotes a water inlet installed in the kitchen furniture 600.
Reference numeral 340 denotes a wireless router capable of wireless communication with the cooking appliance 1. This wireless router 340 also serves as an access point of a network NW such as the Internet.

The cooking device 1 has a top plate 3 covering the upper surface, on which an object to be heated (such as a pot made of magnetic metal) is placed, and induction heating is performed by an IH coil 9 (reference numbers 9C, 9L, and 9R shown in Figs. 3 and 4). That is, the top plate 3 has a left heating port 4L, a right heating port 4R, and a center heating port 4C.

An exhaust port cover 5 is provided on the rear side (rear side) of the top plate 3. The exhaust port cover 5 is made of a punched metal or lattice-shaped metal member with numerous small through holes, and is breathable throughout with little air resistance. Exhaust air released from inside the cooking appliance 1 passes through the exhaust port cover 5 and exits the cooking appliance 1.

A door (heating door) 7 is provided on the front of the main body 2 of the cooking device 1 to open and close the front opening of the heating chamber 6 (see FIG. 3) located inside the main body 2. The door 7 is provided with a handle 8 for opening and closing it.

(2. Detailed configuration of the cooking device)
Next, a specific configuration of the cooking device 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.
Fig. 3 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 according to embodiment 1 as viewed from the side. As shown in Fig. 3, an induction heating coil 9L (hereinafter referred to as "left IH coil") serving as a left induction heating means is provided below the left heating port 4L.

As shown in FIG. 3, the cooking device 1 is a built-in type induction cooking heater that is incorporated into kitchen furniture 600 that has a cooking counter on top. The cooking device 1 has a main body 2 and a top plate 3 that is installed on top of the main body 2. The top plate 3 is exposed above the kitchen countertop that forms the top surface of the kitchen furniture 600.

The top plate 3 is composed of, for example, a heat-resistant glass plate and a metal frame attached to the periphery of the glass plate. Three heating ports 4 are provided on the upper surface of the top plate 3: the left heating port 4L, the right heating port 4R, and the center heating port 4C.

The left heating port 4L, the right heating port 4R, and the center heating port 4C indicate the area where a metal cooking container such as a pot or frying pan (also referred to as the "heated object" N for the first heating means HM1) is placed. Guide marks (not shown) that serve as a guide for the position to place the heated object are printed on the upper surface of the top plate 3 for the left heating port 4L, the right heating port 4R, and the center heating port 4C.

In the cooking device 1, an object to be heated N (not shown) (such as a pot made of magnetic metal) is placed on a top plate 3 that covers the upper surface of the cooking device 1, and is induction heated by an IH coil 9. Reference numeral 32 denotes a bottom wall surface that divides the inside of the cooking device 1 into two independent spaces, an upper space and an lower space.
33 is an installation space located above the bottom wall surface 32 inside the cooking device 1, and the IH coil 9 (9C, 9L, 9R) is housed at a position corresponding to (directly below) the three heating ports 4L, 4R, 4C.

That is, a right IH coil 9R serving as a right induction heating means is provided below the right heating port 4R, and a central IH coil 9C serving as a central induction heating means is provided below the central heating port 4C.

These IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R are circular heating coils made by winding thin conductors such as copper or aluminum wires, and generate a high-frequency magnetic field when a high-frequency current is supplied to them. This causes induction heating of the metal cooking vessels (objects to be heated N) placed over the left heating port 4L, right heating port 4R, and center heating port 4C.

The heating means including the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R and their drive circuits (high-frequency power supply circuits such as inverter circuits, not shown) may be referred to as the induction heating source or first heating means HM1. In the following description, unless there is a particular contradiction, the term "first heating means" HM1 will be used consistently.

A temperature sensor group 30 (see FIG. 10) consisting of multiple temperature sensors (not shown) is mounted near the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R to detect the temperature of the top plate 3 and cooking vessel (heated object N). One temperature sensor 30A (not shown) constitutes one sensor in the temperature sensor group 30. The temperature sensor here may be either or both of a contact type temperature sensor such as a thermistor and a non-contact type temperature sensor such as an infrared sensor.

The heating chamber 6 is provided inside the main body 2, below the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R. The heating chamber 6 is surrounded by a metal wall such as stainless steel, and is a space for heating the food (foodstuffs, ingredients) contained within the heating chamber 6.

The food to be cooked may be placed on a heat-resistant plastic container, a porcelain or heat-resistant glass dish, or may be placed inside a container and placed in the heating chamber 6, in which case the dish or container may be called the "heated container." However, since these containers are not induction heated by the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R, even if they are placed on the heating port 4 of the top plate 3, they are not called the "heated food" N of the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R.

A horizontally long rectangular opening (not shown) is formed in the front of the heating chamber 6 for inserting and removing the food to be cooked. The opening in the front of the heating chamber 6 is covered by a door 7 that can be opened and closed freely. The door 7 is supported by the main body 2 so that it can rotate freely via a hinge and an arm (not shown). This allows the door 7 to open forward to a horizontal position with its lower end as the fulcrum (center of rotation). The door 7 may be pulled forward integrally with a support member (a structure such as a shelf, not shown) that supports the heated container from below, by a slide rail (not shown).

The door 7 is provided with an opening/closing detector 10 for detecting whether the door 7 is open or closed. The opening/closing detector 10 is, for example, a microswitch or an infrared sensor. A microwave oscillator 11 is provided behind the heating chamber 6 to heat the food placed in the heating chamber 6. The microwave oscillator 11 is, for example, composed of a magnetron, and irradiates microwaves into the heating chamber 6 to heat the food placed in the heating chamber, which is known as range heating.

The heating means including the microwave oscillator 11 and its drive circuit (a high-frequency power supply circuit such as an inverter circuit, not shown) may be referred to as the second heating means HM2.

The heating chamber 6 is also provided with an upper radiant heat heating means 12a and a lower radiant heat heating means 12b, which heat the food from above and below using so-called heaters. The upper radiant heat heating means 12a is located on the outer or inner ceiling wall surface of the heating chamber 6, and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b is located on the inner or outer wall surface of the heating chamber 6, and both are sheath heaters.

Other types of radiant heat heating means (e.g., mica heaters, carbon heaters, etc.) may be installed outside the heating chamber 6. Figure 3 shows an example in which the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b are both installed in close contact with the outer wall surface of the heating chamber 6.

The heating means including the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b and their drive circuits (not shown) may be referred to as the third heating means HM3. The upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b may be collectively referred to as the "radiant heat heating means", in which case the reference number "12" is used.

The heating chamber 6 is also provided with an infrared sensor 13 as a non-contact temperature sensor to detect the temperature of the food inside the heating chamber 6 without contact. The temperature range detected by this infrared sensor 13 is set to, for example, -20°C to 100°C. This allows the degree of heating of the food to be detected in real time with high accuracy, for example in 1°C increments. This infrared sensor 13 also constitutes one sensor in the group of temperature sensors 30 (see Figure 16).

The heating chamber 6 is also provided with a contact-type temperature sensor (e.g., a thermistor sensor) 14, which is an interior temperature sensor that detects the ambient temperature inside the heating chamber 6 or the wall temperature of the heating chamber 6.

The thermistor sensor 14 detects temperature by detecting changes in electrical resistance, and therefore the upper limit of the temperature it can detect is approximately 250°C. This thermistor sensor 14 constitutes one of the temperature sensors 30. The thermistor sensor 14 may be installed in two locations, near the bottom and ceiling of the heating chamber 6, as shown in Figure 3.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
Fig. 4 is a top view of the cooking appliance 1 according to the embodiment 1. As shown in Fig. 4, a left operation unit 15L, a central operation unit 15M, and a right operation unit 15R are provided on the front side of the upper surface of the top plate 3 of the cooking appliance 1. These three operation units may be collectively referred to as "input operation units", in which case the reference numeral 15 is used.

At the rear (rear) side of the left operation unit 15L, the central operation unit 15M and the right operation unit 15R, there are a left heating power display unit 17L, a central display unit 16M and a right heating power display unit 17R, a left display unit 16L and a right display unit 16R and a central heating status display unit 17M.

The left display unit 16L, the center display unit 16M, and the right display unit 16R may be collectively referred to as the "display unit", in which case the reference number 16 is used. The center display unit 16M has a horizontally long liquid crystal display screen.

The left heat display unit 17L and the right heat display unit 17R display the heat level using light-emitting elements (such as LEDs) and do not have a display screen.

The left heating power display unit 17L, the right heating power display unit 17R, and the center heating status display unit 17M may be collectively referred to as the "heat power display units", in which case the reference number 17 will be used.

Also, adjacent to the right operation unit 15R is provided an operation button (key) 20A for the main power switch 20 (see FIG. 10). The main power switch 20 turns the main power supply of the cooking device 1 on and off. The button (key) that is pressed to switch the power supply on and off is the operation button 20A.

When the main power supply of the cooking device 1 is OFF, pressing the operation button 20A for, for example, a few seconds turns the main power supply ON. Also, when the main power supply of the cooking device 1 is ON, pressing the operation button 20A for, for example, a few seconds turns the main power supply OFF.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
5, an input key 180 for selecting a voice input mode is disposed at the right end of the central operation unit 15M. This input key 180 may be a mechanical switch, or may be a touch-type input switch input key like input keys 153M to 159M described later.

When the input key 180 for selecting the voice input is pressed once, subsequent inputs can be made by voice.
When this input key 180 is pressed, the state is switched to "voice input mode 2."
However, it is not possible to select the heating means or the heating port (first heating means HM1) by voice using this input key 180. When the input key 180 is pressed once more, the "voice input mode 2" is cancelled.

Therefore, the input key 180 must be operated following, for example, a touch operation ("short press") of the input key 153L to select the heating port 4L. In other words, if the input key 153L is "long pressed," it can be switched to voice input mode 2, but if it is "short pressed" instead of "long pressed," it can be switched to voice input mode 2 from that point on by pressing the input key 180 afterwards.

In the central operation unit 15M, when any one of the input keys 153M, 154M, or 155M is touched and then the input key 180 is operated, the mode is switched to the "voice input mode 2" and the input processing unit (input restriction unit) 70 in the control device 40 sets the voice signal analysis unit 58 (see FIG. 10) to an input standby state. Note that touching the input key 180 does not affect the input functions of the five input keys: the input key 153M, the input key 151M for starting the heating operation, the input key 152M for stopping, and the input keys 153L and 153R of the left and right operation units 15L and 15R. When these five input keys are touched, the "voice input mode 2" by the input key 180 is released.

As described above, the "voice input mode 2" set by inputting the input key 180 is different from the "voice input mode 1" that is set according to the touch pattern of specific (touch-type) input keys such as the various touch-type input keys 153M, 154M, 155M, etc., as described below.

When the input key 180 is pressed, "voice input mode 2" is activated from that moment. In other words, it becomes "voice input mode 2". Then, as described in FIG. 10, when a voice signal is received from the voice signal receiving unit 56, the voice signal analyzing unit 58 analyzes the contents of the voice one by one and outputs the analysis results to the heating control unit 43.

The "range in which the input key 180 for selecting voice input disables touch input" may be limited to only the central operation unit 15M. In this way, when the input key 180 is pressed, the input function of specific (touch-type) input keys such as the various touch-type input keys 154M to 159M arranged on the central operation unit 15M is disabled as described below. Then, the device transitions to an input standby state in which voice commands from the user US are accepted. Note that since touch input cannot be disabled by this input key 180 after the heating operation has started, there is no restriction on input of various input keys (for example, a stop command by 152M) during the heating operation.

21 (21M) is a (central) light-emitting section that constitutes part of the light-emitting section 21, and when the input function of the input key 180 or other input keys 153M, 154M, 151M, 152M, etc. is valid, each light-emitting section 21M emits light. The light continues to be emitted until the input function is disabled. Each light-emitting section 21M is provided with one or more light-emitting elements 27 (see FIG. 10) such as LEDs, and is driven by a light-emitting control section 26 (see FIG. 10).

As will be described in detail later, the light-emitting unit 21 includes, in addition to the (center) light-emitting unit 21M, a (right) light-emitting unit 21R corresponding to the right operation unit 15R, and a (left) light-emitting unit 21L corresponding to the left operation unit 15L.
These light emitting sections 21 have the function of indicating that the input function of the input keys is valid and prompting the user to operate one of the input keys.
This light-emitting unit 21 also serves as a "key identification unit." That is, the light-emitting unit 21 has a function of displaying an input key to be operated (for example, 152L in FIG. 6) by emitting light immediately after receiving "preview information" 201 (described in FIG. 64 to FIG. 66) from the communication terminal 200 in order to perform a linked operation with the communication terminal 200 described later. In the following description, when there are two or more cooking steps, the preview information is also transmitted multiple times, and therefore may be described with reference symbols such as "preview information 1" and "preview information 2."

In the central operation section 15M, adjacent to the left of the input key 153M, an input key 151KP for setting functions is located. The function of this input key 151KP will be explained later.

In this embodiment 1, the input mode in which the user US controls the cooking appliance 1 by pressing with a fingertip or the like (including light contact) is called the "touch input mode." For this reason, the various input keys 151M to 159M, 151R to 155R, and 151L to 155L described below may be called the "touch input mode selection section."

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
6 is an enlarged view of the left display unit 16L, the left heating power display unit 17L, and the left operation unit 15L according to embodiment 1. The left display unit 16L displays information related to cooking in the left heating port 4L, and is formed, for example, of a liquid crystal display.

The left display unit 16L displays the set time for "timer cooking" for the heated object placed on the left heating port 4L, the elapsed time since the heating operation at the left heating port 4L started, or the remaining time until the timer set time ends.

The "timer cooking" is a cooking method in which heating is performed for a period of time (set time) set (input) by the user US (e.g., using the input key 151L, etc.), and since the heating operation is automatically stopped when the set time has elapsed, this is a convenient function for the user US.

When preheat cooking is selected using the left heating port 4L, the left display unit 16L displays the automatically set temperature (default temperature) or the current temperature. The automatically set temperature (default temperature) refers to the target temperature of the bottom surface of an object to be heated (e.g., a metal pan) when the object is heated using the left heating port 4L. The default temperature can be changed by the user US within a certain range. Also, the target temperature can be set to any temperature by touching the input keys 155L and 154L, for example (however, if the temperature exceeds a certain allowable range, the setting input is rejected by the heating control unit 43 shown in FIG. 10).

The left heating power display unit 17L is composed of multiple light-emitting elements (LEDs) arranged in a horizontal line, and displays the heating power of the left heating port 4L in multiple stages. The left heating power display unit 17L indicates the heating power by switching the lighting state (on, off, blinking, etc.) of the multiple LEDs or by switching the lighting color. This allows the user US to be notified of the heating power in an intuitive and easy-to-understand manner.

The left operation section 15L is used to input operations related to cooking using the left heating port 4L.
6, the left operation unit 15L includes five input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L, and 155L. These input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L, and 155L are touch keys. For example, they are electrostatic capacitance type touch sensors (touch switches) that can input by utilizing a change in electrostatic capacitance when the user US lightly touches them with a finger or the like.

Light-emitting units 21L are provided corresponding to the input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L, and 155L. The light-emitting units 21L are composed of a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEDs), and emit light in response to the operation of the input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L, and 155L. Note that two adjacent input keys 154L and 155L share one light-emitting unit 21L because they perform the same type of function, that is, increasing and decreasing the flame power.

The input key 151L is a key that is touched to select "timer cooking" for the left heating port 4L. As described above, this timer cooking is a cooking method in which the user US sets the time for the heating operation and the heating operation is performed only for the set time.

The input key 152L is a key that is pressed when selecting a "control menu" to be implemented by the left heating port 4L. Each time the input key 152L is pressed, one of multiple control menus can be selected. The "control menu" referred to here is, for example, boiling water, stewing, deep frying (automatic cooking), etc. The operating time, heat power, or operating pattern of the left heating port 4L differs for each control menu.

The control menu for using the left heating port 4L and the right heating port 4R by operating the left operation unit 15L or the right operation unit 15R without operating the central operation unit 15M is the control menu for the "single cooking mode" KM3, which uses induction heating only. The "single cooking mode" KM3 will be explained later.

The input key 153L is a key that is pressed to select cooking using the left heating port 4L. That is, pressing the input key 153L selects cooking (single cooking mode KM3) using the left IH coil 9L located below the left heating port 4L. When the input key 153L is pressed again while this left IH coil 9L is being driven, the driving of the left IH coil 9L is stopped and the induction heating operation is immediately stopped.

The input keys 154L and 155L are pressed to specify the heat level for cooking with the left heating port 4L. Pressing the input key 154L on the left decreases the heat level by one level. Conversely, pressing the input key 155L on the right increases the heat level by one level. The heat level for induction cooking with the left heating port 4L has nine levels, ranging from the minimum rated heat level (heat level 1: 150 W) to the maximum rated heat level (heat level 9: 3200 W).

One input key 152L of the left operation section 15L is set as an input key to be operated immediately after receiving "advance notice information 1" 201 from the communication terminal 200 in order to perform a linked operation with the communication terminal 200, which will be described later. Therefore, when this is operated at a predetermined timing, it functions as a "specific input key" that transmits a "confirmation signal" (selection information A) 202, which will be described later, in a confirmation step SP3 (described in Figs. 64 and 66).
The input key 152L can be operated at any time even before the advance notice information 1 is received, but when it is operated (ON), a reception restriction period (TZ1: see FIG. 48) starts from that point.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
7 is an enlarged view of the right display unit 16R, the right heating power display unit 17R, and the right operation unit 15R according to the first embodiment. The right display unit 16R displays information related to cooking in the right heating port 4R, and is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display. The information related to cooking in the right heating port 4R displayed on the right display unit 16R is the same as the information related to cooking in the left heating port 4L.

The right heating power display unit 17R is composed of multiple light-emitting elements (LEDs) and displays the heating power of the right heating port 4R in multiple stages. Like the left heating power display unit 17L, the right heating power display unit 17R indicates the heating power by switching the lighting state (on, off, blinking, etc.) of the multiple light-emitting elements (LEDs) or by switching the lighting color.

The right operation unit 15R is used to input operations related to cooking using the right heating port 4R. As shown in FIG. 7, the right operation unit 15R has five input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R, and 155R.

The input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R and 155R are configured in the same manner as the left operation unit 15L. For example, they are configured as capacitive touch keys that can input by utilizing the change in capacitance when the user US lightly touches them with a finger or the like.

A light-emitting unit 21R is provided corresponding to each of the input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R, and 155R. The light-emitting unit 21R is a light-emitting element (LED), and the light-emitting unit 21R corresponding to each input key lights up in response to the operation of the input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R, and 155R. However, the two adjacent input keys 154R and 155R share a single light-emitting unit 21R because they perform the same type of function, increasing and decreasing the flame power.

The input key 151R is a key that is pressed when selecting timer cooking for the right heating port 4R. The input key 152R is a key that is pressed when selecting a control menu to be implemented for the right heating port 4R.

The input key 153R is a key that is pressed to select cooking using the right heating port 4R. That is, pressing the input key 153R selects cooking (single cooking mode KM3) using the right IH coil 9R located below the left heating port 4R. When the input key 153R is pressed again while the right IH coil 9R is being driven, the drive of the right IH coil 9R is stopped and the induction heating operation is immediately stopped.

The input keys 154R and 154R are pressed to specify the heat level for cooking with the right heating port 4R. Pressing the left input key 154R decreases the heat level by one level. Conversely, pressing the right input key 155R increases the heat level by one level. The heat level for induction cooking with the right heating port 4R has nine levels, ranging from a rated minimum heat level (heat level 1) of 150W to a rated maximum heat level (heat level 9) of 3200W.

The input key 152R on the right operation unit 15R, like the input key 152L on the left operation unit 15L, is a "specific input key" that transmits a "confirmation signal" (selection information A) 202 (described later) to perform a linked operation with the communication terminal 200 (described later).

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
FIG. 8 is an enlarged plan view of the central display unit 16M, the central operation unit 15M, and the central heating status display unit 17M according to the first embodiment.

The central display unit 16M displays information and warnings about the entire cooking device 1, and is composed of a liquid crystal display. The display screen of the central display unit 16M displays the selection result of the induction heating means (first heating means) HM1, the microwave heating means (second heating means) HM2, and the radiant heat heating means (third heating means) HM3, the operating status of each heating means, and caution information or warning information for cooking with each heating means.

The central display unit 16M is a single LCD display in terms of hardware, but as shown in FIG. 8, it has three display areas: a first display area 22 on the left, a second display area 23 in the center left and right, and a third display area 24 on the right, and it is possible to display different things in each display area.

The three display areas 22 to 24 may also be linked together as appropriate depending on the display situation to form a single (large-area) display area, and may display one or more purposes. In the following, the first display area 22 will be referred to as the first area 22. The second display area 23 will be referred to as the second area 23. The third display area 24 will be referred to as the third area 24.

The central heating status display section 17M is divided into two sections in the front-to-rear direction, and the lower section (front side) has a range light-emitting element (LED) 310 behind the section displaying the text "range", a grill light-emitting element (LED) 311 behind the section displaying the text "grill", an oven light-emitting element (LED) 312 behind the section displaying the text "oven", and a central IH light-emitting element (LED) 313 behind the section displaying the text "central IH".

At the top (rear) are warning letters saying "Caution: High Temperature" and a group of high temperature caution light emitting diodes (LEDs) 314 arranged in front of and below a diagram that typically represents the heating chamber 6 and the three heating ports 4L, 4C, and 4R. These LEDs 311 to 313 and the LED group 314 are arranged in the installation space 33 below the top plate 3.

The high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) group 314 is composed of a heating chamber high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314a and an IH high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314b arranged on the left and right.

The heating chamber high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314a lights up when the temperature inside the heating chamber 6 is high, for example, 50° C. or higher.
The IH high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314b lights up when any of the left IH coil 9L, right IH coil 9R, and center IH coil 9C is operating or when the temperature of the top plate 3 is high, for example, 50° C. or higher.

The central operation unit 15M is used to input operations mainly related to cooking in the heating chamber 6 and cooking using the central heating port 4C.
As shown in FIG. 8, the central operation unit 15M includes nine input keys 151M, 152M, 153M, 154M, 155M, 156M, 157M, 158M, and 159M, and a function setting key 151KP (see FIG. 5).

The nine input keys 151M to 159M are capacitive touch keys that emit an input command signal each time they are touched. In addition, light emitting units 21M are provided near each of the input keys 151M to 159M.

The function setting key 151KP (see FIG. 5) is located on the leftmost side of the central operation unit 15M. This function setting key 151KP is used to set the various operations and displays of the entire cooking device 1 according to the user US's wishes.

When the function setting key 151KP is pressed, the control device 40, which will be described later, switches to a "function setting mode", and displays a "function setting menu" such as the one shown below on the display screen of the central display section 16M.
(1) Child lock setting (setting to disable operation of various input keys).
(2) Setting the ventilation device to the linked mode (the ventilation device operates in conjunction with the operation of the cooking appliance 1).
(3) Cleaning guide setting (setting of automatic notification function for when to clean heating chamber 6 and exhaust port cover 5).
(4) Peak cut setting (select one of four maximum power consumption levels: 5700W, 5000W, 4800W, or 4000W).
(5) Audio guide audio settings.
(6) Audio guide volume settings.
(7) Settings to prevent food, cooking utensils, etc. from being forgotten to be removed from the heating chamber 6 (whether or not an alarm is required by the audio notification unit 50 and the central display unit 16M).
(8) HEMS registration settings (settings related to the power usage limiting function of the home power control device).
(9) Setting the time unit for timer cooking (change the 1-minute setting to 5-minute or 30-minute units).
(10) Switching between beginner mode and normal (expert) mode.
(11) Setting the type (range) of food inventory information to be obtained from an external device (refrigerator, etc.).
(12) Setting the display priority (specific cooking menu to be displayed as default, identification information 167) of each cooking menu (e.g., “hamburger steak”) in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
(13) Setting the display priority (specific control menu to be displayed as default) of each control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 (e.g., "Grill in the microwave" and "Pre-boil leafy vegetables").
(14) Setting the cooking mode to be automatically displayed on the central display unit 16M when the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened after the main power switch 20 is turned “ON” (such as the display priority between the linked cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode KM2).
(15) A setting for preventing additional information 165 and 166 (see FIG. 15) described later from being automatically displayed and a setting for preventing the audio notification unit 50 from notifying the additional information 165 and 166 by audio.
(16) When each cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is displayed on the central display unit 16M, the ingredients and nutritional components of the target cooking item (food) are displayed individually each time. Note that either the food ingredients or the nutrients or both may be displayed, but in this embodiment 1, the input key 158M is used as a display command key for food ingredients, and the input key 159M is used as a display command key for nutritional components.
When either input key 158M or 159M is operated within a specified period of time, or when voice input mode 1 is set and a voice command is given, food ingredients or nutritional ingredients are displayed. In other words, they are not always displayed together with cooking menu identification information 167 (described later) but are displayed in response to the operation (including voice) of the user US. Details will be described in FIG. 24.
(17) When selecting individual cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, a setting to search for cooking menu candidates based on the ingredients and nutritional components of food and display them on the central display unit 16M. In this case, the user US can search by voice by pressing the input key 180 to set to "voice input mode 2". Details will be described in FIG. 24.
(18) Setting the display priority of each cooking menu in the collaborative cooking mode KM1.
In relation to the setting of a specific cooking menu to be displayed by default, either the food components or the nutritional components should be set as the top priority item for display. By setting this, for example, the cooking menu can be displayed in ascending order of energy amount (calorie value) among the nutritional components as shown in Fig. 24. Alternatively, the cooking menu can be displayed in descending order of the amount of "iron" as a nutritional component.

As explained above, when the function setting key 151KP is pressed to select the "function setting mode," it is possible to add the display of food ingredients or nutritional ingredients, and it is also possible to set the display setting to be cancelled in the function setting mode after it has been set. This has the advantage that the information, range and display method to be set can be selected according to the wishes of the user US.

The "beginner mode" is an optional function for people (users US) who are not familiar with using the cooking device 1. When the beginner mode is selected, the voice guidance in the voice notification unit 50 (see FIG. 10) becomes more detailed and thorough. In addition, more voice guidance is provided for input operations in the input operation unit 15, and more information is displayed on the display screen of the central display unit 16M.

When the beginner mode is set, particularly in the case of cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM1, the amount of reference information (including, for example, additional information 165, 166 described below) displayed on the display screen of the central display unit 16M increases in cooking process 1 and cooking process 2, or the content of the voice guidance in the voice notification unit 50 increases. This enhances the function of supporting the input operation of the user US.

In addition, in conjunction with switching from the "beginner mode" to the "normal (expert) mode", the content of the voice guidance from the voice notification unit 50 may be automatically set to not change.

When the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened after the main power switch 20 described below is turned "ON," the cooking mode setting that is automatically displayed on the central display unit 16M refers to setting either the linked cooking mode KM1 or the combined cooking mode KM2. Since both the linked cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode KM2 use the same central display unit 16M, the user US can set the display of either one to take priority. This will be explained in detail later.

In the first embodiment, the "combined cooking mode" KM2 exceptionally includes several control menus for the single cooking mode KM3 using the central IH coil 9M (for example, the cooking action "cooking rice").

When the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened after the main power switch 20 is turned “ON”, the control device 40 detects that the door 7 has been opened.
The function assumes that the user US will be cooking using the heating chamber 6, and automatically displays either the first specific screen 16M1 for the linked cooking mode KM1 or the second specific screen 16M2 for the composite cooking mode KM2 on the central display unit 16M.
In addition, immediately after the main power switch 20 is turned ON, the central display section 16M displays a standby initial screen 16MH, which will be described later. After that, immediately after the door 7 is opened, the second specific screen 16M2 is automatically displayed.

After the "Function Setting Menu" is displayed on the display screen of the central display unit 16M, by "pressing and holding" (hereinafter referred to as "long press") a specific input key (e.g., 153M) other than the function setting key 151KP for a certain period of time or longer, one setting menu from the "Function Setting Menu" can be selected, and the user can proceed to the desired individual setting stage.

Alternatively, if two specific input keys other than the function setting key 151KP are pressed and held simultaneously, one of the setting menus from the function setting menu described above can be called up and the desired settings can be changed.

The term "long press" refers to a state in which the button is pressed continuously for five seconds or more, for example.
The control device 40 judges whether the state is the "long press" state by comparing the timing of the touch input from ON to OFF in the central operation unit 15M with a reference value. Alternatively, the input mode judgment unit 15C (see FIG. 11) in the central operation unit 15 judges whether the state is the "long press" state.
In the first embodiment, an example will be described (later with reference to FIG. 11) in which the central operation unit 15M determines whether the button is in the "long press" state.

In addition, in the central operation unit 15M, the timing when the two input keys (e.g., 154M and 155M) are pressed simultaneously can be determined by the "ON" (touch) signal sent from the input operation unit 15M to the control device 40.

In the following explanation, an embodiment in which the input operation unit 15M determines whether or not a "long press" has occurred will be described. However, although not adopted in the first embodiment, there is also a method in which the input operation unit 15M measures the time from the time the "ON" signal is received until the time the signal changes to an "OFF" signal, transmits that data to the control device 40, and the control device 40 determines whether or not a "long press" has occurred.

In this embodiment 1, the specific input keys (153M, 154M, 153L, 153R) have a function of determining the above-mentioned "long press" and switching to the above-mentioned "voice input mode 1." Note that, in order to share the input keys with the specific input keys described later, the input keys 152L, 152R on the left and right operation units 15L, 15R may also be modified so as to switch to the voice input mode 1 by a "long press" operation.
These will be explained in more detail in FIG. 10 and FIG.
Note that a touch operation that is not a "long press", i.e., a continuous touch state for less than 5 seconds, may be called a "short press". Since it is related to the detection capabilities of the input operation units 15M, 15L, and 15R, for example, if the touch time is within the range of 0.1 to 4.9 seconds, the control device 40 determines that it is a "short press".

The "type of inventory information" (range) obtained from the refrigerator 331 (not shown) may be, for example, limited to only frozen foods, or to only food ingredients that can be heated by a microwave heating source (second heating means HM2).

When the control mode and control conditions (temperature, heat, time, etc.) of the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the third heating means HM3 are being selected in the central display section 16M, the input function of the function setting key 151KP is disabled so that the function setting mode is not switched.

Next, the setting of the peak cut value of the cooking appliance 1 will be described.
Even if the default value at the time of shipment from the manufacturer is 5400W, it can be set to any of 5000W, 4800W, or 4000W when installed in the home of the user US.

In this way, the functions of the cooking appliance 1 can be changed by the function setting key 151KP described above according to the wishes of the user US and the usage environment (electricity situation of the home where the appliance is installed). When the peak cut value is set in this way, the setting result is stored in the control device 40, and is used to determine whether or not to permit use of the linked cooking mode KM1 (determination of permission conditions) when the user US selects the linked cooking mode KM1 as described below. Therefore, while recipe data CD (at least one of cooking process 1 and cooking process 2) described below is being received from the communication terminal 200, the peak cut value cannot be changed by the function setting key 151KP (see FIG. 5).

8, the light emitting section 21M is composed of an LED, and emits light in response to the operation of the input keys 151M to 159M. In other words, when the input function is enabled, the corresponding light emitting section 21M continues to emit light.
The two adjacent input keys 155M and 154M have in common the function of changing the display content of the first area 22, and therefore share one light emitting section 21M.

The two adjacent input keys 157M and 156M share one light-emitting section 21M since they have a common function of changing the display content of the second area 23.
The two adjacent input keys 159M and 158M share the same function of changing the display content of the third area 24, and therefore share one light-emitting section 21M.

The input key 151M is a start key that is pressed (touched) to start cooking, and the input key 152M is a cancel key that is pressed (touched) to stop or end cooking.

The input key 153M is an input key that selects the "linked cooking mode" KM1 when operated after the main power switch 20 is turned ON, and may be referred to as the "first input key" below.

When input keys 154M and 155M are operated after the main power switch 20 is turned ON (without pressing input key 153M), they are used to select the "combined cooking mode" KM2, and may be referred to as the "second input key" below.

The input keys 153R and 153L described in FIG. 7 are input keys that select the "single cooking mode" KM1 when operated after the main power switch 20 is turned ON (without pressing input keys 153M, 154M, and 155M), and may be referred to as the "third input key" below.

The input key 151M has a function to decide the start of cooking for the two cooking modes, "composite cooking mode" KM2 and "linked cooking mode" KM1, and may be referred to as the "start key" below. In the "single cooking mode" KM3, the input keys 153L and 153R have a function to decide the start of cooking.

The input key 152M has a function to end (including pausing) the two cooking modes, the "combined cooking mode" KM2 and the "linked cooking mode" KM1, and may be referred to as the "stop key" below. In the "single cooking mode" KM3, the input keys 153L and 153R have a function to determine the end of cooking.

The four input keys 156M to 159M have the function of allowing the user US to adjust (within a certain range) control conditions such as microwave output and cooking time, and may be referred to as the "condition input keys" or "fourth input key" below.

The four input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R are also called "voice input switching keys" that can each be switched to the "voice input mode 1". However, these four input keys only function as "voice input switching keys" when the touch operation is a "long press". This will be explained in detail later with reference to Figures 10 and 11.

When any one of the single cooking mode KM3, composite cooking mode KM2, and cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected, the selection result is displayed on the central display unit 16M. Also, when the "voice input mode 1" is switched to, a message to that effect is displayed (see Figures 21 and 22). The contents of the single cooking mode KM3, composite cooking mode KM2, and cooperative cooking mode KM1 will be explained in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 8, the input keys 154M and 155M are located adjacent to the first area 22 of the central display unit 16M, near the front of it, and are used to switch the display content of the screen displayed in the first area 22 of the central display unit 16M.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
FIG. 9 is an enlarged plan view of the central display section 16M.
When the input key 154M is pressed, that is, operated by the user US, the content displayed in the first area 22, for example, the display information 25A of one control menu ("Microwave manual") belonging to the "composite cooking mode" KM2, moves backward. At the same time, the display information 25B of "Pre-boil leafy vegetables" displayed in the front is displayed in the center. Note that the input key 154M in this case is the case of the "short press" described above, and in the case of a "long press", it functions as the "voice input switching key", which will be described in FIG. 11.

When input key 155M is pressed, display information 25A for "Microwave Manual" displayed in first area 22 moves forward. Accordingly, display information 25C for "Heating" displayed at the rear is displayed in the center. Note that input key 155M in this case is different from input key 154M and is not the "voice input switching key," so if it is "pressed and held," it will not switch to voice input mode and will not be recognized as a valid input operation.

In this way, the user US can select a specific control menu (e.g., "Manual Range") from the "Control Menu" by operating input keys 154M and 155M.

The "manual range" control menu originally belongs to the "single cooking mode KM3" which uses only the second heating means HM2, but in addition to this, the control menus (for combined cooking) belonging to the "combined cooking mode KM2" and the "linked cooking mode KM1" respectively, as well as the control menus and linked cooking menus (for example, "hamburger steak") belonging to linked cooking menus are also displayed in the first area 22.

Then, when the input key (start key) 151M is pressed, that is, when it is operated by the user US, the start of cooking for "Microwave Manual" in the control menu displayed in the center is decided (see FIG. 9), and the heating operation is started. That is, the heating means (in this case, the microwave oscillation source 11) is driven. Thus, the input keys 154M and 155M correspond to the selection keys of the control menu operated by the user US. Similarly, they correspond to the selection keys of the control menu (for composite cooking). Furthermore, they also correspond to the selection keys of the linked cooking menu.

As shown in FIG. 8, input keys 156M and 157M are located adjacent to and in front of the second area 23 of the central display unit 16M, and are used to switch the display content of the screen displayed in the second area 23 of the central display unit 16M.

Explaining again with reference to FIG. 9, when input key 156M is pressed, the wattage (microwave output value) displayed in second area 23 ("500 W" in FIG. 9) is increased by one step (e.g., to "600 W"). Conversely, when input key 157M is pressed, the wattage displayed in second area 23 is decreased by one step (e.g., to "200 W").

By operating input keys 156M and 157M, the user US can select the wattage (microwave output value) for range cooking performed in the heating chamber 6 (a type of "single cooking mode M1" using the microwave oscillator 11).

As shown in FIG. 8, input keys 158M and 159M are located adjacent to and in front of the third area 24 of the central display unit 16M, and are used to switch the display content displayed in the third area 24.

As shown in FIG. 8, when input key 158M is pressed, the heating operation time (set time) displayed in the third area 24 is increased by one step. Conversely, when input key 159M is pressed, the heating operation time displayed in the third area 24 is decreased by one step.

In FIG. 9, the user US can select the set time for microwave cooking in the heating chamber 6 by operating the input keys 158M and 159M, and 34M is the set time information. The set time information 34W is heating intensity information that indicates the amount of power consumed during heating and the amount of microwave output, etc. In FIG. 9, "500W" is displayed.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
FIG. 10 is a control block diagram showing main functions of the cooking appliance 1 according to the first embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 10, the cooking appliance 1 includes a control device 40 that performs integrated control of the entire cooking appliance 1 .

The control device 40 is an electronic circuit board on which electronic components such as a control circuit that controls the operation of each part of the cooking device 1 are mounted. The control device 40 individually controls the drive conditions of the left IH coil 9L, the right IH coil 9R, and the center IH coil 9C based on the operation of the left operation unit 15L and the right operation unit 15R, and the temperature of the heated object on the top plate 3.

The control device 40 individually controls the operating conditions of the central IH coil 9C, the microwave heating means 11, the upper radiant heat heating means 12a, and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b based on the operation of the central operation unit 15M, the temperature of the heated object on the top plate 3, and the detection results of the infrared sensor 13 and the thermistor sensor 14.

The control device 40 also individually controls the display of the left display unit 16L, the right display unit 16R, the left heating power display unit 17L, and the right heating power display unit 17R based on the operation of the left operation unit 15L and the right operation unit 15R.

Furthermore, the control device 40 controls the display of the central display unit 16M and the central heating status display unit 17M based on the open signal from the open/close detection unit 10 and the operation of the left operation unit 15L, the right operation unit 15R, and the central operation unit 15M.

The control device 40 has a storage device 41 that stores various programs and data such as parameters used to control the cooking device 1 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "control data"), and display control data (hereinafter referred to as "display condition data") displayed on each display unit 16L, 16R, 16M, 17L, 17R. The control device 40 also activates the audio notification unit 50 as necessary, and notifies the user US of the operating status of the cooking device 1 by audio.

The control device 40 stores data in a fixed format, such as various programs and information on parameters used in the heating cooking control of the heating control unit 43, in the recipe data storage unit 42 of the storage device 41. This data is the recipe data CD mentioned above. As will be explained later, in the heating cooker 1, recipe data CD corresponding to each of a total of eight cooking menus is prepared from the beginning in order to execute the linked cooking mode KM1.

The recipe data CD and the "display condition data" can be acquired by the cooking appliance 1 from an external device such as the communication terminal 200 for each individual cooking menu, and for each cooking step if there are multiple cooking steps.

42 is a storage unit that stores the recipe data CD and the display condition data. The storage unit 42 may constitute one section (area) in the storage device 41, or may be configured as a separate hardware unit from the storage device 41.

Reference numeral 43 denotes a heating control section which performs integrated control of the entire heating operation of the cooking device 1 and is mainly composed of a microcomputer.
Reference numeral 53 denotes a data acquisition unit, which is capable of acquiring the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51. In addition, there are also cases where the display condition data is acquired from the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51.

1 and 2, a communication unit 51 has a function of performing wireless communication 330 (330BT) with the communication terminal 200. Alternatively, the communication unit 51 has a function of performing wireless communication with the cloud server 300 via the network NW.
The communication unit 51 has a first communication unit 51B (not shown) and a second communication unit 51W (not shown) that correspond to at least two communication methods as described below. The first communication unit 51B corresponds to the communication method between the communication terminal 200, which is Bluetooth (registered trademark). The second communication unit 51W (not shown) has a function corresponding to the communication method, which is a wireless LAN communication method such as WiFi (registered trademark) used as the communication method between the wireless router 340.

Reference numeral 54 denotes a permission condition determination unit which performs a process of determining whether cooking in the linked cooking mode KM1 or the combined cooking mode KM2 is permitted.
Reference numeral 57 denotes a power supply circuit, which supplies power of a constant voltage to the control device 40. Reference numeral 20 denotes a main power switch inserted in the power supply circuit 57, which is opened and closed by the user US.
With regard to the recipe data CD relating to the collaborative cooking mode KM1, at the stage of receiving the first part M1 that sets the cooking process 1 as described below, the permission condition determination unit 54 determines whether cooking is permitted, and if permission is not granted at that stage, the process does not proceed to the acquisition process of the second part M2 of the cooking process 2.

Reference numeral 55 denotes a restriction unit that restricts acquisition of the recipe data CD.
The restriction unit 55 has a function of restricting the data acquisition unit 53 from acquiring the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51 during a standby period before starting cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 (i.e., before "cooking step 1" described later). For example, a reception restriction period TZ1 starts from the time when a specific input key 153M is touched (see FIG. 47).

Furthermore, the restriction unit 55 has a function of restricting the acquisition of new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 until the cooking process of one cooking menu is completed based on recipe data CD acquired from outside.
In addition, the restriction unit 55 may be realized by a single control program of a computer (not shown) that constitutes the control device 40, and it is not necessarily required that the restriction unit 55 be configured as a separate hardware component from the control device 40.

As shown in FIG. 10, the input operation unit 15 has a voice signal receiving unit 56 that receives voice uttered by the user US through a microphone (not shown) and converts it into a predetermined voice signal.

On the other hand, the control device 40 is provided with an audio signal analysis unit 58 that receives an audio signal from the audio signal receiving unit 56 and analyzes the content of the audio. The audio signal analysis unit 58 compares the content of the audio received by the audio signal receiving unit 56 with the information in the audio database in the storage device 41, analyzes the content of the audio, and transmits the analysis result to the heating control unit 43.

70 is an input processing unit. Upon receiving an input signal from the input operation unit 15, the input processing unit 70 switches its own input reception mode to "voice input mode 1". It also controls the input signal analysis unit 52. Furthermore, upon receiving the analysis result from the voice signal analysis unit 58, it transmits control data to the heating control unit 43.

In FIG. 10, 59 is a human detection sensor. It also has a receiving section (not shown) that emits ultrasonic waves or infrared rays forward of the cooking appliance 1 and receives the reflected input. Note that there is no dedicated circuit for processing the signal received by the receiving section, and the control device 40 analyzes the received signal to determine whether or not a person is present.

As indicated by the dashed line frame in FIG. 10, the audio notification unit 50 and the display unit 16 may be collectively referred to as the "notification unit", in which case the reference numeral 90 is used.
Reference numeral 26 denotes a light emission control unit. This light emission control unit controls the light emission of a large number of light emitting elements. The light emission of a light emitting element 27A composed of an LED or the like arranged in the light emitting unit 21 (21M, 21L, 21R) and a light emitting element 27B arranged in the input key 154M is controlled by this light emission control unit 26. When two or more light emitting elements 27 with different light emission colors are arranged in one place, the light emission state of the plurality of light emitting elements provides a visual effect to the user US as if the light emission color has changed.

In FIG. 10, reference numeral 52 denotes an input signal analysis unit that analyzes an input signal from the input operation unit 15 .
The input signal analysis unit 52 individually analyzes the input signals transmitted from the right operation unit 15R, the left operation unit 15L, and the central operation unit 15M. In particular, the input signal analysis unit 52 has a discrimination function for judging whether the input mode switching command (signal corresponding to voice input mode) MC1 has been received. When it is determined that the input mode switching command (signal corresponding to voice input mode) MC1 has been received, it issues a switching command for switching the input mode from the "touch input mode" to the "voice input mode 1."

In the following description, the "input mode switching command MC1" is referred to as the "voice input mode compatible signal MC1." When the input processing unit 70 receives this voice input mode compatible signal MC1, it issues a control signal to the voice signal analysis unit 52 to transition to a voice input standby state (for example, to start a dedicated voice analysis program).

As described with reference to FIG. 7, the right operation section 15R has various input keys (153R, 154R, 151R, etc.), and the touch input results of these input keys are transmitted to the input signal analysis section 52.
In particular, when the input key 152R, which is one of the "voice input switching keys", is touched, the right operation unit 15R determines whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press", and the determination result (a command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40.

Similarly, the left operation section 15R has various input keys (153L, 154L, 151L, etc.), and the touch input results of these input keys are transmitted to the input signal analysis section 52.
In particular, when an input key 152L, which is one of the "voice input switching keys", is touched, the left operation unit 15L judges whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press", and the judgment result (a command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40. The "voice input switching keys" may also include input keys 153R and 153L.

Furthermore, the central operation unit 15M has various input keys (153M, 154M, 155M, 156M, etc.), and the touch input results of these input keys are transmitted to the input signal analysis unit 52.
In particular, when input keys 153M and 154M, which are one of the "voice input switching keys", are touched, central operation unit 15M determines whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press", and the result of this determination (a command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to control device 40.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
Fig. 11 is a block diagram for explaining the relationship between the control device 40 and the central operation unit 15M. The voice signal receiving unit 56 explained in Fig. 10 is omitted. The right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L are basically configured in the same manner as the central operation unit 15M.

In FIG. 11, 15A is an input key identification unit. This input key identification unit 15A identifies the input key that has been touched. For example, when input key 153M is touched, it generates an identification signal unique to that input key. Also, when input key 154M is touched, it generates an identification signal unique to that input key.

Reference numeral 15B denotes a touch detection unit. When a fingertip FG of a user US or the like approaches the touch electrode unit, a detection circuit generates an "ON" signal, and when the fingertip FG moves away, the detection circuit generates an "OFF" signal.
A time measurement unit 15T measures the elapsed time from when the touch detection unit 15B outputs an "ON" signal to when the touch detection unit 15B changes to an "OFF" signal, and transmits measured time data.

15C is an input mode determination unit. This input mode determination unit 15C receives the measured time data from the time measurement unit 15T, and, as described above, with a threshold of 5 seconds as the boundary, if the measured time is 5 seconds or more, it determines that it is "voice input mode 1". If the measured time is less than this threshold, it determines that it is a normal "short press" operation.

The input mode determination unit 15C transmits a signal (voice input mode corresponding signal MC1) indicating the determination result of whether or not the mode is "voice input mode 1" to the control device 40.

15D is a storage unit. This storage unit 15D stores various control parameters and thresholds for the touch detection unit 15A, the time measurement unit 15T, the input mode determination unit 15C, and the like, as well as program information for the determination process.

Reference numeral 15E denotes a central processing unit (CPU) that performs various information processing operations as an input operation unit (central operation unit 15M).
An input signal transmitting unit 15F transmits to the input signal analyzing unit 58 of the control device 40 a unique identification signal of the input key as described above and a voice input mode corresponding signal MC1 as a result of determining whether the mode is "voice input mode 1".

In FIG. 11, the touch detection unit 15A, time measurement unit 15T, input mode determination unit 15C, etc. are depicted as individual independent blocks, but each of these functions may be realized, for example, by software on a single microcomputer, rather than being configured as separate components on hardware.

Although FIG. 11 shows an example of the central operation unit 15M, the control device 40 also identifies the input of the right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L as being from each operation unit. Therefore, in the input key identification unit 15A in the right operation unit 15R, data identifying the input key present in the right operation unit 15R is included in the signal sent from the right operation unit 15R to the input key identification unit 15A. The same is true for the left operation unit 15L.

As is clear from the above description, the cooking device 1 described in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11 has the following features:
a first heating means HM1 for induction heating an object to be heated on the top plate 3;
A heating chamber 6 having a metal wall;
A second heating means HM2 for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber 6;
a third heating means HM3 for heating the heating chamber 6 by radiant heat;
A notification unit 90;
A communication unit 51;
A display unit 16;
The control device 40 is configured as follows.

,
The control device 40 displays a display screen (first specific screen 16M1 to third specific screen 16M3) dedicated to each cooking mode after displaying a standby initial screen 16MH (described in FIG. 41) on the display unit 16. The first specific screen 16M1 to third specific screen 16M3 will be described in FIG. 15 to FIG. 22 and FIG. 42.

There are three types of cooking modes: single cooking mode KM3, combined cooking mode KM2, and linked cooking mode KM1.

The single cooking mode KM3 has the following three types.
(1) an IH only mode in which the first heating means HM1 is operated alone; (2) a range only cooking mode in which the second heating means HM2 is operated alone; and (3) an oven only cooking mode in which the third heating means HM3 is operated alone.

The composite cooking mode KM2 is a heating pattern in which cooking is performed in the heating chamber 6 by simultaneously operating the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3, or by automatically operating them at different times.

The coordinated cooking mode KM1 is a heating pattern in which the second heating means HM2 and/or the third heating means HM3 and the first heating means HM1 are operated sequentially after a transition period TR whose length is determined by a command from the user US.

The control device 40 has an operation program for executing the three cooking modes KM1 to KM3.
The data acquisition unit 53 of the control device 40 can acquire the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 via the communication unit 51 .

In the input operation section 15, the "voice input mode 2" can be selected by the input key 180 provided in the central operation section 15M.
Furthermore, among the input keys arranged on the central operation unit 15M, the right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L, specific input keys (152L, 152R, 153M, 154M) can select "voice input mode 1" according to the "long press" state, which is one of the touch forms.

(3. Configuration of the control menu of the central operation unit)
Next, a selectable control menu that is displayed on the central display unit 16M by the central operation unit 15M will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 12 shows the entire control menu that can be selected using the central operation unit 15M.
The control menus that can be selected by the central operating unit 15M are divided into an RG (range grill) menu group that uses the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) and one or both of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b, and an IH menu group that uses the central IH coil 9C corresponding to the central heating port 4C.

Figure 13 shows the control menu shown in Figure 12 categorized into four perspectives (categories 1 to 4). As is clear from Figure 13, the control menu is broadly categorized into a single cooking mode KM3 and a combined cooking mode KM2. Note that although Figures 12 and 13 do not show the linked cooking mode KM1, the central operation unit 15M can execute a linked cooking menu in the linked cooking mode.

When the main power switch 20 is turned "ON" and input key 154M or 155R is pressed without operating input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M, the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected.

Therefore, the display screen of the central display portion 16M is switched to the second specific screen 16M2 (see FIG. 15).
In the first area 22 of the second specific screen 16M2, the control menu "Warm" shown in the "left display area" of Fig. 12 is always displayed first. This is because the control menu "Warm" is set as the default.

The "left display area" in FIG. 12 is a display area that corresponds to the first area 22 described in FIG. 8. In other words, the various control menus shown in the "left display area" in FIG. 12 are displayed sequentially in the first area 22.

As shown in the "left display area" of Figure 12, in addition to "warm," there are a total of 13 control menus: "Microwave manual," "Pre-boil leafy vegetables," "Pre-boil root vegetables," "Defrost meat," "Microwave grill (RG) cooking," "Microwave grill (RG) reheat," "Microwave grill (RG) manual," "Grill," "Oven," "IH keep warm," "IH rice cooking," and "IH heating."

The control menus "Warm", "Manual microwave", "Pre-boil leafy vegetables", "Pre-boil root vegetables", "Defrost meat", "Range grill (RG) cooking", "Range grill (RG) reheat", "Range grill (RG) manual", "Grill", and "Oven" are included in the RG menu group.
In addition, "IH warming", "IH rice cooking", and "IH heating" are included in the "IH menu group" which uses the first heating means HM1.

The contents shown in the "Central Display Area" in FIG. 12 are the contents displayed in the second area 23 of the central display unit 16M, and relate to adjustments to the heating conditions during cooking, such as temperature, time, heat, "high" or "low", etc. In other words, various control conditions are shown in the "Central Display Area". The contents of the default settings for this "Central Display Area" are listed in the "Default" column in the right column of the "Central Display Area".

The contents written in the "Right Display Area" in FIG. 12 indicate the contents displayed in the third area 24 of the central display unit 16M. The contents of the default settings for the "Right Display Area" are listed in the "Default" column in the right column of the "Right Display Area". A blank space does not indicate a control condition that can be changed, but rather indicates that no information is displayed, or that an appropriate explanatory text that cannot be selected or changed (by the user US) is displayed in the third area 24.

Next, a total of 13 types of control menus displayed in the "left display area" of FIG. 12 will be described.
(1) Warming: refers to heating the food in the heating chamber 6 using the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2). This "warming" is also suitable for reheating the food. The default setting is "80°C", so microwave heating automatically stops when the food is heated to 80°C. Note that "80°C" is the target temperature, which can be adjusted by the user US before heating begins. As shown in the central display area of FIG. 12, it can be set in 5°C increments within the range of 0°C to 90°C, for example.

(2) Manual range: This refers to heating the food in the heating chamber 6 using the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2). The heating time is set by the user US to a specific time between 10 seconds and 60 minutes.

(3) Parboiling of leafy vegetables: This is suitable for boiling the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6 using a microwave heating means (second heating means HM2), particularly vegetables whose leaves are edible, such as spinach, Chinese cabbage, and other leafy vegetables. The infrared sensor 13 measures the temperature rise of the food to be cooked in real time and automatically stops.

(4) Parboiling of root vegetables: This is suitable for parboiling the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6, particularly roots, rhizomes, potatoes, and other root vegetables, using a microwave heating means (second heating means HM2).

(5) Meat thawing: The heating chamber 6 is suitable for thawing various types of frozen meat.
(6) Range grill (RG) cooking: Food items in the heating chamber 6 are cooked by combining microwave heating using a microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) with oven heating using upper radiant heat heating means 12a and lower radiant heat heating means 12b.

(7) Range Grill (RG) Re-cooking: Suitable for re-heating food that has already been cooked in the heating chamber 6.
(8) Range Grill (RG) Manual: The user US appropriately selects between microwave heating and oven heating to heat and cook the food in the heating chamber 6.

(9) Grill: This uses one or both of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b to heat food in the heating chamber 6. In other words, this is a control menu that uses the third heating means HM3.

In the "Grill" control menu, the temperature of the heating chamber 6 is not managed, nor is the heating operation stopped when a rise in temperature of the food being cooked is detected. The heating operation is performed for a period of time specified by the user US within a range of 10 seconds to 30 minutes.

(10) Oven: An oven that uses one or both of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b to heat the food in the heating chamber 6. The temperature of the heating chamber 6 is measured in real time by a thermistor sensor 14, and the power supply to the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b is controlled so that the temperature reaches the set target temperature.

(11) IH Warm: Heats a heated object such as a pot placed above the central heating port 4C so as to keep it at a temperature set by the user US. Low to medium heat of 200W to 750W is used for induction heating, and a temperature sensor (not shown) installed near the central IH coil 9C detects the temperature of the heated object in real time, and the heating control unit 43 of the control device 40 controls the heat based on the detected temperature. The default temperature is 80°C as shown in Figure 12. For example, it is suitable for keeping soup warm.

(12) IH rice cooking: Heats according to the total number (amount of rice cooked) set by the user US. Induction heating powers range from low to high, from 200W to 1500W. A temperature sensor (not shown) installed near the central IH coil 9C is used to detect abnormal heating of the heated object (also called an overheated state or overheating; the same applies below), and if an abnormal temperature is detected, the control device 40 reduces the heat or stops the heating operation.

(13) IH heating: Heats according to the induction heating power set by the user US. There are five levels of heat that can be set: Heat 1: 200 W, Heat 2: 500 W, Heat 3: 750 W, Heat 4: 1000 W, and Heat 5: 1500 W. A temperature sensor (not shown) installed near the central IH coil 9C is used to detect abnormal heating of the heated object, and if an abnormal temperature is detected, the control device 40 reduces the heat or stops the heating operation. The default heat is 500 W.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
FIG. 13 is a classification table of the RG control menus ("RG menu group" in FIG. 12) and the IH control menus ("IH menu group" in FIG. 12) of the independent cooking mode KM3 by the first heating means HM1.

The "left display area" of the first region in FIG. 12 refers to the first area 22 (see FIG. 8). As is clear from category 2 in FIG. 13, the name of the control menu is also displayed in text in the first area 22 of the central display section 16M, and is used by the user US to select the control menu.

Next, FIG. 14 will be described.
FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing the storage structure of various cooking control menus in the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, and the correspondence between the menus and input keys.
The "information indicating the main points of each control menu" shown in category 2 in FIG. 13 is stored as data in the third layer of the recipe data storage unit 42 as shown in FIG.

Therefore, by operating input keys 154M and 155M to select a desired control menu, the user US can automatically or arbitrarily display information showing the main points of each control menu shown in category 2 of FIG. 13, which is one-to-one corresponding (linked) to that control menu. An example of this automatic display is shown in FIG. 15.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram illustrating the display operation on the central display unit 16M when the central operation unit 15M is operated.
First, when the user US turns on the main power by pressing the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 (see FIG. 10), the input functions of the left operation unit 15L, the central operation unit 15M, and the right operation unit 15R are enabled. In other words, the control device 40 is in a state where it can accept operation signals from each of these operation units 15L, 15M, and 15R, and a predetermined screen (hereinafter referred to as the "standby initial screen" 16MH) (see FIG. 41) is displayed on the central display unit 16M, although it is not shown in the figure.

In this state, when the user US presses the input key 154M or 155M, the display screen 15ST is displayed as shown in FIG.
FIG. 15 shows the second specific screen 16M2.
As is clear from the display screen 15ST, the name (identification information) 160 of the control menu "Warm" is displayed large in the center of the first area 22 in the front-to-rear direction.

The control menu identification information 160 for "Warm" is displayed in the center of the first area 22, and behind it are the words "IH heating" (control menu identification information) 161, while conversely, the words "Microwave manual" (control menu identification information) 162 are displayed slightly smaller in front of it.

As a result, when the user US selects a control menu, it is clear that the next options are "IH heating" and "Microwave manual." If, at this stage, the input key 154M is pressed once, the control menu identification information 162 for "Microwave manual" is displayed large, as if it has moved (backwards) to the position of the characters "Warm" (control menu identification information) 160. Note that the characters of the control menu identification information 162 have not actually moved; the displayed information has simply switched.

When the input key 155M is pressed once, the characters "IH heating" (control menu identification information) 161 are displayed large and appear to have moved (forward) to the position of the characters "Warm" (control menu identification information) 160. Note that in this case, too, the control menu identification information 162 has not actually moved; the displayed information has simply been switched.

As shown in FIG. 15, the display screen 15ST displays a target temperature of "80°C" in the second area 23. When microwave heating is performed at this target temperature, the microwave heating is automatically stopped when the infrared sensor 13 detects that the temperature of the food being cooked is 80°C.

If you wish to change the temperature displayed in this second area 23 and change the automatic stop temperature, simply operate input key 156M or 157M. Pressing input key 156M once will raise the temperature by 5°C to 85°C, as shown in display screen 15UP1, and pressing input key 157M once will lower the temperature by 5°C to 75°C, as shown in display screen 15DN1.

The second area 23 also displays a heating source display section 163 that indicates in text that the heating source is a microwave heating means (second heating means HM2).

As described above, 164 is reference information that is automatically displayed to indicate that this is a recommended control menu for heating side dishes, etc. The content of this reference information may be other additional information 165, and two or more types of information may be displayed alternately or sequentially for several seconds each on the display screen (e.g., third area 24) of the central display unit 16M.

Furthermore, as shown in category 2 of FIG. 13, information (reference information) 164 indicating the main points of each control menu may be displayed whenever necessary in response to the operation of the input keys 158 or 159 .
In other words, in this embodiment 1, the reference information 164 that corresponds one-to-one with each control menu (e.g., "warm up") is displayed so that the user US does not hesitate as to whether or not to select each control menu (e.g., "warm up").

Furthermore, when reference information 164 is displayed as shown in FIG. 15, if one of the (two) input keys 158M or 159M located in front of the reference information 164 is touched, more detailed additional information 166 may be displayed in the third area 24 instead of the reference information 164.

As shown in FIG. 15, the aforementioned "composite cooking mode" KM2 is a mode in which multiple heating means with different heating principles, such as the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3, are driven simultaneously or automatically switched with a time lag to heat and cook a common food item.

In FIG. 15, the display screen shown in the central display section 16M is a dedicated display screen for the "combined cooking mode" KM2, and is referred to as the "second specific screen" 16M2.

Next, reference will be made to FIG. 16 to FIG.
16 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the central display unit 16M and the central operation unit 15M in the combined cooking mode KM2, illustrating the operation procedure before the start of the heating operation.

In FIG. 16, FG indicates the fingertip of the user US.
When the main power switch 20 is turned "ON" to start the control device 40 and the input key 154M or 155M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed, the initial standby screen 16MH (see Fig. 41) is switched to the second specific screen 16M2 as shown in Fig. 16. That is, this is the setting operation scene for the "combined cooking mode" KM2 such as a single cooking mode such as microwave heating or microwave grill (RG) cooking.

If input key 153M is pressed before input key 154M or 155M, the input process changes to the input process for the collaborative cooking mode KM1. In other words, from that stage, the standby initial screen 16MH (see FIG. 41) switches to the first specific screen 16M1 (see FIG. 19 to FIG. 22).

When either input key 154M or 155M is pressed with fingertip FG as described above, three candidates for control menus to be targeted for multiple composite cooking modes KM2 are displayed on the display screen of central display unit 16M, i.e., in the first area 22 of the “second specific screen” 16M2.
That is, three pieces of identification information (including a graphic mark and the name of the food to be cooked) 160, 161, and 162 for identifying the three control menus one-to-one are displayed. Among these, the position where the identification information 160 of one of the control menus is displayed may be hereinafter referred to as "display position A."

In FIG. 16, there are three control menus displayed in the central display section 16M. These are "warm," "induction heating," and "manual range." The number of control menus is referred to as the "number of control menus for complex cooking."

In this embodiment 1, the positions where the identification information 161 and 162 are displayed may hereafter be referred to as "display position B" and "display position C," respectively.

In this embodiment 1, the control menu displayed at "display position A" ("Warm" in FIG. 16) has the highest priority for selection. In other words, when input key 151M is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 16, the heating operation starts with "Warm".

In FIG. 16, when input key 154M, which is located to the right of input key 155M, is touched (a normal "short press" operation), "Range Manual" is displayed at display position A.

To change the target temperature of 85°C for "warm," simply touch input key 156M or 157M. In this case, even if you use a "long press" rather than the usual "short press," you will only be able to make normal temperature change inputs. In other words, you cannot change to voice input mode 1 using input keys 156M or 157M.

In FIG. 16, one light-emitting element 21M corresponding to an input key 153M is marked with a star-shaped figure, which indicates that the light-emitting element 21M in question flashes (or emits light in a color different from the other light-emitting elements) and can be operated.

As is clear from FIG. 16, when the control menu is displayed in the first area 22, one of the light-emitting elements 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M and 157M does not yet blink (or emit light in a color different from the other light-emitting elements). In other words, this indicates that input operations are not possible.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
As is clear from FIG. 17, after the control menu is displayed in the first area 22, one of the light-emitting elements 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M, 157M flashes (or emits light in a color different from the other light-emitting elements), indicating that it is possible to input control conditions such as heating time and temperature.

In addition, in FIG. 17, one light-emitting element 21M that corresponds to an input key 151M is surrounded by a dashed circle, which indicates that the light-emitting element 21M is blinking (or emitting light in a color different from the other light-emitting elements) and waiting for a command to start cooking.

In FIG. 17, when an input key 154M, which is one of the "voice input switching keys", is touched, if the touch state is "long press", a mark 154V indicating that the input key has been switched to "voice input mode 1" is displayed by the light-emitting element 27B (see FIG. 10) so as to surround the touched portion of the input key 154M. In other words, the light-emitting element 27B (see FIG. 10), such as an LED, arranged below the top plate 3 is lit by a signal from the light-emission control unit 26, and a frame as shown in FIG. 17 is displayed on the portion of the input key 154M. Alternatively, the entire touched portion of the input key 154M is illuminated from below, making it clearly distinguishable from other input keys.

When the mark 154V is displayed, the control unit 55 of the control device 40 is already in a state where it can accept input of "control conditions" (temperature, heating time, etc.), which are lower-level commands in the control menu (e.g., "warm"), via the audio signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 10) (hereinafter also referred to as a "control condition input standby state").

Therefore, instead of inputting the control conditions by touching the input keys 156M or 157M, the user US can input the control conditions by voice.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
As is clear from Fig. 18, after the mark 154V is displayed, one of the light-emitting elements 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M and 157M does not blink (or emit light in a color different from the other light-emitting elements). In other words, this indicates that input operations of control conditions such as heating time and temperature are not recommended using these input keys. However, when switched to "voice input mode 1", the input functions of input keys that are not necessary for voice input are restricted, so after the mark 154V is displayed, input by touch operation is not possible using the input keys 156M and 157M (if set to voice input mode 1A).
In order to maintain the touch input function of specific input keys (such as 156M) for inputting control conditions even after switching to the voice input mode, it is necessary to set the mode to the "voice input mode 1B" as described above.

As is clear from FIG. 18, after the mark 154V is displayed, auxiliary information 179 for voice input mode 1 is displayed in the larger display area combining the second area 23 and the third area 24.

There are three types of auxiliary information 179: voice input mode display information 179A, which indicates that voice input is being accepted because the mode is voice input mode, and information 179B and 179C, which indicate the range and numerical values of the control conditions that can be input.

The information 179B is the condition shown in "area 2" explained with reference to Fig. 12. That is, it indicates that the user US can only select within the range of 0°C to 90°C.
The information 179C is the condition shown in "Area 2" described in Fig. 12. In other words, in the control menu for "warming" for heating frozen foods with microwaves, the user US can only select from the range of -10°C to 0°C.

The auxiliary information 179 (179A to 179C) shown in FIG. 18 allows the user US to input by voice, and by indicating in advance the range of control conditions that can be input by voice, unnecessary voice input and speaking of inappropriate conditions can be avoided, thereby improving the operability of the user US.

As is clear from FIG. 18, after the mark 154V is displayed, the auxiliary information 179 for voice input mode 1 remains displayed in the large display area formed by combining the second area 23 and the third area 24, which does not satisfy the conditions for starting the heating operation.
That is, in the state of Fig. 18, pressing (touch operation) of the input key (start key) 151M is not recommended as in Fig. 17. Therefore, the light emitting unit 21M is not in a state of emitting light (blinking).

In other words, in this embodiment 1, after switching to the voice input mode, if the specified control conditions have not been input (the state shown in Figure 18), the heating operation cannot be started.

Next, FIG. 19 will be described.
19 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the central display unit 16M and the central operation unit 15M in the combined cooking mode KM1, illustrating the stage before the start of the heating operation.

In FIG. 19, when the main power switch 20 is turned "ON" to start up the control device 40 and the input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed, the initial standby screen 16MH (see FIG. 40) is switched to the first specific screen 16M1 shown in FIG. 19.

If input key 154M or 155M is pressed before input key 153M, the input process changes to the input process for composite cooking mode KM2, and second specific screen 16M2 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 16.

Even if input key 155M or 156M is pressed first and the setting operation for "combined cooking mode" KM2, such as a single cooking mode such as microwave heating or microwave grill (RG) cooking, is halfway through, if it is at a stage before input key 151M is pressed, the input process will change to the input process for "combined cooking mode" KM3 when input key 153M is pressed. In other words, from this stage, only the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display section 16M.

Figure 19 shows the state immediately after pressing the input key 153M, and the identification information 167 of a specific cooking menu (e.g., hamburger) that has been set as the default is displayed in the first area 22.

If input key 153M is touched, followed by input key 154M or 155M, further identification information (including a graphic mark and the name of the food) 168 or 169 is displayed in the first area 22 of the display screen (first identification screen) 16M1 of the central display unit 16M to identify the food to be cooked that is the target of the multiple linked cooking modes KM1 (the linked cooking menu).

In FIG. 19, the number of "foods" that can be cooked in the coordinated cooking mode displayed in the central display section 16M is three. That is, there are three: hamburger steak, gratin, and roast beef. In this way, the number of food items is called the "number of coordinated cooking menus."

In this embodiment 1, there are a total of eight linked cooking menus. Details are given in FIG. 25. However, it is possible to obtain recipe data CD from the smartphone (communication terminal) 200 (described later) and further increase the number of linked cooking menus.

In FIG. 19, 167, 168, and 169 are identification information, which in this embodiment 1 is information that specifies the name of the food to be cooked (e.g., hamburger steak, gratin, roast beef) in a one-to-one relationship. Note that when describing all the identification information of the collaborative cooking menu KM1, the reference number 167 is used.

The position where the control menu identification information 160 described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 18 is displayed is called "display position A."
In contrast, in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the position where the identification information 167 is displayed is also display position A.

In this embodiment 1, the positions at which identification information 160 and identification information 167 are displayed are the same "display position A", but they may be set to different positions. However, in order to avoid confusion for the user US, in the coordinated cooking mode KM1, the eight coordinated cooking menus are always displayed in the same position (display position A). Also, in the composite cooking mode KM2, it is good to unify each control menu to always use the same (single) "display position A".

As shown in FIG. 19, heating unit specification units 171L and 171R are displayed. At this stage, either the right IH coil 9R or the left IH coil 9L can be selected by touching the input keys 156M and 157M. In the combined cooking mode KM2, the input keys 156M and 157M could be used to input control conditions such as heat, but the central operation unit 15M does not allow input of such control conditions for either the right IH coil 9R or the left IH coil 9L. Input of control conditions is performed using the input keys 154R and 154L of the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L. Input of such control conditions can be performed using the corresponding left or right operation unit 15L or 15R after the cooking process has started.
If the input keys 154M and 155M are not operated (within a certain period of time), the process automatically proceeds to the next step, and the display screen is switched to that of FIG.

Referring to FIG. 20 .
In Fig. 20, the heating unit specification sections 171L and 171R are displayed in the first specification screen 16M1. The user US can select either the right IH coil 9R or the left IH coil 9L by operating the input keys 157M and 156M adjacent to each other on the left and right. In this embodiment 1, the left heating unit 4L is set as the default, and the operation of the input keys 157M and 156M is not essential.

In FIG. 20, the operation support information 170 displays "Press the start button to start heating the left IH." This means that by pressing the input key 151M on the central operation unit 15M, induction heating (cooking process 1) (in the coordinated cooking mode KM1) can be started by the left IH coil 9L. However, in this embodiment 1, it is necessary to press the input key 153L on the left operation unit 15L after pressing the input key 151M.

As shown in FIG. 20, identification information 168 indicating the name of another cooking item (e.g., gratin) is displayed above (at the rear in plan view) the identification information 167 displayed on the first specific screen 16M1.

In addition, below the identification information 167, identification information 169 indicating the name of another cooking item (e.g., roast beef) is displayed. In FIG. 20, one light-emitting element 21M corresponding to an input key 151M is surrounded by a dashed circle, which indicates that the light-emitting element 21M is blinking (or emitting light in a color different from the other light-emitting elements) and waiting for a command to start cooking.

Each time either input key 154M or 155M is operated once, identification information 167 indicating the name of the food to be cooked (e.g., hamburger steak) changes its display by moving one step upward or downward. In other words, by moving forward and backward, identification information 167 can be displayed sequentially at a predetermined position (front-to-back center position) in first area 22, in other words, at display position B.

In this embodiment 1, there are a total of eight types of food to be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 (see FIG. 25). Therefore, for example, by operating the left input key 155M eight times, the identification information 167 of one food to be cooked (e.g., hamburger steak) is cycled through. Conversely, by operating the right input key 154M eight times, the identification information 167 of one food to be cooked (e.g., hamburger steak) is cycled through.

After selecting a cooking menu (e.g., hamburger steak), as described above, the user must select the left and right heating units 4L and 4R or input control conditions (e.g., preheating temperature), and then issue a command to start the heating operation using input key 151M.

As described above, inputting the left and right heating elements 4L, 4R and the control conditions (e.g., preheating temperature) requires pressing either input key 154M or 155M multiple times, which requires the user US to perform multiple touch operations. This is also the case with the above-mentioned combined cooking mode KM2. For example, as explained in FIG. 12, the temperature setting for "warming" can be selected from the range of 0 to 90 degrees, but each of input keys 156M and 157M can only input an increase (or decrease) of 5 degrees with one touch operation, so to input, for example, 15 degrees, three touch operations ("short presses") are required.

In this embodiment 1, in order to reduce the troublesome input operations, in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, when the identification information 167 of one cooking menu is displayed in a predetermined position B of the first area 22 as shown in Figures 19 and 20, the input key 154M can be used to switch to voice input mode.

As described above, when the input key 154M, which is one of the voice input switching keys, is touched, if the touch state is "long press," a mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to voice input mode is displayed so as to surround the touched portion of the input key 154M, as shown in FIG. 20.

Referring to FIG. 21 .
At the timing when mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to voice input mode is displayed, voice input mode display information 179A indicating that voice input is being accepted may be displayed on first specific screen 16M1 as auxiliary information 179, as shown in FIG. 21.

In the state shown in Figure 21, the left and right heating sections 4L, 4R have not yet been selected. In this state shown in Figure 21, if the user US inputs setting information such as "left IH" by voice, the selection of the left heating port 4L is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1.
22 shows an example in which the function is set to automatically select the left heating unit 4L. As shown in FIG. 22, the result of the automatic selection of the left heating port 4L is displayed on the first specified screen 16M1.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 22, one light-emitting element 21M corresponding to the input key 151M flashes as shown in the dashed circle (or emits light in a color different from the other light-emitting elements), and proceeds to the next state upon receiving a command to start cooking, so that pressing the input key 151M starts the heating and cooking operation.

Next, we will explain Figure 23.
In Fig. 23A, FG indicates the fingertips of the user US. Every time the input key 155M is pressed once, the display contents of the first specific screen 16M1 change to display screens 23A to 23D as shown in Fig. 23B.

As described above, when the user US sets the input operation unit 15 in advance to the function setting mode (using the function setting key 151KP) and operates multiple input keys on the input operation unit 15 during the function setting mode to display individual cooking menus in the linked cooking mode KM1 on the central display unit 16M, it is possible to set the display to prioritize either food ingredients or nutritional ingredients.

For example, when the function setting key 151KP is pressed as described above, a dedicated display screen for the "function setting menu" is displayed on the display screen of the central display portion 16M.
Therefore, it is preferable to set in advance that the food ingredient display mode can be automatically selected by "long pressing" a specific input key (e.g., 156M) other than the function setting key 151KP. For example, for one setting menu (e.g., hamburger) in the above-mentioned "function setting menu", the display screen can be set to automatically display "food ingredient display" and "nutritional ingredient display".

Furthermore, when the display screen for setting such "food composition labeling" or "nutritional composition labeling" is displayed, it may be possible to operate a specific input key other than the function setting key 151KP (e.g., any one of 156M, 157M, etc.) to change the conditions for setting the "food composition labeling" or "nutritional composition labeling" or to cancel the setting. For example, it may be possible to set it so that only the "iron" nutrient and the "energy (calorie equivalent)" of the component are displayed as a specific range.

For this reason, if the function setting key 151KP is set to prioritize either food ingredients or nutritional ingredients and display them based on that, "hamburger" will not necessarily be displayed first, as shown in Figure 23 (A).

On the other hand, as described above, the user US can search for cooking menus by voice by pressing the input key 180. Therefore, for example, if a voice input such as "a menu with low calorie value" is made at the stage shown in FIG. 23, the cooking menu with the lowest calorie value (amount of energy) among the eight cooking menus will be displayed at a predetermined position (front-to-back center position, i.e., the "display position A" mentioned above) in the first area 22 on the first specific screen 16M1.

For example, in FIG. 23, three cooking menu items are displayed: gratin, hamburger steak, and roast beef. If the input key 180 is pressed at this point, the voice input mode 2 is entered. The user US may then give a voice input of "low calorie menu." Incidentally, the energy amount (unit: kilocalories) per 100 g of weight is 152 for gratin (macaroni gratin), 223 for hamburger steak, and approximately 196 for roast beef. Therefore, macaroni is extracted as the "menu with the lowest calorie value" among these three.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 23, input key 154M can be "long pressed" to switch to voice input mode 1, and menus with low calorie values can be extracted by voice input.

Next, we will explain Figure 24.
FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the central display section 16M in the collaborative cooking mode KM1, and is an example in which standard ingredients and nutritional ingredients for "hamburger steak," one of the cooking menus, are displayed.

At the stage of Figures 20 to 23, if the user US issues a command to display either the food ingredients or the nutritional ingredients by voice input, or if the input key 158M or 159M is touched at the stage where the operational support information 170 is displayed (see Figure 20), the first specific screen 16M1 temporarily switches to the display screen of Figure 24 (A) and Figure 24 (B). Pressing the input key 158M is considered to be a command to display the food ingredients.

In the following description, the display screen in FIG. 24(A) will be referred to as the "food ingredient display screen" 16M1A, and the display screen in FIG. 24(B) will be referred to as the "nutritional ingredient display screen" 16M1B.

The food component display screen 16M1A and nutritional component display screen 16M1B automatically return to the original state of the first specific screen 16M1 after a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed.
Alternatively, the display program of the control device 40 stipulates that if the user US gives any command by voice input, or if either of the input keys 158M, 159M is operated once more within the specified period of time (10 seconds), the original state of the first specific screen 16M1 will be restored.

Referring to FIG. 25 .
FIG. 25 is a table showing the correspondence between the cooking menu in the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 and the operational support information 170 (see FIG. 20).

As can be seen from FIG. 25, there are at least two pieces of operational support information 170.
That is, there are two types of operational support information, an operational support information A (170A) and an operational support information B (170B). The first operational support information A (170A) is "Determine with the start button." This "start button" refers to the input key 151M.
The second piece of operational support information B (170B) is information stating that "the IH to be used can be changed."
The data of the table shown in FIG. 25 is stored in the storage device 41 of the control device 40.

As shown in Figure 25, for each food item (cooking menu), a "specific input key" that needs to be operated when the user US cooks using the recipe data CD is determined in advance, and this information is also stored in the memory device 41.
As described above, recipe data CD for performing one cooking operation is obtained in two stages: a first part M1 for setting cooking process 1 using one or two heating means, and a second part M2 for setting cooking process 2 using the other heating means.

For example, in the case of "hamburger steak," the specific input key for acquiring data for cooking process 1 (first portion M1) is either 152L or 152R. In other words, the user US can select either the input key 152R on the right heating unit 15R or the input key 152L on the left operation unit 15L at their discretion. Note that both cannot be selected, and the specific input key selection process is completed when either one is selected.

Furthermore, when obtaining data for the second portion M2 that sets cooking process 2, it is necessary to operate another specific input key. For example, in the case of the above-mentioned "hamburger steak", the specific input key for obtaining data for cooking process 2 (second portion M2) is 153M. That is, input key 153M of central operation unit 15M can be operated. Note that when obtaining recipe data CD in this way, the specific input key to be operated is determined in advance, as shown in the "specific input key" column in FIG. 25, and this information is stored in the storage device 41.

The two types of operation support information A (170A) and operation support information B (170B) mentioned above are automatically switched before the start of the cooking process in the "collaborative cooking mode" KM3. For example, they are displayed alternately every few seconds.

Next, we will refer to FIG.
In this embodiment 1, a "cooperative preheat cooking mode" KM4 is provided as one type of the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
There are two types of coordinated preheat cooking mode KM4.

An example of a cooking menu that uses the linked preheat cooking mode KM4 is "hamburger steak." In the case of "hamburger steak," the preheating process is performed using the first heating means HM1.

When the cooking process 1 is started while the preheating process is being performed, the heating operation of the preheating process is not stopped at the start point of the cooking process 1.
Therefore, the energization of the first heating means HM1 and the energization of the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) and the third heating means HM3 in charge of cooking process 1 are performed in parallel during the same time period.

In other words, in the linked preheat cooking mode KM4, the heating source (in the above explanation, the first heating means HM1) that has started operating before cooking process 1 is not necessarily stopped at the start of cooking process 1, and during cooking process 1, power may be applied to either or both of the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) and the third heating means HM3.

Unless there is a particular contradiction, the following explanation will be based on the assumption that the linked cooking mode KM1 includes the linked preheat cooking mode KM4.

When the linked cooking mode KM1 (KM4) is selected, the left operation unit 15L of the left IH coil 9L cannot be used for other cooking menus (also called "occupied state") when the identification information 167 indicating the name of the food to be cooked is displayed on the central display unit 16M.

Specifically, of the various input keys on the left operation unit 15L, at least the input key 153L is disabled by the heating control unit 43. This "disabled" means that a valid command signal is not sent from the input key 153L to the heating control unit 43, and that even if a valid command signal is sent, the heating control unit 43 does not process the command signal as a valid command signal. In either case, heating with the left IH coil 9L cannot be selected.

At the same time, when the identification information 167 is displayed, the right operation unit 15R of the right heating port 4R may be made unusable (by "disabling" the input key 153R). However, if the user US has set the function in advance on the input operation unit 15 (using the function setting key 151KP) so that this "disabling" is not performed, and if the right IH coil 9R is already being used for another control menu (heating operation is ongoing), the right IH coil 9R can be used as is. On the other hand, in the linked cooking mode KM1, if it has already been used (by other cooking), it is determined (by the heating control unit 43) that it cannot be used.

Therefore, only the left IH coil 9L is "occupied" by the selection of the linked cooking mode KM1 (KM4). Also, when viewed from the perspective of the first heating source HM1 as a whole, only a portion of the three heating ports 4L, 4C, 4R (the left IH coil 9L) is "restricted" in use. Note that if the right IH coil 9R is not being used for other cooking, the right IH coil 9R may also be placed in an occupied state.

Continuing with the description of FIG.
26 shows the operation steps when "fried chicken" is made in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 (cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4). In FIG. 26, #1 to #9 show the operation of the user US and the state change of the cooking appliance 1.

The "fried chicken" shown in FIG. 26 differs from the "hamburger" described above in that cooking step 1 is performed in the heating chamber 6 and cooking step 2 is performed by the first heating means HM1.

In FIG. 26, before starting cooking step 1 to cook "fried chicken," the user US first selects the left IH coil 9L and presses the input key 151L. Then, preheating of the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 3 begins (step Y21). In this case, the object to be heated N is a metal pot or frying pan, etc., in which a certain amount of cooking oil is poured.

Meanwhile, the user US opens the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 and places ingredients for "fried chicken" (such as seasoned chicken) into the heating chamber 6 (#1).
After closing the door 7, an operation called "pressing the start button" (step Y22) is performed. This is performed by pressing the input key 151M of the central operation unit 15M.

At this point, the microwave heating source (second heating means HM2) is activated and cooking step 1 of microwave cooking begins. Then, notification 1 of reference information is given.

The notification 1 is, for example, to inform the user of the time remaining until the end of heating, such as "Microwave heating has started. Heating time is xx minutes." Or, if the control is performed to detect the temperature of the food being cooked and determine when to end the heating, it may be to inform the user of information indicating the target temperature, such as "Heating to xx degrees Celsius."

During this cooking step 1, the preheating of the left IH coil 9L is also completed (for example, the object to be heated is heated to 180°C, which is the standard preheating temperature) (step Y23A). The user US is notified of the completion of preheating by voice and text, etc., via the audio notification unit 51 and the central display unit 16M (first specific screen 16M1) (step Y23B).

The user US can stop microwave heating at any time during cooking step 1. To stop it, simply open the door 7. Note that microwave heating can be stopped once by pressing the input key 152M on the central operation unit 15M only once. However, pressing the input key 152M twice in succession within a short period of time cancels the cooking mode and the selection of "fried chicken" in the linked cooking mode. The user is notified immediately before or after the microwave heating has stopped (step Y24).

By opening the door 7, the microwave heating operation is immediately stopped, and the cooking process 1 is completed (#3).
Next, the user US moves the food that has been heated in the heating chamber 6 into the object to be heated (such as a frying pan) that is being preheated on the top plate 3 (#4).

Then, cooking process 2 is started at the left heating port 4L (#5).
In cooking step 2, since the input key 153L (see FIG. 6) of the left operation unit 15L is pressed at the beginning before preheating starts, there is no need to operate the left operation unit 15L at the start of cooking step 2. In other words, when the food (fried chicken ingredients) is moved into the object to be heated that has been preheated to, for example, 180° C., heating of the food starts at the temperature of the object to be heated (this point is the start point of cooking step 2).

As described above, the user US does not need to operate the input operation unit 15 in order to start cooking process 2 (#5).
The point at which the food to be cooked is placed on top of the food to be heated is the start of cooking process 2, but the temperature sensor group 30 (see Figure 10) may detect a temporary drop in the temperature of the food to be cooked when the food is placed on top of the food to be cooked, and then determine the start of cooking process 2 electrically.
The cooking process 2 can be ended at any timing by the user US operating the left operating unit 15L.

Next, the user US moves the food to be cooked again.
First, the door 7 is opened, the food to be cooked is placed in the heating chamber 6, and the door 7 is closed (#6).
Then, the input key 151M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed to start cooking step 3 of the range grill control menu (RG control menu) (step Y26).

In this case, to prevent microwave heating or the like from being performed without placing the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6 (so-called "empty cooking"), the door 7 is opened once after cooking process 1 is completed, and then the heating operation can be started by pressing the input key 151M only if it is detected (by the door 7 open/close detection unit 10) that the door 7 has been closed again. In addition, the timing for operating this input key 151M is limited to a certain time (e.g., 3 minutes) from the end of cooking process 1, or to a certain time (e.g., 2 minutes) from the time the door 7 is opened and closed again, thereby improving safety.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since cooking process 3 by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 6 was started by operation input by the user US, the operation support information 170 is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1. It is also notified by voice (step Y27).

The audio notification includes information including guidance such as, for example, "Heating will finish in 30 seconds. If you wish to extend the time further, please set the time." Furthermore, since the user US knows that the final cooking process is about to end, he or she can start preparing to remove the "fried chicken" from the heating chamber 6 from the point of notification of this operation support information 170. In synchronization with this, the contents of the operation support information 170 are displayed in text or the like by the central display unit 16M. The operation support information 170 is displayed at a specific position on the first specific screen 16M1, as in the example shown in FIG. 20.

Thereafter, the microwave heating operation is stopped, and cooking process 3 is completed (#7). Note that cooking process 3 can be stopped immediately if the user US opens the door 7.
Then, the user US moves the food heated in the heating chamber 6 into the object to be heated that is being preheated on the top plate 3 (#8). In this case, if the object to be heated is maintained in a heated state by induction heating until the end of cooking step 3, the user US may place another object to be cooked on the object to be heated and start induction heating (cooking step 4) (#9).

Induction heating cooking can be ended by operating the left operation unit 15L. In other words, the user US's operation to end heating cooking at this point (step Y28) is to press the input key 153L of the left operation unit 15L corresponding to the left IH coil 9L.

The cooking sequence shown in FIG. 26 can shorten the time required from the start of the induction heating operation (start of the preheating step) to the end of cooking step 1.
That is, cooking step 1 is started by placing ingredients (food to be cooked) in heating chamber 6 prior to the completion of preheating by induction heating or notification of the completion of preheating.

Because preheating by the first heating means HM1 is completed before cooking process 1 is completed, the food to be cooked can be transferred immediately to the food to be heated on the top plate 3 after cooking process 1 is completed, and cooking process 2 can be started.

In the example of "fried chicken" in FIG. 26, cooking step 3 is included, but cooking step 3 and cooking step 4 are not necessarily required. Cooking steps can be completed based on the type of food to be cooked and the wishes of the user US.

In addition, in FIG. 26, the "left IH coil drive period" continues even after cooking step 2 is completed, but after cooking step 2 is completed, the drive of the left IH coil 9L may be stopped at any time by the left operation unit 15L. However, as shown by the dashed frame in FIG. 26, if the left IH coil 9L is also to be used in cooking step 4, it is necessary to start the preheating operation again before cooking step 4.

Next, we will explain Figure 27.
FIG. 27 shows the operation steps when "fried chicken" is selected as a cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, similar to FIG.
In Fig. 27, #1 to #9 indicate operations by the user US and state changes of the cooking appliance 1, as described in Fig. 26. The other symbols correspond to those in Fig. 26.

The difference between FIG. 27 and FIG. 26 will now be described.
FIG. 27 shows a case where cooking process 1 is started in heating chamber 6 after completion of preheating of the object to be heated by first heating means HM1 (step Y23A) and notification thereof (step Y23B).

Step Y21 indicates the start of driving the first heating means HM1.
When the completion of preheating of the heated object by the first heating means HM1 (step Y23A) is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 and the left and right display units 16L, 16R (step Y23B) and is also notified by audio notification unit 50, the user US opens the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 and places the ingredients for "fried chicken" (such as seasoned chicken) into the heating chamber 6 (#1).
After closing the door 7, the input key 151M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed.

At this point, microwave cooking process step 1 is started (step Y22). Then, the notification 1 of the reference information is performed. After this, the process is the same as that shown in FIG. 26.

In the cooking sequence shown in FIG. 27, the time required from the start of the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 (start of the preheating process) to the end of cooking process 1 is longer than that in FIG. 26.

However, since the food ingredients (food to be cooked) start to be heated in the heating chamber 6 after the preheating by the first heating means HM1 is completed or a notification of the completion of the preheating (step Y23B) is received, when cooking step 1 in the heating chamber 6 ends, there is a guarantee that cooking step 2 can be started immediately by the first heating means HM1 if the food to be cooked is moved. Therefore, this method is suitable for users US who are not very familiar with the linked preheating cooking mode KM4.

In addition, in FIG. 27, the "driving period of the left IH coil 9L" continues even after cooking step 2 is completed, but if the first heating means HM1 is not used after cooking step 2 is completed, the driving of the left IH coil 9L may be stopped at any time by the left operating unit 15L after cooking step 2 is completed. However, as shown in the dashed box in FIG. 27, if the left IH coil 9L is also used in cooking step 4, preheating must be started again before cooking step 4.

In the configurations shown in Figures 26 and 27, the first heating means HM1 is energized first to start the preheating operation, while the cooking process 1 is carried out in the heating chamber 6.
The "linked preheat cooking mode" KM4 of this embodiment 1 is not limited to the cooking process 1 being performed in the heating chamber as described above.

In another linked preheat cooking mode KM4, the heating operation is started first by the first heating means HM1, the heated object such as a frying pan is heated to a preheat target temperature (e.g., 180°C), and when the target temperature is reached, the heated object is placed on top of the heated object, and cooking step 1 is started. After this preheating step, the heated object may be moved into the heating chamber 6 while still on top of the heated object, and placed in the heating chamber 6 together with the heated object, and cooking step 2 may be performed in order to further heat the heated object with the third heating means HM3. However, in this case, if the heated object is a metal pot or frying pan, it will be difficult to heat it with the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source), so it is necessary to place it in a heat-resistant glass or porcelain container and place it in the heating chamber 6.

Next, we will explain FIG. 28.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the control operation of the heating control unit 43 until the transition to the combined cooking mode KM1.

In the linked cooking mode KM1 of this embodiment 1, there is a pattern (first linked cooking mode) in which the first heating means HM1 is driven first, and then at least one of the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 is driven. Representative examples of cooking menus suitable for cooking with this pattern include four, ranging from "hamburger steak" to "gratin," as shown in the table in Figure 25.

There is also a second linked cooking mode in which the order is reversed. Representative examples of cooking menus suitable for cooking in this second linked cooking mode are four, ranging from "fried chicken" to "tempura," as shown in the lower half of the table in Figure 25.

The steps in FIG. 28 are common to both the first collaborative cooking mode and the second collaborative cooking mode.
First, in step SB1, the input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M is operated, thereby starting the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

In the next step SB2, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display section 16M, and various information for executing the coordinated cooking mode KM1 is displayed. In this step SB2, in order to select a cooking menu for each coordinated cooking mode, the "name of the food to be cooked" (e.g., "hamburger steak") 167 is displayed as one type of identification information 167 in the center of the front-to-rear direction of the first area 22, i.e., the display position A.

Depending on the selection of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the timing at which the heating means (the first heating means HM1 to the third heating means HM3) are "occupied" may be either of the following two cases.
(1) As described above, for example, after the case where the left IH coil 9L for cooking process 1 is selected (in FIG. 28, this corresponds to “Start of occupied state (case 2)” after step SB4).
(2) As shown in FIG. 28, from step SB2 onward (in FIG. 28, this corresponds to "Start of Occupied State (Case 1)").

The next step SB3 is to determine whether at least one of the input keys 154M, 155M has been operated. As described in FIG. 8 and FIG. 19 to FIG. 22, by operating the two input keys 154M, 155M, the user can select the identification information 167 indicating the name of an item to be cooked in the collaborative cooking mode (e.g., hamburger steak).

If the input keys 154M and 155M are not operated (within a certain period of time), the process proceeds to Step SB4.
In step SB4, as described above, one of the two heating unit specification parts 171L and 171R displayed in the first specification screen 16M1 is selected. When the user US operates the input keys 157M and 156M adjacent to each other on the left and right, the user can select one of the right IH coil 9R and the left IH coil 9L.

The left heating port 4L may be set as the default, the heating unit specification section 171L may be displayed first on the first specification screen 16M1, and the process may proceed directly to step SB5. In the example described in FIG. 22, when making hamburger steak using coordinated cooking, the left heating port 4L is set as the default, and the left IH coil 9L is set to be selected preferentially.

In the next step SB5, it is determined whether an input operation has been performed to cancel the selection of the linked cooking mode. If the input key 152M has been operated once, the determination is "Yes". Then, the process returns to step SB3. If the input key 152M has been operated twice in succession within a certain short period of time (for example, five seconds), it is determined that the linked cooking mode KM1 has been cancelled, and the process returns to the state of the initial standby screen prior to step SB1. Therefore, the selection of the three cooking modes KM1 to KM3 returns to the initial stage.

On the other hand, if input key 151M is operated while input key 152M is not operated, the process proceeds to next step SB6. Then, cooking step 1 of linked cooking mode KM1 is started.

In FIG. 28, in step SB7, in the operation program of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, various functional parts are activated according to the "cooking conditions" (including "control conditions" such as heat and heating time) of a specific cooperative cooking menu (recipe) such as "hamburger steak." In other words, from this stage, the mode transitions to the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

First, in step SB7, the display unit corresponding to the heating unit selected in step SB4 is activated. However, in the case of a cooking menu that uses the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) or the third heating means HM3 in cooking step 1 (for example, "fried chicken" as described above), the central display unit 16M is already activated, so in this step SB7, no new display unit is activated.

In cooking step 1, for example, if a cooking menu uses the left IH coil 9L, the left display unit 16L is activated in step SB7. The input function of the left operation unit 15L is then enabled, and the unit waits for input from the user US. Then, the process proceeds to step SB8.

At step SB8, the operation of the input key 153L is awaited and the cooking process of the combined cooking mode KM1 is started.
The display contents of the first specific screen 16M1 of step SB8 include process information 172 such as that the first cooking process 1 uses the left IH coil 9L, and the next cooking process 2 uses a microwave heating means (second heating means HM2), as described in FIG. 19.

Next, reference will be made to FIG. 29 and FIG.
Fig. 29 is a flowchart showing the control operation of the heating control unit 43 until the transition to the coordinated cooking mode. Fig. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions and determination results before transition to the coordinated cooking mode.

Referring to FIG. 29 .
Steps ST1 to ST8 are operation steps defined in the basic operation program of the heating control unit 43.
First, when the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 is pressed (ST1), the next step ST2 is a step in which the heating control section 43 determines whether or not there is an abnormality.

At step ST2, the central display unit 16M is activated and displays the message "There are no abnormalities, so cooking can begin." At this stage, the heating control unit 43 also checks whether it has received a setting command from the input operation unit 15 regarding the upper limit of the total power consumption.

If the cooking appliance 1 is set to transmit startup information to the communication terminal 200 or cloud server 300 at step ST2, the communication unit 51 wirelessly transmits the startup information (operating state data OS) at this stage.

In the next step ST3, the central display unit 16M and the audio notification unit 51 also provide a notification and audio guidance to prompt the user to select the heating means.
In the next step ST4, the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display section 16M, and also, usage precautions for the user US are displayed.

Then, it is determined whether an input key other than input key 153M (e.g., 154M) has been operated (ST5). If input key 153M has been operated, step ST5 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step ST6. In other words, the process proceeds to the step of using the "linked cooking mode" KM3.

In step ST6, the permission condition determination unit 54 checks whether the "permission conditions" are met. For example, the operation state of the heat source used in the "combined cooking mode" KM1 is checked.
The permission conditions and the determination results will be explained in detail in FIG.

In step ST5, the first input operation is checked. For example, it is determined whether the left operation unit 15L or the right operation unit 15R was operated before the input key 153M was pressed, and it is also determined whether the "combined cooking mode" KM2 was selected by the central operation unit 15M (by the input key 154M or 155M).

If the input key 153M is operated for the first time within a certain grace period (e.g., 30 seconds) from step ST3, the display for the "linked cooking mode" KM1 will start as described above.

On the other hand, if input key 153M is not operated and another input key (e.g., input key 155M or 154M) is touched, step ST5 is judged as "Yes", and the process proceeds to step ST9 to start cooking in a mode other than the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1. Note that a detailed description of step ST9 is omitted here.

In FIG. 29, steps ST6 and ST7 are operational steps for determining whether or not cooking in the "combined cooking mode" KM1 is permitted.
Step ST6 is a stage for judging "permission condition 1".

Here, "permission condition 1" means
(1) The "peak cut value" that specifies the upper limit of the maximum power that can be used by the cooking device 1 is 5000 W or more.
(2) When there is a power reduction command signal received by the control device 40 via the communication unit 51 from the external cloud server 300 or the communication terminal 200, the peak cut value of the reduction command is 5000 W or more;
If these two conditions are met, the determination in step ST6 is "Yes."

The "permission condition 2" in the next step ST7 is the following four conditions.
(1) In the first heating means HM1, the central heating port 4C is not in heating operation.
(2) Either the second heating means HM2 or the third heating means HM3, or both, are not in heating operation.

(3) In the first heating means HM1, neither the right heating port 4R nor the left heating port 4L is being used for the heating operation (or only one of them is being used for the heating operation). In other words, neither the left IH coil 9L nor the right IH coil 9R is being used for the heating operation.
(4) The "permission condition 4" described later is satisfied. In other words, the latest temperature of the top plate 3 is not so high as to exceed a limit value (for example, 100° C.).

If the above four conditions are met, step ST7 will be judged as "Yes". Then, the process will proceed to step ST10. In other words, the process can proceed to the step of inputting the start of cooking in the coordinated cooking mode KM1. In other words, in step ST10, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed.

If the determination is "No" in steps ST6 and ST7, the process proceeds to step ST8, and the central display unit 16M and the audio notification unit 50 inform the user US that the collaborative cooking mode KM1 cannot be selected.

Here, we will explain the meaning of the above-mentioned "permission condition 1" being specified as "5000 W or more." For simplicity, the following explanation will not specifically mention the power consumption of electrical components other than the heat source, such as the internal cooling fan (not shown) of the main body 2.

The reason why the required demand (power demand amount secured in advance) for implementing the "Cooperative cooking mode" KM1 must be 5000W or more is because the maximum (instantaneous) power required for each heating source during operation in cooperative cooking mode is as follows:

(1) Microwave cooking (second heating means HM2): 1000 W
(2) Oven cooking: 2000 W (upper radiant heat heating means 12a: 1000 W, lower radiant heat heating means 12b: 1000 W)
(3) Range grill cooking: 1500 W (second heating means HM2: 500 W, upper radiant heat heating means 12a: 1000 W)

On the other hand, the maximum power for a cooking menu in the "combined cooking mode" KM1 is 1500W.
Therefore, in the combined cooking mode, the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 may operate simultaneously.

In other words, the maximum power is 3500W, which is the sum of the "1000W" of the second heating means HM2, the "1000W" of the third heating means HM3 (2000W is achieved by alternating current of 1000W each time), and the "1500W" of the first heating means HM1 that performs induction heating.

When the demand (pre-securing power demand) is 5000W:
When the right induction coil 9R is performing 3000W heating (normal heating), the remaining demand is 2000W.
When the "coordinated cooking mode" KM1 is implemented from this state, the remaining demand is 1500W short of the 3500W of power required for coordinated cooking, so the heating power of the right IH coil 9R is reduced to 1500W (from 3000W) and coordinated cooking can be started.

If the demand (pre-securing power demand) is 4000W:
When frying food using the right heating port 4R (requiring a maximum of 1500W), the remaining demand is 2500W.
If coordinated cooking is performed from this state, the remaining demand is 1000 W short of the 3500 W of power required for coordinated cooking, so the heat of the right IH coil must be reduced. However, if the heat is reduced while the automatic control menu is being executed, cooking will not go well, so the heat of the automatic control menu cannot be reduced.
In the end, 4000W is not enough to provide the required heat for the automatic control menu.

As is clear from the above explanation, before starting the "linked cooking mode" KM1, it is necessary to determine (confirm) whether there is a demand (power demand secured in advance) of 5000 W, which is the sum of the power required for linked cooking (3500 W) and the power required for the cooking menu of the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L (1500 W).

Next, we will refer to FIG.
Fig. 30 shows the determination processes in steps ST6 and ST7 in Fig. 29. These determinations are made by the permission condition determination unit 54.
Step ST5 is the stage where the input key 153M is operated.
In the next step STX1, the permission condition determination unit 54 of the control device 40 compares the latest state of the cooking appliance 1 with the permission conditions 1 and 2 described above, and determines whether the state satisfies permission conditions 1 and 2.

In step STX1 in FIG. 30, audio (notification) 1 to audio (notification) 4 indicate the contents notified to the user US by the audio notification unit 50. In other words, this is a specific example of the contents of step ST8 in FIG. 29.

Displays 1 to 4 in FIG. 30 show the contents displayed on the central display unit 16M. Note that Displays 1 to 4 are not displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 that is displayed from step SB2 in FIG. 28 onwards, but are displayed on the central display unit 16M when the first specific screen is not displayed. In other words, they explain the display contents that are displayed at the stage of step ST8 in FIG. 29 (audio notification is also performed).

The first specific screen 16M1 is not displayed unless the prerequisites for transitioning to the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 (permission condition 1 and permission condition 2) are met. Therefore, if it is determined that permission condition 1 or permission condition 2 is not met after the user US sets (selects) various conditions for the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 (e.g., identification information 167), the display and audio notification of step ST8 are followed, and the screen returns to the initial standby screen (step ST4 in FIG. 29). Therefore, the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is not disallowed until the user US has set all of the control conditions, etc., for the heating operation command, and the user is not forced to perform unnecessary input operations.

Next, we will explain FIG.
FIG. 31 illustrates the operation from when the cooking appliance 1 is started up to when cooking recipe data CD for the cooking appliance 1 is acquired from the communication terminal device 200 or an external server (cloud server 300).

In this embodiment 1, the recipe data CD for the coordinated cooking mode KM1 includes, but is not limited to, the number of the coordinated cooking menu (identification information 167), the order of the multiple heating means used, the heating means used in cooking step 1, the heating means used in cooking step 2, if there is a cooking step 3 or later, the heating means used for each of those cooking steps, and if there are default (standard settings) control conditions (heat, heating time, target heating temperature, etc.) for each cooking step, the setting value or range of setting values.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 1, a specific input key (such as 153M) that should be operated first is associated with each cooking step in the recipe data CD. In other words, if a cooking step is made up of two steps, the control device 40 has determined specific input keys to be operated in two stages: a first part M1 (of the recipe data CD) for setting cooking step 1, and a second part M2 for setting cooking step 2.

In FIG. 31, steps SS1 to SS8 are operational steps defined in the integrated control program of the control device 40, and are basically identical to the content defined in the basic operation program described in FIG. 29.

When the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 is pressed first (SS1), the next step SS2 is a step in which the heating control unit 43 determines whether or not there is an abnormality.

Steps SS1 to SS4 are the same as steps ST1 to ST4 described in Figure 29, so duplicate explanations will be omitted.

In step SS5, the cooking appliance 1 performs an operation to ask the user US to confirm in advance whether or not to send a signal to the communication terminal 200 or cloud server 300, which has been registered in advance, to request the provision of cooking recipe data CD. A "confirmation screen" is displayed on the central display unit 16M, and a notification is also given by the audio notification unit 50. This "confirmation screen" is a type of the standby initial screen 16MH, which will be described later.

If the user US sets in advance using the function setting key 151KP of the input operation unit 15 to automatically execute the external connection in step SS5, it will be performed automatically at a specified timing.

In other words, as described in FIG. 1, pairing between the smartphone 200 and the cooking appliance 1 can be automatically performed, and wireless communication 330 can be established between the smartphone 200 and the cooking appliance 1.

The external connection in step SS5 involves repeatedly transmitting and receiving data alternately several times between the cooking appliance 1 and an external communication device (such as the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300).
For example, when signal 1 is first transmitted from cooking appliance 1, communication terminal 200 receives signal 1 and transmits signal 2. In response, cooking appliance 1 checks its internal status (e.g., the set value of total power consumption, etc.), and if there are no problems, transmits standby signal 2 to proceed to the next stage. This is the process.

Finally, reception of the necessary "setting information" (including recipe data CD) from the external communication device (communication terminal 200, etc.) is completed. In other words, on the cooking appliance 1 side, after receiving a signal once, it performs several alternating communications, such as returning another signal immediately thereafter, and finally completes reception of the necessary "setting information". In this series of flows, there is a step that asks the user US to decide whether or not to receive the recipe data CD. In other words, in this cooking appliance 1, there is a step where the user US can clearly and in advance recognize that the recipe data CD will be received, and therefore it is prevented from proceeding to the execution stage of the recipe data CD without the user US knowing. These details will be explained later.

On the other hand, as part of facilitating the above-mentioned external connection, in step SS6, a predetermined icon, information, etc. is displayed on the central display section 16M to inform the user US that the recipe data CD can be acquired. An example of this is shown on the display screen 2C in FIG. 41. The display to inform the user US is displayed concisely, for example, in text, as shown in the acquisition operation support information 60P on the display screen 2C in FIG. 41.

If in step SS6 the user does not consent to connection to the external device (such as the communication terminal 200), then as shown in step SS9, a non-reception message such as "receipt of recipe data CD is not currently being received" is sent to the registered external device (the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300). In this way, the user US can also set up to refuse reception.

FIG. 31 shows the process of acquiring only one cooking step from the recipe data CD.
When there are two or more cooking steps, such as in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the above-mentioned processing of steps SS5 to SS8 must be performed in the same manner for each of cooking step 1 and cooking step 2.

In other words, in the case of recipe data CD with two cooking steps, in the first part M1 (of recipe data CD) for setting cooking step 1, a specific input key input operation is required to agree to the acquisition of the first part M1. Incidentally, as described above, if the cooking menu for the linked cooking mode KM1 is "hamburger steak," the specific input key to be operated to acquire the first part M1 is 152R of the right operation unit 15R or 152L of the left operation unit 15L.

On the other hand, if the user agrees to connect to the external device and issues an instruction to acquire data in step SS6, the data acquisition unit 53 of the cooking appliance 1 acquires the recipe data CD from the external device via the communication unit 51. The acquired recipe data CD is stored in a specified "temporary storage unit" (not shown) in the recipe data storage unit 42 (step SS7).

In the next step SS8, the contents of the recipe data CD acquired from the external device, particularly the identification information 167, are displayed on the central display unit 16M. In addition, the audio notification unit 50 notifies the user of the fact that the data has been received, for example, by saying, "A hamburger recipe has been received."

In the first embodiment, the control device 40 is programmed to permit the data acquisition unit 53 to acquire the recipe data CD if the input key 180, which is the selection unit for the voice input mode 2, is operated during the standby period in which the control device 40 waits for a command to start the heating operation after the main power switch 20 is turned on and power supply is started.

That is, if the user US presses the input key 180 at the stage of step SS6, the step is judged as "Yes" and acquisition of the recipe data CD is permitted. However, several conditions must be satisfied before the recipe data CD is actually acquired by the control device 40. This will be described in detail later.
If there are two or more cooking steps, the process returns to step SS5 after step SS8. In order to agree to the acquisition of the second part M2 (of the recipe data CD) for setting the cooking step 2, a specific input key input operation is required in step SS6. For example, as described above, if the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is "hamburger steak," the only specific input key to be operated in order to acquire the second part M2 is 153M.

Next, reference will be made to Figures 32 to 38.
Fig. 32 is a flow chart showing the main input steps for the three cooking modes after the main power is turned on in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 33 is a flow chart 1 showing the input steps after the main power is turned on in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 34 is a flow chart 1 showing the input steps in the case of the linked cooking mode in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 35 is a flow chart 1 showing the input steps in the case of the combined cooking mode in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 36 is a flow chart 1 showing the input steps in the case of the single cooking mode in the cooking appliance 1.
Fig. 37 is a flow chart showing the main input process when cooking by acquiring recipe data for the three cooking modes after the main power is turned on in the cooking appliance. Fig. 38 is a flow chart 1 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data CD from the outside in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 39 is a flow chart 2 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data CD from the outside in the cooking appliance 1.

32 to 36 show the case of the above-mentioned "voice input mode 1A." That is, in one input operation section 15 (for example, central operation section 15M), the input key 154M as the "combined key" is provided among the multiple input keys.
Therefore, when the "voice input mode 1A" is changed by the input key 154M, the input functions of the input keys (156M, 158M, etc.) other than the input key (combined key) 154M are disabled from that point on. The voice input mode can also be set by the input key 153M in the same way as the input key 154M.

Figures 32 to 36 explain a case where a user US operates the input operation unit 15 of the cooking appliance 1 to perform cooking, rather than a case where recipe data CD is acquired from an external source (such as a communication terminal 200) and cooking is performed.

Referring to Figure 32 .
In FIG. 32, the blank reference characters (such as 153M) indicate input keys 153M and the like to be operated in the following steps S2 to S15.
In FIG. 32, the main input keys are also displayed in white letters.
The range enclosed by the dashed line indicates the range in which voice input is possible in "voice input mode 1" which is switched to by "long pressing" the input keys (multi-purpose keys) 153M, 154M, etc.

Steps S2 to S6 show the operation steps in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
Steps S7 to S11 show the operation steps in the combined cooking mode KM2.
Steps S12 to S15 show the operation steps in the single cooking mode KM3 using the first heating means HM1.

When the main power switch 20 is turned on, the standby initial screen 16MH is first displayed on the central display section 16M (step S1).
Next, when the input key 153M is touched, the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected (step S2), and the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (step S3).

At this stage, as described in Figures 19 to 22, the first specific screen 16M1 simultaneously displays at least three cooking menus on one screen. Therefore, each time the input key 154M or 155M is touched, a different cooking menu can be displayed in turn (step S4).

In step S5, the control conditions for one linked cooking menu can be selected using input keys 156M and 157M. If input of control conditions is not required, input key 151M can be pressed. In this way, the process can proceed to cooking step 1 of linked cooking mode KM1 (step S6).

As is clear from FIG. 32, if the input key (combined key) 154M is "pressed and held" in step S4, the control device 40 switches to a voice-based "input standby state," allowing the range of conditions from step S4 to S5 to be input by voice. For example, the cooking menu and control conditions can be input as a set by the user US speaking, such as "hamburger steak, preheat 180°C." Note that only the control conditions other than the food to be cooked may be input by voice, such as "heat 7 hours 10 minutes." Note that the voice input mode can also be set by pressing and holding the input key 153M in step S2.

Continuing with the description of FIG.
In step S2, if the input key 154M or 155M is touched without touching the input key 153M, the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected (step S7), and the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed (step S8).
Each time the input key 154M or 155M is touched, a different control menu (see FIG. 16) can be displayed in sequence (step S9).

In step S9, if one of the control menus (e.g., "warm") displayed on the second specific screen 16M2 is satisfactory, the user can then press input key 156M or 157M to select the control conditions (microwave output, heating time, etc.) (step S10).

In step S10, if the control conditions for one composite cooking mode are satisfactory, pressing input key 151M will allow transition to cooking step 1 of composite cooking mode KM2 (step S11).

As is clear from FIG. 32, if the input key (combined key) 154M is "pressed and held" at step S7, the control device 40 switches to a voice "input standby state," so that the range of conditions from step S9 to S10 can be input by voice. For example, the control menu (in this case, "heat") and the control conditions can be input as a set by the user US speaking, such as "warm 500 W." Note that only the control conditions may be input by voice, such as "500 W, time 10 minutes."

Continuing with the description of FIG.
If the input key 153M is not touched in step S2, and neither of the input keys 154M nor 155M is touched in step S7, but either the input key 153L or 153R of the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L is touched, the single cooking mode KM3 using the first heating means HM1 is selected (step S12), and the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed on the right display unit 16R or the left display unit 16L (step S13).

Each time the input key 152L or 152R is touched, a different control menu (see FIG. 42) can be displayed in turn on the left display unit 16L or the right display unit 16R (step S14).

In step S14, if one of the control menus (see FIG. 41) displayed on the third specific screen 16M3 is satisfactory, the user can then press input key 154L or 155L (in the case of the left operation unit 15L) or input key 154R or 155R (in the case of the right operation unit 15R) to select the control conditions (induction heating power, heating time, etc.) (step S15).

In step S15, if the control conditions for one single cooking mode KM3 are satisfactory, induction heating may be started automatically within a certain period of time (10 seconds) without pressing an input key. However, in this embodiment, induction heating (step S16) is not started unless either the input key (e.g., input key 153L) on the left operation unit 15L or the right operation unit 15R is actually touched.

As is clear from FIG. 32, if the input key (combined key) 153L or 153R is "pressed and held" at step S12, the control device 40 switches to a voice "input standby state," so that the range of conditions from step S14 to S15 can be input by voice. For example, the control menu (in this case, "boil water") and the control conditions can be input as a set by the user US speaking, such as "boil water, heat level 6." Note that only the control conditions may be input by voice.

In addition, the control conditions can be set by operating input keys 154L, 155L, etc. (step S15). Furthermore, the timer setting time can be set using input keys 151R and 151L. These can also be input by voice after switching to voice input mode 1. For example, you can say something like "heat 6 timer 10 minutes."

As is clear from FIG. 32, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has
The input operation unit 15 has a first input operation unit (a right operation unit 15R and a left operation unit 15L) for the first heating means HM1 and a second input operation unit (a central operation unit 15M) for the second heating means,
The first input operation unit 15L and the second input operation unit 15M each have an input key A (153L, 153R) arranged thereon, and an input key B (153M, 154M) arranged thereon,
The control device 40 is characterized in that it validates the touch input of either the input key A (153L, 153R) or the input key B (153M, 154M), whichever occurs first, and does not start the input process using the other input key until input of the control conditions (heat, heating time, etc.) for the heating cooking mode (coordinated cooking mode KM1, combined cooking mode KM2, single cooking mode KM3) or control mode (the "warm" mode, etc.) is completed and heating cooking is started.

In other words, for the three heating cooking modes (linked cooking mode KM1, combined cooking mode KM2, and single cooking mode KM3), only one of the input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R that is touched first is accepted by the control device 40, and the other input keys are placed in a state where no input command is accepted.

Therefore, for example, if input key 154M is touched and then pressed and held down to switch to voice input mode, input from other input keys will be disabled (however, input functions of input keys 151M and 152M will be maintained).

Therefore, when the voice input mode is started by either the input key A (153L, 153R) or the input key B (153M, 154M), it becomes impossible to select other cooking modes or control modes, and setting conditions are not inadvertently input by voice input.

In addition, if the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is entered using one input key (e.g., 154M) in the voice input mode, the voice input mode that had been in effect up until that point is cancelled when input key 151M is pressed to start cooking. Therefore, there is no confusion when the user US subsequently performs a touch operation to select another cooking method. In addition, there is no need to cancel the voice input mode.

Next, we will explain Figure 33.
In FIG. 33, outlined reference characters (eg, 153M) indicate the input keys (eg, 153M) operated in steps SM3, SM4 and SM8.
In Fig. 33, step SM1 performs processing equivalent to the processing of steps ST2 and ST3 in Fig. 29. That is, the central display unit 16M is started and the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed. An abnormality determination is performed, and if no abnormality is found, a message is displayed saying "Since there is no abnormality, cooking can be started." Then, the standby initial screen 16MH and the audio notification unit 51 provide a notification and audio guidance to prompt the user to select a heating means.

In the next step SM2, the input functions of all input operation units 15M, 15L, and 15R are enabled to prepare for touch input operation of each input key (153M, 154M, 153L, 154R, etc.). In addition, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 11) possessed by the input operation unit 15 starts measuring the elapsed time. Note that while FIG. 11 shows an example of the central operation unit 15M, the right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L also have the same configuration as the central operation unit 15M. Therefore, they have a configuration equivalent to the time measurement unit 15T.

In the next step SM3, the coordinated cooking mode KM1 is selected. In step SM4, the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected. In step SM8, the single cooking mode KM3 using the first heating means HM1 is selected.

First, in step SM3, it is determined whether or not the input key 153M has been touched, and if it has been operated, the process proceeds to the route A1 shown in FIG. 33 and FIG.
If there is no touch operation in step SM3, the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM4. If either input key 154M or 155M is touched in step SM4, the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the route B1 shown in Fig. 33 and Fig. 35.

If there is no touch operation in step SM4, the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM8. If either input key 153L or 153R is touched in step SM8, the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the route C1 shown in Figures 33 and 36.

In step SM8 shown in FIG. 33, if no touch operation has been performed, the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM5. In this step SM5, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 11) determines whether a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SM3.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SM5 that the preset time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM6. Then, a process to automatically shut off the main power supply (hereinafter referred to as "automatic shutoff process 1") is performed. Then, the series of operations ends (SM7). In this way, if no input operation is performed, the main power switch 20 will automatically open when the time limit (e.g., 30 minutes) is exceeded.

Next, we will explain Figure 34.
FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the operation after the input key 153M is touched in step SM3 shown in FIG.
When the input key 153M is touched, if the touch operation is a "long press", it is determined by the input mode determination section 15C (see FIG. 11) of the central operation section 15M.

Then, the determination in step SM40 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM41. On the other hand, if it is a "short press", the determination becomes "No", and the process proceeds to step SM50.
Step SM41 is a step for determining whether or not the above-mentioned "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are satisfied. If these permission conditions are not satisfied, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM47). The denial process is the process of step ST8 described in FIG. 29.

As described above, for example, when the first portion M1 of cooking step 1 of recipe data CD for one cooking menu (e.g., hamburger steak) is received, the cooking device 1 can identify the identification information 167 contained in the first portion M1, and therefore can determine the heating means to be used in cooking step 1 and cooking step 2, the level of maximum power consumption required, etc. This allows an accurate determination to be made as to whether the aforementioned "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are met.

If the determination in step SM41 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM42.
From step SM42, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed.
The state at the time when this first specific screen 16M1 is displayed is shown, for example, in Fig. 20. After that, the input key 154M or 155M is further touched (or may be touched multiple times) to select a specific cooking menu (e.g., hamburger).

In FIG. 34, in step SM43, the timer 15T (see FIG. 11) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the pre-set time limit TY has been exceeded. After this step SM43, if voice input is made from the user US via the voice signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 10), step SM44 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM45.

By the way, at the stage of step SM43, the control device 40 has already switched to "voice input mode 1A". Therefore, if the input key 155M is touch-inputted after step SM43, the input of the input key 155M will not be accepted by the control device 40 due to the "voice input mode 1A". In other words, unless there is voice input, step SM44 will not become "Yes", and it is not possible to proceed to step SM46 for input completion. Note that if "voice input mode 1B" is set, touch input can continue as described above. Also, exceptionally, the voice input control program may be modified so that if the input key 154M is touch-inputted again (in this case, "short press"), the "voice input mode" is released.

In this way, in this embodiment 1, immediately after the input key 154M is "pressed and held," the mode switches to voice input mode 1A, and voice input mode 1A continues automatically thereafter. However, voice input mode 1A is released when the heating operation starts (i.e., released when the input key 151M is touched).

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM46. In step SM46, a determination is made as to whether input has been completed, and if step SM46 returns a "Yes" result, the process goes into a standby state waiting for input from input key 151M (A21).

On the other hand, if steps SM44 and SM46 are "No", the process returns to step SM44 and waits for voice input from the user US.
Also, if it is determined in step SM45 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM45 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM48 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutoff processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 33, and refers to returning the display from the first specific screen 16M1 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying that the input has not been made properly, or notifying by voice from the voice notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SM5, and may proceed to step SM6 for automatic shutoff processing.

Steps SM50 and after will now be described with reference to FIG.
Step SM50 is a step for determining whether or not the above-mentioned "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are satisfied. If "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are not satisfied, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM56). The denial process is the process of step ST8 described in FIG. 29.

If the determination in step SM50 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM51.
From step SM51, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed.
The state at the time when this first specific screen 16M1 is displayed is shown, for example, in Fig. 20. After that, the input key 154M or 155M is further touched (or may be touched multiple times) to select a specific cooking menu (e.g., hamburger).

In FIG. 34, in step SM52, the timer 15T (see FIG. 11) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the pre-set time limit TY has been exceeded. After this step SM52, if the user US performs a touch input, for example, using the input keys 156M or 157M, via the audio signal receiver 56 (see FIG. 10), step SM53 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM54.

By the way, at the stage of step SM53, the control device 40 has already switched to touch input mode. Therefore, if the input key 155M is touch-inputted after step SM52, the input of the input key 155M is accepted by the control device 40 due to the touch input mode. In other words, as long as it is a touch input, step SM53 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM46 where input is complete. However, as an exception, if the input key 154 is touch-inputted again (in this case, "long press"), the touch input mode may be released and changed back to "voice input mode 1".

In this way, in this embodiment 1, the touch input mode is maintained unless the input key 154M is "pressed and held," and the touch input mode continues automatically thereafter. This touch input mode is not automatically released even when the heating operation is started, so the default touch input mode is maintained thereafter.

If the time elapsed since step SM52 has not exceeded the time limit TY, the process proceeds to step SM55. Then, a determination is made as to whether input has been completed. If the determination in step SM55 is "Yes", the process goes into a standby state waiting for input from the input key 151M (A22).

On the other hand, if steps SM53 and SM55 are "No", the process returns to step SM53 and waits for a touch input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM54 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM54 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM57 for error processing. The error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutoff processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 33, and refers to returning the display from the first specific screen 16M1 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying a message that the input has not been made properly, or notifying the user by voice from the voice notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SM5, and may proceed to step SM6 for automatic shutoff processing.

Next, we will explain Figure 35.
FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the operation after either the input key 154M or 155M is touched in step SM4 shown in FIG.
When the input key 154M is touched, if the touch operation is a "long press", it is determined by the input mode determination section 15C (see FIG. 11) of the central operation section 15M.

Then, the determination in step SM60 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM61. On the other hand, if it is a "short press", the determination becomes "No", and the process proceeds to step SM70.
Step SM61 is a step for determining whether or not "permission condition 3" is satisfied.
The "permission condition 3" here is different from the permission condition 1 and permission condition 2 of the combined cooking mode (see Figs. 29 and 30). The "permission condition 3" in the combined cooking mode specifies that the latest temperature of the heating chamber 6 checked by the temperature sensor group 30 is, for example, 80°C or less. If the result measured by the temperature sensor group 30 is, for example, 100°C, this is because it exceeds the temperature detection range (90°C or less) of the "warm" control menu.

If "permission condition 3" is not met, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM67). Note that the denial process is a process in which a message such as "The heating chamber is too hot to cook" is displayed on the initial standby screen 16MH, or a similar notification is given by the audio notification unit 50. Note that when cooking is performed in the heating chamber 6 using the third heating means HM3, the heating chamber 6 may remain hot for a while due to residual heat even after the cooking is completed.

If the determination in step SM61 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM62.
From step SM62 onwards, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed.
The state at the time when the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed is shown, for example, in Fig. 16. After that, the input key 154M or 155M is further touched (or may be touched multiple times) to select a specific control menu (e.g., warm).

In FIG. 35, in step SM63, the timer 15T (see FIG. 11) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the pre-set time limit TY has been exceeded. After this step SM63, if voice input is made from the user US via the voice signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 10), step SM64 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM65.

By the way, at the stage of step SM63, the control device 40 has already switched to voice input mode 1. Therefore, if the input key 155M is touch-inputted after this step SM63, the input of the input key 155M is not accepted by the control device 40 due to the voice input mode (because it is set to the "voice input mode 1A"). In other words, unless there is voice input, step SM64 does not become "Yes", and it is not possible to proceed to step SM66 for input completion. Exceptionally, if the input key 154M is touch-inputted again (in this case, "short press"), the "voice input mode 1" may be changed to be released. Also, if it is set to "voice input mode 1B", the touch input of the input key 155M is accepted by the control device 40.

In this way, in this embodiment 1, immediately after "long pressing" input key 154M, the mode switches to voice input mode 1, but voice input mode 1 is automatically released when a command to start cooking is given (by touching input key 151M).

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM66. In step SM65, a determination is made as to whether input has been completed, and if step SM66 returns a "Yes" result, the process goes into a standby state waiting for input from input key 151M (B21).

On the other hand, if steps SM64 and SM66 are "No", the process returns to step SM64 and waits for voice input from the user US.
Also, if it is determined in step SM65 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM65 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM68 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutoff processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 33, and refers to returning the display from the second specific screen 16M2 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying that the input has not been made properly, or notifying by voice from the voice notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SM5, and may proceed to step SM6 for automatic shutoff processing.

Next, steps SM70 and after will be described with reference to FIG.
Step SM70 is a step for determining whether the above-mentioned "permission condition 3" is satisfied. If permission condition 3 is not satisfied, a denial process is carried out at this stage (step SM76). The "denial process" in this case is the same as the denial process of step SM67.

If the determination in step SM70 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM71.
In step SM71, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed.
The state at the time when the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed is shown, for example, in Fig. 16. After that, the input key 154M or 155M is further touched (or may be touched multiple times) to select a specific control menu (e.g., warm).
At this stage, if the input key 154M is "pressed and held", the mode switches to voice input mode 1, and the process proceeds to step SM63. However, if the input key 154M is not "pressed and held" but the input key 155M is operated for input or the input key 154 is "shortly pressed", the "touch input mode" is maintained, and the process proceeds to step SM72.

In this way, in this embodiment 1, when selecting a composite cooking mode or a control menu (e.g., warming), immediately after "long pressing" the input key 154M, the mode switches to voice input mode 1, but that voice input mode 1 does not continue automatically thereafter, but is released when the heating operation starts. Note that if the same input key 154M is "short pressed," the voice input mode 1 may be released at this point.

In FIG. 35, in step SM72, the timer 15T (see FIG. 11) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the pre-set time limit TY has been exceeded. After this step SM72, if the user US performs a touch input, for example, using the input keys 156M or 157M, via the audio signal receiver 56 (see FIG. 10), step SM73 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM74.

By the way, at the stage of step SM72, the control device 40 has already switched to touch input mode. Therefore, if the input key 155M is touch-inputted after step SM72, the input of the input key 155M is accepted by the control device 40 due to the touch input mode. In other words, as long as it is a touch input, step SM73 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM75 where the input is complete. However, as an exception, if the input key 154M is touch-inputted again (in this case, "long press"), the touch input mode may be released and changed back to "voice input mode 1".

In this way, in this embodiment 1, the touch input mode is maintained unless the input key 154M is "pressed and held," and the touch input mode continues automatically thereafter. The touch input mode is not automatically released when the heating operation starts. Therefore, the normal touch input mode is maintained thereafter.

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM75. Then, a determination is made as to whether input has been completed. If the determination in step SM75 is "Yes", the process goes into a standby state waiting for input from the input key 151M (B22).

On the other hand, if the results of steps SM73 and SM75 are "No", the process returns to step SM73 and waits for a touch input from the user US.
Also, if it is determined in step SM74 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM74 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM77 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutoff processing 1 shown in step SM6 of Fig. 33, and refers to returning the display from the second specific screen 16M2 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying that the input has not been made properly, or notifying by voice from the voice notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process may proceed to step SM5 and then to step SM6 for automatic shutoff processing.

Next, we will refer to FIG.
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the operation following the touch operation of either the input key 153L or 153R in step SM8 of FIG.
In order to simplify the following explanation, the following explanation will be limited to the case where the left operation unit 15L is operated.

If the touch operation of the input key 153L is a "long press", it is determined by the input mode determination unit 15C (see FIG. 11) of the left operation unit 15L. Note that FIG. 11 shows an example of the central operation unit 15M, but the left operation unit 15L has a similar configuration to that shown in FIG. 11.

Then, the determination in step SM80 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM81. On the other hand, if it is a "short press", the determination becomes "No", and the process proceeds to step SM90.
Step SM81 is a step for determining whether or not "permission condition 4" is satisfied.
The "permission condition 4" here is different from the permission conditions 1 and 2 of the coordinated cooking mode (see Figs. 29 and 30) and the above-mentioned "permission condition 3.""Permission condition 4" in the single cooking mode KM3 is, for example, when the latest temperature of the top plate 3 is checked by the temperature sensor group 30 and is a high temperature, for example, exceeding 100°C. This is because when the temperature of the object to be heated is detected non-contact to perform induction heating control, a high temperature from the start of the heating operation can hinder accurate temperature control and induction heating control.

If "permission condition 4" is not met, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM87). The denial process is a process in which the initial standby screen 16MH is displayed on the left display unit 16L and a message such as "The top plate is too hot to cook" is displayed, or a similar message is issued by the audio notification unit 50. Note that when induction heating cooking is performed, the top plate 3 may remain hot for a while even after cooking is completed.

If the determination in step SM81 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM82.
From step SM82 onwards, the third special screen 16L3 (16R3) is displayed.
An example of the third specific screen 16L3 is shown in, for example, FIG. 42. The third specific screen 16R3 in FIG. 42 is an example when displayed on the left display unit 16L. When the right operation unit 15R is operated, the third specific screen 16L3 displayed on the right display unit 16R is basically the same as the screen shown in FIG. 42. After that, in order to select a specific control menu (e.g., preheating), input can be made by voice input mode. Note that the central operation unit 15M can select the single cooking mode KM3 in which the central heating port 4C is selected, and in that case, the central display unit 16M also displays a third specific screen M3 in the same form as the third specific screen 16L3 shown in FIG. 42.

At this stage, the mode has already been switched to "voice input mode 1", so in the next step SM83, the timer 15T (see FIG. 11) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the preset time limit TY has been exceeded. If, after step SM83, voice input is made by the user US via the voice signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 10), step SM84 becomes "Yes", and the program proceeds to the next step SM85.
For example, if the user US utters “preheat 200° C.”, the voice signal receiving unit 56 converts this voice input into an electrical signal and inputs it to the voice signal analyzing unit 58 .

In step SM85, it is determined whether the time limit TY has been exceeded, and if not, the process proceeds to step SM86.
In step SM86, it is determined whether the input has been completed, and if the determination in step SM86 is "Yes", the induction heating operation is automatically started within a certain time (for example, 10 seconds). In other words, in the first heating means HM1 using the left operation unit 16L (in the case of the single cooking mode HM1), no special input key operation is required to start heating, and the heating operation is directly started (C21). Note that the actual induction heating operation may be started when the input key 152L or 152R different from the input key (153L or 153R) operated in step SM8 (see FIG. 33) is touched.

On the other hand, if steps SM84 and SM86 are "No", the process returns to step SM84 and waits for voice input from the user US.
Also, if it is determined in step SM85 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM85 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM88 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutoff processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 33, and refers to returning the display from the third specific screen 16L3 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying a message that the input has not been made properly, or notifying the user by voice from the voice notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SM5, and may proceed to step SM6 for automatic shutoff processing.

Next, steps SM90 and after will be described with reference to FIG.
Step SM90 is a step for determining whether or not the above-mentioned "permission condition 4" is satisfied. If permission condition 4 is not satisfied, a denial process is carried out at this stage (step SM96). The "denial process" in this case is the same as the denial process of step SM87.

If the determination in step SM90 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM91.
From step SM91 onwards, the third special screen 1616L3 (16R3) is displayed in place of the standby initial screen 16MH.
An example of the third specific screen 16L3 is shown in Fig. 42. Fig. 36 shows an example of the screen displayed on the left display unit 16L, and the third specific screen 16L3 on the right display unit 16R has basically the same form. After that, the input keys 154L, 155L, 151L, etc. are touched (or may be touched multiple times) to select a specific control menu (e.g., preheating). The central operation unit 15M can be used to select the single cooking mode KM3 in which the central heating port 4C is selected. In this case, the central display unit 16M also displays a third specific screen M3 in the same form as the third specific screen 16L3 shown in Fig. 42.

In FIG. 36, in step SM92, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 11) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the pre-set time limit TY has been exceeded.

At this stage, the "touch input mode" is in effect, so in the next step SM93, the timer 15T (see FIG. 11) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the pre-set time limit TY has been exceeded.

The input keys 154L, 155L, 151L, etc. may be touched to sequentially input the control menu (e.g., preheat) and the control conditions such as the preheat temperature (touching may be performed multiple times). In this way, when a touch input is performed by the user US, step SM93 becomes "Yes", and if the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds from step SM94 to the next step SM95.
For example, if the user US inputs the conditions "preheat" and "200° C." sequentially by touch input, the left operation section 15L converts this input into an electrical signal and inputs it to the input signal analysis section 52 (see FIG. 10).

Note that if you press and hold input keys 154L or 155R, these input keys do not have the function of switching to voice input mode 1, so voice input is not possible.

In this way, in this embodiment 1, to select the single cooking mode HM1 of the first heating means HM1 or to select the heating section (right heating section 4R, left heating section 4L) (using input keys 153R and 153L), the mode switches to voice input mode 1 immediately after "long pressing" input key 153R or 153L (step SM8 in FIG. 33), but voice input mode 1 continues automatically thereafter.

In other words, once you press and hold the input key 153L or 153R, voice input mode 1 will be maintained regardless of any subsequent operation of that voice input key (if it is set to the above-mentioned "voice input mode 1B"). Even if you press and hold the input key 153L (153R) again (twice in succession), voice input mode 1 will remain.

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded in the determination of step SM94, the process proceeds to step SM95. Then, a determination is made as to whether the input has been completed. If the determination of step SM95 is "Yes", the induction heating operation will automatically start within a certain period of time (e.g., 10 seconds). In other words, in the first heating means HM1 using the left operation unit 16L (in the case of single cooking mode HM1), no special input key operation is required to start heating, and the process proceeds directly to the heating operation (C22). Note that the process may be modified so that the actual induction heating operation can be started when an input key 152L or 152R different from the one operated in step SM8 (see FIG. 33) is touched.

On the other hand, if steps SM93 and SM95 are "No", the process returns to step SM93 and waits for a touch input from the user US.
Also, if it is determined in step SM94 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM94 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM97 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutoff processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 33, and refers to returning the display of the third specific screen 16M3 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying a message that the input has not been made properly, or notifying the user by voice from the voice notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SM5, and may proceed to step SM6 for automatic shutoff processing.

Next, we will explain Figure 37.
Fig. 37 shows the operation of the cooking appliance 1 when recipe data CD is acquired from the outside (such as the communication terminal 200) and cooking is performed. Fig. 37 shows the operation when the central operation unit 15M is operated. This is different from the explanatory diagram including the left and right operation units 15L and 15R as shown in Fig. 32.
The range indicated by the dashed frame indicates the range that can be input by voice in “voice input mode 1” that can be set by “long pressing” input key (dual-purpose key) 153M, and in “voice input mode 2” that can be selected by input key 180.

The same parts as those in FIG. 32 will be given the same reference numerals and duplicated explanations may be omitted.
Steps S2A to S6 show the operation steps in the coordinated cooking mode KM1.
Steps S7A to S11 show the operation steps in the combined cooking mode KM2.
Steps S12A to S15 show the operation steps in the single cooking mode KM3 using the first heating means HM1, i.e., the central heating port 4 C. Note that there is also cooking in which the microwave oscillator (magnetron) 11 and the radiant heat heating means 12 are used separately, but a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the main power switch 20 is turned on, the standby initial screen 16MH is first displayed on the central display section 16M (step S1).
Step S1A collectively indicates a series of processes for acquiring recipe data CD from an external communication terminal 200, a cloud server 300, or the like.

Steps S2A, S7A, and S12A perform the determination processes corresponding to steps S2, S7, and S12 in FIG. 32, respectively, but are slightly different from FIG.
In steps S2, S7, and S12 in FIG. 32, input from the input operation unit 15 is received and a decision is made as to whether the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the composite cooking mode KM2, or the like is to be selected.
In contrast, in step S1A in Fig. 37, the data acquisition unit 53 analyzes the "preview information 1" that is first received, and at least identifies the identification information of the cooking menu. At this point, it is not necessary to identify one of the three cooking modes. For example, when the first portion M1 of the cooking step 1 of the recipe data CD for the cooking menu "hamburger steak" is received, the identification information 167 is recognized.

In step S1A, the identification information is further determined and the specific input key that needs to be operated to obtain data for cooking step 1 is identified as 153M. Then, a display is displayed to prompt the user to operate this specific input key 153. At the time of step S1, the initial standby screen 16MH is displayed, but upon receiving advance notice information 1 from the outside, the display switches to a receiving operation display screen 16MM (not shown) which indicates that a response operation to receive a recipe is in progress.

Furthermore, when the specific input key 153 is operated, a predetermined selection information A (202) is transmitted to the outside, and the communication terminal 200 receives the selection information A and transmits the data of the first part M1 for setting cooking process 1, and receives the data in step S1A.

In steps S2A, S7A, and S12A, the data of the first portion M1 received in step S1A is analyzed, and one of the three cooking modes is determined. In this embodiment 1, when the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected and the cooking menu is "hamburger", the specific input key is only 153M of the central operation unit 15M. In step S1A, after the advance notice information 1 is received from the external communication terminal 200, cloud server 300, etc., a process is performed in advance to operate the appropriate specific input key corresponding to the advance notice information 1. The details of this process are described in detail in FIG. 65, etc.

As described above, by analyzing the operation of the input operation unit 15 in step S1A by the input signal analysis unit 52, and by analyzing the contents of the warning signal A of one recipe data CD by the data acquisition unit 53, it is possible to reliably distinguish between the four items of cooking process (cooking process 1, cooking process 2, etc.), cooking mode, cooking item (cooking menu), and specific input key. The information on the cooking mode identified as a result of this distinction (identification) is used in the following steps S2A, S7A, and S12A in sequence.

In step S2A, it is determined whether the cooking mode is the cooperative cooking mode KM1. If it is determined that the cooking mode is the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the process proceeds to step S3.
In step S3, the display of the first specific screen 16M1 is started, and one cooking menu acquired from the outside and the control conditions are displayed. By touching the input key 154M or 155M, the control conditions (heat power, target heating temperature, etc.) for that cooking menu can be changed, and the change result can be displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step S5).

FIG. 37 shows a case where the mode is switched to the voice input mode before step S5.
As explained in Fig. 32, in the touch input mode, the control conditions (heating power, target heating temperature, etc.) can be changed by touching the input key 154M or 155M. In Fig. 37, if a "long press" is performed when operating the specific input key 153M in step S1A, the mode is switched to voice input mode from that point on, so that the desired control conditions can be input by voice (step S20). In other words, touching the input key 154M or 155M is not required.

In step S5, if the control conditions for one linked cooking menu (cooking name: hamburger) are acceptable, the user can press input key 151M. In this way, the user can move to cooking step 1 of linked cooking mode KM1 (step S6).

As described above, if the input key (combined key) 153M is "pressed and held" in step S1A, the control device 40 switches to a voice-based "input standby state," and in step S20, the control conditions can be input by voice within a certain range. For example, the cooking menu and control conditions can be input as a set by the user US speaking, such as "Hamburg steak, preheat 180°C." Note that only the control conditions other than the food to be cooked may be input by voice, such as "heat 7 hours 10 minutes." Note that, since the cooking menu (e.g., "hamburg steak") is already known at the stage when the advance notice information 1 or recipe data CD is acquired, only the control conditions other than the food to be cooked may be input by voice, as described above.

Continuing with the description, FIG.
If it is determined in step S2A that the cooking mode is not the coordinated cooking mode KM1, the process proceeds to step S7A. If it is determined in step S7A that the cooking menu is the composite cooking mode KM2, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed on the central display unit 16M (step S8). In step S8, the display of the second specific screen 16M2 is started, and one cooking menu acquired from the outside and the control conditions are displayed.
That is, the second specific screen 16M2 displays only one cooking menu targeted by the recipe data CD. This is a difference from step S8 in FIG.
In the touch input mode, in step S10, each time the input key 154M or 155M is touched, a result reflecting a different control condition can be successively displayed on the second specific screen.

However, in FIG. 37, if the specific input key (multi-purpose key) 153M is "pressed and held" in step S1A, the control device 40 switches to a voice-based "input standby state," and in step S21, the control conditions can be input in voice input mode.

In step S10, if the control conditions for one (composite cooking mode) cooking menu are satisfactory, pressing input key 151M will allow transition to cooking step 1 of composite cooking mode KM2 (step S11).

In this way, since the state can be switched to an "input standby state" by voice at step S1A, in step S21, control conditions can be input by voice within a certain range. For example, a control condition can be input by the user US speaking, such as "500 W." Note that multiple control conditions can be input by voice at the same time, such as "500 W 10 minutes."

Continuing with the description, FIG.
If it is determined in step S7A that the recipe data CD is not the combined cooking mode KM2, the process proceeds to step S12A. If it is determined in step S12A that the recipe data CD is the recipe data CD for the single cooking mode using the heating chamber 6 or the central heating port 4C, the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed on the central display unit 16M (step S13). That is, in step S13, the display of the third specific screen 16M1 is started, and the identification information and the control conditions of one cooking menu acquired from the outside are displayed. Note that, since the specific input key 153M is touched in step S1A, only the cooking of the single cooking mode KM3 that can be executed by the central operation unit 15M can be selected. That is, the cooking menu selected by the left and right operation units 15L and 15R cannot be selected in steps S12A and after.

The control conditions (heat, heating time, etc.) for the cooking menu displayed on the third specific screen 16M3 can be selected by pressing input key 154M or 155M (step S22).

However, in FIG. 37, if the input key 153M is "pressed and held" at step S1A, the control device 40 switches to a voice "input standby state", so that at step S22, the control conditions can be input in voice input mode.
That is, since the control device 40 has switched to the voice input standby state before step S22, in step S22, the control conditions can be input by voice within a certain range. For example, the control conditions can be input by the user US's voice, such as "heat level 2, 30 minutes." In this case, too, since the name of the dish has already been determined, there is no need to voice the name of the dish.

As is clear from FIG. 37, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has the following features:
The input operation unit 15 has a first input operation unit (a right operation unit 15R and a left operation unit 15L) for the first heating means HM1, and a second input operation unit (a central operation unit 15M) for the second heating means,
The first input operation unit 15L and the second input operation unit 15M each have an input key A (153L, 153R) arranged thereon, and an input key B (153M, 154M) arranged thereon,
The control device 40 is characterized in that it validates the touch input of either the input key A (153L, 153R) or the input key B (153M, 154M), whichever occurs first, and does not start the input process using the other input key until input of the control conditions (heat, heating time, etc.) for the heating cooking mode (coordinated cooking mode KM1, combined cooking mode KM2, single cooking mode KM3) or control mode (the "warm" mode, etc.) is completed and heating cooking is started.

In other words, for the three heating cooking modes (linked cooking mode KM1, combined cooking mode KM2, and single cooking mode KM3), only one of the input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R that is touched first is accepted by the control device 40, and the other input keys are placed in a state where no input command is accepted.

Therefore, for example, if input key 154M is touched and then pressed and held down to switch to voice input mode, input from other input keys will be disabled (however, input functions of input keys 151M and 152M will be maintained).

Therefore, when the voice input mode is started by either the input key A (153L, 153R) or the input key B (153M, 154M), it becomes impossible to select other cooking modes or control modes, and setting conditions are not inadvertently input by voice input.

In addition, if the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is entered using one input key (e.g., 153M) in voice input mode, the voice input mode is cancelled when input key 151M is pressed to start cooking. Therefore, there is no confusion when the user US subsequently performs touch operations to select another cooking mode.

In addition, when "advance notice information 1 (201)" including information indicating a specific (one) cooking menu is transmitted from the external communication terminal 200, and a specific input key indicated in the advance notice information 1 (201) is operated in response to receiving the advance notice information 1 (step S1A), the process proceeds to obtain the recipe data CD of the cooking menu related to the advance notice information 1. In other words, it becomes unnecessary to select a cooking mode, cooking menu, control menu, etc. by touch input of the input key 153M or 154M.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 1, when using recipe data CD acquired from an external source for cooking with two or more types of heating means and two or more cooking steps, such as in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the recipe data CD can be acquired only when advance notice information 1 and advance notice information 2 are received in advance at least at the cooking step 1 stage and cooking step 2 stage, respectively, and the correct specific input key (153M for cooking step 1 in FIG. 37) is entered.

Next, reference will be made to Figures 38 and 39.
Fig. 38 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data CD from the outside in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 39 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data CD from the outside.

In Fig. 38, step SL1 performs a process corresponding to step SM1 in Fig. 33. In the next step SL2, a process corresponding to step SM2 in Fig. 33 is performed.
Step SL3 is a process corresponding to step SS5 of connecting to the outside and notifying the outside, which has been described with reference to Fig. 31. That is, this step is intended to ask the user US to confirm in advance whether or not to transmit a signal requesting provision of recipe data CD to the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 that has been registered and set in advance.

As described above, it is also possible to automatically execute the external connection from the stage of step SL3 (SS5) (if it has been preset by the function setting key 151KP described above).
This step SL3 includes the operation of input keys by the user US, and will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 65 etc. If the control device 40 has acquired the recipe data CD, the next step SL4 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SL5.

The next step SL5 is a process for determining whether the received recipe data CD meets the predefined permission conditions. As described above, for example, in the coordinated cooking mode KM1, anything that does not meet "permission condition 1" or "permission condition 2" is not permitted as a cooking menu (see Figures 29 and 30). Also, in the combined cooking mode KM2, a determination is made as to whether a specific "permission condition 3" is met. Note that permission condition 3 is the same as that described in step SM61 of Figure 35. Furthermore, for the first heating means HM1, the previously described "permission condition 4" must be met (see step SM81 of Figure 36).

If it is determined in step SL5 that the permission conditions are not met, in the case of a cooking menu that belongs to the cooperative cooking mode KM1, a signal (data) is sent from the communication unit 51 to the outside to notify that the recipe data CD cannot be received (step SL9), as in the process described in step ST8 of FIG. 29. Note that while FIG. 29 shows the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, such a "non-received message" is also sent for the combined cooking mode KM2 and the single cooking mode KM3. This will be explained in more detail later.

If the permission conditions are met, the determined recipe data CD is stored as valid data in a predetermined storage area of the recipe data storage unit 42 (step SL6).
Furthermore, the identification information 167, 160 and control conditions (heat, heating time, target temperature, etc.) included in the recipe data CD are displayed on the central display unit 16. For example, a cooking menu for the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SL6).

In the first embodiment, the control device 40 acquires the recipe data CD for cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 in a sequential manner for each cooking step. In other words, when there are two cooking steps in total, the control device 40 acquires the "setting information" in two stages, a first part M1 for setting cooking step 1 and a second part M2 for setting cooking step 2.
For this reason, when the recipe data CD for the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is acquired in step SL5, if the permission conditions are not satisfied in the first part M1, the process cannot proceed to step SL6. Therefore, since the cooking process 1 cannot be set, the process cannot proceed to acquiring the data for the second part M2 for the cooking process 2. In other words, only the second part M2 for setting the cooking process 2 cannot be acquired.

The next step SL7 is a step for modifying the control conditions. For example, in the linked cooking mode KM1, the control conditions (for cooking process 1) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (e.g., heating time, target heating temperature, heat, etc.) can be changed as appropriate by operating the input keys 156M to 159M of the central operation unit 15M. Note that since the recipe data CD is acquired on a cooking menu basis, it is already determined that the cooking menu is a specific one (e.g., hamburger steak), and this cannot be changed to another cooking menu (e.g., roast beef).

If you want to modify the control conditions, for example in the coordinated cooking mode KM1, you can simply input the appropriate changes using the central operation unit 15M (step SL10). In this case, you can select "voice input mode 1" and input the settings by voice.

If it is determined in step SL4 that recipe data CD (first portion M1 that sets cooking process 1) has not been received, the process proceeds to step SL8. In this step SL8, it is determined whether a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SL4. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SL11. Step SL11 is "automatic shutoff process 1" which automatically shuts off the main power supply, similar to step SM6 described in FIG. 33. Note that the time limit TX in this step SL8 and the time limit TX in step SM6 described in FIG. 33 do not have to be the same time, and different times may be set.

In the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, FIG. 38 shows only the steps up to obtaining the first part M1 for setting cooking process 1 and modifying the control conditions, but after cooking process 1 is completed and before cooking process 2 is started, as explained in step SL3 above, it is necessary to operate a specific input key that should be input before cooking process 2 and send selection information A (202) to the communication terminal 200.

Next, we will explain Figure 39.
FIG. 39 shows the operation when the input key 180 is operated to select "voice input mode 2."
In FIG. 39, step SS5 is the same as step SS5 explained in FIG. 31, so a duplicated explanation will be omitted.
Step SS10 is a step for judging whether or not the input key 180 of the voice input mode 2 is operated. If the input key 180 is pressed once, the answer is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SS11. If the input key 180 is not operated, the process proceeds to the normal touch input mode (step SS15).

If the data acquisition unit 53 has acquired the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51, step SS11 becomes "Yes".
If it is determined in step SS11 that the recipe data CD has not been received, the process proceeds to step SS16. In step SS16, it is determined whether a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SS11. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SS17. Step SS17 is an "automatic shutoff process 1" that automatically shuts off the main power supply, similar to step SM6 described in FIG. 33. Note that the time limit TX of step SS17 and the time limit TX of step SM6 described in FIG. 33 do not have to be the same time, and different times may be set.

The contents of the recipe data CD received in step SS11 are checked to see if they satisfy the "permission conditions" described above (see step SL5 in FIG. 38), and if so, step SS12 becomes "Yes."

If the permission conditions are not met, as described in step SL9 of FIG. 38, the communication unit 51 transmits a signal (data) to the outside to inform the outside that the recipe data CD cannot be received (SS18).

If the permission conditions are satisfied, the determined recipe data CD is stored in a predetermined storage area of the recipe data storage unit 42 as regular data.
Furthermore, the identification information 167, 160, etc. and the control conditions included in the recipe data are displayed on the central display unit 16. For example, when the recipe data CD is the cooperative cooking mode KM1, it is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS13).

The control conditions (e.g., heating time, target heating temperature, heat, etc.) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 can be changed as appropriate by voice input acquired via the voice signal receiving unit 56 of the input operation unit 15 (steps SS14, SS15).

When "voice input mode 2" is selected by input key 180, "voice input mode 2" continues until a heating operation for one cooking menu is started. It does not switch to "touch input mode" during the input stage. This is because switching during the input process may cause confusion in the operation of the user US.

If you wish to switch to touch input mode, simply press input key 180 again at any stage. The touch input mode will be restored from the point at which it is pressed. Note that after returning to touch input mode, if, for example, input key 154M is "pressed and held," the mode will switch to "voice input mode 1." Therefore, in voice input mode 1 (set to voice input mode 1B), if, for example, input key 156M is operated for input, input is possible because the input function of that input key has not been disabled.

The collaborative cooking mode KM1 has not been described in detail so far.
In the cooperative cooking mode KM1, it is necessary to sequentially acquire the first part M1 that sets cooking process 1 and the first part M2 that sets cooking process 2. Therefore, if it is determined in step SS12 that the permission conditions are not satisfied after receiving the first part M1, the operation of acquiring the recipe data CD cannot be continued at that point.

Next, we will explain Figure 40.
Fig. 40 is a flowchart for explaining the operation of the heating control unit 43 when the control device 40 in the cooking appliance 1 switches to the voice input mode 1. Note that Fig. 40 shows the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, but the same is basically true for the other cooking modes.

In FIG. 40, step SS20 indicates the time when the input mode of the control device 40 is switched to voice input mode 1.
In the next step SS21, the voice notification unit 50 and the central display unit 16M notify that the acceptance of voice input has begun. The state of the central display unit 16M at this point is, for example, as shown in Fig. 21. That is, a mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to the voice input mode is displayed on the central operation unit 15M, and voice input mode display information 179A indicating that voice input is being accepted is displayed as auxiliary information 179 on the first specific screen 16M1.

In the next step SS22, the voice signal analysis unit 58 transitions to an input standby state in which it receives voice commands from the user US. In addition, a time measurement unit (not shown) inside the control device 40 starts measuring the elapsed time.

The voice input information uttered by the user US is acquired by the voice signal receiving unit 56 via a microphone (not shown). The voice signal receiving unit 56 converts the acquired voice information into a predetermined voice signal and transmits it to the voice signal analyzing unit 58 (step SS23).

The audio signal analysis unit 56 analyzes the received audio signal (step SS24) and displays the input content on the central display unit 16M (first specific screen 16M1). For example, as described in FIG. 22, it notifies the user by voice, for example, "Hamburger, right IH, automatically selected," and also displays the same in text on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS25).

In step SS25, if the input information is insufficient, the voice notification unit 50 may further guide the user by voice, such as "Please specify the preheat temperature." Alternatively, the range of specific control conditions may be notified, such as "We recommend a preheat temperature of 200°C. Please specify the temperature."

If the input of the control conditions required to start the heating operation is insufficient, the process returns to step SS23. Before returning to step SS23, the audio notification unit 50 indicates the control conditions that are insufficient to be input and prompts the user to input them (not shown).

When the heating control unit 43 determines that the input of the control conditions required to start the heating operation has been completed (step SS26), the process proceeds to step SS27. In step SS27, since voice input has been completed, a notice is given that voice input mode 1 will be released, and it is recommended that the input key 151M be touched (step SS27). Note that when the input key 151M is touched, voice input mode 1 is immediately released.

On the other hand, if no voice command is received in step SS23, the process proceeds to step SS28. In step SS28, it is determined whether the time elapsed since step SS22 exceeds a predetermined time limit TY1. If the time limit TY1 has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SS23. However, if the time limit TY1 (e.g., 5 minutes) has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SS29. Step SS29 is "automatic shutoff process 2" similar to step SM6 in FIG. 33. Note that this "automatic shutoff process 2" is a series of processes in which, in the state of the first specific screen 16M1, the voice notification unit 50 issues an alarm to the user US, and then the screen is automatically switched to the standby initial screen 16MH, and then the main power switch 20 is automatically opened. This prevents the input process from being left unattended for a long time for some reason, ensuring safety. The time limit TY1 may be the same as the time limit TY of step SM43 described in FIG. 34, or may be of a different length.

Next, we will explain Figure 41.
FIG. 41 shows the display contents of the central display section 16M corresponding to each of the main operation steps after the main power switch 20 is turned on.
When the main power switch 20 is turned off, the central display unit 16M is not activated and does not display any information.
When the main power switch 20 is turned ON, the control device 40 performs self-diagnosis to check for abnormalities, etc., as described above, and then displays "Display Screen 1," which is one display form of the initial standby screen 16MH in Figure 41, on the central display unit 16M.

In the display screen 1 shown in FIG. 41, 60A is a display message notifying the user that the power is on. 60B is two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) for guiding (the communication terminal 200) via the network NW to the recipe data providing server 301, which is a dedicated recipe posting site. 60C is text explaining the meaning of the two-dimensional code (hereinafter, "two-dimensional information explanation text").

When the two-dimensional code 60B is optically read by the communication terminal 200, it can be guided and connected to the recipe data providing server 301 that holds information on various cooking recipes. This two-dimensional information explanation 60C and the display text 60A are a type of "common information during standby" 60N.

After the display screen 1 in FIG. 41 is displayed, the display screen 2C is automatically displayed. In this display screen 2C, the recommendation text 60H prompts the user US to perform an input operation to select a heating source. Note that after the display screen 1, the display screen 2A or 2B may be displayed.

On the display screen 2A, the text display 60D saying "Caution: Bumping" is one of the warning displays. "Bumping" refers to the phenomenon where, when a viscous food (liquid) such as curry or stew is heated, the inside of the food becomes overheated above the boiling point, causing sudden and violent boiling. As steam escapes from the heated liquid, hot droplets may fly off, which can be dangerous. The timing and cause of bumping is said to be the introduction of foreign matter or impact from outside. For this reason, when a metal pot or the like containing food is placed on the top plate 3 and induction heated, the display warns of caution when stirring the food. The information in this warning display 60E is a type of "common standby information" 60N.

The four display screens shown in FIG. 41, display screen 1, display screen 2A, 2B, and 2C, are called the "common screen" or "standby initial screen" 16MH. Note that forms other than these four may also be included in the common screen 16MH.

On display screen 2B, 60E is a warning display that warns the user that the inside of heating chamber 6 is at a high temperature and to avoid inadvertent contact. If control device 40 detects that heating chamber 6 has not yet cooled down sufficiently after oven cooking has been performed in heating chamber 6, the display screen will automatically switch to this state.

Although display screens 2A and 2B cannot be displayed simultaneously, they may be displayed alternately at intervals of a few seconds to alert users to both the bumping and high temperature indications. In addition, the audio notification unit 50 may also be used to simultaneously output the alerts displayed on display screens 2A and 2B in audio format.

In the display screen 2C of Fig. 41, 60P is the above-mentioned acquisition operation support information. This acquisition operation support information 60P displays that in order to acquire the recipe data CD in the cooking appliance 1, it is necessary to touch a specific input key in advance.
For example, in the case of a cooking menu item "hamburger" belonging to the cooperative cooking mode KM1, cooking step 1 is performed at the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, so the obtained operation support information 60P displays that the input key 152L or 152R should be touched. In addition, the audio notification unit 50 may notify the user by voice in accordance with this display.

As is clear from display screen 1 to display screen 2A to 2C in FIG. 41, the display of these various pieces of information, including the acquisition operation support information 60P, is performed using the entire display screen. In other words, rather than displaying it partially in any of the first area 22 to third area 24 described above, in order to secure as large a display area as possible, the first area 22 to third area 24 are displayed as an integrated display so that they cannot be distinguished, and the user US sees it as being displayed in the entire central display section 16M.

Next, we will explain Figure 42.
FIG. 42 is an enlarged plan view illustrating the operation of the left display section 16L of the cooking appliance 1. As shown in FIG.
42 shows the third specific screen 16L3 for the single cooking mode KM3. This Fig. 42 is displayed when the input key 153L (see Fig. 6) is operated after the stage of step SS4 in Fig. 31.

Next, when the input key 152L is operated, the control menus to be implemented by the left heating port 4L are displayed one by one on the left display section 16L. As shown on display screen 3A in FIG. 42, the user can separately set the control menu to be displayed first (default setting) to "Keep Warm," "Deep Fry" on display screen 3B, or "Preheat" on display screen 3C, using function setting key 151KP.

Furthermore, when input key 153L is operated at step SM8 in FIG. 33, or when input key 152L is operated at step SM93 in FIG. 36, the control menu to be implemented at the left heating port 4L is displayed on the left display unit 16L. Each time input key 152L is pressed, the display of the control menu changes one by one (such as keep warm, deep fry, preheat, etc.). In other words, each time input key 152L is pressed, one of multiple control menus can be selected.

The control menus that can be selected for the left heating port 4L (in induction heating single cooking mode KM3) are, for example, "keep warm," "boil water," "stewing," "deep frying (automatic cooking)," "preheating," etc. The operating time, heat, or operating pattern of the left IH coil 9L differs for each control menu.

Display screen 3A in Fig. 42 shows a case where the "keep warm" control menu is selected. Display screen 3B shows a case where the "fry" control menu is selected. Display screen 3C shows a case where the "preheat" control menu is selected.
The auxiliary information 179A is displayed adjacent to the display portion of the name of each control menu on the third specific screen 16M3 after switching to the voice input mode. Therefore, it is not displayed when the mode is not the voice input mode.

When selecting "Keep Warm" ("IH Keep Warm" shown in FIG. 12) in the control menu (in induction heating single cooking mode KM3) using the central IH coil 9M that is responsible for the central heating port 4C in the central display unit 16M, the input key 154M or 155M can be touched several times or more to display the display screen 3A shown in FIG. 42. In this case, the central display unit 16M has a display form similar to that of the display screen 3A, and this screen is called the "third specific screen" 16M3.

Next, we will explain Figure 43.
43 illustrates the operation steps of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 from when the recipe data CD is acquired to when the cooking process is completed, in the case where the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected.

FIG. 43 shows the process after the data of the first portion M1 that sets the cooking process 1 of the recipe data CD has been acquired for one cooking menu that requires cooking processes 1 and 2.
The control device 40 judges whether the first part M1 has been successfully received (step SU1). If it has been successfully received, the process proceeds to step SU2. In step SU2, the identification information (e.g., 167) of the corresponding cooking menu, the set control conditions (heat, heating time, etc.), and information on all cooking steps are displayed on one of the first specific screen 16M1 to the third specific screen 16M3. Note that the "information on cooking steps" here may be the process information 172 described in the next FIG. 44.

If the menu item to be cooked is in the linked cooking mode KM1, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed in step SU2. Therefore, if the content displayed on the first specific screen 16M is acceptable, cooking can be started. However, if there is a preheating process using the first heating means HM1 before cooking process 1, the input key (153L, 153R) of the left operation unit 15L or right operation unit 15R corresponding to the selected left heating port 4L or right heating port 4R is touched.

Cooking process 1 is started (step SU3), and in the case of timer cooking, cooking process 2 ends when the set time has elapsed (step SU4). In the case of non-timer cooking, cooking process 1 is started (step SU3) and stopped (step SU4) according to start and stop commands from the user US.

In step SU4, when cooking process 1 is completed, in the case of the collaborative cooking mode KM1, various information for proceeding to cooking process 2 is displayed (step SU5) while maintaining the display of the first specific screen 16M1 (or 16L1, 16R1) for cooking process 1.
In step SU5, information such as that cooking process 1 has been completed and that an input operation is required to obtain the second portion M2 for setting cooking process 2 is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1.

Next, as a preliminary step to receiving recipe data CD for the second part M2 from the communication terminal 200, when advance notice information 2 (201) is transmitted from the communication terminal 200, after the advance notice information 2 is received, a specific input key corresponding to the advance notice information 2 is operated (step SU5).

For example, when cooking an integrated cooking menu, if cooking step 2 is performed in the heating chamber 6, it is necessary to operate the only specific input key 153M on the central operation unit 15M. For example, in the case of the above-mentioned "hamburger steak," cooking step 2 is performed using the heating chamber 6 in combination with the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3, so the specific input key 153M is touched (step SU6).

In the next step SU7, it is determined whether the data of the second part M2 from the communication terminal 200 has been successfully received. If it has been successful, the process proceeds to step SU8. In step SU8, the display contents of the step SU2 stage are updated. As described in step SU2, the identification information (e.g., 167) of the corresponding cooking menu, the set control conditions (heat power, heating time, etc.), and the latest process information 172 are displayed on the first specific screen 16M1.

After that, by pressing the input key 151M on the central operation unit 15M, cooking process 2 can be started (step SU9). Furthermore, in the case of timer cooking, cooking process 2 can be automatically ended when the set time is reached (step SU10). In the case of non-timer cooking, cooking process 2 can be ended immediately by the user US pressing the input key 152M (step SU10). Furthermore, in the case of control conditions that detect the internal temperature of the heating chamber 6 or the temperature of the food being cooked and stop cooking automatically, cooking process 2 can be ended automatically depending on the temperature conditions (step SU11).

Next, description will be given of Figures 44 to 46.
44 to 46 are enlarged plan views showing the central operation unit 15M and the central display unit 16M when recipe data CD is acquired and cooking (food name: hamburger steak) is performed in the collaborative cooking mode KM1.

FIG. 44 shows the state immediately after receiving notice information 1 from communication terminal 200, and at this stage, the data of first portion M1 has not yet been received.
44, reference numeral 177 denotes reception start information indicating that the stage is before the recipe data CD is acquired from the external device (the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300). The text "before reception starts" is displayed, and it is easy to understand that the cooking menu (for cooking hamburger steak) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 is in the middle of being acquired.
Numeral 172 denotes the process information. In FIG. 44, it can be seen that three processes are executed in sequence: a preheating process using the first heating means HM1, a cooking process 1 using the first heating means HM1, and a cooking process 2 using a microwave heating means (second heating means HM2).

Reference numeral 170 denotes operation support information. In the example of Fig. 44, the user US is prompted to select either the left heating port 4L or the right heating port 4R for the preheating step using the first heating means HM1, and is prompted to operate either the specific input key 152L or 152R.
As shown in FIG. 44, all input functions of the various input keys 153M to 159M, 151M and 152M of the central operation unit 15M are disabled, and as can be seen from the fact that no star-shaped figure is drawn at the position of the light-emitting unit 21M, the light-emitting unit 21M is not emitting any light (including blinking).

Next, we will explain Figure 45.
FIG. 45 is an enlarged plan view 2 showing the central operation unit 15M and the central display unit 16M when recipe data CD is acquired and cooking (food name: hamburger steak) is performed in the collaborative cooking mode KM1.
45, reference numeral 173 denotes an external recipe identification section indicating that the recipe data CD is obtained from an external device (the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300). The words "Received Recipe" are displayed in text, and it is easy to see that the cooking menu (for cooking hamburger steak) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 is a recipe obtained from outside.

In FIG. 45, the light-emitting unit 21M corresponding to the input key 151M is in a standby state in which the heating operation can be started at any time. To indicate this, the light-emitting unit 21M is flashing to prompt the user to operate the input key 151M. The dashed circle indicates that the light-emitting unit 21M is flashing.

In FIG. 45, a star-shaped figure is drawn at the position of the light-emitting unit 21M. This figure means that the input functions of each input key (in the case of FIG. 45, only 151M) located on the front side of the light-emitting unit 21M are valid, and by performing a touch operation at this point, inputs such as starting heating, increasing or decreasing heat, and setting the heating time can be made.

In Fig. 45, light-emitting section 21M corresponding to input keys 157M and 156M is not illuminated. This is because the heating port has been selected in advance on communication terminal 200 side, and advance notice information 1 (201) has been transmitted to cooking appliance 1.
If the left and right heating ports 4L and 4R have not been selected, as shown in FIG. 45, it is necessary to select either the heating section specification section 171L for selecting cooking with the left heating port 4L or the heating section specification section 171R for selecting cooking with the right heating port 4R. To make this selection, it is necessary to activate the input functions of the corresponding input keys 156M and 157M. FIG. 45 shows a case where the received notice information 1 (201) includes selection information A (202) that has already selected the left heating port 4L out of the two heating ports 4L and 4R during the process of acquiring the data of the first part M1 of the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200. In other words, this is the state after the specific input key 152L of the left operation section 15L has already been operated and the selection information A (202) indicating the operation has been transmitted.

In this embodiment 1, as described in Figures 62, 63, etc., a function is provided for selecting either the left heating port 4L or the right heating port 4R in advance (see step SG5 in Figure 62). Therefore, in reality, the heating unit specification parts 171L and 171R in Figure 45 are not displayed, or only the selected left heating unit specification part 171L is displayed, and input using the input keys 156M and 157M is not possible.

The data (setting information) of the first part M1 of the recipe data CD acquired from the external device is preferentially displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 by displaying the external recipe identification section 173. That is, the identification information 167 of the received recipe data CD is displayed in the "display position B" of the first specific screen 16M1. Therefore, by pressing the input key 151M as shown in FIG. 45, cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 can be started immediately.
As will be explained later, after the first specific screen 16M1 as shown in Figure 45 is displayed, if cooking process 1 is performed at the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, actual induction heating will not start unless an input key (e.g., input key 153L) of either the left operation unit 15L or the right operation unit 15R is touched.

In FIG. 45, the cooking device 1 is in a standby state in which a heating operation can be started at any time. To indicate this, the light-emitting section 21M corresponding to the input key 151M is flashing to prompt the user to operate it. Note that the first specific screen 16M1 in FIG. 45 displays the preheating temperature as "180°C", but this preheating temperature cannot be set using the central operation section 15M. The preheating temperature is set using the left operation section 15L. For example, this can be done by touch input using the left operation section 15L, or by voice input.

Next, we will explain Figure 46.
FIG. 46 shows the state immediately after receiving advance notice information 2 (of second part M2) from communication terminal 200, and at this stage, the data (setting information B) of second part M2 has not yet been received.
46, reference numeral 177 denotes reception start information indicating that the stage is before the recipe data CD is acquired from the external device. The text "before reception starts" is displayed, and it is easy to understand that the cooking menu (for cooking hamburger steak) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 is in the middle of being acquired.
Reference numeral 172 denotes process information, and in FIG. 46 it can be seen that this is the stage prior to carrying out cooking process 2 which uses the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 in combination.

Reference numeral 170 denotes operation support information. In the example of Fig. 46, the user US is requested to select the specific input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M for cooking process 2.
46, the input functions of all the various input keys of the central operation unit 15M (154M to 159M, 151M and 152M) except for the specific input key 153M are disabled. In other words, as can be seen from the fact that no star-shaped figure is drawn at the position of the light-emitting unit 21M, the light-emitting unit 21M does not emit any light (including blinking).
On the other hand, for the specific input key 153M, the corresponding light emitting section 21M flashes to prompt the user to operate the specific input key 153M. The dashed circle indicates that the light emitting section 21M is flashing.

When entering the heating pause period P3 described below, the display unit 16 may display this FIG. 46. In that case, this FIG. 46 may be displayed before the advance notice information 2 (of the second part M2) is received from the communication terminal 200. At the stage of receiving the recipe data CD for cooking process 1, the control device 40 can grasp the heating means and the specific input keys that will be driven in cooking process 2, so it is possible to prompt the user to operate the specific input keys as shown in FIG. 46 before the advance notice information 2 arrives from the communication terminal 200.

Next, we will explain Figure 47.
FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking steps of a collaborative cooking menu and operations on the input operation unit 15 in chronological order.
In the example of Figure 47, the cooperative cooking menu is composed of two cooking steps, cooking step 1 and cooking step 2.
FIG. 47 shows a case where cooking is performed according to recipe data CD from an external source.
Cooking process 1 is an example in which the second heating means HM2 is used.

The data of the first portion M1 (cooking process 1) of the recipe data CD is acquired during the preparation period P1 in FIG.
In the data of the first portion M1 (cooking process 1), in the example of Fig. 47, the following conditions are specified in a predetermined computer program format. Control conditions such as heat power may also be specified.
(1) Cooking menu identification information (e.g., 167) and the identification number of cooking process 1.
(2) The heating means to be driven (if there are multiple heating means, the order in which they are driven) and the control conditions such as their heating power.
(3) When the first part of advance notice information 1 (201) is received, information specifying the specific input key 153 is displayed on the display unit 16.
(4) When the first part of the setting information is received, the heating operation of cooking process 1 is started upon receiving a touch operation from input key 151M.
(5) When input key 153R (153L) is pressed, the heating operation of cooking process 1 is stopped, or when certain conditions (continuous cooking time or reaching of a target temperature) are met, the heating operation of cooking process 1 is stopped at that point.
(6) After the heating operation of cooking process 1 is stopped, a heating pause period P3, which will be described later, is maintained for a certain period of time from that point on.
(7) When cooking process 1 is stopped, notify communication terminal 200 that cooking process 1 is ending or heating pause period P3 is starting.
(8) During the heating pause period, communication with the communication terminal 200 regarding the cooking process 2 is permitted.
The data may further include data specifying the time length of the heating pause period P3. The above data (1) and (2) are essential, and data (3) to (8) may be omitted if the data is held in advance by the control device 40.

The data of the second portion M1 (cooking process 2) of the recipe data CD is acquired during a preparation period P3 (heating pause period) in FIG.
In the data of the second portion M2 (cooking process 2), in the example of Fig. 47, the following conditions are specified in a predetermined computer program format. Control conditions such as heat power may also be specified.
(1) Cooking menu identification information (e.g., 167) and cooking process 2 identification number.
(2) The heating means to be driven (if there are multiple heating means, the order in which they are driven) and the control conditions such as their heating power.
(3) When the second part of the advance notice information 2 (201) is received, information for specifying one or both of the specific input keys 152L and 152R is displayed on the display unit 16.
(4) When the second part of the setting information B is received, the heating operation of the cooking process 2 is started upon a touch operation from the input key 153L or 153R.
(5) When there is a touch operation input of input key 153L (153R), the heating operation of cooking process 2 is stopped, or when certain conditions (continuous cooking time or reaching of target temperature) are met, the heating operation of cooking process 2 is stopped at that point. Note that the above data (1) and (2) are essential, and data (3) to (5) may be omitted if the control device 40 has the data in advance.

In the example of recipe data CD in Figure 47, cooking step 1 is performed using a microwave heating source (second heating means HM2), and cooking step 2 is performed by moving the food to be cooked onto top plate 3 and performing induction heating.

In addition, this cooking device 1 has additional protection measures in place to prevent the cooking mode settings and control conditions from being inadvertently changed in response to an external command signal.

In the example of FIG. 47, the second heating means HM2 is operated first, and after the second heating operation is completed, the first heating means HM2 is operated. However, the radiant heat heating means 12 may be operated as the third heating means at the same time as the second heating means HM2.

As shown in FIG. 47, the collaborative cooking menu shown here is composed of four steps.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is the period from when the input key 153M is operated to execute the coordinated cooking menu to when cooking step 1 in the heating chamber 6 is started by the input key 151M.

Operation of the specific input key 153M (central operation unit 15M) during the preparation period P1 is one method required for communication from the communication terminal 200 to the cooking appliance 1. In other words, when advance notice information 1 (201) regarding the first part M1 of the recipe data CD is received from the communication terminal 200, it is necessary to touch the specific input key 153M accordingly.

Thereafter, when the input key 151M is operated after receiving data relating to the first portion M1 of the recipe data CD, the preparation period P1 ends and a transition is made to the heating and cooking period P2 (cooking step 1).
When the first part M1 of the recipe data CD is received, the standby initial screen 16MH is switched to the first specific screen 16M1, so that when the user US presses the input key 151M, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display section 16M.

P2 is a heating and cooking period (cooking step 1) by the first heating means HM1.
In this cooking step 1, microwaves are supplied to the inside of the heating chamber 6, and the operation of heating and cooking an object to be cooked (not shown) is started.
This cooking process 1 is started when the control device 40 confirms that the door 7 has been opened once during the preparation period P1 and has been closed thereafter. The door open/close signal from the open/close detection unit 10 is utilized by the control device 40.
The control device 40 measures the time required from when the door 7 is opened until it is closed again, and if a certain allowable time TX is exceeded, a safety measure is adopted such that the heating operation will not start even if the input key 151M is pressed from that point onwards. If the input key (start key) 151M is not pressed after the door 7 is closed, cooking process 1 will not start.

At the stage when cooking process 1 is started, the control device 40 has already finished determining whether the permission conditions (1 and 2) are met, and therefore is aware of the usage status of both the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L.
Therefore, as a default setting, when the control device 40 selects to use either the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L for cooking in cooking process 1 at the start of cooking process 1 in the cooperative cooking mode, the selected heating port is placed in an occupied state. That is, when either the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L is selected in cooking process 1 of this cooperative cooking mode KM1, the selected heating port is placed in an occupied state. As a result, the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L cannot be used for other cooking. In addition, in this FIG. 47, since neither the right heating port 4R nor the left heating port 4L is used in cooking process 1, the heating ports 4L and 4R are not placed in an occupied state during this preparation period.

The content of the cooking step 1 is basically determined in advance for each cooking menu by the operation program of the linked cooking menu. For example, when the standard heating time has elapsed, the voice notification unit 50 notifies the user, and the first specific screen 16M1 displays a message such as "x minutes will soon elapse." In other words, the user US is notified that the cooking step 1 is approaching its end.
To end cooking process 1, the user US only needs to press the input key 152M once.

P3 is a heating pause period during which cooking process 1 by the second heating means HM2 is temporarily stopped and cooking process 2 by the first heating means HM1 is started.
When the heating pause period P3 starts, the input function of the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L that may be used in the cooking process 2 becomes effective. In addition, the left and right display units 16L, 16R also start to be driven, and the first specific screens 16L1, 16R1 start to be displayed.
During this heating pause period P3, setting information for cooking process 2 is obtained from the communication terminal 200. At this time, in order to select either the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, selection information A (202) is transmitted to the communication terminal 200 by pressing either the specific input key 152R of the right operation unit 15R or the specific input key 152L of the left operation unit 15L.

This heating pause period P3 is the period required to check the degree of heating of the food in cooking step 1, to add seasonings, or to add another food to be cooked and perform cooking step 2. It is also the period required to move the food from the heating chamber 6 onto the top plate 3.

Operation of the specific input key 152L (left operation section 15L) or 152R (right operation section 15R) during the heating pause period P3 is one method required for communication from the communication terminal 200 to the heating cooker 1. In other words, when advance notice information 2 (201) regarding the second part M1 of the recipe data CD is received from the communication terminal 200, it is necessary to touch the specific input key 152L or 152R accordingly.

The heater port for carrying out cooking step 2 must be selected as either the right heater port 4R or the left heater port 4L. If the left heater port 4L is selected as the default setting, then during heating pause period P3, the specific input key 152L of the left operation unit 15L must be touched. When the specific input key 152L is touched to transmit selection information A (202), the left heater port 4L becomes occupied.

Thereafter, when the input key 153L is operated after receiving data relating to the second portion M2 of the recipe data CD, the heating pause period P3 ends and the process proceeds to the heating cooking period P4 (cooking step 2).
When the second portion M2 of the recipe data CD is received, the first specific screen 16M1 displayed on the central display unit 16M in cooking step 1 is maintained on either the left or right display unit 16L, 16R. That is, since the user US presses the input key 152L to select the left heating port 4L, the first specific screen 16L1 is displayed on the left display unit 16L when the second portion M2 is acquired thereafter.

In cooking step 2, the user US may be able to individually set the control conditions (e.g., cooking time and target temperature) by operating at least one of the two input keys 154L and 155L, but depending on the cooking menu, the user US may not be able to change the control conditions.

Cooking step 2 ends when input key 153L is pressed to command the heating cooking operation to stop. In the case of timer cooking, induction heating cooking ends automatically when the time has elapsed, and cooking step 2 ends.

As is clear from FIG. 47, the heating chamber 6 cannot be used for other cooking from the moment the specific input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M used in cooking step 1 is touched to select the linked cooking menu. Depending on the cooking menu, the specific input key in preparation period P1 may be operated on the left operation unit 15L (or the right operation unit 15R). In that case, the left heating port 4L (or right heating port 4R) becomes occupied when the input key 152L (or 152R) of the left operation unit 15L (or right operation unit 15R) is operated.

As is clear from the above description, the control device 40 performs the following function restriction process.
(1) The input signals of various input keys in the central operation unit 15M on which the specific input key 153M is located are disabled or input is restricted. For example, the input functions of the input keys 154M and 155M are disabled. As a result, during the heating and cooking period P2 (cooking step 1) to the heating and cooking period P4 (cooking step 2), the central operation unit 15M cannot be used (cannot input) except in situations where input is required in the linked cooking mode KM1.
(2) Even when the heating and cooking period (cooking step 1) begins, the left and right operation units 15L, 15R can be used (the input signals from the left and right operation units 15L, 15R are not invalidated).

In this manner, from the preparation period P1 stage prior to the heat cooking period (cooking process 1), only the heating chamber 6 for cooking process 1 is occupied.
Therefore, the heating chamber 6 is "occupied" by the selection of the associated cooking menu.

Furthermore, even if the control device 40 detects that the door 7 has changed from an open state to a closed state before the heating cooking period (cooking process 1) begins, if the temperature inside the heating chamber 6 is higher than the reference value, there is a concern that the control device 40, the non-contact (infrared) sensor 13, and thermistor sensor 14 may erroneously recognize the abnormally high temperature in the heating chamber 6 as indicating that cooking is complete even before cooking has begun.
Therefore, if the temperature of the heating chamber 6 is too high before the start of the heating cooking period (cooking process 1), the first specific screen 15M1 displays the message that "the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) cannot be used immediately due to high temperature."

The period indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 47 is the reception restriction period TZ1 for one recipe data CD. During the acquisition restriction period TZ1 indicated by the thick arrow, other (different cooking) recipe data CD cannot be acquired besides the one (one type) recipe data CD acquired during the preparation period P1. In other words, this indicates that the recipe data CD for the second cooking cannot be acquired during the acquisition restriction period TZ1. However, the "second cooking" here refers to a different cooking menu, and the relationship between the first part M1 and the second part M2 does not apply, so the data of the second part M2 can be received without any problems. Note that in the case of recipe data CD that has a third part M3 (shown), the data of the third part M3 is similarly not subject to the acquisition restriction.

After the input key 153M is touched once and the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, the limiting operation is performed by the limiting unit 55 as follows.
If two or more specific input keys (e.g., 153M and 152L) are operated simultaneously, the control device 40 recognizes this as an abnormal operation and does not process the input signals from the multiple specific input keys (e.g., 153M, 152L) as normal signals. When transmitting selection information A (202) before obtaining recipe data CD, which will be described later, such (concurrent) input operations of multiple specific input keys are ignored by the control device 40 or are subject to a warning that they are abnormal inputs.

The limiting unit 55 built into the control device 40 operates as follows.
As shown in Fig. 47, it is not possible to change a cooking menu A of a specific cooperative cooking mode KM1 obtained from outside to another cooking menu B (e.g., "hamburger steak") of the same cooperative cooking mode KM1. To change the menu, it is necessary to operate the input key 152M to temporarily cancel the cooperative cooking mode KM1 and return to the initial standby screen 16MH.

In other words, once the reception restriction period TZ1 indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 47 begins, cooking using the specific linked cooking menu A obtained from outside can be canceled at any time by operating the input key 152M. Once a cancellation operation is performed in this way, the screen returns to the initial standby screen 16MH, and in that state (preparation period P1), it is necessary to touch the specific input key 153M again in response to the operation of the communication terminal 200.

In addition, for a specific linked cooking menu A based on recipe data CD acquired from outside, during the period until all cooking steps (from cooking step 1 to cooking step 2 to cooking step N) are completed, the control device 40 cannot acquire recipe data CD for another linked cooking menu C from outside (such as the smartphone 200).

In other words, when the limited period indicated by the thick arrow in Fig. 47 is entered, by operating the input key 151M, it is possible to decide to start cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, and to carry out cooking using the recipe data CD of the specific cooperative cooking menu A acquired just before this decision. However, until all the cooking steps of this cooking menu A are completed, it is not possible to acquire additional recipe data CD from outside.
Thus, when the reception restriction period TZ1 of one recipe data CD is entered, reception of other recipe data CD cannot be started. This reception restriction period TZ1 ends automatically when one cooking menu is completely finished. Or, it ends automatically when the start key 151M is pressed to start cooking. This latter example is not shown in FIG. 47. Note that the former "cooking menu is completely finished" includes both a case where the user US stops cooking at his/her own discretion in the middle of the cooking process, and a case where the control device 40 detects the passage of time, the temperature condition, etc. and automatically stops heating.

Next, we will explain Figure 48.
FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking steps of a collaborative cooking menu and operations on the input operation unit.
In the example of Figure 48, the collaborative cooking menu is composed of three cooking steps: cooking step 1, cooking step 2, and cooking step 3.
48 does not show a case where cooking is performed based on recipe data CD from an external source, but shows an example where the user US selects only one cooking menu using the input operation unit 15 and uses the recipe data CD stored in the recipe data storage unit 42. Note that cooking step 1 is an example where the first heating means HM1 is used.

In the example of Fig. 48, the contents of the recipe data CD are stored (memorized) in the recipe data storage unit 42 in a predetermined computer program format, with the following conditions. Control conditions for heat power, etc. are also specified. Note that Fig. 48 does not show an example of the simplified recipe data CD.
(1) Waiting for input of the input key 151M to start induction heating operation at the right heating port 4R (or the left heating port 4L).
(2) When there is an input from input key 153R (153L), the heating operation is stopped, or when a certain condition (continuous cooking time or reaching of a target temperature) is met, the heating operation is stopped at that point.

In the program included in the recipe data CD, similarly to FIG. 47, a heating pause period P3 and a heating pause period P5 are defined.
The duration of these heating pause periods P3 and P5 is not specified. However, in order to prevent cooking from being interrupted for an excessively long time, for example, the elapsed time of each cooking step may be counted based on the end point of cooking step 1 and cooking step 2, and when 30 minutes have elapsed, for example, an alarm may be issued and the execution of the cooking menu may be forcibly stopped.

In the example of recipe data CD in Figure 48, cooking step 1 is performed using the first heating means HM1, cooking step 2 is performed using a microwave heating source (second heating means HM2), and finally cooking step 3 is provided in which the food to be cooked is moved onto the top plate 3 and induction heating is performed to finish off the cooking by compensating for insufficient heating.

In the example of FIG. 48, the first heating means HM1 is operated first, and the second heating means HM2 is operated after the first heating operation is completed. However, the radiant heat heating means 12 may be operated as the third heating means at the same time as the second heating means HM2.

As shown in FIG. 48, the collaborative cooking menu shown here is made up of six steps.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), in which the input key 153M is operated to execute the cooperative cooking mode KM1, and the input key 154M or 155M is operated to select the cooperative cooking menu. If the left heating port 4L is set as the default as described in Fig. 45, the start key 151M is pressed on the central operation unit 15M, and finally the input key 153R is operated on the right operation unit 15R. The period until the heating and cooking operation is started on the right heating port 4R (induction) is the preparation period P1.
If it is desired to carry out cooking step 1 using the right heating port 4R, the user need only operate input keys 156M or 157M as shown in FIG. 45 to select the right heating port 4R and then press start key 151M.

When the input key 153M is operated, if the "permission condition 1" and the "permission condition 2" are satisfied, the control device 40 displays the first specific screen 16M1. Note that FIG. 48 does not show the operation (start, end) of the first specific screen 16M1.

When the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (on the central display section 16M), one of the linked cooking menus can be selected by operating the input keys 154M and 155M. If the input key 153R is then operated, the preparation period P1 ends, the mode transitions to linked cooking mode (using the right heating port 4R), and the heating and cooking period P2 begins.

When the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, if the identification information 167 of the linked cooking menu desired by the user US is displayed in a specified position on the first specific screen 16M1 (default display), there is no need to operate the input keys 154M and 155M.

The heating and cooking period P2 is a period of cooking step 1 performed by the first heating means HM1.
In this cooking step 1, an appropriate food to be cooked, such as a metal pan, is placed on the right heating port 4R, and the input key 153R is pressed, after which induction heating operation is started.
In this manner, in this embodiment 1, cooking process 1 is started by pressing start key 151M, but immediately thereafter, it is necessary to touch input key 153R or 153L on the corresponding right operation unit 15R or 15L.

At the stage when the cooking process 1 is started, the control device 40 has already determined whether permission conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied, and therefore knows which heating portion of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating means) is in use. In other words, the use status of both the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L is known.
Therefore, as a default setting, the control device 40 determines to use the "right heating section" 4R in cooking step 3 of the coordinated cooking mode, and occupies this right heating port 4R.

The cooking step 1 is basically determined in advance by the operation program of the linked cooking menu. For example, when the standard heating time has elapsed, the voice notification unit 50 notifies the user, and the first specific screen 16M1 displays a message such as "x minutes will soon elapse." In other words, the user US is notified that the cooking step 1 is nearing completion.
To end cooking process 1, the user US only needs to press the input key 153R once.

P3 is the heating pause period during which cooking process 1 by the first heating means HM1 is temporarily stopped and cooking process 2 by the second heating means HM2 is started.

This heating pause period P3 is a period required for checking the degree of heating of the food in cooking step 1, for adding seasonings, or for adding another food to perform cooking step 2. It is also a period required for moving the food to the heating chamber 6.
The heating pause step P3 ends when the input key 151M is pressed, and the process proceeds to the cooking step 2 at P4.

This cooking process 2 is started when the control device 40 confirms that the door 7 has been opened once during the pause period P3 and has been closed thereafter. The door opening/closing signal from the opening/closing detection unit 10 described above is used by the control device 40.

The control device 40 measures the time required from when the door 7 is opened until it is closed again, and if a certain "allowed time" is exceeded, a safety measure is adopted such that the heating operation will not start even if the input key 151M is pressed from that point on. Note that the "allowed time" here may be set to the same time as the time limit TX (30 minutes) described in Figures 33 and 39.

The cooking step 2 basically ends automatically when the heating time predetermined by the operation program of the linked cooking menu has elapsed or when the temperature of the food to be cooked has risen to a set value (e.g., 90°C). For example, in one linked cooking menu, heating begins with a microwave output of 500 W. Furthermore, if the user US opens the door 7 at any time, the microwave irradiation is instantly stopped and the heating operation is stopped.

In cooking step 2 of P4, the user US may be able to individually set the control conditions (e.g., cooking time and target temperature) by operating at least one of the four input keys 156M to 159M, but depending on the cooking menu, the user US may not be able to change the control conditions.

The example in Figure 48 shows the case where cooking step 2 is ended by pressing the input key (stop key) 152M on the central operation unit 15M. When the input key 152M is pressed to command the cooking to stop, cooking step 2 ends and the process proceeds to the heating pause period of P5.

During this heating pause period P5, the user US opens the door 7, removes the food to be cooked from inside the heating chamber 6, and places it on the right heating port 4R of the top plate 3. The food to be cooked is placed inside a heated object N such as a metal pot.
Then, when the input key 153R for the right heating unit 4 is pressed to command the start of cooking, the heating pause step P5 ends and the process proceeds to a heating cooking period P6 (the "cooking step 3" of induction heating).

This heating pause period P5 is a period required to check the degree of heating of the food in cooking step 2, to add seasonings, or to add another food to be cooked and perform the next cooking step 3. For example, in cooking step 2, only frozen food is heated as the food to be cooked, and in cooking step 3, a food to be cooked that has been immersed in seasonings or cooking liquid, or that has been cooked separately by preheating, etc., can be added to the same heated food N. This broadens the range of cooking possibilities.

P6 switches from cooking step 2 using the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source) to cooking step 3 using the first heating means HM1 (in this case, induction heating means, for example, the right heating port 4R).
In this cooking step 3, when cooking is performed using the right heating port 4R as described above, the user US can individually set the control conditions (e.g., cooking time and target temperature) by operating the input keys 154R, 155R (see Figure 8).

In addition, if cooking step 3 is performed using the left heating port 4L, the user US can individually set the control conditions (e.g., cooking time and target temperature) by operating the input keys 154L and 155L.

When input key 153R is pressed to command cooking to stop, cooking step 3 ends and the operation of linked cooking mode KM1 ends. In the case of timer cooking, induction heating cooking ends automatically when the time has elapsed, and cooking step 3 ends.

As is clear from FIG. 48, the right operation unit 15R of the right heating port 4R becomes unusable from the point in time when the start of cooking is decided using the input key 151M of the central operation unit 15M, not when the linked cooking menu is selected, i.e., when the identification information 167 indicating the name of the cooking on the linked cooking menu is displayed on the central display unit 16M. Note that if the left heating port 4L is set by default, the left heating port 4L will be occupied.

As is clear from the above description, the control device 40 performs the following function restriction process.
(1) The input signal from the right operation unit 15R is disabled or the input is restricted. For example, the input functions of the input keys 151R and 152R are disabled. As a result, the right heating port 4R cannot be used (cannot input) during the heating cooking period (cooking step 1) to the heating cooking period (cooking step 3) except when input is required in the linked cooking mode KM3.
(2) Even when the heating and cooking period (cooking step 1) begins, the left operation unit 15L (not selected in the preparation period P1) can be used (the input signal from the left operation unit 15L is not invalidated).

In this way, when the heating cooking period (cooking process 1) begins, the control device 40 occupies the right heating port 4R from the stage of cooking process 1 until the end of cooking process 3.

Therefore, the right heating port 4R is "occupied" by the selection of the linked cooking menu. Also, when viewed from the perspective of the first heating means HM1 as a whole, the use of only a portion (the right side) of the three heating sections is "restricted" during the period from the end of cooking step 1 to the end of cooking step 3.

Even after the heating cooking period (cooking step 1) ends, the above-mentioned restricted state of the right heating port 4R is not released.
At the stage of the cooking process 1, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, and the user US can easily understand that he or she is in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

Furthermore, even if the control device 40 detects that the door 7 has changed from an open state to a closed state before the heating cooking period (cooking process 2) begins, if the temperature inside the heating chamber 6 is higher than the reference value, there is a concern that the control device 40, the non-contact (infrared) sensor 13, and thermistor sensor 14 may erroneously recognize the abnormally high temperature in the heating chamber 6 as indicating that cooking is complete even before cooking has begun.
Therefore, if the temperature of the heating chamber 6 is too high before the start of the heating cooking period (cooking process 1), the first specific screen 15M1 displays the message that "the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) cannot be used immediately due to high temperature."

The period indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 48 is the reception restriction period TZ1 of one piece of recipe data CD, as described with reference to FIG.
When the input key 153M is touched once to select one cooking menu and start cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, as shown in Fig. 48, it is not possible to obtain additional recipe data CD from an external device such as the communication terminal 200. For example, even during the heating pause period P3, it is not possible to input additional recipe data CD for another cooking menu. If the input key 153M is pressed during the preparation period and then the cancel input key 152M is pressed, the input of the input key 153M is canceled, and the state returns to the initial state. After that, it is possible to proceed to obtain recipe data CD from outside (a separate operation of transmitting recipe data CD from the communication terminal device 200 or the like is required).

After the input key 153M is touched once and the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, the restriction unit 55 performs the following restriction operation.

That is, the limiting unit 55 built into the control device 40 operates as follows.
As shown in Fig. 48, it is not possible to change a cooking menu A of a specific cooperative cooking mode KM1 obtained from outside to another cooking menu B (e.g., "hamburger steak") of the same cooperative cooking mode KM3. To change it, it is necessary to operate the input key 152M to temporarily cancel the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and return to the scene of the initial standby screen 16MH.

In other words, once the time limit indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 48 is reached, the cooking using one linked cooking menu A specified by touch input can be cancelled at any time by operating the input key 152M. Once a cancellation operation is performed in this way, the screen returns to the initial standby screen 16MH, and in this state, it is necessary to touch the input key 153M again.

In addition, for a specific linked cooking menu A for which cooking step 1 has started, the control device 40 cannot obtain recipe data CD for another linked cooking menu C from outside (such as the communication terminal 200) during the period until all cooking steps are completely completed.

In other words, when the limited period indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 48 is entered, by operating the input key 151M, it is possible to decide to start cooking in the linked cooking mode KM3, and to carry out cooking of the specific linked cooking menu A acquired immediately before this decision. However, until all the cooking steps of this cooking menu A are completed, it is not possible to acquire further recipe data CD from outside and start cooking.

Next, reference will be made to Figures 49 to 53.
Fig. 49 is a time chart 1 for explaining the entire recipe data obtainable section and control operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 in the cooking device 1. Fig. 50 is a time chart 1 for explaining the entire recipe data obtainable section and control operation of the composite cooking mode KM2 in the cooking device 1. Fig. 51 is a time chart showing a modified example 1 of the time chart shown in Fig. 49. Fig. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation unit 15 and the central display unit 16M in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 corresponding to the modified example of Fig. 51. Fig. 53 is a time chart showing a modified example 2 of the time chart shown in Fig. 49.

In FIG. 49, SA1 to SA10 indicate the operation of the control device 40.
First, the control device 40 detects that the main power switch 20 is turned on (step SA1), transmits data indicating that the device has been started (operating state data OS) from the communication unit 51 to the outside, and starts the self-diagnosis mode (SA2). That is, the control device 40 checks whether the components of the cooking appliance 1, such as the circuits and sensors, are normal.

Next, the display unit 16 is started to display the standby initial screen 16MH (SA3). After this, the standby initial screen 16MH displays a message prompting the user US to select a heating method, and the audio notification unit 50 provides similar audio guidance (SA3A).
From the time when this voice guidance is displayed (step SA3A), the "acceptance state of data (setting information) for cooking process 1" of recipe data CD is started. At this stage of step SA3A, communication unit 51 may notify the outside that the acceptance state of data (setting information) for cooking process 1 has started. This makes it possible for terminal display unit 216 of communication terminal 200 to display information that allows the preparation state of cooker 1 to be known.

Next, the user US presses the input key 153M to select the collaborative cooking mode KM1. This is step SA4 in FIG. 49.

The "initial standby period" TP in this embodiment 1 is the period that begins from step SA3A, and the timing at which this initial standby period TP ends is when the input key for starting the heating operation is pressed (SA7). In the collaborative cooking mode KM1, the input key for starting is the input key (start key) 151M.

The initial waiting period TP cannot exceed the first limit period (first time limit TX). In other words, the initial waiting period TP is limited to a maximum of 30 minutes, for example, by the processing of step SM5 described in FIG. 33.

Next, an example in which the cooking appliance 1 acquires the recipe data CD relating to one cooking menu selected by the communication terminal 200 will be described.
During the initial waiting period TP while waiting for a command to start the heating operation as described above, there may be cases where selection information A (202) for receiving recipe data CD from the outside cannot be transmitted unless the specific input key 153M, which also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1, is pressed.
In this case, the specific input key 153M is operated according to the display on the central display section 16M. Then, the "recipe acquisition permission condition" described later is satisfied. In other words, the program permits the data acquisition section 53 to acquire the recipe data CD.

In other words, if the user US presses the input key 153M after step SA3A, acquisition of the recipe data CD of the collaborative cooking mode KM1 is permitted from the stage at which the input key 153M is pressed.
In the case of a cooking menu in the combined cooking mode KM2, the input key 154M or 155M may be designated as the specific input key. Also, in the linked cooking mode KM1, the input key 152R or 152L for the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L may be designated as the specific input key to be operated.

In FIG. 49, the "state of accepting data (setting information) for cooking process 1" starts at step SA3A, i.e., the start of the "initial standby period" TP, but this state of accepting data may start at step SA4, when the specific input key 153M is touched for the first time.

Incidentally, the input key 153M also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1. Therefore, if the input key is "pressed and held" in step SA4 and the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds), the mode automatically switches to voice input mode 1 at the point in time when the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds) (step SA5).

Therefore, the mode is switched to voice input mode 1 from step SA5 shown in FIG. 49, and during the period of voice input mode 1, the control conditions for the coordinated cooking mode KM1 can be set by voice input.
The voice input mode 1 is automatically terminated when a command to start the heating operation is given by input key 151M.

Next, in step SA9, the "state of accepting data (setting information) for cooking process 1" started in step SA3A is released. As a result, the recipe data (for cooking process 1 only) (for linked cooking mode KM1) acquired during the initial standby period TP as shown in FIG. 49 is finalized as the final data and used for the subsequent cooking process 1. Note that the operation timing of input key 151M (step SA7) that issues a command to start the heating operation and step SA9 are actually simultaneous, but for the sake of explanation, they are depicted in FIG. 49 as if there is a time difference. After this, the heating operation is started in step SA10, and this timing is also almost simultaneous with step SA7.

In the cooperative cooking mode KM1, cooking process 1 starts from step SA10, but when cooking process 1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 50, during the heating pause period P3 (see FIG. 47), the "state for accepting data (setting information) for cooking process 2" starts, and a specific input key needs to be operated.

As is clear from FIG. 49, the period from steps SA4 to SA7 during the initial standby period TP is the period TB1 during which recipe data CD (cooking process 1) for the collaborative cooking mode KM1 can be acquired.

Within the initial standby period TP, the period from steps SA4 to SA7 is the cancelable period TB2 for the recipe data CD (cooking process 1) of the collaborative cooking mode KM1.
The period from steps SA4 to SA7 is a control condition changeable period TB3 for the recipe data CD (cooking process 1) of the collaborative cooking mode KM1.

Next, the operation of acquiring the recipe data CD for the cooking process 2 will be described with reference to FIG.
In Fig. 50, SA11 to SA17 show the operation of the control device 40. Fig. 50 shows the operation after step SA10 shown in Fig. 49.
When the heating operation for cooking step 1 is completed (step SA11), the central display unit 16M and the left and right display units 16L, 16R start to display a message prompting the user to obtain setting information for cooking step 2. For example, in the central display unit 16M, the display content of the first specific screen 16M1 displays operation support information 170 as shown in FIG.

In the case of Figure 46, the operation support information 170 requests the user US to select a specific input key 153M on the central operation unit 15M for cooking process 2, but in the case of Figure 50, the content requests the user US to operate a specific input key on either the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L (step SA12).
From this step SA12, the "state for accepting data (setting information) for cooking process 2" starts, so it is necessary to operate a specific input key.

At this step SA12, the control device 40 is configured to transmit a notification signal to the communication terminal 200 to prompt the communication terminal 200 to transmit the recipe data CD for the cooking process 2.

When the specific input key 152L on the left operation unit 15L is touched (step SA13), the setting information acquisition period TS for cooking process 2 starts from this point. Therefore, the setting information for cooking process 2 sent from the communication terminal 200 after the selection information A (202) was sent to the communication terminal 200 can be acquired during this "setting information acquisition period TS." After acquisition, the input key 152M on the central operation unit 15M can also be pressed to perform a cancellation process.

Incidentally, the input key 152L also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1. Therefore, if the input key is "pressed and held" at step SA13 and the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds), the mode automatically switches to voice input mode 1 at the time that time is exceeded (step SA5).

Therefore, the mode is switched to voice input mode 1 from step SA14 shown in FIG. 50, and during the voice input mode 1 period, the control conditions for cooking process 2 in the collaborative cooking mode KM1 can be set by voice input.
The voice input mode 1 is automatically ended when a command to start the heating operation is given by using the input key 151M (step SA15). The heating pause period P3 is immediately ended by the touch operation of the input key 151M.

Next, in step SA16, the "state of accepting data (setting information) for cooking process 2" started in step SA12 is released. As a result, the acquired (linked cooking mode KM1) recipe data (for cooking process 2 only) is finalized as the data and will be used for cooking process 2 thereafter. Note that the operation timing of input key 151M (step SA15) that issues the command to start the heating operation and step SA16 are actually simultaneous, but for the sake of explanation, they are depicted in FIG. 50 as if there is a time difference. After this, in step SA17, the heating operation for cooking process 2 is started. This timing SA17 is within a few to 10 seconds of step SA15.

Next, the combination cooking mode KM2 will be described with reference to FIG.
First, the control device 40 detects that the main power switch 20 is turned on (step SA1), transmits data indicating that the device has been started (operating state data OS) from the communication unit 51 to the outside, and starts the self-diagnosis mode (SA2). That is, the control device 40 checks whether the components of the cooking appliance 1, such as the circuits and sensors, are normal.

Next, the display unit 16 is started to display the standby initial screen 16MH (SA3). After this, the standby initial screen 16MH displays a message prompting the user US to select a heating method, and the audio notification unit 50 provides similar audio guidance (SA3A).
From the time when this voice guidance is displayed (step SA3A), the "state of accepting data (setting information) for cooking process 1" of the recipe data CD is started. Note that although there is only one cooking process in the composite cooking mode KM2, for convenience of explanation, it will be referred to as cooking process 1.
In FIG. 51, the user US operates the input key 154M to select the combined cooking mode KM2 (step SA4).
Then, during the initial waiting period TP, at the time of step SA4 when the input key 154M is pressed, the "recipe acquisition condition" is satisfied.

If the "recipe acquisition condition" is satisfied during the initial standby period TP, the data acquisition unit 53 can acquire the recipe data CD for the control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 (e.g., "warming") once via the communication unit 51.

Furthermore, during the initial standby period TP, the recipe data CD of the cooking menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 acquired from outside can be cancelled by the input key 152M.
In practice, in the initial standby period TP, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed first, and after the identification information 160 of the recipe data CD is displayed on that screen, the input key 152M may be pressed.

Furthermore, during the initial standby period TP, the control conditions of the acquired recipe data CD can be changed as appropriate by operating the input keys 156M to 159M (some control conditions cannot be changed). Again, the control conditions are displayed in the displayed second specific screen 16M2, so all that is required is to look at the display and press the input key 156M, etc.

Incidentally, the input key 154M also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1. Therefore, if the input key is "pressed and held" in step SA4 and the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds), the mode automatically switches to voice input mode 1 at the point in time when the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds) (step SA5).

Therefore, the mode is switched to voice input mode 1 from step SA5 shown in FIG. 51, and during the period of voice input mode 1, the control conditions for the combined cooking mode KM2 can be set by voice input.
The voice input mode 1 is automatically terminated when a command to start the heating operation is given by input key 151M.

Next, in step SA9, the "state of accepting data (setting information) for cooking process 1" that was started in step SA3A is released. This confirms the acquired recipe data (for composite cooking mode KM2) as the final data, and it is used for cooking process 1 from step SA10 onwards. Note that the operation timing of input key 151M (step SA7), which issues a command to start the heating operation, and step SA9 are actually simultaneous, but for the sake of explanation, they are depicted in Figure 51 as if there is a time difference. After this, the heating operation is started in step SA10, and this timing is also almost simultaneous with step SA7.

51, the initial waiting period TP ends when the input key (start key) 151M is operated (SA7), and the actual heating operation starts immediately thereafter (SA10).
As described above, the initial standby period TP ends at step SA7. In other words, the "state of accepting data (setting information) for cooking process 1" is also released at approximately the same time, so that after this, recipe data CD for another composite cooking mode KM2 cannot be obtained from outside (however, if the composite cooking mode KM2 is cancelled by the input key 152M during the cooking process, the recipe data CD can be obtained again).

The time difference between the acquisition of recipe data CD by step SA3 and step SA4 in FIG. 51 is limited to 30 minutes. If 30 minutes is exceeded, the control device 40 forcibly turns off the main power switch 20 for safety reasons, since there is a possibility that the user US has forgotten to enter an operation input. Alternatively, the control device 40 issues a command to perform an operation such as issuing an alarm via the audio notification unit 51 (see step SL8 in FIG. 38).

In addition, instead of restricting the time difference between the acquisition of recipe data CD by step SA3 and step SA4 to within 30 minutes, the period from step SA3A to step SA4, which is the point at which the initial waiting period TP begins, may be restricted to within 30 minutes.

As is clear from FIG. 51, the period from steps SA4 to SA7 during the initial waiting period TP is the period TB1 during which recipe data CD for the composite cooking mode KM2 can be acquired.

Within the initial standby period TP, the period from steps SA4 to SA7 is a cancelable period TB2 for the recipe data CD in the composite cooking mode.
The period from steps SA4 to SA7 is a control condition changeable period TB3 of the recipe data CD of the composite cooking mode KM2.

Next, we will explain Figure 52.
Figure 52 is a time chart showing a first modified example of the time chart shown in Figure 50. SA1 to SA10, like Figure 50, show the operation of the heating control unit 43 of the control device 40 when cooking in the combined cooking mode KM1 is performed.
Step SA4 is the time when the user US touches the input key 153M to select the cooperative cooking mode KM1. In the case of Fig. 52, the initial standby period TP also starts from step SA3A and ends when the input key 151M is pressed (step SA7).

Even in the case of the collaborative cooking mode KM1 shown in FIG. 52, the input key 153M is pressed during the initial standby period TP, which is limited to a predetermined time (for example, within 30 minutes), so the "recipe acquisition permission condition" is met at the time of step SA4.

When the “recipe acquisition permission condition” is satisfied, the data acquisition unit 53 can acquire the recipe data CD of the collaborative cooking mode KM2 via the communication unit 51 only once.
In this Figure 52, the acquisition time of the recipe data CD (cooking process 1) is different from that of the example shown in Figure 50, as will be explained below.

If the input key 153M, which also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1, is not pressed during the initial standby period TP, the cooking menu for the linked cooking mode KM1 cannot be selected. In other words, the recipe data CD to be acquired cannot be identified.

When input key 153M is operated, the "recipe acquisition permission condition" is satisfied. In other words, the data acquisition unit 53 is programmed to permit acquisition of the recipe data CD. From the point of step SA4, the recipe data CD can be acquired (note that in reality, since the recipe data CD is subject to restrictions such as the performance of the communication infrastructure, acquisition may not be completed instantly, and may take several to 20 seconds).

Incidentally, the input key 153M also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1. Therefore, if the input key is "pressed and held" in step SA4 and the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds), the mode automatically switches to voice input mode 1 at the point in time when the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds) (step SA5).

However, there are cases where the user US does not realize that the mode has been switched to the voice input mode 1 at the above-mentioned stage. Alternatively, there are cases where the user US is not aware of the long press operation.
52, after the automatic switching, when the first specific screen 16M1 indicates that the recipe data CD has been acquired, the screen also indicates that the mode has been switched to voice input mode 1. At the same time, the voice notification unit 50 also notifies the user. An actual example of the first specific screen 16M1 is shown in FIG.

52, input in voice input mode 1 is accepted from step SA5A onwards. Therefore, from step SA5A onwards, the control conditions for the coordinated cooking mode KM1 can be set by voice input.
The voice input mode 1 automatically ends when a command to start the heating operation is given through input key 151M (step SA7).

In the example of FIG. 52 as well, the "acceptance state of data (setting information) for cooking process 1" of recipe data CD starts from the point in time when voice guidance is displayed (step SA3A).
In addition, in step SA9, the "state of accepting data (setting information) for cooking process 1" started in step SA3A is released. As a result, the setting information for cooking process 1 among the recipe data CD (of the linked cooking mode KM1) acquired up to this point is finalized as the final data and is used for cooking process 1 from step SA10 onwards. Note that the operation timing of the input key 151M that issues a command to start the heating operation (step SA7) and step SA9 are actually simultaneous, but for the sake of explanation, FIG. 52 shows a time difference. After that, the heating operation is started in step SA10, and this timing is also almost simultaneous with step SA7. However, when cooking process 1 uses the right IH coil 9R or the left IH coil 9L, there may be a delay of several to 10 seconds due to the proper detection and determination of the heated object.

As shown in FIG. 49, instead of starting the "state of accepting data (setting information) for cooking process 1" from step SA3A, this "state of accepting" may start from step SA4, when the specific input key 153M is touched for the first time.

Next, we will explain Figure 53.
FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation unit 15 and the central display unit 16M in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 corresponding to the modified example of FIG.
There are two types of auxiliary information 179 shown in Fig. 53. One is voice input mode display information 179D indicating that voice input is being accepted because the mode is voice input mode. The other is reference information 179E recommending the input of control conditions and including examples of control conditions that can be input (e.g., standard value of preheat temperature).

At the stage in FIG. 53, as is clear from the fact that the light-emitting sections 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M to 169M are not illuminated, it is not possible to input control conditions by touching each of these input keys (because in this example, they are set to the above-mentioned "touch input mode 1A").
Furthermore, as is clear from the fact that the light-emitting section 21M corresponding to the input key 151M is not emitting light, even if the input key 151M is pressed, the heating operation cannot be started at this stage, because the input of the control conditions has not been completed.

Next, we will explain Figure 54.
FIG. 54 is a time chart for explaining the period during which recipe data CD can be acquired and the control operations in the collaborative cooking mode KM1 as a whole, and shows a second modified example of the time chart shown in FIG.

In FIG. 54, SA1 to SA10 indicate the operation of the control device 40, similarly to FIG.
54, the hardware configuration of the voice input dedicated key 180 is changed. Specifically, the operation surface of the input key 180 is configured to be illuminated from below by a light emitting element (LED) (not shown) arranged below the operation surface.

The input function of the input key 180 is enabled when the control device 40 is started and the input key 153M or the input key 154M is touched (step SA4). After the input function is enabled, the input key 180 is illuminated by the light-emitting element (not shown), and the operation portion (key operation surface) of the input key 180 stands out among the operation portion 15.

The initial standby period TP also begins when the standby initial screen 16MH prompts the user US to select a cooking mode (step SA3A).

As in FIG. 51, step SA4 is the point in time when either input key 153M or input key 154M is touched. At this point in time, the "recipe acquisition permission condition" is satisfied, so that acquisition of recipe data CD can be executed. Thereafter, when input key 151M is operated, the initial waiting period TP ends.

In the example of FIG. 54, after the input key 153M is touched, the recipe data (for cooking step 1) for the linked cooking mode KM1 can be obtained from the outside via the communication unit 51. When the input key 154M is touched without touching the input key 153M, the recipe data for the combined cooking mode KM2 can be obtained.

If the input key 180 is touch-input operated at the time of step SA5 after the input key 153M or 154M is operated, the control device 40 transitions to the voice input mode 2. Therefore, after step SA5, the user US can input the control conditions by voice.
54, since the voice input mode 2A is selected, the input functions of (some of) the input keys (e.g., 156M) other than the voice input dedicated key 180 are temporarily disabled. Therefore, even if the input keys 156M and 157M are touched, no input can be made.

In the example of FIG. 54 as well, the "acceptance state of data (setting information) for cooking process 1" of recipe data CD starts from the point in time when voice guidance is displayed (step SA3A).
In addition, in step SA9, the "state of accepting data (setting information) for cooking process 1" started in step SA3A is released. As a result, the setting information for cooking process 1 among the recipe data CD (of the linked cooking mode KM1) acquired up to this point is finalized as the final data and is used for cooking process 1 from step SA10 onwards. Note that the operation timing of the input key 151M (step SA7) that issues a command to start the heating operation and step SA9 are actually simultaneous, but for the sake of explanation, FIG. 54 shows a time difference. In addition, after this, the heating operation is started in step SA10, and this timing is also almost simultaneous with step SA7. However, when cooking process 1 uses the right IH coil 9R or the left IH coil 9L, there may be a delay of several to 10 seconds due to the proper detection and determination of the heated object.

Next, we will explain Figure 55.
55 shows the main processing of the control device 40 during the period up to the start of cooking based on recipe data CD obtained from the outside. In particular, it shows the processing for displaying data on food ingredients and nutritional ingredients.

In FIG. 55, the recipe data CD (at least the first part M1 and the second part M2) acquired from the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51 is stored in the recipe data storage unit 42 of the storage device 41 (step SS30). Then, it is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS31). This stage corresponds to step SS13 described in FIG. 39.

At step SS31, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display unit 16M. In other words, at least the identification information 167 is displayed (see, for example, Figures 46 and 53).

In the next step SS32, in order to display the food ingredients, it is determined whether a display command has been issued from the user US. If, in the example of FIG. 53, the system has already transitioned to voice input mode 1, and a defined term (phrase) such as "food ingredients" or "calories" is uttered by voice, the determination in step SS32 is "Yes." This voice signal is analyzed by the voice signal analysis unit 58 (see FIG. 10), and data on the food ingredients of the target cooking menu is read from the storage device 41.

In the central display section 16M, the first specific screen 16M1 displays a food component display screen 16M1A as shown in Fig. 24(A) (step SS33). The amounts of energy, protein, fat and iron are displayed in grams.
Next, the process proceeds to step SS34 for judging whether the input key 151M is pressed. In this step SS34, the input is waited for a certain period of time until the user US performs an operation. If the input key 151M is pressed during the waiting time, the display returns to the first specific screen 16M1. Then, the driving of the heating means (such as the first heating means HM1) is started (SS35).

If the input key 158M is not pressed and no voice command is given to display food ingredients within a certain period of time from step SS31, the determination in step SS32 will be "No."

If the determination in step SS32 is "No", the process proceeds to step SS36. In step SS36, a determination is made as to whether or not a command to display the nutritional components of the food has been issued. In the example of FIG. 53, since the process has already transitioned to voice input mode 1, at the stage of step SS36, a specified term (phrase) such as "nutrients" or "nutrition" is spoken.

Then, the audio signal is analyzed by the audio signal analysis unit 58 (see FIG. 11) and the nutritional component data of the target cooking menu is read from the storage device 41. Then, step SS36 is judged as "Yes." Note that even if the input key 180 is pressed again to cancel the audio input mode 2 and then the input key 156M is pressed, step SS36 is also judged as "Yes."

If step SS36 is judged as "Yes", the nutritional component display screen 16M1B as shown in FIG. 24(B) is displayed on the display unit 16 (central display unit 16M) (step SS37). The amounts of energy, protein, fat and iron are then displayed in grams. Then, the process proceeds to step SS34.

As mentioned above, if the function setting input key 151KP has not been operated in advance to set the food ingredients and nutritional components to be displayed individually each time before cooking begins, the operations of steps SS33 and SS37 shown in FIG. 55 will not be performed.

As is clear from FIG. 55, in this embodiment 1, when cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the food component display screen 16M1A and the nutritional component display screen 16M1B can be displayed at the stage of receiving the setting information for cooking step 1 of the recipe data CD, i.e., the first part M1. This makes it easy for the user US to view useful nutrient and food component information at the initial stage of obtaining the recipe data CD.

Note that, although the examples in Figures 50 to 54 do not show the single cooking mode KM3, recipe data CD can be acquired from outside via the communication unit 51 during the initial standby period TP, similar to the recipe data CD for the combined cooking mode KM2 and the coordinated cooking mode KM1.

Next, a communication terminal 200 shown in FIG. 56 will be described.
The communication terminal 200 such as a smartphone has a transmission unit and a reception unit 210, a communication control unit 211, a central processing unit (CPU) 212, a ROM and a RAM 213, a speaker 214, a touch-type operation unit 215, a terminal side display unit 216 having a display screen, a cooking appliance database (storage unit) 217, a posture detection unit 218, a remote operation information generation unit 219, and a storage unit 220. The transmission unit and reception unit 210 has an NFC input/output unit 221 for short-range wireless communication. Therefore, two paths, wireless communication via the Internet and short-range wireless communication (NFC), can be used.

Reference numeral 222 denotes a voice input unit for converting the speech (voice) of the user US into an input signal.
The touch-type operation unit 215, the terminal side display unit 216, and the voice input unit 222 are integrated in hardware to form a display operation unit 225. Note that a search unit that analyzes the voice signal from the voice input unit 222 and performs term search, information search, etc. is not shown. The search unit may be provided inside the communication terminal 200, or may be provided in an external cloud server 300, so that the search function is provided outside the communication terminal 200.

The attitude detection unit 218 is equipped with various sensors such as a gyro sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a gravity sensor, and can detect the inclination and orientation of the communication terminal 200. As a result, a signal that detects the up-down direction of the communication terminal 200 is output to the central processing unit 212.

The central processing unit 212 receives a detection signal from the attitude detection unit 218 and controls the display direction of the terminal side display unit 216 .
The central processing unit 212 inputs a signal received from the communication unit 51 of the cooking appliance 1 to the remote operation information generating unit 219 .

The central processing unit 212 has a recipe data acquisition unit 230, a recipe data transmission unit 231, a terminal side recipe selection unit 232, and a food composition data acquisition unit 233. The recipe data acquisition unit 230, the recipe data transmission unit 231, the terminal side recipe selection unit 232, and the food composition data acquisition unit 233 may be functionally realized as a whole by a single computer program, or may be configured by separate control circuits.

The cooking appliance database 217 holds "notification data" 223 for the cooking appliance 1. This notification data is used to generate notification information (including image information) for the central display unit 16M, the left and right display units 16L and 16R of the cooking appliance 1, and the audio notification unit 50. The cooking appliance database 217 also holds "remote control data" 224 for the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1.

Furthermore, the cooking appliance database 217 stores food ingredient and nutrient ingredient data 226 related to each cooking menu targeted by the recipe data CD. In this embodiment, information on food ingredients (energy, lipids, proteins, etc.) and nutrient ingredients (potassium, calcium, etc.) is collectively referred to as "food ingredient information" DD.

The notification data 223, remote control data 224, and food ingredient/nutrient ingredient data 226 may be stored in the communication terminal 200 from the beginning, or the food ingredient information may be acquired by connecting to a cloud server 300, which is an information providing means, via a network NW and downloading the food ingredient information from the cloud server 300. In other words, the cooking appliance database 217 does not need to be constructed by storing the information in a fixed manner, and may be in a form in which information is acquired as needed and temporarily stored in a volatile memory.

The cooking appliance database 217 may obtain recipe data CD for various cooking methods that can be performed by the cooking appliance 1, particularly for cooking menus (e.g., "Ratatouille") that can be used in the collaborative cooking mode KM1, from the cloud server 300 or from another communication terminal 200 via the NFC input/output unit 221.

The remote control information generating unit 224 processes the signal acquired from the cooking appliance 1 via the central processing unit 212 and the input signal from the display operation unit 225, and generates remote control information for the cooking appliance 1.

The "remote operation information" in this embodiment 1 refers to information transmitted from the communication terminal 200 to remotely operate the cooking appliance 1. Therefore, when the cooking recipe data CD is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 to the cooking appliance 1, the data becomes a type of remote operation information.
The "remote operation information" includes "information on input operation" corresponding to all cooking modes of the cooking appliance 1 including the coordinated cooking mode KM1 and the composite cooking mode KM2, display information of the central display unit 16M in the coordinated cooking mode KM1, the composite cooking mode KM2, etc., and further display information on the right display unit 16R and the left display unit 16L. However, in all cooking modes including the coordinated cooking mode KM1, information that serves as a command to start a heating operation is not included. Therefore, the cooking appliance 1 does not start a heating operation by this remote operation information.

The "information regarding input operations" includes the recipe data CD for executing the cooking menu of the collaborative cooking mode KM1. In other words, it includes setting information for executing cooking step 1 and cooking step 2.

The "remote operation information" may not include the display information of the center display unit 16M and the display information related to the right display unit 16R and the left display unit 16L. In addition, command information for the functions that can be set using the function setting key 115 described above may not be transmitted from the communication terminal 200, and may not be generated by the communication terminal 200. In other words, the function setting mode of the cooking appliance 1 cannot be activated from the communication terminal 200.

The central processing unit 212 executes the overall processing of the communication terminal 200 according to the control programs stored in the ROM/RAM, reading data required in the process of executing the processing from the ROM/RAM, and storing data generated in the process of executing the processing in the ROM/RAM.

The storage unit 220 is a non-volatile semiconductor memory that can store information about the cooking appliance 1 that is read from the transmission unit and the reception unit 210. For example, it is used to temporarily store the recipe data CD for a specific cooking menu that is downloaded (read) from the cloud server 300.

The information on the cooking appliance 1 is obtained from a first server 321 (not shown), which is a component of the cloud server 300. The information may then be obtained by the communication terminal 200 from the first server 321 via the network NW.

When the user US touches a specific portion of the terminal display unit 216 of the communication terminal 200, the remote operation information generating unit 219 generates remote operation information based on this touch signal.
The remote operation information is transmitted from the transmission unit 10 to the cooking appliance 1. Although the transmission unit 210 is called a "transmission unit/reception unit" because it also functions as a reception unit, it may be changed to a configuration having only a transmission function.

If the cooking appliance 1 is already powered and started, the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 treats the received remote operation information as input operation information for a cooking mode. For example, when a remote operation signal related to the linked cooking mode KM1 is received, the standby initial screen 16MH of the central display unit 16M transitions to a reception standby screen (not shown) for one cooking menu (e.g., hamburger) in the linked cooking mode KM1. These linked operations have been described with reference to FIG. 53 etc.

On the other hand, on the communication terminal 200 side that transmitted the remote operation information, the display on the terminal side display unit 216 changes based on the remote operation information. In other words, the contents of the display screen of the terminal side display unit 216 on the display operation unit 225 of the communication terminal 200 and the display contents of the central display unit 16M of the cooking appliance 1 change in coordination with each other from time to time, but the timing of the change is not completely synchronized with the cooking appliance 1.

Even if the communication terminal 200 generates command data for a specific cooking menu as remote operation information, the cooking appliance 1 will only recognize the command data as valid setting information after a predetermined process (including determination) has been completed on the cooking appliance 1 side.

The recipe data CD for a cooking menu (e.g., hamburger steak) in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 includes data specifying the heating means from cooking step 1 to the final cooking step 2, and information on the default control conditions (e.g., heat level, heat value, heating time, etc., but not limited to these). This information on the control conditions (recipe data CD) is transmitted all at once when a specific transmission key 240 (see FIG. 61) on the communication terminal 200 is pressed.

In other words, the data of detailed control conditions that the user US can arbitrarily set on the first specific screen 16M1 can be sent to the cooking appliance 1. As described above, the recipe data CD referred to here is simplified recipe data CD. The simplified recipe data CD does not include information specific to the heating means (including information indicating the attributes of the heating means and information on the heating port), cooking process information, information indicating the order of the heating means to be driven, etc., but is mainly composed of instructions and data (sometimes called "commands" or "command data") that determine the control conditions such as heating capacity and heating time.
That is, the "simplified recipe data" CD mainly consists of identification information for specifying a cooking menu (for example, "hamburger steak") and setting data (command data) for the control conditions.

The food component data acquisition unit 233 has data (food component data) on the components (e.g., energy content, protein, etc.) and nutritional components (e.g., vitamins A, C, iron, minerals, etc.) of various foods.

The "food composition data" of the food composition data acquisition unit 233 does not have to be stored from the time of manufacture of the communication terminal 200. For example, in Japan, the Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology has made the "Standard Tables of Food Composition in Japan" available to the public (on the Internet, etc.). Therefore, the communication terminal 200 may acquire data on specific foods from this data and store the data for each food in the food composition data acquisition unit 233.

When the food component data acquisition unit 233 acquires recipe data CD for a cooking menu (e.g., hamburger steak) from the cloud server 300, if data on nutritional components, etc. for the food cannot be obtained from the cloud server 300, the food component data acquisition unit 233 can supplement the data on nutritional components, etc. in the communication terminal 200 and provide it to the cooking appliance 1. This will be described in detail later.

Next, we will explain Figure 57.
In FIG. 57, steps SE1 to SE12 show the main operation steps from the start-up of the communication terminal 200, and mainly show the operation of transmitting the recipe data CD.

The user US operates the touch operation unit 215 of the communication terminal 200 to connect to the cloud server 300 or to activate a search function (step SE1). Then, the user operates search condition input keys and cooking menu name input keys, etc., displayed on the terminal display unit 216 to search for cooking menus (step SE2).
The user US can touch the terminal display unit 216 to display the desired cooking menu on the terminal display unit 216 (for example, one or more cooking menu options are displayed on one display screen) (step SE3).

The terminal display unit 216 may be configured to simultaneously display a list of various cooking menus in a predetermined order and rules by default. For example, the cooking menus may be displayed in alphabetical order based on their names, or the user US may use a search function to search by voice input, such as by uttering the name of the dish, such as "hamburger steak."

When one of the cooking menus displayed on the terminal display unit 216 is selected (by a touch operation), the screen switches to a "dedicated screen" for that cooking menu. In other words, when only such a specific cooking menu is selected, the determination in step SE4 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SE5. This "dedicated screen" will be described in FIG. 61.
On the other hand, on the terminal side display unit 216, input keys (icons) such as "Search for other menus" and "Search again" are also displayed on the screen showing the search results, so when these are touched, this step SE4 is judged as "No" and the display returns to the search input screen.

At step SE5, what is displayed on the terminal display unit 216 is a first screen 216A (see FIG. 61), which will be described later.
The first screen 216A is a screen on the terminal display unit 216 that displays identification information (such as the name of the cooking method) related to one selected cooking menu and information such as the heating means to be used.

When one cooking menu is selected by touch operation (touch operation of input key 237A shown in FIG. 61 etc. described later) on first screen 216A showing such search results, or when a cooking menu in the displayed range is selected by voice input, recipe selection unit 232 detects that one cooking menu has been selected (step SE6). Then, advance notice information 1 (201) described later is transmitted. Furthermore, the display of first screen 216A on terminal side display unit 216 is changed to that of second screen 216B. In other words, first screen 216A, second screen 216B, and further third screen 216C described later are all configured as "touch input type display screens" that allow input by touch operation of user US.

The central processing unit (CPU) 212 displays, on the first screen 216A, identification information (such as the name of the cooking method) relating to the selected cooking menu and information such as the heating means to be used.
The first screen 216A will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 60(A) and FIG. 61, and the recipe data information displayed on the first screen 216A is, for example, as follows:
(1) Cooking time (2) Serving size (2 servings, 4 servings, etc.)
(3) Ingredients (4) Preparation (5) Cooking method (name of cooking mode to be selected on the cooking device 1, input operation section, specific input keys, etc.)

When the user US touches the confirmation keys (icons) 237A, 237B (see FIG. 60) for the cooking menu on the first screen 216A, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation and switches the display content from the first screen 216A to the second screen 216B (step SE7). If the cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A is not to be selected, the process returns from step SE6 to step SE2, where another cooking menu can be searched for and selected.

When the confirmation key (icon) 237 for this cooking menu is touched, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 reads out corresponding information KID capable of identifying a specific input key (e.g., 153M) corresponding to the confirmed cooking menu from the storage unit 220 or the cooking appliance database 217, and transmits it all at once when transmitting the "advance notice information 1 (201)" described below.

In FIG. 57, step SE6A is shown in dashed lines because it is prepared as an optional function. In this step SE6A, when the confirmation key (icon) 237 (see FIG. 61) for the cooking menu is touched, the process displays on the second screen 216B that "Advance notice information 1" (201) has been sent to the cooking appliance 1.

The advance notice information 1 (also called "advance notice") 201 is intended to indicate that the cooking appliance 1 is in the preparation stage for sending one piece of recipe data CD. However, in the case of a cooking menu that requires multiple cooking steps, such as the linked cooking mode KM1, the advance notice information is sent multiple times for each cooking step, such as cooking step 1, cooking step 2, etc. This advance notice information 1 (201) may be simple data that is sufficient to identify the type of cooking mode and the cooking menu.

After the advance notice information 1 (201) is transmitted, that is, when the confirmation keys (icons) 237A, 237B (see FIG. 60) of the cooking menu are touched, the terminal side display unit 216 switches from the first screen 216A to the second screen 216B.
The second screen 216B includes information for requesting a decision as to whether or not to transmit recipe data to the cooking appliance 1 (this will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 61).
Depending on the cooking menu, either the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L may be usable. In that case, the advance notice information 1 (201) includes information that prompts the user US to select whether to use the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L.

In response to the advance notice information 1 (201), the cooker 1 is required to press a specific input key (for example, 152L or 152R) on either the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L. In response to this operation, the cooker 1 transmits to the communication terminal 200 "selection information A (confirmation information A)" 202 indicating that a specific heating port has been selected.
The correspondence information KID capable of identifying one specific input key may be included in the selection information (confirmation information) A and transmitted together with the advance notice information 1 (201). With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably determine the specific input key that requires the operation of the user US. However, in the cooking device 1 of this embodiment 1, the correspondence information KID is held (stored) in the storage device 41, so the correspondence information KID does not necessarily have to be transmitted from the communication terminal 200.

When cooking step 1 of the linked cooking mode KM1 is performed using the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, if recipe data is not used, the start key 151M on the central operation unit 15M is pressed, and then the input key 153R on the right operation unit 15R or the input key 153L on the left operation unit 15L is pressed in a two-step method.

In contrast, when cooking using recipe data, even if cooking step 1 of the linked cooking mode KM1 is performed using the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, the object of the operation on the cooking appliance 1 that is requested by the second screen 216B is the left and right operation units 15L, 15R (specific input keys 152L, 152R). In other words, "selection information A" 202 indicating that a specific heating port has been selected is transmitted from the left and right operation units 15L, 15R, and is not transmitted by operation of the central operation unit 15M. This is different from the case of linked cooking with manual settings as described in FIG. 20. In FIG. 20, either the right IH coil 9R or the left IH coil 9L was selected by operating the input keys 157M, 156M adjacent to each other on the left and right.

When the communication terminal 200 receives the above-mentioned "selection information A" (confirmation information A) 202 for the heater port, the determination in step SE8 is "Yes."
In this Figure 57, steps SE6A and SE8 are provided as optional functions, but if the optional functions are not used, the process proceeds to step SE9 while maintaining the state of second screen 216B, which began displaying at step SE6.

The step SE8 is for judging whether or not an operation of pressing any of the input keys (152L or 152R) of the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L of the cooking appliance 1 has been performed.
When a specific input key on either the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L is pressed, the cooking appliance 1 transmits a signal indicating the result to the communication terminal 200, so that the determination in step SE8 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SE8A. This step SE8 is also prepared as an optional function.

Since the signal of advance notice information 1 (201) is transmitted to the cooking appliance 1 in step SE6, upon receiving the advance notice information 1 (201) (step SE8), the control device 40 may start a process to prepare for cooking using the recipe data CD obtained from the communication terminal 200. For example, a warning message such as "Recipe data will now be received, so other cooking cannot be started" may be displayed on all display units 16 (16M, 16L, 16R).

Meanwhile, the communication terminal 200 repeatedly checks at regular intervals whether selection information A (202) has arrived from the cooking appliance 1, and if it has not been received, proceeds to time limit processing (step SE12). The time limit processing measures the elapsed time from step SE6, and when a certain time limit (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, error processing is performed and the operation in FIG. 56 is stopped. In other words, even if the user US forgets to perform the sending operation midway, the process automatically returns to the stage of step SE2.

If selection information A (202) for heating ports 4L, 4R is received from the cooking appliance 1, step SE8 is judged as "Yes", and the second screen 126B shown in Figure 61 (B), which began to be displayed in step SE6, is changed to second screen A (216B1) shown in Figure 62 (A).
Then, on the second screen A (216B1), it is recommended that the user touch the input key 240 for sending on that second screen A.

In step SE9, if the user US touches the send key (icon) 240 on the second screen A (216B1), or touches the send key 240 on the second screen B (216B) shown in Figure 61 (B), step SE9 becomes "Yes" and proceeds to step SE10.
In Step SE10, the cooking menu selected in Step SE6 (the first part M1 or the second part M2 of the recipe data CD) is transmitted to the cooker 1.

Next, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 switches the display content from the second screen 216B or the second display screen A (216B1) to the third screen (step SE11). There are two types of third screens 216C1 and 216C2. This will be explained in FIG. 63.

Next, we will explain Figure 58.
FIG. 58 is an operational explanatory diagram (flowchart) showing the relationship between the recipe data receiving process and the cooking process of the communication terminal (information processing terminal device) 200 shown in FIG.
Steps SD1 to SD14 show the operation of the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200.

The user US transmits the first part M1 and the second part M2 of the recipe data CD to the cooking appliance 1 using the communication terminal 200 in the following order:
First, when the confirmation key (icon) 237A (described in FIG. 60) for the cooking menu is touched on the first screen 216A, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation and selects cooking process 1 (step SD1).

In the next step SD2, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 transmits advance notice information 1 (201) to the cooking appliance 1. Also, the display of the first screen 216A in step SD1 is switched to the display of the second screen 216B shown in Fig. 60(B).
That is, the second screen 216B waits for the arrival of the selection information A (202) for cooking process 1, which is sent from the cooking appliance 1 with the operation of a specific input key (152R, etc.) as a trigger (step SD3). At this stage, the second screen 216B displays input keys 240 for sending data (setting information) related to cooking process 1 from the recipe data CD.

When the specific input key 152R of the right operation unit 15R of the cooking appliance 1 is touched, for example, the selection information A (202) is transmitted from the cooking appliance 1 and is received by the communication terminal 200 (step SD4).
Next, communication terminal 200 changes to display second screen A (216B1) as shown in Fig. 62 (A). Second screen A (216B1) displays input key 240 for transmitting first portion M1 including data related to cooking step 1 of recipe data CD (step SD5). When input key 240 is pressed, the data of first portion M1 is transmitted to cooking appliance 1 (step SD6).

The second screen A (216B1) described in FIG. 62(A) is displayed by an option setting, so this second screen A (216B1) does not have to be displayed. In that case, after operating a specific input key (152R, etc.), touch operation can be performed on the input key 240 on the second screen 216B shown in FIG. 61(B).

When the data of the first portion M1 transmitted in step SD6 is normally received by the cooking appliance 1, the cooking process 1 can be started in the cooking appliance 1.
When cooking step 1 is completed, the cooking appliance 1 transmits information indicating the completion of cooking step 1 (step SD7). However, step SD7 shown in Fig. 58 is added as an option setting, and step SD7 is not essential. However, the presence of step SD7 allows the communication terminal 200 to know that the heating pause period P3 has begun. Therefore, advance preparations can be made to provide the cooking appliance 1 with the data of the next second portion M2.

When the data of the first portion M1 is normally received by the cooking appliance 1, the communication terminal 200 automatically returns to displaying the first screen 216A. Alternatively, when the input key (icon) 244C for returning to the cooking menu display screen is pressed on the third screen (described in FIG. 63) 216C1 that notifies the user of the normal communication result, the display returns to displaying the first screen 216A.

Next, the user US transmits the second part M2 of the recipe data CD to the cooking appliance 1 using the communication terminal 200 in the following order:
First, when the confirmation key (icon) 237B (described in FIG. 60) for the cooking menu is touched on the first screen 216A, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation and selects cooking process 2 (step SD8).

In the next step SD9, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 transmits advance notice information 2 (201) to the cooking appliance 1. The display also switches from the first screen 216A to the second screen 216B. That is, the operation of a specific input key (153M), which is the prerequisite for cooking process 2, is used as a trigger to display a screen that awaits the arrival of selection information B (202) transmitted from the cooking appliance 1 (step SD10). At this stage, the second screen 216B displays an input key 240 for transmitting the second portion M2 of the recipe data CD, which includes data related to cooking process 2.

When the specific input key 153M on the central operation unit 15M of the cooking appliance 1 is touched, the selected information A (202) is transmitted from the cooking appliance 1, which is received by the communication terminal 200. Although not specifically shown, the communication terminal 200 changes the display to the second screen A (216B1). The second screen A (216B1) displays an input key 240 (not shown) for transmitting the second portion M2 of the recipe data CD, which includes data related to cooking step 2. When the input key 240 is pressed, the data of the second portion M2 (setting information B) is transmitted to the cooking appliance 1 (step SD13).

When the data of the second portion M2 transmitted in step SD13 is normally received by the cooking appliance 1, the cooking process 2 can be started in the cooking appliance 1.
When the input key 152M of the cooking appliance 1 is touched to end the cooking process 2, the cooking appliance 1 ends the cooking process 2. The cooking appliance 1 transmits information indicating the end of the cooking process 2, and the communication terminal 200 receives this information (step SD14). This allows the user US to know the end of the cooking process 2 not only from the cooking appliance 1 but also from the communication terminal 200.

Next, we will explain Figure 59.
FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing main operations of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 after receiving data from the communication terminal (information processing terminal) 200 shown in FIG.
In the control device 40, the communication unit 51, which is responsible for data acquisition processing, cooperates with the data acquisition unit 53 (see Figs. 10 and 11) to perform the operations of steps SC1 to SC11 described below. As described above, the recipe data CD is acquired from the communication terminal 200 for each cooking step (first part M1, second part M2, etc.). However, in Fig. 59, the acquisition of each part is not distinguished, and the common parts are described.

In the heating cooker 1, at the stage of establishing an initial communication state with the communication terminal 200, the communication unit 51 provides the communication terminal 200 with data including the “device identification information” (also referred to as “preparation information 203”).
In the state where communication has been established, when recipe data CD is subsequently received from the outside via the communication unit 51, the data is temporarily stored in the temporary memory (step SC1).
The communication unit 51 first obtains the overall "status information" of the cooking appliance 1. This status information is information indicating the status of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1. Therefore, for example, the status information is information confirmed by the heating control unit 43 as to what status the first heating means HM1 to the third heating means HM3 are in.

For example, the communication unit 51 acquires information such as the fact that the control conditions have already been set (e.g., induction heating level 5, heating for 10 minutes), that the device is in a standby state immediately before heating begins, and that the device is receiving a temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor group 30 (step SC2).

The communication unit 51 repeatedly performs such a status checking operation on each component part of the cooking appliance 1 at regular time intervals to collect the latest accurate data.
In this way, information that can determine whether the cooking appliance 1 is in a state where it can transition to control according to the contents of the received recipe data CD is collected by the communication unit 51. That is, the communication unit 51 of the cooking appliance 1 compares the contents of the data, including the device identification information, transmitted immediately before with the contents of the recipe data CD received from the communication terminal 200 in step SC1 (step SC3). Note that, as shown by the dashed line between steps SC3 and SC2 in Fig. 59, data collection and comparison are performed many times within a certain time limit.

If it is determined that there is no discrepancy between the contents of the data sent from the communication unit 51 and the contents of the received recipe data, the determination of the "status information" is terminated (step SC4). Note that in this step SC4, it is also determined at the same time whether the "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are satisfied, such as the state of the "peak cut value" that specifies the upper limit of the temperature of the heating chamber 6 and the maximum power consumption.

If the result of the determination in step SC4 is "Yes", the data acquisition unit 53 receives the determination result from the communication unit 51 and stores the recipe data CD in a specified memory area in preparation for the heating and cooking that will be performed immediately afterwards (step SC5).

Next, the process proceeds to step SC6, where the data acquisition unit 53 transmits a signal (status check result) indicating that the recipe data CD has been successfully acquired from the communication unit 51 to the communication terminal 200, which is the sender of the recipe data CD. The "status check result" here corresponds to the processing of step SG10 described in FIG. 65. In addition, upon receiving the information on the status check result, the communication terminal 200 determines that the transmission of the recipe data CD has been successful (described in step SG11 in FIG. 65).

Furthermore, the data acquisition unit 53 displays on the display unit 51 that the recipe data CD has been acquired (step SC6). An example of this display is described with reference to FIG.
At this stage, the "setting information A" included in the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 is the control conditions (for example, heating power is 1000 W, heating time is 10 minutes) that are prepared in advance on the communication terminal 200 side. In other words, the remote operation information 219 includes information on the control conditions that are set as defaults.

Next, in step SC7, it is determined whether the user US has agreed to the control conditions. If the user US presses the start key 151M, the user US is deemed to have agreed to the control conditions, and the control device 40 treats the setting information A as "confirmed setting information" and stores it in the "confirmed setting information" storage area in the recipe data storage unit 42 (step SC8). Then, if cooking process 1 is to be started with the right operation unit 15R, the device transitions to a standby processing state in which it waits for the input key 153R to be touched (step SC9).

On the other hand, if the user US wishes to change the control conditions displayed in step SC6, by touching the input keys 156M, 157M, a different control condition is displayed in the central display section 16M in response to that operation (step SC10). Then, since it is possible to return to step SC7, the user agrees to the revised control condition and proceeds to step SC8. In other words, some of the control conditions of the setting information A are changed by input from the user US, and the setting information A becomes the "confirmed setting information".

At the stage of step SC8, the state of the central display unit 15M immediately before pressing the start key 151M is, for example, a display indicating that "Press the start key to begin heating" as described in FIG. 46. In contrast, after pressing the start key 151M, a display is displayed on the display unit of the corresponding heating unit to encourage the final operation. When using the right heating port 4R as described above, a display is displayed on the right display unit 15R recommending pressing the input key 153R. Also, the light-emitting unit 21R of the corresponding input key (153R) flashes.

On the other hand, if the determination result of step SC4 is "No", the data acquisition unit 53 receives the determination result from the communication unit 51 and transmits a signal (notification of non-permission) including the content that the recipe data CD cannot be received from the communication unit 51 to the outside (the communication terminal 200 of the transmission source) (step SC11). The "notification of non-permission" here is transmitted to the communication terminal 200 at the time of step SG10 described in FIG. 65.
In FIG. 59, the case is that of a cooking menu belonging to the cooperative cooking mode KM1, but such a "notification of non-permission" message is also sent for the combined cooking mode KM2 and the single cooking mode KM1.

When the communication terminal 200 receives the non-permission notification of step SC11 from the cooking appliance 1, it displays the notification on the terminal display unit 216. The notification may also be made through the speaker 214 of the communication terminal 200. These will be described in detail in FIG. 62.

Next, we will explain Figure 60.
FIG. 60 is an operational explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the recipe data display screen and cooking steps of the communication terminal (information processing terminal device) 200 shown in FIG.
60(A) shows the first screen 216A. That is, it shows a state in which recipe information for one cooking menu (in this case, "acqua pazza") that the user US has already desired is found and displayed.

60A, reference numeral 245 denotes a display section for identifying information (cooking menu name) of the recipe data CD, which displays, for example, the name or abbreviation of the cooking method.
Reference numeral 235 denotes an image display section that displays schematic diagrams or photographs (still images) that clearly show the foods to be cooked on the cooking menu, and is displayed in the vicinity of the identification information display section 245 .

60(A), the first screen 216A simultaneously displays the following six pieces of information in addition to the information in the identification information display section 245. However, due to limitations in the display area of the terminal side display section 216, not all of the information can be viewed in a list form.
(1) Cooking time (2) Serving size (2 servings, 4 servings, etc.)
(3) Ingredients (4) Preparation (5) Cooking method (cooking direction in cooking step 1, cooking step 2, etc. performed in cooking device 1, etc.)
(6) Cooking process information (including heating means and its control conditions, etc.) 236A, 236B.
In Fig. 60(A), as shown in a first display portion 251 and a second display portion 252 described later, default values of control conditions such as "IH optimum temperature 200°C" and "grill for 10 minutes" are shown. Such default values of control conditions can also be included in the recipe data CD and transmitted. Therefore, the cooking appliance 1 can obtain data such as "preheat temperature 200°C" as setting information for the control device 40.

The cooking process information 236A, 236B is displayed in one place for each cooking process. For example, in a cooking menu having cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 (for example, the above-mentioned "Aquapazza"), the cooking process information 236A, 236B is displayed in one place each at the end of the section displaying the contents of cooking process 1 and cooking process 2.
60(A) shows only a part of the first screen 216A. When the first screen 216A is moved upward while touching it with the fingertip FG as shown by the dashed line, the screen can be scrolled upward. In other words, the first screen 216A continues vertically, and other related information is displayed in sequence from the bottom. This allows detailed information such as ingredients and preparation to be displayed in sequence.

237 is a confirmation key (icon) for selecting cooking step 1 of one cooking menu (for example, the above-mentioned "Aquapazza") displayed on this first screen 216A. This confirmation key 237A is a confirmation key (icon) for the cooking menu described in step SE5 of FIG.
Reference numeral 251 denotes a first display portion in which an explanation regarding cooking step 1 in the recipe is displayed. The first portion M1 may or may not include information of the first display portion 251 in addition to the information of the identification information display portion 245 and the cooking step information 236A.
As is clear from FIG. 60(A), in the first screen 216A, the input keys 237A and the cooking process information 236A are arranged at the very end of the section displaying the “How to make” for cooking process 1, i.e., adjacent to the bottom end of the first display portion 251.

Next, we will explain Figure 60(B).
Since Figure 60 (B) is a screen that continues from the bottom end of the first screen 216A shown in Figure 60 (A), neither the identification information (cooking menu name) display section 245 of the recipe data CD nor the image display section 235 is displayed, but they may be always displayed at the top of the first screen 216A.
In the recipe, the cooking step information 236B and the input key (icon) 237B are arranged adjacent to the bottom of the second display portion 252 related to cooking step 2. As shown in Fig. 60(B) , the cooking method for the "heating pause period P3" between cooking steps 1 and 2 is also displayed.
As shown in Figures 60(A) and (B), the first screen 216A displays information on the cooking method and ingredients for cooking process 1 through heating pause period P3, and also cooking process 2, as well as information on control conditions such as heat and heating time, continuously from the top to the bottom of the screen in the order of the cooking processes.

The second portion M2 may or may not include information from the second display portion 252 in addition to the information from the identification information display portion 245 and the cooking process information 236B.

Next, we will explain Figure 61.
FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the communication terminal 200 shown in FIG.
61(A) shows the first screen 216A, which shows a state in which the user US has already found and displayed recipe information for one cooking menu that he or she desires.

In Fig. 61(A), 234 is a character display section showing the type of display information of the first screen 216A. In Fig. 61(A), "IH Menu" is displayed to show that it is an induction heating cooking menu. Note that this character display section 234 does not have to be displayed as shown in Fig. 60(A).
On the first screen 216A, the image display section 235, such as a schematic diagram or a photograph (still image) that allows a clear image of the food to be cooked for the cooking menu, is displayed adjacent to the identification information (cooking menu name) display section 245.

237A is a confirmation key (icon) for selecting one of the cooking menus displayed on this first screen 216A. This confirmation key 237A is the selection key (icon) for cooking process 1 described in step SD1 of FIG. 58. 238 is an input key (icon) for issuing a command to close this first screen 216A.

Next, we will explain Figure 61 (B).
When the user US touches the confirmation key (icon) 237A (or 237B) for the cooking menu on the first screen 216A, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation and switches the display from the first screen 216A to the second screen 216B as shown in FIG. 61 (B).

In the second screen 216B, 239 is a character display section showing the type of display information of the second screen 216B. In Fig. 61(B), "Preparation for sending IH settings" is displayed to show that the preparation stage is for sending setting information for induction heating cooking. In other words, it shows that the preparation stage is for sending setting information for cooking with an induction heating source.
Numeral 240 denotes an input key (icon) for commanding transmission, and when this key is pressed, the recipe data of the cooking menu selected in Fig. 61 (A) is divided into two parts, a first part M1 and a second part M2, and sequentially transmitted to the cooking appliance 1. Note that the data of the first part M1 and the second part M2 are not transmitted consecutively, but this will be described in detail later.

The second screen 216B shown in FIG. 61(B) is the “cooking process 1 transmission waiting screen” in step SE7 shown in FIG.
In this state of the second screen 216B, the user US can recognize that he or she needs to touch and operate a specific input key (icon) 152R or 152L on either the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L of the cooking appliance 1.
After this touch operation, the input key 240 on the second screen 216B is pressed. Note that 241 is an input key for canceling, and by touching this key, the state can be returned to that shown in FIG.

Next, we will explain Figure 62 (A).
FIG. 62 (A) shows a second screen 216B1 showing a standby state in which, upon receiving selection information A (202) by touching a specific input key (such as 152R), a transmission process is executed for the first part M1 or the second part M2 of the recipe data CD for executing one cooking menu.
FIG. 62(B) shows another second screen 216B2 which displays a transmission result different from that shown in FIG. 62(A) upon receiving selection information A (202) by touching a specific input key (such as 152R).
These two types of second screens 216B1 and 216B2 are not dedicated screens that are necessarily displayed on the terminal side display unit 216 after recipe data CD is transmitted from the communication terminal 200. A transition from the state of Fig. 61(A) or Fig. 61(B) to Fig. 63(A) or Fig. 63(B) may also be made.

There are at least two types of second screens 216B1 and 216B2 as shown in Fig. 62(A) and (B). The first screen, like the second display screen 216B1 shown in Fig. 62(A), displays a message requesting that the user operate the input key 240 to transmit setting information (either the first part M1 or the second part M2) because a specific input key (e.g., 152R) on the cooking appliance 1 side has already been operated.
The other is a second screen 216B2 which notifies that the desired heating port or heating means cannot be used due to circumstances on the cooking device 1 side. In other words, the second screen B (216B2) in Fig. 62(B) is displayed when the input key (icon) 237A on the first screen 216A is pressed and the heating means to be used in the selected cooking menu is being used for another cooking.
As is clear from the second screen 216B2 in FIG. 62 (B), advice information is displayed indicating that the recipe data should be sent after the cooking currently being used (right heating port 4R) is finished.

Next, we will explain Figure 63.
Fig. 63(A) is a third screen 216C1 displaying the transmission result, and Fig. 63(B) is another third screen 216C2 displaying the transmission result.
Either one of these third screens 216C1 and 216C2 is a dedicated screen that is always displayed on the terminal side display unit 216 after the recipe data CD is transmitted from the communication terminal 200.

There are two types of third screens 216C1 and 216C2. The first screen is the third screen 216C1 shown in Fig. 63(A). The fact that the transmission was successful is displayed in text on the display unit 244A.
The other is a third screen 216C2 which is displayed when the transmission from the cooking appliance 1 ends in failure, as shown in FIG. 63(B).

As shown in FIG. 63(B), the third screen 216C2 displays in the display section 244B a message indicating that transmission from the cooking appliance 1 has failed, along with the cause of the failure.

Next, we will explain Figures 64 and 65.
Fig. 64 shows main operation steps of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 and related operation steps of the communication terminal 200. Further detailed steps will be described with reference to Fig. 65.
64 to 66 omit illustration of wireless communication between the cloud server 300 and the cooking appliance 1. Therefore, acquisition of the "status information" periodically performed on the cooking appliance 1 side, repeated and continuous transmission of the result to the cloud server 300, etc. are not shown in these Figs. 63 to 65.

In FIG. 64, steps SG 1 to SG 12 indicate main operation steps of the control device 40 and the communication terminal 200 .
SP1 is a "communication establishment step" (preparation step) after the communication state is established, and is a stage in which information regarding specific recipe data CD is neither transmitted nor received.

The next step SP2A is a "key identification step" in which advance notice information 1 (201) is sent from communication terminal 200 (cooking step 1), and the content of advance notice information 1 (201) is determined by control device 40. In this key identification step SP2A, the specific input key to be operated on cooking device 1 is determined from the cooking menu information (including identification information) specified in advance notice information 1 (201).

The next step SP2B is a "notification step" in which, based on the result of the determination in the key determination step SP2A, the specific input key is displayed on the display unit 16. Note that the correspondence between the specific input key and the display unit 16 is held as data in advance on the control device 40 side, so that, for example, if it is determined that the specific input key is "153M" on the central operation unit 15M, a command is issued from the control device 40 to display it on the central display unit 16M.

SP3 is a “confirmation step” in which the cooking appliance 1 confirms the contents of the advance notice information 1 (201) and transmits a confirmation signal (selection information A) 202 to the communication terminal 200.
SP4 is a "receiving step" for acquiring information on recipe data CD relating to one food item to be cooked.
SP5 is a "standby step" (standby state before cooking) in which the cooking appliance 1 waits for a command to start cooking after successfully acquiring the recipe data CD.
In FIG. 64, the following description will be given focusing on the process from the point in time when a communication state is established between the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal 200 (step SG1).
Note that Figure 64 shows the acquisition of the data portion of cooking process 1 of recipe data CD, i.e., the data of the first portion M1. To acquire the data portion of cooking process 2, i.e., the data of the second portion M2, it is necessary to execute step SG3B and subsequent steps again.

The communication state is established by, for example, transmitting and receiving a preparation signal (preparation information) 203 for mutual authentication between the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal 200. The preparation signal (preparation information) 203 is automatically transmitted when the cooking appliance 1 is started up. Alternatively, it is transmitted when a specific input key (the input key 153M) is pressed. The preparation signal 203 is a unified signal regardless of the heating means or cooking menu, and includes at least the device identification information of the cooking appliance 1. In addition, as described in FIG. 41, two-dimensional information 60B that guides the communication terminal 200 to the cloud server 300 is displayed on the initial standby screen 16MH, so that the communication terminal 200 can easily prepare to obtain recipe data from the cloud server 300.

Figure 64 illustrates the case where a cooking menu related to the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is executed. Note that, as described above, the communication terminal 200 cannot specify a cooking mode and search for cooking menus by that cooking mode. Also, since it is more efficient to search by cooking type (e.g., Japanese, Chinese, etc.), name, abbreviation, etc., rather than searching by cooking mode, the communication terminal 200 of this embodiment 1 employs a method of extracting cooking menus by cooking name (including abbreviation), etc.

First, the communication terminal 200 searches for a cooking menu. Recipe data for the desired cooking menu may be obtained in advance from the cloud server 300 (step SG2). At this point, the terminal display unit 216 displays a search screen 216P (not shown) that displays the search results for the cooking menu.

In the communication terminal 200, when one of the multiple cooking menus displayed on the search screen 216P is selected by touch operation, only the specific (one) cooking menu that the user US wants to cook can be displayed on the first screen 216A (see FIG. 60) (step SG3). At this point, the setting information for executing the specific one cooking menu is read from the heating cooker database 217 and temporarily stored in the recipe selection section 232.

When the user US touches the confirmation key 237A on the first screen 216A (see FIG. 60) at this step SG3 stage (step SG3A), the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation and causes the terminal display unit 216 to display the second screen 216B instead of the first screen 216A (step SG3B) (see FIG. 61).

In this embodiment 1, up until the time of step SG3B, a specific input key (for example, 153M) can be freely touched on the cooking appliance 1. When a touch operation (input operation) is performed, unique selection information A is transmitted to the communication terminal 200 (described in FIG. 66).
Therefore, in step SG3B, immediately before the second screen 216B is displayed on the terminal display unit 216, that is, at the stage of generating the advance notice information 1 (advance notice) 201 described below, it is determined whether the input key (e.g., 153M) to be operated has already been operated.

If the result of this determination is that the previously operated input key (e.g., 153M) does not match the specific input key (e.g., 152L) that needs to be operated in order for the cooking appliance 1 to obtain the cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A, advance notice information 1 (advance notice) 201 is sent to the cooking appliance 1 (step SG3B).

In this way, when the confirmation key (icon) 237A for the cooking menu is pressed, the presence or absence of a specific input key (e.g., 152L) that requires operation is determined, and the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200 generates and transmits advance notice information 1 (201).

As described in Fig. 61 (B), the second screen 216B displays information (selection request information) requesting an input operation of a specific input key for confirmation on the cooking appliance 1 side. This information includes the advance notice information 1 (201).
In the example of Fig. 61 (B), the operation of either the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L is specified. In this example, in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the first cooking step 1 may be induction heating, so that it is necessary to touch the input key 152L of the right operation unit 15R, for example.
In this case, the touch operation may be either the "long press" operation or the "short press" operation described above, but if the touch operation is a "long press" operation, the "voice input mode 1" is started.

In this way, on the cooking appliance 1 side that has received the advance notice information 1 (201), the display unit 15 (center display unit 15M, left and right display units 15L, 15R) displays that operation of either the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L is required (step SG4).

In this way, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200 determines whether there is a specific input key (e.g., 152L) that needs to be operated when the confirmation key (icon) 237A for the cooking menu is pressed, and generates advance notice information 1 (201) and transmits it to the cooking appliance 1.

If it is determined in step SG3A that a specific input key (e.g., 152L) has already been operated, the first screen 216A in FIG. 61(A) is transitioned to the second screen 216B as shown in FIG. 62(A), and advance notice information 1 (201) stating that "a specific input key needs to be operated" as shown in FIG. 61(B) is not sent again to the user US. In other words, as shown in FIG. 62(A), since a specific input key (e.g., 152L) has already been operated, a message is displayed requesting the user to press input key 240 (send button) to send.

As shown in FIG. 64, the key identification process SP2A continues until step SG4. If the user US touches a specific input key (e.g., 152L) before receiving the advance notice information 1 (advance notice) 201, such input is detected by the input signal analysis unit 52 (see FIG. 10) of the control device 40 in the key identification process SP2A, and information on the operated input key is recorded (saved) in chronological order in the storage device 41.

When the advance notice information 1 (201) is received, in the key identification step SP2A, the corresponding information KID corresponding to the cooking menu of the advance notice information 1 (201) is read from the storage device 41, and a specific input key that needs to be operated is identified.
If the extracted specific input key is the input key 153 of the central operation unit 15M and the specific input key 153M has already been touch-operated before receiving the advance notice information 1 (201), there is no need to operate it again, so this is displayed on the central display unit 16M.

On the other hand, the number of extracted specific input keys is not necessarily one. As in the first embodiment, there are the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L, and cooking can be performed using either one of the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L in the specific cooking menu selected by the user US.
In this case, if a predetermined specific input key corresponding to the cooking menu has never been touched for input before receiving the advance notice information 1 (201), the control device 40 displays information identifying the specific input key that requires input operation on the display unit 16, such as the central display unit 16M.
The following describes a case in which, after receiving the advance notice information 1 (201), the key identification process SP2A notifies the user that the specific input keys to be operated are the specific input key 152R of the right operation unit 15R and the specific input key 152L of the left operation unit 15L.

In this step SG4, when the input key 152L is touched to select the left heating port 4L, the "occupied state" of the heating means is started as described above. If, at the time of this step SG4, the input key 152R of the right operation unit 15R is operated before the input key 152L is operated, the operation of this input key 152R is recognized by the control device 40. Then, in the next step SG5, operation information of the specific input key is transmitted to the communication terminal 200.
Then, communication terminal 200 can detect that specific input key 152R has been operated.

Continuing with the explanation of FIG.
In the notification step SP2B, when the specific input key 152R is touched (step SG5), data indicating the result of this touch operation is acquired by the communication terminal 200 (step SG6). The data indicating the result of this touch operation from the cooking appliance 1 may be referred to as a "confirmation signal" or "selection information A" 202 in the following description.
In this step SG6, it is determined from the received contents of the selection information A that a specific input key (for example, 152R) has been operated after the unique selection information A (202) is received.
Therefore, on the terminal display unit 216 of the communication terminal 200, as shown in Fig. 62(A), a message "The right IH ON button has been pressed" is displayed on the second screen A (216B1) (if the option is set). If the option is not set, the state of the second screen 216B shown in Fig. 61(B) is maintained.

Next, when the input key 240 on the second screen 216B shown in FIG. 61 (B) is pressed, or when the input key 240 on the second screen A (216B1) shown in FIG. 62 (A) is pressed, the recipe data CD (setting information of the first part M1) for executing a specific cooking menu is transmitted in a lump from the communication terminal 200 (step SG7). In other words, the "command data" (setting information) for setting the cooking appliance 1 to a specific state and enabling cooking step 1 to be executed is transmitted in a lump from the communication terminal 200.

In this embodiment 1, the communication unit 51 of the cooking appliance 1 is attached to the outer wall surface of the cooking appliance 1 in the form of an adapter, and therefore, hereinafter, the communication unit 51 is referred to as a "communication adapter."

When the communication adapter 51 receives the command data (step SG8), it acquires the "status information" of the cooking appliance 1 itself, as described below. This status information is information indicating the status of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1, as described in Fig. 59. Therefore, for example, it is information ascertaining the status of the first heating means HM1 by the heating control unit 43.
In this way, the status information of the cooking appliance 1 and the contents of the received command data are analyzed to determine whether there is a problem with the execution of cooking according to the received command data (see step SG9 in FIG. 65).

When the cooking appliance 1 determines that there is no problem with carrying out the cooking, the communication adapter 51 transmits the status confirmation result to the communication terminal 200 (step SG10). Note that this transmission process corresponds to the transmission of the "permission notification" in step SC5 described in FIG. 59. If the cooking appliance 1 determines that there is a problem with carrying out the cooking, the communication adapter 51 of the cooking appliance 1 transmits data to the communication terminal 200 as a signal (notification of non-permission) including information that the recipe data CD cannot be received. This corresponds to the process of step SC11 shown in FIG. 59.

In the communications terminal 200, the central processing unit 212 analyzes the contents of the "permission notice" or "non-permission notice" from the cooking appliance 1 (step SG11).
Then, either the third screen 216C1 shown in FIG. 63(A) or the third screen 216C2 shown in FIG. 63(B) is displayed (step SG12).

As explained in FIG. 47 etc., there is a recipe data reception restriction period TZ1, so when data for a specific cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") is acquired through recipe data CD, the cooking menu cannot be changed to another cooking menu (e.g., "fried chicken" or "pork cutlet"). Therefore, there is no need to input the input keys 154M, 155M corresponding to the first area 22, and the corresponding light-emitting section 21M does not emit light. Furthermore, at this stage, the cooking menu cannot be changed by voice input either.

When cooking a specific cooking menu based on the received recipe data, the user US can change the control conditions (e.g., cooking time and target heating temperature) as appropriate using the input operation unit 15 or voice input before starting cooking, but some cooking menus do not allow the control conditions to be changed. In addition, the "setting tolerance range" of the control conditions is set in advance on the cooking device 1 side, and the "setting tolerance range" cannot be exceeded even for a cooking menu obtained from the communication terminal 200.

Cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 can be started by pressing the start key 151M on the central operation unit 15M (step SG12 in FIG. 64). However, if cooking step 1 is an induction heating source (first heating means HM1) that drives the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, it is necessary to touch the input key 153R or 153L on the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L again to start cooking step 1.

Next, we will explain Figure 65.
In FIG. 65, steps SG1 to SG16 indicate main operation steps of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 and related operation steps of the communication terminal 200.
In Figure 65, the same parts as in Figure 64 are given the same reference numerals, so the following description will focus mainly on the different parts.

Step SG9 analyzes the status information of the cooking appliance 1 and the contents of the received command data (related to cooking step 1) to determine whether there is a problem with the execution of cooking according to the received command data.
Here, the "status information" of the cooking appliance 1 is, for example, information such as "the heating power of induction heating is zero, and the appliance is in a standby state immediately before heating starts," and information such as the state upon receiving a temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor group 30 and the detected temperature, which is acquired by the communication adapter 51. Note that within the communication adapter 51, such status confirmation operations are repeated many times at regular intervals to collect the latest accurate data.
In this way, the status information of the cooking appliance 1 and the contents of the received command data are analyzed to determine whether there is a problem with the execution of cooking according to the received command data. Note that this type of determination process has been described in detail in step SC4 of Fig. 59, so details will be omitted here.

In the cooking device 1, when cooking can be started using the received recipe data, the light-emitting sections 21M, 21L, and 21R are illuminated to indicate to the user US the input key that can be operated first in the input operation section 15 to be operated.
For example, in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1,
(1) When cooking process 1 is performed in heating chamber 6, light emitting portions 21M of input keys 156M and 157M are illuminated (step SG13). Then, the process prepares for input of control conditions.
(2) If cooking step 1 is performed using either the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, the light emitting portions 21L and 21R of the input keys 154L, 154R, 155L and 155R are illuminated (step SG13).

As described above, in step SG13, the light emitting section 21 (21L, 21M, 21R) of a specific input key in the input operation section 15 selected in step SG5 is made to visually stand out by continuous illumination or blinking illumination, so that the input key to be operated first is made to stand out visually.
When the input key 152L of the left operation unit 15L is touched in step SG5, the light emitting portion 21L of the input key 153L (see FIG. 7) in the left operation unit 15L blinks or lights up continuously (step SG13). Then, the operation of the user US is guided so that induction heating cooking is started by the input key (start key) 153L.

At this point, the light-emitting parts 21L of the input keys 155L and 154L may be flashed or lit continuously so that the heat level and other adjustments can be made. However, since the heat level and time can be adjusted once induction heating has actually started, it is not necessary to flash or light them continuously.

Next, the process proceeds to step SG15. In this step SG15, when the start key 153L of the left operation unit 15L is pressed, induction heating cooking is started. Immediately after the start of heating, the communication adapter 51 of the cooking appliance 1 again performs an operation of acquiring status information at regular intervals and transmits the status information to the communication terminal 200.
In the cooperative cooking mode KM1 that does not use recipe data CD, even if cooking step 1 is the left heating port 4L, cooking is started in a two-step method of pressing the input key 151M on the central operation unit 15M and then pressing the input key 153L. In this respect, the procedures for starting cooking using the left and right heating ports 4L4R when using recipe data CD and when not using it are different.

In the next step SG16, the communication terminal 200 acquires status information data from the cooking appliance 1, and can monitor on the terminal display unit 216 that cooking is being performed according to the recipe data set by the user US. At this point, the third screen 216C is no longer displayed on the terminal display unit 216.

The reception restriction period TZ1 starts from step SG5 shown in FIG. 65. That is, if the control device 40 (input signal analysis unit 52) determines that any one of the specific input keys 152L, 152R, 153M has been operated after the notification process SP2B (see FIG. 63), the reception restriction period (TZ1: see FIG. 47) starts from that point.

If a specific input key (e.g., 153M) is operated before the notification step SP2B, a reception restriction period (TZ1: see FIG. 47) starts from the time the specific input key (e.g., 153M) is operated. When this reception restriction period TZ1 starts, the input functions of the specific input keys 152L, 152R, 153M and other input keys (excluding the start and stop switches of input keys 151M, 152M, etc.) in the "irregular state" are disabled. In other words, a valid input signal cannot be transmitted from the input operation unit 15 to the control device 40. As a result, it becomes impossible to obtain recipe data CD for another cooking menu or input a cooking mode (e.g., linked cooking mode KM1).

The "irregular state" refers to a state other than the case where the cooking appliance 1 requests the user US to touch a specific input key (e.g., 153M) upon receiving advance notice information 1 (advance notice) 201 from the communication terminal 200. In other words, it refers to a state in which a new cooking menu is selected or a control condition is set by operating an input key other than the specific input key shown on the display unit 16 in the notification process SP2B.

Next, we will explain Figure 66.
Fig. 66 is a time chart 3 showing the cooperative operation between the communication terminal (information processing terminal) 200 and the cooking appliance 1 in the cooking system of the first embodiment. Basically, after the advance notice information 1 (201) arrives from the communication terminal 200, a specific input key (e.g., 153M) is operated on the cooking appliance 1 in response to the advance notice information 1 (see Figs. 64 and 65). However, Fig. 66 is an exceptional case. That is, Fig. 66 shows a case where a specific input key (e.g., 153M) is operated on the cooking appliance 1 before the advance notice information 1 (201) arrives from the communication terminal 200.

In FIG. 66, steps SG1 to SG12 indicate main operation steps of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 and related operation steps of the communication terminal 200.
SP1 is a "communication establishment step SP1" (preparation step) after the communication state is established as described in Fig. 64. This is a stage in which information regarding specific recipe data CD is not transmitted or received.

The next step SP2A is a "key identification step" in which advance notice information 1 (201) is transmitted from communication terminal 200 and the content of advance notice information 1 (201) is judged by control device 40. This key identification step SP2A starts when a specific input key (e.g., 153M) is touched on cooking device 1. Alternatively, it starts when display screen 2C is displayed on display unit 16 (central display unit 16M) and acquisition operation support information 60P is displayed as described in FIG. 41.
Step SG1A is a step in which the display screen 2C (see FIG. 41) is displayed. In this step SG1A, when the approach of the communication terminal 200 is detected and the communication establishment step SP1 is started, the display unit 16 can prompt the user to operate a specific input key to acquire recipe data CD from the outside (display screen 2C in FIG. 41).

When the user US touches an appropriate specific input key (e.g., 153M) to execute a desired cooking menu (step SG1B), history information of this input operation is recorded (stored) in the storage device 41. The cooking device 1 also transmits information of the specific input key that has been input (corresponding information KID) to the communication terminal 200 as selection information A (202). The central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200 stores the selection information A (202) including the information of the specific input key that has been input (corresponding information KID) in the cooking device database 217 or the storage unit 220.
SG3 indicates a stage where a specific cooking menu is displayed on terminal display unit 216 of communication terminal 200.

As explained in FIG. 64, step SG4 is a display step performed by the cooking appliance 1 upon receiving the advance notice information 1 (201), but this may be performed immediately after the "first judgment" of the next step SG5A. For this reason, it is indicated by a dashed frame. For example, the display unit 15 (central display unit 15M, left and right display units 15L, 15R) displays that operation of one of the specific input keys 152R, 152L on the right operation unit 15R and left operation unit 15L is required. In the case of the specific input key 153M, it may be displayed only on the central display unit 15M.

Step SG5A is a process corresponding to step SG5 described in Fig. 64. This step SG5A is also called a "key determination step" performed in the confirmation process SP3.
In this step SG5A, it is determined whether the information of the specific input key to be operated (key correspondence information KID) corresponding to the identification information of one cooking menu transmitted in the advance notice information in step SG4 matches the specific input key operated in the key identification process SP2 (hereinafter, this is referred to as the "first determination").

Next, if the first determination result shows no match, a determination is made as to whether the specific input key to be operated (e.g., 152R) has been operated (hereinafter, this is referred to as the "second determination").

If the first determination result shows no match, information on the specific input key to be operated is displayed on the display unit 16 (e.g., the central display unit 16M, the right display unit 16R), and a message is displayed, such as text, indicating that the displayed specific input key is to be operated. That is, in step SG5A, similar to step SG4 in FIG. 64, the input key to be operated (e.g., 152L) is identified, and information prompting the user to operate the key is displayed in step SG5A, and then the second determination is performed.

If the first determination results in a "match" and then the second determination results in an "operated" determination, selection information A (202) is transmitted to communication terminal 200 (step SG5A).
In this way, in either case, when the appropriate specific input key is operated before receiving advance notice information 1 (201) from communication terminal 200, or when the appropriate specific input key is operated after receiving advance notice information 1 (201), the recipe data CD selected by user US can be obtained by heating cooker 1. Moreover, since the specific input key to be operated only needs to be operated once for one cooking process, the operation by user US is simple.

As described above, when a specific input key (e.g., 152L) is operated in step SG5A to transmit selected information A, the left display unit 16L corresponding to this specific input key 152L displays a receiving operation display unit 174 (not shown) using characters and figures to indicate that the selected information A has been transmitted and that the device is transitioning to a receiving state for recipe data CD. If a command to transmit selected information A is issued using specific input key 153M of the shared operation unit 15M, the receiving operation display unit 174 (not shown) is displayed on the central display unit 16M.

Furthermore, in this step SG5A, a display may be performed to inform the user US of the latest situation.
For example, when it is confirmed in the confirmation step SP3 that the specific input key (e.g., 153M) has been operated, the control device 40 displays information indicating that the selection information A (202) has been transmitted (e.g., text information such as "A response signal has been transmitted"), or information indicating the receiving step of the recipe data CD (e.g., text information such as "The receiving step will now begin"), in the display section (e.g., central display section 16M) corresponding to the input operation section (e.g., central operation section 15M) where the input key is located. This step is included in the step SG5A shown in FIG. 66.

Next, we will explain Figure 67.
67 is a time chart showing the cooking operation in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 of the cooking appliance 1 in the cooking system of embodiment 1. Steps SS40 to SS55 show the main control operations of the control device 40. In the case of cooking with one cooking step such as the single cooking mode KM3, one cooking step ends at the stage of step SS47.
FIG. 67 provides a more detailed explanation of the operational steps shown in FIG. 43, and corresponding steps in FIG. 43 are designated in FIG. 67 by the symbols SU3, SU4, SU5, SU6, SU8, SU9 and SU11.

Step SS40 is the stage where advance notice information 1 (201) corresponding to the data of the first portion M1 for executing cooking process 1 is received from the communication terminal 200.
In the next step SS41, the contents of the advance notice information 1 are analyzed. As described above, the advance notice information 1 includes identification information for specifying a cooking menu, process identification information 182 (not shown) for indicating that this is cooking process 1, and the like. Therefore, in response to the advance notice information 1, specific input keys that need to be operated on the cooking appliance 1 side are extracted from the data in the storage device 41.

In step SS42, information indicating the extracted specific input key is displayed on the display unit 16. In addition, the audio notification unit 50 may prompt the user to operate the specific input key by audio. The specific input key to be operated may be indicated by continuous light emission or blinking light by the (center) light-emitting unit 21M or the (right) light-emitting unit 21R corresponding to the right operation unit 15R.

In step SS43, when a specific input key (e.g., 152R on the right operation unit 15R) is operated with reference to the information indicating the specific input key displayed on the display unit 16, the control unit 40 generates selection information A (202) corresponding to the specific input key (e.g., 152R) and transmits it from the communication unit 51.

In step SS44, the setting information A (for the first portion M1 relating to the cooking process 1) transmitted from the communication terminal 200 is received.
As described in steps SC4 to SC6 of FIG. 59, the communication unit (communication adapter) 51 determines whether or not it is in a state in which it can transition to control according to the contents of the received recipe data CD for the first portion M1.

If the communication unit (communication adapter) 51 judges that the data is "Yes," the data acquisition unit 53 receives the judgment result from the communication unit 51 and stores the data (setting information A) of the first portion M1 acquired immediately before in a specified storage area of the recipe data storage unit 42, in preparation for the heating and cooking that will be performed immediately afterwards.

Next, step SS45 is not a required process as indicated by the dashed line, but is a function that can be added as an option. In this step SS45, the data acquisition unit 53 transmits a signal (status check result) indicating that the data has been successfully acquired from the communication unit 51 to the communication terminal 200, which is the sender of the recipe data CD (data of the first part M1). The "status check result" here corresponds to the processing of step SG10 in FIG. 65.

Next, in step SS46, the acquired recipe data CD (data of the first part M1), i.e., the contents of the setting information A, are displayed on the display unit 16, and if the start of cooking is input through the input operation unit 15, cooking (cooking process 1) starts. After that, cooking (cooking process 1) ends (step SS47).

At step SS47, the control device 40 transmits a notification signal from the communication unit 51 to the communication terminal 200, prompting the communication terminal 200 to transmit recipe data CD (setting information B) for cooking process 2. At the same time, the display unit 16 notifies the user by the notification means that the heating pause period P3 has begun and that it is necessary to obtain recipe data CD for cooking process 2 (data for the second portion M2).

Since the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected, the heating pause period P3 is entered from step SS47.
During this heating pause period P3, unless data of the second portion M2 of the recipe data CD is acquired, it is not possible to proceed to cooking step 2.
Therefore, during this heating pause period P3, operations similar to those in steps SS40 to SS45 are carried out.

Advance notice information 2 for the second part M2 for carrying out cooking process 2 is transmitted by the user US operating the communication terminal 200 .
In step SS48, the advance notice information 2 (201) is received from the communication terminal 200.
In the next step SS49, the contents of the advance notice information 2 are analyzed. Then, in response to the advance notice information 2, specific input keys that require an input operation are extracted from the data in the storage device 41.

In step SS50, information indicating the extracted specific input key is displayed on the display unit 16. In addition, the audio notification unit 50 may prompt the user to operate the specific input key by audio. The (central) light emitting unit 21M or the light emitting unit 21M corresponding to the central operation unit 15M indicates the specific input key to be operated by continuous light emission or blinking light.

In step SS51, when a specific input key (e.g., 153M of central operation unit 15M) is operated with reference to the information indicating the specific input key displayed on display unit 16, control unit 40 generates selection information B (202) corresponding to the specific input key (e.g., 153M) and transmits it from communication unit 51.

In step SS52, the setting information B (for the second portion M2 relating to the cooking process 2) transmitted from the communication terminal 200 is received.
In step SS52, as described in step SS44, it is determined whether or not it is possible to transition to control according to the contents of the recipe data CD for the second portion M2 received by the communication unit (communication adapter) 51.

If the communication unit (communication adapter) 51 judges that the data (setting information B) of the second portion M2 acquired immediately before is stored in a specified storage area of the recipe data storage unit 42 in preparation for cooking step 2 that is performed immediately afterwards.

Next, step SS53 is not a required process, as indicated by the dashed line, but is a function that can be added as an option. In this step SS53, similar to step SS45, the status check result is sent to communication terminal 200. Therefore, communication terminal 200 can check whether communication has been successful.

Next, in step SS54, the contents of the acquired recipe data CD (data of the second part M2) are displayed on the display unit 16, and cooking (cooking step 2) is started by inputting the start of cooking through the input operation unit 15. At this point, the heating pause step P3 ends.
Thereafter, the cooking process (cooking step 2) is terminated by a stop operation by the user US, or the cooking process (cooking step 2) is terminated automatically after the set heating time has elapsed (step SS55).

Although not explained in steps SS46 and SS54, the user US can modify control conditions such as heat and set temperature as appropriate before the start of cooking process 1 and cooking process 2. However, depending on the cooking menu, there are cases where the control conditions cannot be changed based on the received setting information of the first part M1 or the second part M2. In addition, the control conditions can be modified midway through the cooking operation after it has started.

As shown in FIG. 67, the "state of accepting data (setting information A) of cooking process 1" of recipe data CD starts immediately before step SS40. The timing of the start of this state of acceptance is shown in FIG. 49. That is, it is the time when the voice guidance and the display indicating that recipe data CD can be acquired are displayed (step SA3A). As explained in FIG. 49, at the start of this state of acceptance, the communication unit 51 may notify the outside that the state of accepting data (setting information) of cooking process 1 has started. This makes it possible for the terminal display unit 216 of the communication terminal 200 to display information that allows the preparation state of the cooking appliance 1 to be known.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 67, the "end of the state of accepting data (setting information A) for cooking process 1" occurs when the command to start cooking process 1 is issued (step SA7) or immediately thereafter (step SA9), as described in FIG. 49.

As shown in FIG. 67, the "start of the state of accepting data (setting information B) for cooking process 2" is step SA12 or immediately thereafter, as described in FIG. 50. Also, the "end of the state of accepting data (setting information B) for cooking process 2" is the time when a command to start cooking process 2 is issued (step SA15) or immediately thereafter (step SA16), as described in FIG. 50.

Summary of embodiment 1.
As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is as follows:
An input operation unit 15;
A plurality of heating means HM1 to HM3 driven in (at least one of) cooking step 1 and cooking step 2 in order to heat one food to be cooked;
A communication unit 51 for wirelessly communicating with the outside;
A notification means 90;
A control device 40 that acquires setting information A related to the cooking process 1 and setting information B related to the cooking process 2 via the communication unit 51;
having
The control device 40 sequentially acquires the setting information A of the cooking process 1 and the setting information B of the cooking process 2,
When the specific input key A (152L, 152R, 153M) of the input operation unit 15 is operated, the control device 40 proceeds to a step (receiving step SP4) in which the setting information A of the cooking process 1 can be acquired,
When a specific input key B (152L, 152R, 153M) of the input operation unit 15 is operated, the process proceeds to a step (receiving step SP4) in which setting information B of the cooking process 2 can be acquired.
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, the external recipe data CD can be reliably acquired by the cooking appliance 1 and used for actual cooking.
In other words, when the user US performs an input operation (such as a touch operation) in advance on a specific input key (e.g., input key 153M) to be operated by the user US on the side of the cooking appliance 1, the operation proceeds to obtain the recipe data CD after a confirmation operation by the user US (presence or absence of a specific operation on the input operation unit 15), thereby preventing operation errors by the user US and improving usability.
Furthermore, in the case of a cooking menu that has multiple cooking steps, such as the collaborative cooking mode KM1, the entire recipe data CD can be reliably obtained through the stages of receiving setting information for each cooking step, such as the preview information 1, preview information 2, etc., and confirming the information using the specific input key, so that it is expected that the operability of a heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking by utilizing multiple cooking steps can be improved.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
When the specific input key A or the specific input key B is operated, the control device 40 starts a reception state for receiving setting information of the heating means (see FIG. 49, FIG. 52), and when the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 is started, the reception state is released (see step SA9 in FIG. 49, step SA9 in FIG. 52).

With this configuration, the start and end (time range) of receiving (acquiring) the recipe data CD are clear, and once one acquisition process is completed, the reception is automatically terminated with the start of the heating operation, so even if the user US mistakenly operates the communication terminal 200, the recipe data CD will not be received at an inappropriate time. Therefore, when selecting a cooking menu or performing cooking, there is no misunderstanding or confusion on the part of the user US, and no failure to acquire the recipe data CD.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The control device 40 is characterized in that it notifies the user that the reception state has started by the notification means 90, and further transmits the notification to the outside from the communication unit 51.
That is, the necessity of operating a specific input key can be easily notified by the display unit 16, etc. Also, as described in step SA3A of Fig. 49, the preparation state for receiving recipe data CD can be notified by visual or audio guidance on the communication terminal 200 side, so that the user US can know the preparation stage for receiving recipe data CD of the cooking appliance 1 on the communication terminal 200 side.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 1, the cooking device 1 according to the second disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device 1 according to the second disclosure is as follows:
A plurality of input operation units 15M, 15L, and 15R;
A notification means 90;
A communication unit 51 that acquires recipe data relating to one cooking object from an external device;
A control device 40 that controls a cooking process according to the recipe data CD acquired via the communication unit 51;
having
When the recipe data CD includes setting information for a plurality of cooking steps, the control device 40 sequentially acquires the recipe data CD divided for each cooking step, for each cooking step;
the control device 40, when acquiring the recipe data CD for each cooking process, operates specific input keys (153M, 152L, 152R) arranged on the input operation units 15M, 15L, 15R in an order determined by the recipe data CD, respectively;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, recipe data CD can be received (acquired) for each cooking process section in response to the operation of the multiple input operation units 15M, 15L, and 15R. This prevents the user US from misunderstanding or becoming confused when selecting a cooking menu or performing cooking.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 1, a heating and cooking system relating to the third disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the heating and cooking system according to the third disclosure includes:
A cooking device 1 having a plurality of input operation units 15M, 15L, and 15R and a communication function (communication unit 51);
A communication terminal 200 connected to the cooking appliance 1 by wireless communication,
The communication terminal 200 includes:
(1) A first screen 216A and a second screen 216B are sequentially displayed on the terminal display unit 216,
(2) The first screen 216A displays the recipe data CD relating to the selected food in the order of a first display portion 251 showing information relating to cooking step 1 and a second display portion 252 showing information relating to cooking step 2 (see FIG. 60).
(3) When the first display portion 251 displayed on the first screen 216A is selected, the display is switched to the second screen 216B (see FIG. 61 ).
(4) The second screen 216B displays input keys 240 for transmitting the setting information A of the cooking process 1 of the recipe data CD,
(5) When the input key 240 is operated, the setting information A related to the cooking process 1 selected on the first screen 216A is transmitted to the cooking appliance 1,
When the cooking appliance 1 receives a command to start the cooking process 1 after receiving the setting information A (for example, see step SA7 in FIG. 49), the cooking appliance 1 starts the cooking process 1 and cancels the reception process of the setting information A (for example, see step SA9 in FIG. 49);
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, recipe data CD stored in the external communication terminal 200 can be sequentially acquired by the cooking appliance 1 for each cooking step and used for actual cooking.
Furthermore, in the communication terminal 200, the first display portion 251 relating to the cooking process 1 is displayed, and the input key 237A for sending the advance notice information 1 (201) is displayed in the vicinity of the first portion 251, so that the advance notice information 1 of the recipe data CD (part of cooking process 1) can be sent easily and reliably by operating the input key 237A. The same applies to the sending of the advance notice information 2 of cooking process 2.
That is, the user US can be appropriately guided in the operation on the first screen 216A and the second screen 216B of the communication terminal, which prevents the user US from making operational mistakes or becoming confused, and improves usability.

Furthermore, with regard to the heating cooker 1 of the second disclosure, in embodiment 1, when the first display portion 251 displayed on the first screen 216A is selected, advance notice information 1 (201) specifying the input operation unit to be used for the cooking process 1 is displayed on the second screen 216B (see Figure 61 (B)).
Therefore, the user US can operate the input key 237A while checking the displayed advance notice information 1 (201), which improves the user US's sense of security in operation and improves usability.

Furthermore, in the heating and cooking system according to the third disclosure,
The communication terminal 200 was characterized in that an input key 237A for transmitting preview information 1 (201) identifying the recipe data CD was displayed at a position corresponding to the first display portion 251 on the first screen 216 constituting a touch-type input screen (see Figure 60 in particular).
With this configuration, when the user US checks the contents of the first display portion 251 of cooking process 1, he or she can operate the input key 237A displayed therein to send advance notice information 1 (201) to the cooking appliance 1, thereby preventing the user US from making an operational error and improving operability.

Furthermore, in the heating and cooking system according to the third disclosure,
When it is determined that the setting information for cooking process 1 has reached the cooking appliance 1, the transmission result information for the setting information is displayed on a third screen 216C that is displayed after the second screen 216B (see step SG12 in Figures 63 and 64).
Therefore, the results of sending the setting information of the recipe data CD can be individually confirmed each time on the third screen 216C, and the user US can accurately and easily confirm the communication status.

Furthermore, in the heating and cooking system according to the third disclosure,
The cooking device 1 has a first heating means HM1 and a second heating means HM2,
a control function of an integrated cooking mode KM1 in which one of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 is driven first in a cooking step 1, and then the other heating means is driven in a cooking step 2 after a heating pause period P3;
The heating cooker 1 was configured to transmit a notification signal to the communication terminal 200 at the stage of step SA12 (see Figure 50) of the heating pause period P3, prompting the communication terminal 200 to transmit the setting information for the cooking process 2.
Therefore, the communication terminal 200 of the user US can obtain information prompting the user US to obtain the recipe data CD (data for the second part M2) for cooking process 2 when the heating pause period P3 is entered, so that the user US can easily understand the next required operation during the heating pause period P3 and proceed to execute cooking process 2.

Furthermore, the cooking system and cooking appliance 1 of the first embodiment have various characteristic configurations as described below, and specific effects can be expected according to these configurations, as described below.
Part 1:
The control device 40 acquires the recipe data CD in two stages, a first part M1 for setting a cooking process 1 using one of the heating means and a second part M2 for setting a cooking process 2 using the other heating means,
The control device 40 is
(1) a communication establishment step SP1 of establishing a communication state with a specific communication terminal 200;
(2) after the communication establishment step SP1, a notification step (SP2A) of performing a specific notification A of the input operation unit in the notification means 90 in response to advance notice information 1 (201) regarding the first part M1 acquired from the communication unit 51;
(3) after the notification step 1 (SP2A), a notification step 2 (SP2B) of performing a specific notification B of the input operation unit in the notification means 90 in response to advance notice information 1 (201) regarding the second part M2 acquired from the communication unit 51;
(4) a confirmation step (SP3A) of transmitting selection information A when the input operation unit notified in the notification step 1 is operated;
(5) a confirmation step 2 (SP3B) of transmitting selection information B when the input operation unit notified in the notification step 2 is operated;
The configuration is characterized by executing the above.

Therefore, when the user US operates an input operation section (e.g., input key 153M) that should be operated on the side of the cooking appliance 1, the user US performs a confirmation operation on the cooking appliance 1 side (e.g., input operation of input key 153M) before proceeding to the operation of obtaining recipe data CD, thereby preventing operation errors by the user US and improving usability.
Furthermore, since recipe data CD for a cooking menu having multiple cooking steps can be reliably obtained through two stages for each cooking step: receiving the advance notice information 1, advance notice information 2, etc., and confirming the information by operating the specific input key, it is expected that the operability of a heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking by utilizing multiple cooking steps will be improved.

Number 2:
The control device 40 is
(1) When advance notice information 1 (201) regarding the first portion M1 is acquired from the communication unit 51, the notification means 90 notifies a specific input key A (e.g., 152L). When the notified specific input key is further operated, the process proceeds to a step of acquiring setting information of the first portion M1,
(2) When advance notice information 2 (201) regarding the second portion M2 is acquired from the communication unit 51, the notification means 90 notifies a specific input key B (e.g., 153M). When the notified specific input key B is further operated, the process proceeds to a step of acquiring setting information of the second portion M2.
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, when the heating cooker 1 obtains the recipe data (cooking menu) selected by the user US, the operation of obtaining the recipe data CD proceeds only when the advance notice information 1 is received from the communication terminal 200 and the specific input key (to be operated) notified by the notification means 90 is operated, thereby preventing operational errors by the user US and improving usability.
Furthermore, recipe data CD for a cooking menu with multiple cooking steps can be reliably obtained for each cooking step through three steps: receiving advance notice information 1, advance notice information 2, etc., notifying a specific input key by the notification means 90, and confirming the specific input key. This is expected to improve the operability of a heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking by utilizing multiple cooking steps.

Tip 3:
In one embodiment of the cooking system, the communication terminal 200 includes:
(1) The first screen 216A and the second screen 216B are displayed in sequence on the terminal display unit 216,
(2) In the first screen 216A, the recipe data (ingredients, cooking method, steps, etc.) of the food to be cooked that is the subject of the recipe data CD are displayed in the order of a first display portion 251 relating to cooking step 1 and a second display portion 252 relating to cooking step 2 (step SG3 in FIG. 60 and FIG. 64 ).
(3) The first screen 216A displays an input key 237A for transmitting advance notice information 1 (201) to notify the user that the cooking process 1 displayed on the first screen 216A has been selected,
(4) When a transmission process is performed using the input key 237A, the display is switched to the second screen 216B (step SG3B in FIG. 64),
When the cooking appliance 1 receives the advance notice information 1, the cooking appliance 1 displays on the display unit 16 information specifying the specific input key (e.g., any one of 153M, 152L, and 152R) corresponding to the cooking process 1 indicated in the advance notice information 1, and when the specific input key to be displayed is operated, the cooking appliance 1 issues selection information A (202) (see step SG5 in FIG. 64 ).
When the communication terminal 200 receives the selection information A (202), the setting information A related to the cooking process 1 can be transmitted to the cooking appliance 1 (in response to an operation of the transmission input key 240 on the second screen 216B).
The configuration was characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the communication terminal 200 can display the transmission input key 237A in the first display portion 251 related to the cooking process 1, and guide the user US to operate to obtain the recipe data CD.
Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1, after the main power switch 20 is turned ON, information identifying a specific input key (e.g., any one of 152L, 152R, 153M) corresponding to the cooking process 1 is displayed on the display unit 16, and selection information A required to obtain recipe data CD is transmitted only when the correct specific input key is operated, thereby preventing operational errors by the user US and improving usability.

Tip 4:
After the main power switch 20 is turned on, the control device 40
(1) When any one of the specific input keys 153M, 152L, and 152R is operated for input, individual selection information A (202A, 202B, and 202C) corresponding to the specific input key is generated;
(2) When advance notice information (advance notice signal) A (201) of a specific cooking menu (e.g., “hamburger steak”) targeted by the recipe data CD is received, a specific input key (e.g., 153M) corresponding to the cooking menu is identified from among the specific input keys, and a confirmation step SP3 is started to determine whether the identified specific input key has been operated for input;
(3) The selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C) is transmitted when the specific input key (e.g., 153M) specified in the confirmation step SP3 is operated.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

With this configuration, the external recipe data CD can be reliably acquired by the cooking appliance 1 and used for actual cooking.
Furthermore, in either case, when the user US has previously operated a specific input key (e.g., 153M) on the cooking appliance 1 that is suitable for obtaining the selected recipe data (cooking menu), or when the user US receives advance notice information 1 (or advance notice information 2) from the communication terminal 200 and then operates the specific input key, the cooking appliance 1 side undergoes a confirmation operation (whether or not the specific input key 153M has been operated) before proceeding to the operation of obtaining the recipe data CD, thereby preventing operational errors by the user US and improving usability.

Number 5:
Furthermore, as explained in Figure 62 (A), if a specific input key defined in the cooking menu notified in the advance notice information 1 has been operated before receiving the advance notice information 1 (201), the cooking appliance 1 will not perform a display operation such as step SG4 in Figures 64 and 66, thereby preventing the user US facing the cooking appliance 1 from having an unnecessary misunderstanding (interpreting that the specific input key needs to be operated again).

Number 6:
Furthermore, in this embodiment 1, the following heating and cooking system is disclosed.
That is, one embodiment of the heating and cooking system includes:
A cooking device 1 having a plurality of input operation units 15, a display unit 16, a communication function, and a plurality of heating means (HM1 to HM3);
A communication terminal 200 connected to the cooking appliance 1 by wireless communication,
The input operation unit 15 has individual operation units 15L and 15R corresponding to only one of the heating means, and a common operation unit 15M corresponding to a plurality of the heating means,
The cooking device 1 has first specific input keys 152L and 152R arranged on the individual operation units 15L and 15R, and a second specific input key 153M arranged on the shared operation unit 15M,
By selecting the first specific input keys 152L and 152R, first menu information (a single cooking mode of induction heating cooking) can be displayed on the display unit 16 (16L and 16R),
By selecting the second specific input key 153M, second menu information (such as a coordinated cooking mode or a composite cooking mode) can be displayed on the display unit 16 (16M).
The communication terminal 200 includes:
(1) Having a function of receiving selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C) generated from the cooking appliance 1 as a result of input operations of the first specific input keys 152L, 152R and the second specific input key 153M,
(2) displaying either the first menu information or the second menu information on the first screen 216A in response to a user input;
(3) When one cooking menu belonging to either the first menu information or the second menu information displayed on the first screen 216A is selected (when the input key 237A is selected), the display is switched to the second screen 216B,
(4) In the second screen 216B, when the selection operation (input) of either the first specific input key or the second specific input key corresponding to the one selected cooking menu has been completed, first information (see second screen A: 216B1 in FIG. 62) for transmitting recipe data CD corresponding to either the first menu information or the second menu information is displayed, and when the selection operation (input) of neither the first specific input key nor the second specific input key has been completed, second information (see advance notice information 201 in FIG. 61(B)) for requesting the selection operation of either the first specific input key or the second specific input key is displayed.
(5) When the second information (notice information 201) is displayed on the second screen 216B, determining whether the selection operation of the first specific input key or the second specific input key has been completed by waiting for reception of the selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C) from the cooking appliance (step SG6);
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, recipe data CD stored in the external communication terminal 200 can be reliably acquired by the cooking appliance 1 and used for actual cooking.
Furthermore, if the user US has previously operated a specific input key (e.g., 153M) on the side of the heating cooker 1 that is suitable for obtaining the selected recipe data (cooking menu), the communication terminal 200 confirms (determines) whether or not the specific input key has been operated by the user US, and then displays the second screen A (216B1) as shown in FIG. 62 (A), and displays the first information for sending the recipe data CD (e.g., the right IH input key button has been pressed, so press the send button), thereby reliably guiding the user to the operation of sending the setting information for the recipe data CD.
This prevents the user US from making operational mistakes and improves usability.

Number 7:
The heating cooker 1 of embodiment 1 was configured to have, as multiple heating means, a first heating means HM1 controlled by the individual operation units 15L and 15R, and a second heating means HM2 and a third heating means HM3 controlled by the shared operation unit 15M.

This configuration allows the three heating means HM1 to HM3 to be selected and cooking in the single cooking mode KM3, combined cooking mode KM2, and linked cooking mode KM1 to be performed sequentially without mutual interference. This makes it possible to provide a heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Number 8:
The cooking device 1 has a function of executing at least two or more cooking modes, a single cooking mode KM3, a combined cooking mode KM2, and a cooperative cooking mode KM1, by the various heating means.
The single cooking mode KM3 is controlled by the first specific input keys 152L and 152R arranged on the individual operation units 15L and 15R.
The composite cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM1 are controlled by the third specific input key 153M arranged on the common operation unit 15M.

Due to this configuration, cooking in the single cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the coordinated cooking mode KM1 can be performed sequentially without interfering with each other.
In addition, the third specific input key 153M arranged on the common operation unit 15M can be used to control the acquisition of recipe data for the composite cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM1, making it possible to avoid increasing the number of input keys and switch operation buttons according to the number of cooking modes, thereby realizing an input operation unit 15 that does not impair operability.

Number 9:
The specific input keys 153M, 152L, 152R are provided on each of the input operation units 15 (15L, 15M, 15R) independently of the selected cooking mode KM1 to KM3, and when the specific input key is operated, unique selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C) that can identify the specific input key is transmitted to the communication terminal 200,
The communication terminal 200 holds information capable of identifying (identifying) each of the specific input keys 153M, 152L, 152R in the cooking appliance database 217, and judges whether the specific input key 15 (15L, 15M, 15R) corresponding to the specific recipe data CD is operated (see step SG6 in Figs. 64 to 66). Then, when the selection information A indicating that the specific input key has been operated is acquired, a transmitting means (see input key 240 in Fig. 62(A)) is provided for transmitting the setting information to the cooking appliance 1;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, when a specific input key (e.g., 152R) to be operated has been operated in advance, the communication terminal 200 checks whether or not the specific input key on the cooking appliance 1 side has been operated in advance by the user US (see step SG6 in FIG. 63), and then displays the second screen A (216B1) as shown in FIG. 62(A), and displays the first information for transmitting the recipe data CD (e.g., the right IH input key button has been pressed, so press the send button. See FIG. 62). Therefore, the user US can be guided to the operation of transmitting the setting information of the recipe data CD.
This prevents the user US from making operational mistakes and improves usability.
Furthermore, the specific input keys 153M, 152L, 152R are provided on each of the input operation units 15 (15L, 15M, 15R) regardless of the selected heating cooking mode KM1 to KM3. Therefore, even in the case of cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM1 that uses the shared operation unit 15M, there is always one specific input key (153M) to be input, and the user can avoid becoming confused about the operation.

Number 10:
The communication terminal 200 is configured to sequentially display, on the terminal side display unit 216, a first screen 216A that displays identification information of the recipe data CD, a second screen 216B that allows input operations for transmitting the setting information to the heating cooker 1, and a third screen 216C that displays transmission result information of the setting information.
Therefore, the contents of the recipe data, the necessity for input operations to transmit the setting information, and further the results of transmitting the setting information can be confirmed individually each time on each display screen (first screen to third screen), allowing the user US to accurately and easily confirm the situation.

Number 11:
The second screen 216B is configured to display the result of determining whether the specific input key corresponding to the recipe data CD has been operated, as shown in second screen A (216B1) of Figure 61 (A).
Therefore, the user US can accurately and easily confirm the necessity of the input operation of the specific input key.

The second screen 216B is configured to separately display a state 1 (see FIG. 61(B)), which indicates that the operation of the specific input key corresponding to the recipe data CD is requested, and a state 2 (see FIG. 62(A)), which indicates that the operation of the specific input key has been completed.
Therefore, the user US can accurately and easily confirm the necessity of the input operation of the specific input key.

Number 12:
One embodiment of the cooking device 1 disclosed in the first embodiment is as follows:
a plurality of input keys (154M, 155M, etc.), a plurality of specific input keys 152L, 152R, 153M, a notification means 90, a communication unit 51, and a control device 40 that controls the heating means HM1 to HM3 using recipe data CD acquired from an external source to perform cooking;
The control device 40 is
(1) a notification step SP2B (see FIG. 64) of notifying the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M when advance notice information 1 (201) corresponding to the cooking of the recipe data CD is received;
(2) a confirmation step SP3 of determining whether the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M have been operated after the notification step SP2B, and transmitting selection information A (202) when it is determined that the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M have been operated;
(4) a restriction step of initiating a reception restriction period (TZ1: see FIG. 65) when the selection information A (202) is transmitted;
The above steps were executed in sequence.

With this configuration, the recipe data CD stored in the external communication terminal 200 can be reliably acquired by the cooking appliance 1 and used for actual cooking.
Furthermore, the notification means 90 (display unit 16) of the cooking appliance 1 notifies the user US of specific input keys that should be operated in advance in response to the advance notice information 1 from the communication terminal 200, and guides the user US to operate the confirmation process SP3, thereby preventing operational errors by the user US and improving usability.
Furthermore, since the reception restriction period TZ1 is started, reception of inappropriate data is prevented, and there is no hindrance to correct operation of the user US.

Number 13:
Furthermore, one aspect of the heating and cooking system disclosed in the first embodiment is as follows:
In the communication terminal 200,
(1) The first screen 216A and the second screen 216B are successively displayed on the terminal display unit 216,
(2) The first screen 216A displays the recipe data CD relating to the selected food to be cooked, divided into a first portion M1 and a second portion M2.
(3) When the recipe data CD displayed on the first screen 216A is selected, the display is switched to the second screen 216B, and advance notice information 1 (201) indicating the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M to be operated before receiving the recipe data CD is displayed on the second screen 216B.
(4) The second screen 216B displays input keys 237A and 237B for transmitting the selected recipe data CD in correspondence with the first portion M1 and the second portion M2, respectively.
(5) When the input keys 237A and 237B are operated, the setting information A relating to the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 of the recipe data CD selected on the first screen 216A is transmitted to the cooking appliance 1,
After the main power switch 20 is turned on, the cooking device 1
(1) a key specifying step SP2A of detecting that any one of the specific input keys 152L, 152R, 153M has been operated;
(2) when advance notice information 1 (201) of a specific cooking menu targeted by the recipe data CD is received from the communication terminal 200, a confirmation process SP3 is performed to determine whether a specific input key defined for the specific cooking menu has been operated before receiving the advance notice information 1;
Execute the following in sequence.
When it is confirmed in the confirmation step SP3 that the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M have been operated, the cooking appliance 1 transmits selection information A (202).
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, the recipe data CD stored in the external communication terminal 200 can be reliably acquired by the cooking appliance 1 and used for actual cooking.
Moreover, in the cooking appliance 1, after the main power switch 20 is turned on, it detects that any one of the specific input keys 152L, 152R, 153M has been operated, and when it is confirmed that the specific input key 152L, 152R, 153M that should be operated before obtaining the recipe data CD has been operated, it can automatically transmit the selection information A (202) in order to obtain the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200. This makes it possible to prevent the user US from making an operational error and to improve usability.

Number 14:
The heating cooker 1 illustrated in the first embodiment is configured to be able to individually notify the specific input keys in the input operation unit 15 (15L, 15M, 15R) that should be operated in advance in response to the operation of the user US by using the key identification unit 21 (light-emitting units 21M, 21L, 21R) of the notification means 90.
This guides the user US to operate the confirmation step SP3 (to the correct specific input key), thereby preventing the user US from making an operational mistake and improving usability.

Number 15:
In embodiment 1, the communication terminal 200 further adopts a configuration characterized in that, when it receives the selection information A (202), setting information A related to the recipe data CD displayed on the first screen 216A is transmitted to the heating cooker 1, and if it is determined that the setting information A has reached the heating cooker 1 (see step SG11 in Figure 64), transmission success information 244A indicating that the transmission of the setting information A was successful is displayed on the third screen 216C of the communication terminal 200 (see step SG12 in Figure 64).

With this configuration, the transmission status of the recipe data CD can also be confirmed on the communication terminal 200 side on the terminal side display unit 216 (third screen 216C).
These features make it possible to realize a heating and cooking system that improves usability for the user US.

Number 16:
The cooking device 1 shown in the first embodiment is
The input operation unit 15 has touch-type input keys (153M, 154M, 153L, 153R, etc.) for selecting cooking contents,
The input operation unit 15 instructs the control device 40 to start a voice input mode in response to a touch state of the input key,
After starting up the display unit 16, the control device 40 displays a standby initial screen 16MH on the display unit 16,
The control device 40 is characterized in that, when it receives a command to start the voice input mode from the input operation unit 15 while the standby initial screen 16MH is being displayed, it enables the recipe data CD to be acquired via the communication unit 51, and also accepts a command to set control conditions for the recipe data CD.
Specifically, the input operation unit 15 has touch-type input keys (153M, 154M, 153L, 153R, etc.) for selecting three types (linked, combined, single) of cooking modes or cooking menus,
The input operation unit 15 judges whether or not it is necessary to switch to the voice input mode (voice input mode 1) based on the touch state of the input keys, and issues a voice input mode corresponding signal MC1.
The control device 40 is configured such that, when it receives the voice input mode corresponding signal MC1, it is capable of acquiring the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51, and also accepts a command to set control conditions from the user US.

Because of this configuration, the timing of obtaining various recipe data CD from the outside can be controlled by the input keys (153M, 153L, 153R, etc.) of the input operation unit 15. In addition, the touch-type input keys (153M, etc.) on the input operation unit 15 for selecting a heating cooking mode, control mode, cooking menu, etc. can also be used to switch to a voice input mode, so that the tedious input process before starting the heating operation can be input by voice. This improves operability and reduces the workload of the user US. In addition, there is no need to increase the number of input keys, which is advantageous in terms of cost and improved operability.

Number 17:
The control device 40 of the cooking device 1 shown in the first embodiment is
a coordinated cooking mode KM1 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven with a time lag to perform one cooking operation;
When the control device 40 receives a command 1 (see step SB1 in FIG. 28) for selecting a cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 from the input operation unit 15, if the permission conditions (see FIG. 29) are satisfied, the control device 40 displays a first specific screen 16M1 for executing the cooperative cooking mode KM1 on the display unit 16,
The control device 40 is configured such that, when command 2 is received from the input operation unit 15 (input keys 158M, 159M or audio signal receiving unit 56) while the first specific screen 16M1 is being displayed (see Figures 17 and 18), information on at least one of the amounts of food ingredients or nutritional ingredients for a specific dish (see Figure 24) that can be executed in the collaborative cooking mode KM1 is displayed on the display unit 16.

That is, when the user US issues a command to display either the food ingredients or the nutritional ingredients by voice input at the stage shown in Figures 20 to 23, or when the input key 158M or 159M is touched at the stage where the operational support information 170 is displayed (see Figure 20), the first specific screen 16M1 temporarily switches to the display screens shown in Figures 24 (A) and 24 (B), and the food ingredient display screen 16M1A and the nutritional ingredient display screen 16M1B can be displayed.

Because of this configuration, when selecting a specific cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the user can easily obtain information on the ingredients and nutrients of the food related to that cooking menu. This improves the convenience of the cooking menu selection operation by the user US.

For example, the user US can select an appropriate cooking menu based on information on the amount of food ingredients and nutrients depending on the family's health management, dietary restrictions, etc., which can contribute to improving their eating habits.

Number 18:
Furthermore, the cooking device 1 shown in the first embodiment has
The display switches between identification information 167 of one cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak"), a dedicated food ingredient display screen 16M1A showing food ingredients, and a dedicated nutritional ingredient display screen 16M1B showing nutritional ingredients, so that the user US can easily and clearly identify each piece of information.

Number 19:
Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, the specific input keys (input keys 153M, 154M) of the input operation unit 15 are also used as a selection unit for the voice input mode 1.
This configuration makes it possible to avoid increasing the number of operation keys (operation units) of the input operation unit 15, and allows the user US to easily switch to the voice input mode 1, thereby preventing a decrease in operability. Note that, in the right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L, the input keys 153R and 153L that can select the voice input mode 1 may be set as specific input keys.

Number 20:
Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of embodiment 1, the acquisition condition for acquiring recipe data CD from outside is satisfied when one input key (e.g., specific input key 153M) of the touch input unit is operated within the first time limit (TX).
That is, the initial waiting period TP cannot exceed the first limit period (first time limit TX), for example, a maximum of 30 minutes.

Therefore, even if the user US stops operating the input operation unit 15 midway for some reason, the cooking appliance 1 automatically disables input (by forcibly opening the main power switch 20). This prevents cooking control data and the like from being acquired from an external source without the user US's knowledge, improving safety.

Number 21:
Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of embodiment 1, when the input key 180 is not operated and when one specific input key (153M) of the input operation unit 15 is not operated within a first time limit (TX), the control device 40 is configured to perform at least one of cutting off the main power supply or commanding an alarm operation by the alarm unit 90 (see automatic shut-off process 1 at step SL11 in Figure 38).

That is, as explained in FIG. 39, the time elapsed from the determination step (SS10) of whether the input key 180 or the specific input key 153M that can switch to voice input mode 1 has been operated is limited to, for example, 30 minutes or less. Or, the time elapsed from the first step SS5 in which the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed is limited to 30 minutes or less.

Therefore, if the user US forgets or is unable to perform an input operation for some reason, the control device 40 will forcibly open the main power switch 20 or issue an alarm from a safety standpoint, thereby improving safety.

Number 22:
Furthermore, in this embodiment 1,
The heating cooker 1 is characterized in that the restriction unit 55 restricts the acquisition of new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 (sets a reception restriction period TZ1) until the cooking process of the cooking menu to which the acquired recipe data CD is applied is started or until the cooking process is completed.

With this configuration, three types of heating means can be selected to sequentially perform cooking in the single cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the linked cooking mode KM1 without interfering with each other. This makes it possible to provide a heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, because of the restriction unit 55, once recipe data for one specific linked cooking menu A is acquired, the control device 40 will not inadvertently acquire recipe data CD for another linked cooking menu B immediately before the start of a cooking process or during a cooking process. Therefore, for example, another cooking menu (including a control menu for a combined cooking mode or a control menu for a single cooking mode) will not be inadvertently received during linked cooking. Therefore, there is no concern about confusion of the user US due to reception or operational interference on the cooking appliance 1 side.

Number 23:
Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The input operation unit 15 is disclosed to have a configuration in which input keys 153L and 153R for selecting the single cooking mode KM3, input keys 154M and 155M for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2, and an input key 153M for selecting the linked cooking mode KM1 are separately provided.

With this configuration, the three cooking modes can be selected individually using the respective input keys (input means), improving the operability for the user US even in a cooking device 1 with an increased number of heating sources.

Number 24:
Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 disclosed in the first embodiment,
After the main power is turned on by the input operation unit 15, the control device 40
(1) Displaying the standby initial screen (common screen) 16MH on the display unit 16,
(2) When the touch-type input keys 153M and 154M for selecting either the linked cooking mode KM1 or the composite cooking mode KM2 are operated, the restriction unit 55 restricts the acquisition and use of the recipe data CD acquired from the communication unit 51,
(3) When the input keys 153M and 154M are operated, the display of the standby initial screen (common screen) 16MH is automatically changed to the display of the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2.
(4) While the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed, the process moves to an initial standby period TP in which a cooking start command is received from the input operation unit 15,
(5) During the initial standby period TP, in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the acquisition of the recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 is limited to two times, that is, the first portion M1 and the second portion M2.
(6) When a specific input key (154M) among the input keys 153M and 154M is touched, a voice input mode corresponding signal MC1 is generated from the input operation unit 15 in response to the touch state, and the mode transitions to a “voice input mode of control conditions” for executing the recipe data CD.

According to this configuration, once the standby initial screen (common screen) 16MH is displayed, it can be easily understood that by operating the selection input keys 153M, 154M thereafter, the first specific screen 16M1 and the second specific screen 16M2 dedicated to the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode can be displayed, and recipe data can be obtained from outside.
You can also use some of the input keys to switch to voice input mode.
This makes it possible to avoid confusion or misunderstanding in the input operations by the user US from immediately after the main power is turned on until cooking begins, and it is expected that usability will be improved by utilizing voice input and touch input.

Number 25:
Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of embodiment 1, when the input process for one heating cooking cycle is completed and heating cooking is started, the voice input mode is automatically cancelled and the default touch input mode is restored. Therefore, when starting input for the next heating cooking cycle, there is no need to touch input keys, etc. just to cancel the voice input mode, making it easy to use.

Number 26:
In the cooking device 1 disclosed in the first embodiment,
Although there are three input operation units 15M, 15L, and 15R, when an input key (e.g., 154M) that can select "voice input mode 1" on one input operation unit (e.g., central operation unit 15M) is pressed, the input process of the other input operation units (left and right operation units 15L and 15R in this case) cannot be started, and voice input mode 1 cannot be selected either. However, in the above case, when cooking is being performed on the other input operation units (left and right operation units 15L and 15R in this case), it is possible to operate the input keys on those input operation units by "touch input". Therefore, the heat can be changed or heating stopped during cooking without any restrictions.

In other words, when one input key (e.g., 154M) is pressed to set "voice input mode" in one of the multiple input operation units, the input process for "starting new cooking" cannot be started in the other input operation units. In an input operation unit that is already performing cooking, input operations other than the voice input mode are possible. Therefore, cooking that is currently being performed can be controlled (e.g., stopping heating, changing heat, etc.) by operations other than voice input (touching, pressing).

This unique configuration makes it possible to avoid simultaneous voice input at one input operation unit and another input operation unit, so when cooking at two locations simultaneously, or when cooking at one location and starting another cooking operation, there is no interference between the input commands, making it possible to execute reliable input operations and ensuring high safety.

Embodiment 2.
Figures 68 to 78 show a cooking device and a cooking system according to embodiment 2. Note that parts that are the same as or equivalent to the configuration of embodiment 1 described in Figures 1 to 67 are given the same reference numerals.

In the second embodiment, the configuration of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 is different from that of the first embodiment. In addition, the configuration of the cloud server 300 is also changed.
In addition, in this embodiment 2, only one specific input key 151KP, 152L, 152R is selected for each of the three input operation units 15L, 15M, 15R, and among them, the input key 151KP is significantly different from the embodiment 1 in that it does not have a function for selecting a cooking menu or cooking mode.

In this second embodiment as well, when recipe data (including the "display condition data") is acquired from an external communication terminal device 200 or the like, the restriction unit 55 restricts some of the input functions and display functions of the cooking appliance 1. To this end, the data acquisition unit 53 issues various control commands in response to the operation of acquiring recipe data from the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51. Note that, in this second embodiment as well, the control device 40 acquires the recipe data CD in two stages: a first part M1 that sets cooking process 1 using one of the heating means, and a second part M2 that sets cooking process 2 using the other heating means.

Referring to Figure 68 .
A refrigerator 331 and a cooking appliance 1 are installed inside a kitchen 601 which is one of the living spaces. The refrigerator 331 and the cooking appliance 1 can transmit and receive information to and from the wireless router 340 via wireless communication.

The wireless router 340 also serves as an access point to a network NW such as the Internet, etc. The wireless router 340 can access the first server 321 in an external space.
In this embodiment 2, the cloud server 300 described in the first embodiment includes a first server 321, a second server 322, a recipe data providing server 301, and a food component information server 326 described later.

The cooking appliance 1 can acquire at least recipe data CD through wireless communication 330BT with the communication terminal 200. This recipe data CD includes not only cooking control data for executing the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM1, but also cooking control data for the combined cooking mode KM2, etc.

In this second embodiment, the communication terminal 200 can also perform direct wireless communication with the wireless router 340. The basic configuration of this communication terminal 200 is the same as that of the communication terminal 200 described in the first embodiment.

As described in the first embodiment (FIG. 56), the communication terminal 200 has the notification data 223 and the remote control data 224. In the second embodiment, the notification data 223 and the remote control data 224 may be obtained by connecting to the first server 321, which is an information providing means, via the network NW and downloading the data from the first server 321.

The cooking appliance database 217 also stores food ingredient and nutritional component data 226, which is obtained via the second server 322 from a food ingredient information server 326 that provides various types of food ingredient information. The symbol DD is food ingredient information (ingredient data) that includes both food ingredient and nutritional component data.

The food composition information server 326 may use data from, for example, the "Standard Tables of Food Composition in Japan" published by the Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology.

The communication terminal 200 can transmit recipe data CD and remote control information RS, such as commands to perform cooking operations, to the cooking appliance 1.

The communication terminal 200 has a voice input section 222 (see FIG. 56) that converts voice from a user US into a predetermined voice input signal VS.
Therefore, when the user US speaks into this communication terminal 200, a voice input signal (voice data) VS can be transmitted to the second server 322. In other words, necessary input operations can be performed without touching the touch operation unit 215 (see FIG. 56).

When the cooking appliance 1 is activated, the user US can provide speech information to the communication terminal 200 by voice, for example, to extract the desired recipe data CD from the recipe data providing server 301 and provide it to the cooking appliance 1 via the communication terminal 200.

For example, since the recipient of the voice input signal VS is the second server 322, the speech information may include, for example, "XXX (an example of a name or nickname identifying the second server 322), looking for a recipe for collaborative cooking."
The spoken information “XXX, look for a recipe” is one type of external command information that can be applied to the cooking appliance 1.

Furthermore, the speech information "XXX, looking for a recipe for collaborative cooking" is information that specifies the cooking mode for the cooking device 1.

Furthermore, the speech information "Looking for a recipe for XXX that can be done in the microwave and induction" is speech information that extracts cooking menus that are possible in the collaborative cooking mode KM1.

This speech information can be converted into standard commands prepared in advance in the second server 322.

The speech information issued by the user US to the communication terminal 200 is converted to text data in the communication terminal 200 and transmitted to the second server 322 in the form of text data of the speech information (voice input signal VS).

The control unit 322C of the second server 322 receives text data (voice input signal VS) via the input/output unit 322A and determines whether it can be converted into a standard command stored in the memory unit 322R.

The control unit 322C converts the text data of the speech information (voice input signal VS) into various commands (also called "command data") that are prepared as standard commands. The "commands" here include instructions to extract recipe data for performing one cooking from the recipe database stored in the recipe data providing server 301. The input/output unit 322A is, for example, an API gateway.

The first server 321 and the second server 322 are connected by a network NW such as the Internet.
An inquiry signal (inquiry data) SN is transmitted from the input/output unit 322A of the second server 322 to the first server 321. This inquiry signal SN is, for example, a command requesting that the recipe data CD be extracted from the recipe data providing server 301. It is also a command signal generated by an input operation of the communication terminal 200 when a user wishes to know various data on the operating state of the cooking appliance 1 (for example, the contents and progress of the cooking process). In other words, these data are operation support data GS for the user US.

In addition, since the second server 322 does not require special control or processing specific to the cooking appliance 1, it is possible to use existing servers, such as servers of various systems such as AI assistants, intelligent assistants, and smart speakers.

The first server 321 shown in FIG. 68 is operated by the company (manufacturer) that produced the cooking appliance 1, and has a thorough understanding of the special controls and processes that are unique to the cooking appliance 1 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "cooker control information"), and is therefore able to accurately grasp the operating status of the cooking appliance 1 (including both heating and non-heating operations). The memory unit 321R stores data corresponding to the "cooker control information". Therefore, if the first server 321 acquires the operating status data OS described below, the first server 321 can accurately analyze the actual operating status of the cooking appliance 1.

The first server 321 is configured to acquire various "operating status data" OS from the cooking appliance 1 as described below via the wireless router 340 at any time.

The operating status data OS includes data indicating the ON/OFF state of the main power switch 20, selection data for the combined cooking mode KM1, data on control conditions such as heating temperature and heating time, and the latest temperature measurement data for the top plate 3 and heating chamber 6.

The recipe data providing server 301 is capable of transmitting and receiving information to and from the first server 321 via wireless communication. A "system control server" that serves as a control means for linking the recipe data providing server 301, the first server 321, etc., is not shown. Of the individual recipe data CD prepared in the recipe data providing server 301, those related to the linked cooking mode KM1 are prepared for multiple cooking steps, but when provided to the communication terminal 200, all of the multiple cooking steps are provided to the communication terminal 200 collectively.

The recipe data providing server 301 may be incorporated and integrated into the first server 321. The food ingredient information server 326 is connected to the first server 321 via a wired or wireless communication network NW.

The first server 321 is configured so that each cooking appliance 1 is preregistered, and the operating status data OS transmitted from each cooking appliance 1 is acquired in association with the user US of the cooking appliance 1.

The first server 321 has an input/output unit 321A for individually performing wireless communication with the wireless router 340 and the second server 322. This input/output unit 321A is, for example, an API gateway. This input/output unit 321 receives recipe data from the recipe data providing server 301.

The first server 321 includes a controller 321C. The controller 321C decodes an inquiry signal (command) SN from the second server 321, generates necessary control information in response to the inquiry signal SN, and transmits the generated control information to the second server 322.
Furthermore, the first server 321 analyzes the operating state data OS transmitted from a large number of cooking appliances 1 and the user identification information of each cooking appliance 1. That is, the cooking appliance 1 of each user US can be identified from information in the database of user identification information held in the memory unit 321R.

The first server 321 has a database of the control of each preregistered cooking appliance 1 in the memory unit 321R. Therefore, if the data requested by a cooking appliance 1 does not match the cooking appliance 1, the data is not transmitted.

Similarly, even if the first server 321 receives a query signal SN from the communication terminal 200, it transmits specific operation support data GS via the second server to the communication terminal 200 in a set with data such as the model identification number. For this reason, for example, if the communication terminal 200 inputs control conditions that are not compatible with specific recipe data CD, the first server 321 does not accept such input, or notifies the communication terminal 200 of the reason for not accepting it. For this reason, in the case of voice input mode, if the control conditions input (spoken) by the user via the communication terminal 200 exceed the range permitted by the cooking appliance 1, the communication terminal 200 is notified of the inappropriate input and is configured to request the input of different control conditions.

Furthermore, the first server 321 also has a function of controlling the timing of providing the recipe data CD for a specific cooking menu obtained from the recipe data providing server 301 to the second server 322. This will be explained in detail later.

In this second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, an input key 180 for selecting voice input is arranged in the central operation section 15M of the input operation section 15. This input key 180 may be a mechanical switch, or may be an input key of a touch-type input switch like input keys 153M to 159M.

Next, we will explain Figure 69.
FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of cooking appliance 1, and corresponds to FIG. 10 of embodiment 1.
As is clear from Fig. 69, the control device 40 of this embodiment 2 does not have a configuration corresponding to the voice signal analysis unit 58 shown in Fig. 10 of the embodiment 1. In other words, this control device 40 does not have a function of receiving a voice signal from the outside and analyzing it.

The control device 40 of this second embodiment does not have a configuration equivalent to the audio signal receiving unit 56 shown in FIG. 10 of the first embodiment. In other words, the input operation unit 15 of this second embodiment does not have a function for receiving an audio signal from the outside. The other configurations are the same as those shown in FIG. 10 of the first embodiment, so duplicated explanations will be omitted.

Next, we will explain FIG. 70.
Fig. 70 is a block diagram for explaining the relationship between the control device 40 and the central operation unit 15M. This Fig. 70 corresponds to Fig. 11 of the first embodiment. The right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L are basically configured in the same manner as the central operation unit 15M.

70, the control device 40 has an input signal analysis section 52. This input signal analysis section 52 has an input mode determination section 52C.
The input mode determination unit 52C receives the measurement time data MJ from the input operation unit 15 (15M, 15L, 15R), and if the measurement time data MJ is 5 seconds or more, with a predetermined threshold (for example, 5 seconds) as the boundary, determines that the input mode is "voice input mode 1." If the measurement time data MJ is less than this threshold, the input mode determination unit 52C determines that the input mode is a normal "short press" operation.

The "measurement time data MJ" input from the input operation unit 15 to the control device 40 corresponds to a voice input mode corresponding signal.

Meanwhile, each of the input operation units 15L, 15M, 15L including the central operation unit 15M is provided with a time measurement unit 15T. Measured time data MJ measured by the time measurement unit 15T is transmitted as is to the input signal analysis unit 52 of the control device 40.
That is, the time measurement unit 15 T measures the “touch time” from when the user US touches the screen with his/her finger until when he/she releases the touch screen, and transmits the measured time data MJ to the input signal analysis unit 52 .

The input mode determination unit 52C analyzes the measured time data MJ (voice input mode corresponding signal), and if it determines that the setting conditions for "voice input mode 1" are met, it outputs an input mode switching signal MC2 to the input control unit 70. For example, if the measured time data MJ is time data with a length equal to or longer than a threshold value (e.g., 5 seconds), it is determined that the setting conditions for voice input mode 1 are met, and outputs an input mode switching signal MC2.

15D is a storage unit. This storage unit 15D stores various control parameters such as the touch detection unit 15A and the time measurement unit 15T described above, program information for the judgment process, etc.

Reference numeral 15E denotes a central processing unit (CPU) that performs various information processing operations as an input operation unit (central operation unit 15M).
An input signal transmitting section 15F transmits the above-mentioned unique identification signal of the input key, the measured time data MJ of the “touch time”, and the like to the input signal analyzing section 52 of the control device 40.

In FIG. 70, the touch detection unit 15A, the time measurement unit 15T, the memory unit 15D, etc. are depicted as individual independent blocks, but each of these functions may be realized, for example, by software on a single microcomputer, rather than being configured as separate components on hardware.

In FIG. 70, the input mode determination unit 52C is depicted as part of the input signal analysis unit 52, but it may be configured separately on hardware. Also, for example, the functions of the input mode determination unit 52C, the input signal analysis unit 52, etc. may be realized by software on a single microcomputer.

In addition, while FIG. 70 shows an example of the central operation unit 15M, the control device 40 also identifies the input of the right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L as being from each operation unit. Therefore, in the input key identification unit 15A in the right operation unit 15R, data identifying the input key present in the right operation unit 15R is included in the signal from the input key and transmitted to the control device 40. The same is true for the left operation unit 15L.

Upon receiving the input mode switching signal MC2, the input processing unit 70 goes into an input standby state in preparation for any input related to the recipe data CD from the first server 321.

In FIG. 70, the touch detection unit 15A, the time measurement unit 15T, etc. are depicted as individual independent blocks, but rather than configuring them as separate hardware, each of these functions may be realized, for example, by software on a single microcomputer.

In this second embodiment, mutual authentication has been performed between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking appliance 1. Therefore, when the cooking appliance 1 starts up and transmits a signal for automatic connection (also called a "scan signal"), mutual communication for automatic connection is performed between the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal 200. The scan signal may also be transmitted from the communication terminal 200.

When a connection is established between the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal device 200, the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal device 200 continue to be able to directly communicate wirelessly with each other. If the communication terminal device 200 moves with the user US and moves away from the cooking appliance 1, communication may be temporarily disabled, but the connection will automatically be restored when the communication range (distance) returns.

During the period from when the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed until the specific input key 151KP is pressed (e.g., to select the linked cooking mode KM1), acquisition of recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 is basically prohibited. Recipe data CD cannot be acquired. (However, recipe data CD for cooking menus performed using the left and right operation units 15L, 15R can be acquired by operating the specific input keys 152L, 152R).

In addition, during the period from when the main power switch 20 is turned ON until the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed, no recipe data CD can be obtained from the communication terminal device 200.

When the cooking appliance 1 receives recipe data CD, it temporarily stores the recipe data in a specified storage area (or a dedicated buffer memory) of the recipe data storage unit 42. In other words, the first part M1 that specifies cooking step 1 and the second part M2 that specifies cooking step 2 are linked to the identification information of one cooking menu (processed so that they can be identified in a one-to-one relationship) and stored in the form of one recipe data. Note that reception of the notification data 223 and remote control data 224 described above is also permitted, and these are linked to the recipe data CD of the cooking menu (for example, "Ratatouille") and temporarily stored in the storage unit 42.

Next, we will explain Figure 71.
FIG. 71 is a plan view of the central display unit, central operation unit, left and right operation units, and central heating status display unit of the cooking appliance 1 in embodiment 2.
One of the features of the second embodiment is the display section 16. As shown in Fig. 71, the display section 16 is made up of three sections: a left display section 16L, a central display section 16M, and a right display section 16R.

There is no difference in the display function, effective area of the display screen, or planar shape of the three display units 16L, 16M, and 16R. In other words, the function of the central display unit 16M shown in embodiment 1 is also possessed by the left display unit 16L and the right display unit 16R in embodiment 2. The initial standby screen at startup immediately after the main power is turned on to the cooking appliance 1 is not only displayed on the central display unit 16M, but similar content is also displayed simultaneously on the right operation unit 16R and the left operation unit 16L.

First specific screens 16M1, 16L1, and 16R1 are displayed at appropriate timing on the central display section 16M, the left display section 16L, and the right display section 16R.
Similarly, the second specific screens 16M2, 16L2, and 16R2 and the third specific screens 16M3, 16L3, and 16R3 are also displayed at appropriate times, respectively, although as will be described below, the central display section 16M has a partial priority in terms of display timing.

The central display section 16M displays information about an integrated cooking mode that combines the first heating means HM1 to the third heating means HM3, as well as information about a single cooking mode KM3 and cooking in a composite control mode.
The left display section 16L displays information related to the left heating port 4L and the left operation section 15L.
The right display section 16R displays information related to the right heating port 4R and the right operation section 15R. Note that the input key 180 for selecting a voice input mode common to all input operation sections is omitted from Fig. 70.

The integrated display unit 30, the left display unit 31L, and the right display unit 31R display various information in the coordinated cooking mode. In other words, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, and when operating in the coordinated control mode, related information is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1.

In the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 71, the cooking modes can be broadly divided into two: a mode that selects the range grill-related "combined cooking mode/single cooking mode," and a mode that selects the "linked cooking mode."

As shown in FIG. 71, the central operation unit 15M is a shared operation unit, as in the first embodiment. Specifically, it has a collection of various input keys that are shared among four cooking modes: the individual cooking mode KM3 of the microwave heating source (microwave oscillator) 11, the individual cooking mode KM3 of the radiant heat heating means 12, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the linked cooking mode KM1.

The second feature of this second embodiment is the input key 151KP. The input key 151KP shown in FIG. 71 is an input key for the function setting mode described in the first embodiment, but at the same time, it is also a specific input key that can transmit a signal (selection signal A or selection signal B) to which the user US responds when advance notice information 1 (or advance notice information 2) of recipe data CD is received. Note that this input key 151KP can select the function setting mode only when it is "pressed and held." Also, input key 153M does not have the function of a specific input key.

Next, we will explain Figure 72.
FIG. 72 is an enlarged plan view of the central display unit 16M, the central operation unit 15M, and the central heating status display unit 17M of the cooking appliance 1. FIG.
One of the features of the second embodiment is that the input key 151KP is the (only) "specific input key" in the central operation unit 15M. The touch operation surface of the input key 151KP has a function description "preparation for reception" written on the top surface of the central operation unit 15M.
The input key 153M located to the right of the input key 151KP is used to select the cooperative cooking mode KM1, similar to the input key 153 in the first embodiment. However, as described in Fig. 71, this input key 153M does not have the function of a specific input key.

The two input keys 155M and 154M to the right are used to select the composite cooking mode KM1. The functions of these three input keys 153M, 154M, and 155M are the same as those described in the first embodiment, and include the function of selecting cooking menus and control menus by touch operation.

As described in the first embodiment, the function of the input keys 153M, 154M, and 155M is to select the "voice input mode" by performing a "long press" operation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 72 (on the top surface of the central operation unit 15M), the explanatory text for the function "voice input" is written.

FIG. 72 shows the display contents of the central display unit 16M in the middle of obtaining recipe data CD for a cooking menu using the central operation unit 15M from the communication terminal 200.
Reference numeral 174 denotes a reception operation display section, which in this scene indicates that the device is on standby to receive recipe data CD from the outside.

Here, "on standby" refers to a state in which the operation of receiving recipe data CD has not yet actually started. In other words, this is a state in which the operation of receiving neither the first part M1 defining cooking step 1 nor the second part M2 defining cooking step 2 is being performed.
Reference numeral 175 denotes operation support information, which in this scene displays in text a message instructing the user US to press the input key 151KP, guides the user US in the operation of acquiring recipe data, and supports the progress of the operation.

Figure 72 shows the stage where, when selecting "fried chicken" in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 described in embodiment 1, advance notice information 1 (201) has already been received, and so a touch operation of a specific input key (in this case, 151KP) is requested in order to respond. If the selected cooking menu item in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 was "hamburger steak," which is one of the cooking menu items in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, it is not this specific input key 151KP that will be used, but rather the light-emitting element 21L or 21R corresponding to either the specific input key 152L or 152R of the left or right operation unit 15L, 15R that will emit light (including blinking). Figure 72 shows an example in which the light-emitting element 21M of the central operation unit 15M is emitting light.

In this second embodiment, as described above, at least the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed not only on the central display unit 16M, but also on the left and right display units 16L and 16R at the same time. Figure 72 shows the case of "Hamburger", but unlike the first embodiment, the standby initial screen 16MH in Figure 72 is displayed simultaneously on the central display unit 16M and the left and right display units 16L and 16R.

Next, we will explain Figure 73.
Fig. 73 shows an example of a specific display screen that displays that recipe data for "hamburger steak", one of the cooking menu items cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, is being received from the communication terminal 200. Fig. 73 shows the case of "hamburger steak", but unlike the first embodiment, the receiving operation display screen 16MM of Fig. 73(B) is also displayed simultaneously on the central display unit 16M and the left and right display units 16L and 16R. This is because, for example, input of the preheating temperature on the right operation unit 15R is required in the preheating process of this "hamburger steak".

Figure 73 (A) is a schematic diagram showing an enlarged view of the reception operation display screen 16MM. The initial standby screen 16MH switches to the reception operation display screen 16MM, which shows that a recipe is being received from outside, as shown in Figure 73 (A).

In Fig. 73A, 16F denotes a plurality of progress marks that appear on a receiving operation display screen 16MM according to the progress of the receiving operation. These progress marks 16F come in two types: black triangular shapes and white triangular shapes.
In Fig. 73(A), 174 is a receiving operation display section, which in this scene displays in text a fact that the recipe data CD is in the middle of being received from outside. Note that in Fig. 73(A), the receiving operation display section 174 does not display whether the first part M1 defining cooking step 1 or the second part M2 defining cooking step 2 is in the middle of being received, but display information that can identify the step, such as "cooking step 1" or "first step", may be added as appropriate.

The receiving operation display screen 16MM is displayed by switching from the initial standby screen 16MH immediately after, for example, pressing one specific input key (e.g., 151KP) to transmit selected information A.

As shown in FIG. 73(A), immediately after the start of the cooking control data reception operation, there is one black triangular progress mark 16F, but as the reception operation progresses, the number gradually increases, and eventually there are five black triangular progress marks 16F lined up. As the number of black triangular progress marks 16F increases, the same number of white rectangular progress marks 16F disappear.

The progress mark 16F may display the degree of progress by changing the size and color of a single figure, or may be expressed by animation.
FIG. 73(B) is a schematic diagram showing the first specific screen 16M1 immediately after the recipe data CD has been received.
As shown in FIG. 73B, auxiliary information 179 is displayed in a large area formed by combining the second area 23 and the third area 24 .
Three types of auxiliary information 179 are displayed.
One is reception information 179F indicating that recipe data CD for "hamburger steak" in which cooking step 1 is performed using the right heating port 4R has been received.
The second is reference information 179E that recommends the input of control conditions and includes examples (standard values) of control conditions that can be input.
The third is voice input mode display information 179D, which indicates that voice input is being accepted. If the voice input mode is not selected, this voice input mode display information 179D is not displayed. Note that this voice input mode can be selected by pressing input keys 153M, 154M, etc., after the external recipe identification section 173 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 73(B), the received information 179F does not indicate whether the first part M1 that specifies cooking step 1 or the second part M2 that specifies cooking step 2 was received, but such information specifying the cooking step may be added and displayed.

As explained in the first embodiment, in the second embodiment as well, the external recipe identification unit 173 allows the user to easily see that the cooking menu currently displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 is based on recipe data CD acquired from an external source. In the linked cooking mode KM1, the external recipe identification unit 173 may display the cooking process number or the name of the cooking process (for example, "first half process" or "first half recipe").

In the example of FIG. 73(B), the reference information 179E on the first specific screens 16M1 and 16R1 indicates that the standard temperature for initially preheating a hamburger steak is 180°C. The preheat setting temperature can be changed by the user US through voice input (e.g., saying "Preheat 190°C"). The reference information 179E is displayed on the first specific screens 16M1 and 16R1 of the central display section 16M and the right display section 16R corresponding to the selected right heating port 4R.

In the example of FIG. 73(B), the reference information 179E indicates that the standard temperature for initially preheating the hamburger steak is 180°C. This preheat setting temperature can be changed by the user US through voice input (e.g., saying "Preheat 190°C").

When the recipe data CD is determined to be "not permitted processing" based on the determination of the permission conditions, as shown in FIG. 73(C), the reception operation display section 174 changes to a not permitted display 174F indicating that the reception operation has failed.
73C shows that the current temperature of the heating chamber 6 is high (for example, 120° C.), the heating chamber 6 cannot be used if the temperature remains high, and the method of quickly lowering the temperature by opening the door 7 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 73(B), the information of the recipe data CD stored in the recipe data storage unit 42 is displayed in the first specific screen 16M1 (when cooking hamburger steak in the collaborative cooking mode KM1).

Instead of the receiving operation display screen 16MM shown in FIG. 73(A), multiple light-emitting elements (LEDs) may be provided, as in the left heating power display unit 17L of embodiment 1, and the progress of the receiving operation may be displayed in multiple stages by the light emitted by the multiple light-emitting elements. For example, at the beginning of the receiving operation, only one LED may be lit, and the number of lit LEDs may increase as the receiving operation progresses. Alternatively, the progress may be expressed by switching the blinking or color of the LED. This may allow the user US to be informed of the completion of the receiving operation in an intuitive and easy-to-understand manner.

Next, we will explain Figure 74.
74 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the central operation section 15M and the central display section 16M in a recipe data receiving process. This diagram is a modified example of the display form of FIG.
Fig. 74 shows the process of receiving recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200. For all heating cooking modes including the combined cooking mode KM2, the display design of the receiving operation display screen 16MM is unified as shown in Fig. 74 (A) (B). In other words, a wide display area is secured by combining the first area 22 to the third area 24.

Immediately after starting reception of recipe data CD from the outside, the initial standby screen 16MH is switched to a reception operation display screen 16MM indicating that the reception operation is in progress, as shown in FIG. 74(A).
Reference numeral 174 denotes a receiving operation display section, which displays in text the fact that recipe data CD is being received from the outside. The display information of the receiving operation display section 174 may include the name of the cooking mode, the name of the control menu, the identification information 160, 167, etc. In FIG. 74, "microwave heating" is displayed, and it can be confirmed at this stage that cooking is being performed using the heating chamber 6. In the case of the linked cooking mode KM1, the receiving operation display section 174 may display which of the first portion M1 defining cooking step 1 and the second portion M2 defining cooking step 2 is being received. For example, display information such as "cooking step 1" or "first step" may be added as appropriate.

Figure 74 (A) shows an example of the receiving operation display screen 16MM on the central display unit 16M, but if, for example, operation is required using specific input keys 152L, 152R on the right operation unit 15R and left operation unit 15L, similar receiving operation display screens 16ML, 16MR are displayed on the left and right display units 16L, 16R (not shown in Figure 74).

If the recipe data CD is determined to be “not permitted processing” based on the judgment of the permission conditions (permission conditions 1 to 4, etc.), as shown in FIG. 74 (B), the reception operation display unit 174 changes to displaying non-reception information (not permitted information) 174F indicating that the reception operation has failed.
174A is reception support information. In FIG. 74B, the reason for the denial of the recipe data CD was that the peak cut power setting value among the permission conditions was less than 5000 W (not satisfying permission condition 1), and therefore a remedy is displayed, and it is recommended that the user US change the setting of the peak cut function of the heating cooker 1 using the function setting key 151KP. In the case of the linked cooking mode KM1, when the data of the first part M1 defining the cooking process 1 is received, the permission conditions 1 and 2 are judged, and if not permitted, the second part M2 of the cooking process 2 cannot be acquired.

In FIG. 74, an example was explained in which "permission condition 1" was used as the criterion for determining "non-permission processing" of the cooking appliance 1, but this is the case for the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2 using the heating chamber 6 (microwave heating "warm") and the linked cooking mode KM1. Other conditions may be added to the criteria for "permission condition 1".

Next, we will explain Figure 75.
FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display contents on the terminal display unit 216 of the communication terminal 200 used in the heating and cooking system of the second embodiment.
FIG. 75 (A) is an explanatory diagram of a first screen 216A that displays identification information (such as the name of the cooking method) related to one cooking menu selected by a user US, and information such as the heating means to be used.

As explained in detail in FIG. 60 and FIG. 61(A) of the first embodiment, the first screen 216A displays various information regarding one cooking menu (food to be cooked), such as cooking time, quantity (for two people, for four people, etc.), ingredients, preparation, and cooking method (such as the name of the cooking mode selected on the cooking device 1 and the input operation section).

When the user US touches the confirmation key (icon) 237A for the cooking menu on the first screen 216A, in response to the input from the touch operation, the communication terminal 200 transmits advance notice information 1 (201) regarding cooking process 1 to the cooking appliance 1 in the case of the coordinated cooking mode KM1. In the case of other combined cooking modes, since there is only one cooking process, advance notice information 1 for all cooking processes is transmitted.

The second screen 216B, which starts to be displayed after the advance notice information 1 (201) is transmitted, includes information requesting a decision as to whether or not to transmit the recipe data CD relating to the selected cooking menu to the cooking appliance 1. In the example of FIG. 75, the central operation unit 15M is used in cooking step 1, so the user US needs to operate the specific input key 151KP of the central operation unit 15M after receiving the advance notice information 1 (201).

In FIG. 75(A), 236 is cooking process information indicating one type of heat source as part of the "recipe" mentioned above. In the example of FIG. 75(A), it can be seen that cooking is being performed in the "range grill" control mode (of the composite cooking mode KM2). "Range grill" cooking is cooking using a combination of the microwave oscillator 11 and the radiant heat heating means 12, and is a type of automatic cooking. Note that since this is the composite cooking mode KM2, there are no (multiple) cooking processes that change the cooking location by moving the food to be cooked. In other words, since there is only one cooking process, the cooking process information 236 is only displayed in one place.

In addition, unless the cooking menu is in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the send input key (cooking menu confirmation key) 237A for cooking process 1 and the send input key 237B for cooking process 2 are not displayed sequentially or simultaneously on the terminal display unit 216, as shown in FIG. 60 of the first embodiment.

Reference numeral 237 denotes a confirmation key (icon) for the cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A. When this is touched, advance notice information 1 is transmitted. In response to the input by the touch operation, the communication terminal 200 switches the display contents from the first screen 216A to the second screen 216B.
Reference numeral 234 denotes a character display section showing the type of display information (one of the display menus) of the first screen 216A. In Fig. 75(A), "Heating chamber menu" is displayed to indicate that the heating chamber 6 is used for cooking.

Next, we will explain Figure 75(B).
When the user US touches the confirmation key (icon) 237 for the cooking menu on the first screen 216A of Figure 75 (A), the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation and switches to the display of the second screen 216B shown in Figure 75 (B).

In the second screen 216B, 239 is a character display section showing the type of display information of the second screen 216B. In Fig. 75(B), "Preparing to send heating chamber settings" is displayed to show that the preparation stage is in progress for sending setting information for a cooking process using the heating chamber 6.
Numeral 240 is an input key (icon) for commanding transmission, and when this is pressed, recipe data CD of the cooking menu selected in Fig. 75(A) is transmitted to the cooking appliance 1. However, in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, in the case of a cooking menu which involves cooking steps 1 and 2, input key 237 shown in Fig. 75(A) and input key 240 in Fig. 75(B) are each touched twice.

The second screen 216B shown in Fig. 75(B) displays preparation work on the cooking device 1 side for the user US. Specifically, it indicates that the central operation unit 15M to be used in cooking step 1 should be operated, and recommends pressing the "preparation button on the central operation unit." This "preparation button" refers to the specific input key 151KP shown in Figs. 71 and 72.
At this time, the cooking appliance 1 has already received the advance notice A (201) and illuminates the light emitting unit 21M of the central operation unit 15M to prepare for the user's operation of pressing the input key 151KP. The illumination of the light emitting unit 21M is an operation support operation corresponding to step SG13 described in FIG. 65 of the first embodiment.

When the input key 151KP is pressed, in response to this action, the heating cooker 1 transmits to the communication terminal 200 “selection information A (confirmation information A)” 202 indicating that a specific heating section (in this case, the heating chamber 6) has been selected.
Therefore, when the input key 240 on the second screen 216B displayed in FIG. 75(B) is pressed, the recipe data CD for one cooking menu selected in FIG.

Next, we will explain Figure 76.
FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification of the display content on the terminal side display unit 216 shown in FIG.
In the second screen 216B shown in Fig. 76, 201 is an example of the advance notice information 1. A part of this advance notice information 1 (201) has already been transmitted to the cooking appliance 1 as advance notice information at the stage of the first screen 216A before the second screen 216B is displayed. That is, the cooking appliance 1 has acquired both or either of the information that the central operation unit 15M and the heating chamber 6 are to be used. Therefore, the cooking appliance 1 starts blinking the light emitting unit 21M corresponding to the corresponding input key 151KP.

As shown in FIG. 76, advance notice information 1 (201) includes information requesting that the central operation unit 15M used in this recipe (cooking) be operated before the recipe data CD is transmitted.
75(B) above, the input operation unit 15 to be operated is displayed as the central operation unit 15M. Furthermore, in the actual central operation unit 15M, the light emitting units 21M corresponding to the input keys 151KP are blinking, and in the central operation unit 15M, the other light emitting units 21M are neither blinking nor emitting light continuously.
Therefore, as in the advance notice information 1 (201) of Fig. 76, the operation surface of a specific input key (e.g., 151KP) to be operated on the cooking appliance 1 side is highlighted by shining light from below or emitting light, so that it can be clearly shown that the input key to be operated by the user US is only the input key 151KP. This makes it even easier and more certain to specify the input key 151KP than in the example of Fig. 75(B), and it is expected that the user US will perform a reliable input operation.

Next, we will explain Figure 77.
FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing still another example of the display contents on the terminal side display unit 216 shown in FIG.
If communication terminal 200 has already received a signal indicating that the specific input key to be operated is being operated before input key 237 shown in Figure 75 (A) is pressed, second screen 216B shown in Figure 77 is displayed.
As shown in the second screen 216B of Fig. 77, it is notified that the specific input key (on the cooking appliance 1 side) that should be operated to obtain the recipe data CD has already been operated. Therefore, it is understood that there is no need to operate the specific input key again on the cooking appliance 1. Then, if it is OK to transmit the recipe data CD as it is, it is displayed that the transmission input key 240 should be pressed.

The second screen 216B of FIG. 77 is displayed when the specific input key (e.g., 151KP) operated in the "key identification step SP2A" matches the "specific input key" (e.g., 151KP) (corresponding to a specific cooking menu) when the confirmation key (icon) 237 is touched on the first screen 216A of FIG. 75 (A), as described in FIG. 64 of the first embodiment.
The operation information of the specific input key in the key identification step SP2A is transmitted from the cooking appliance 1 to the communication terminal 200 at the time of the operation. That is, the communication terminal 200 acquires the operation information of the specific input key in the key identification step SP2A in advance. Therefore, the central processing unit 212 determines that the specific input key (on the cooking appliance 1 side) that should be operated to acquire the recipe data CD has already been operated, and displays the second screen 216B of FIG. 77.

Next, we will explain Figure 78.
78(A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams 3 showing the display contents on the terminal display unit 216 of the communication terminal 200 used in the heat cooking system.
In the third screen 216C shown in Fig. 78(A), 239 is a character display section showing the type of display information of the third screen 216C. In Fig. 78(A), "Heating chamber transmission result" is displayed to show the status after the setting information of the heating chamber 6 is transmitted.
FIG. 78A is a display screen of the transmission result, which is a special screen that is always displayed after the recipe data CD is transmitted.

There are two types of screens for displaying the transmission results. The first screen is the screen shown in Fig. 78(A). This is the stage where the final result transmitted from the cooking appliance 1 has not yet been received, and simply displays the contents transmitted from the communication terminal 200, particularly the cooking menu and the main control conditions (heating time, microwave output value).
The second screen is the screen shown in Fig. 78 (B). This is the stage where the communication terminal 200 judges whether the transmission of the recipe data CD was successful or not after receiving the transmission result (determination result) from the cooking appliance 1. Information on the success or failure of the transmission is displayed.

In FIG. 78 (A), 525 is a transmission information display section, which displays a list of the name of the transmitted cooking menu (identification information) and two types of control conditions (set temperature and microwave output value) as shown in the figure. The transmission action "Transmitted" is also displayed at the same time. 332 is a menu screen display section (icon) for selecting to return to the initial menu display screen. In the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the transmission information display section 525 may further display the number and name of the cooking process (such as "first half process" and "second half process").

333 is an input key (icon) of a storage command for storing the transmitted cooking menu inside the communication terminal 200 or the first server 321 so that it can be easily extracted when searching for a cooking menu at a later date. When this is pressed, the "transmitted" cooking menu shown in FIG. 78(A) is stored in the communication terminal 200 or the first server 321 together with the setting information such as the control conditions. For example, the recipe data may be stored in the memory unit 220 of the communication terminal 200 (see FIG. 56) in the order of transmission date and time for only 30 days, and the older recipe data than that may be stored in the memory unit 321R of the first server 321 (see FIG. 68) in order by user US or by device identification information. In the case of recipe data CD of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the first part M1 specifying cooking process 1 and the second part M2 specifying cooking process 2 are linked to the identification information of one cooking menu and saved in the form of one recipe data.

Next, we will explain Figure 78(B).
Reference numeral 507A denotes an auxiliary information display section A. In the example of Fig. 78(B), the reason for the "non-permission process" from the cooking appliance 1 is simply explained in text.
Reference numeral 507B denotes auxiliary information display section B displayed near auxiliary information display section 507A. Fig. 78(B) shows an example in which the cooking appliance 1 has received status information indicating that the heating chamber 6 is in a high temperature state and has carried out a disallowance process for the recipe data CD. As a countermeasure to this disallowance process, it is recommended that the door 7 of the heating chamber (grill chamber) 6 be opened. This countermeasure will lower the temperature of the heating chamber 6, so it is expected that no error will occur when the recipe data CD is sent again.

In FIG. 78(B), 541 is a voice input mode display unit that indicates that the communication terminal 200 is set to the voice input mode. When this voice input mode display unit 541 is displayed, the user US can directly speak into the voice input unit 222 to input using that voice.

In FIG. 78 (B), 542 is reference information extracted by the central processing unit 212 of the communication terminal 200 with reference to the information in the cooking appliance database 217 in accordance with the content of the "non-permission process" from the cooking appliance 1, and is a type of operation support data GS (see FIG. 68).

When the cooking appliance 1 notifies the user of the "non-permission process", the cooking appliance 1 may transmit a unique error code (such as a simple number) to the communication terminal 200, and the central processing unit 212 of the communication terminal 200 may compare the error code with the error code in the cooking appliance database 217 and display the reference information 542.

In the example of Figure 78 (B), it is shown that heating is possible with "manual heating" where the heating time is individually specified by the user, rather than the control menu "automatic microwave" which detects the temperature of the food being cooked and automatically stops heating. In other words, the user is recommended to set "time" as a control condition. Note that when heating is done manually, the heating time (control condition) may be determined by inputting the specific cooking name from the communication terminal 200 to the first server 321 and obtaining reference information regarding time from the first server 321.

In FIG. 78(B), 543 is an error notification (error display) indicating the fact that a notification of "non-permission processing" has been received from the cooking appliance 1. Note that this error notification is displayed both when it occurs due to the actual state of the cooking appliance 1 (temperature, peak cut conditions, etc.), as in the above-mentioned "permission condition 1," and when there is a communication failure in the network NW or wireless communication 330BT.

In the above description, the communication terminal device 200 such as a smartphone performs wireless communication 330BT with the cooking appliance 1 using Bluetooth (registered trademark). As an alternative method, since the communication terminal device 200 has an NFC input/output unit 221 (see FIG. 56) for short-distance wireless communication, the communication terminal device 200 may be brought into close proximity or into contact with an NFC input/output unit (not shown) on the cooking appliance 1 side to input information.

Summary of embodiment 2.
As is clear from the above description, in the second embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is as follows:
An input operation unit 15;
Heating means HM1 to HM3 for heating one food item in cooking step 1 and cooking step 2;
A communication unit 51 for wirelessly communicating with the outside;
A notification means 90;
A control device 40 that acquires setting information A related to the cooking process 1 and setting information B related to the cooking process 2 via the communication unit 51;
having
The control device 40 sequentially acquires the setting information A for the cooking process 1 and the setting information B for the cooking process 2,
When the specific input key A (152L, 152R, 151KP) of the input operation unit 15 is operated, the control device 40 proceeds to a step (receiving step SP4) in which the setting information A of the cooking process 1 can be acquired,
When a specific input key B (152L, 152R, 151KP) of the input operation unit 15 is operated, the process proceeds to a step (receiving step SP4) in which setting information B of the cooking process 2 can be acquired.
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, the external recipe data CD can be reliably acquired by the cooking appliance 1 and used for actual cooking.
In other words, when a specific input key (e.g., input key 151KP) suitable for obtaining the recipe data (cooking menu) selected by the user US is operated in advance on the side of the heating cooker 1, the operation proceeds to obtain the recipe data CD after a confirmation operation by the user US (presence or absence of a specific operation on the input operation unit 15) is performed, thereby preventing an operation error by the user US and improving usability.
Furthermore, in the case of recipe data CD for a cooking menu with multiple cooking steps, such as the collaborative cooking mode KM1, the information can be reliably obtained for each cooking step through the stages of receiving the preview information 1, preview information 2, etc. and confirming the information using the specific input key, so it is expected that the operability of a heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking by utilizing multiple cooking steps will be improved.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment,
When the specific input key A or the specific input key B is operated, the control device 40 starts a reception state for receiving setting information of the heating means, and when the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 is started, the reception state is released.

With this configuration, the start and end (time range) of receiving (acquiring) the recipe data CD are clear, and once one acquisition process is completed, the reception is automatically terminated with the start of the heating operation, so even if the user US mistakenly operates the communication terminal 200, the recipe data CD will not be received at an inappropriate time. Therefore, when selecting a cooking menu or performing cooking, there is no misunderstanding or confusion on the part of the user US, and no failure to acquire the recipe data CD.

Furthermore, in this second embodiment, a heat cooking system related to the third disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the heating and cooking system according to the third disclosure includes:
A cooking device 1 having a plurality of input operation units 15M, 15L, and 15R and a communication function (communication unit 51);
A communication terminal 200 connected to the cooking appliance 1 by wireless communication,
The communication terminal 200 includes:
(1) A first screen 216A and a second screen 216B are sequentially displayed on the terminal display unit 216,
(2) The first screen 216A displays the recipe data CD relating to the selected food in the order of a first display portion 251 showing information relating to cooking step 1 and a second display portion 252 showing information relating to cooking step 2.
(3) When the first display portion 251 displayed on the first screen 216A is selected (by the input key 237), the display is switched to the second screen 216B displaying advance notice information 1 (201) specifying the input operation unit (e.g., specific input key 151KP) to be used in the cooking process 1 (see FIG. 75 ),
(4) The second screen 216B displays input keys 240 for transmitting the setting information A of the cooking process 1 of the recipe data CD (see FIG. 75 ).
(5) When the input key 240 is operated, the setting information A related to the cooking process 1 selected on the first screen 216A is transmitted to the cooking appliance 1,
The heating cooker 1 is configured such that, after receiving the setting information A, when a command to start the cooking process 1 is received, the cooking cooker 1 starts the cooking process 1 and cancels the process of receiving the setting information A.

With this configuration, recipe data CD stored in the external communication terminal 200 can be sequentially acquired by the cooking appliance 1 for each cooking step and used for actual cooking.
Furthermore, in the communication terminal 200, the first display portion 251 relating to the cooking process 1 is displayed, and the input key 237 for transmission is displayed in the vicinity of the first portion 251, so that the advance notice information 1 (201) of the recipe data CD (part of cooking process 1) can be transmitted by operating the input key 237. This is also the case for transmitting the advance notice information 2 of cooking process 2.
That is, the operation of the user US can be guided in a timely manner on the first screen 216A and the second screen 216B of the communication terminal, which prevents the user US from making operational mistakes or becoming confused, and improves usability.

Furthermore, in one form of the heating and cooking system relating to the third disclosure disclosed in this embodiment 2, as shown in Figure 76, the advance notice information (201) held by the communication terminal 200 includes visual information requesting that the central operation unit 15M used in a specific recipe (cooking) selected by the user US be operated before the recipe data CD is transmitted.
Moreover, in the input operation section 15 (central operation section 15M) to be operated, the light-emitting section 21M corresponding to the specific input key 151KP is blinking, and in the central operation section 15M, the other light-emitting sections 21M are neither blinking nor emitting continuous light.
In the communication terminal 200, as shown in the advance notice information 1 (201) in FIG. 76, the operation surface of a specific input key (e.g., 151KP) to be operated on the cooking appliance 1 side is illuminated with light from below or is illuminated to emphasize the presence of the specific input key 151KP.
With these configurations, in this second embodiment, the communication terminal 200 and the cooking appliance 1 cooperate to clearly inform the user that the specific input key to be operated is only the 151KP, so that the user US can be expected to perform a reliable input operation.

Furthermore, one form of the cooking device 1 disclosed in this embodiment 2 is as follows:
Individual operation units 15L and 15R of the single cooking mode KM3;
A common operation unit 15M for the cooperative cooking mode KM1;
A communication unit 51 for wirelessly communicating with the outside;
A first heating means and a second heating means;
A notification means 90;
a control device 40 that executes cooking using the recipe data CD acquired via the communication unit 51;
The individual operation unit has first specific input keys 152L and 152R,
The shared operation unit 15M has a second specific input key 151KP,
The control device 40 is
(1) a notification step SP2 in which one input key to be used in accordance with the advance notice information 1 (201) acquired from the communication unit 51 is specified from among the first specific input key and the second specific input key 151KP, and notified by the notification means 90;
(2) a confirmation step SP3 of transmitting selection information A (202) when the specific input key specified by the notification means 90 is operated;
Execute the following in sequence.
The control device 40 acquires the recipe data CD relating to one cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode in two stages, a first portion M1 for setting a cooking process 1 using the first heating means and a second portion M2 for setting a cooking process 2 using the second heating means,
The control device 40 is
When the advance notice information 1 is acquired from the communication unit 51 with respect to the first portion M1,
When the advance notice information 2 is acquired from the communication unit 51 with respect to the second portion M2,
In any case, the selection information A is transmitted in response to the operation of the first specific input keys 152L, 152R and the second specific input key 151KP specified by the notification means 90.
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, when the user US inputs the second specific input key 151KP suitable for obtaining the cooking process of the recipe data (cooking menu) of the selected collaborative cooking mode KM1 after receiving the advance notice information 1 from the communication terminal 200, the user US performs a confirmation operation on the cooking device 1 side (e.g., whether or not the specific input key 151KP has been operated) before proceeding to the operation of obtaining the recipe data CD.
Therefore, in the case of the integrated cooking mode KM1 having a plurality of cooking steps, it is possible to prevent the user US from making operational mistakes for each cooking step, and to improve usability.
Furthermore, since the recipe data CD of the collaborative cooking mode KM1, which has multiple cooking steps, can be reliably obtained for each cooking step through the steps of receiving the advance notice information (201) and confirming the same, it is expected that the operability of a heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking by utilizing multiple cooking steps will be improved.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 illustrated in the second embodiment has
The cooking device includes a plurality of input keys (154M, 155M, etc.), a plurality of specific input keys 152L, 152R, 151KP, a notification means 90, a communication unit 51, and a control device 40 that controls the heating means HM1 to HM3 using recipe data CD acquired from an external source to perform cooking,
The control device 40 is
(1) When acquiring the recipe data CD for an integrated cooking mode in which a cooking step 1 using one of the heating means and a cooking step 2 using a plurality of the heating means are performed, the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 are acquired separately,
(1) a notification step SP2B for notifying the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 151KP when advance notice information 1 (201) corresponding to the cooking process 1 is received;
(2) a confirmation step SP3 of judging whether the specific input keys 152L, 152R, 151KP have been operated after the notification step SP2B, and transmitting confirmation information A (201) if it is judged that the specific input keys have been operated;
(3) When the confirmation information A (202) is transmitted, information regarding the receipt of the recipe data CD is displayed on the display unit 16 of the notification means 90 (progress marks 16F, 174, see FIG. 73 ).
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, the recipe data CD stored in the external communication terminal 200 can be reliably acquired by the cooking appliance 1 for each cooking step and used in actual cooking.
Furthermore, the notification means 90 (display unit 16) of the cooking appliance 1 notifies the user US of a specific confirmation input key (e.g., 151KP) that should be operated in advance in response to the operation of the user US by using advance notice information 1 (201) from the communication terminal 200, and guides the user US to operate the confirmation process SP3, thereby preventing operational errors by the user US and improving usability.

Furthermore, one form of the heating cooker 1 shown in embodiment 2 is configured to transition to a receiving process SP4 in preparation for receiving the recipe data CD after transmitting the confirmation information A (202) in the confirmation process SP3.
Therefore, by pressing the specific input key for confirmation (for example, 151KP), the user US can directly proceed to the receiving process of the recipe data CD relating to the specified cooking process, which is convenient for the user US.

Furthermore, one form of the cooking device 1 disclosed in this embodiment 2 is as follows:
the notification means 90 includes a key identification unit 21 (light-emitting units 21M, 21L, 21R) for identifying the second specific input key 151KP and the first specific input keys 152L, 152R, respectively, and a condition display unit 16 (liquid crystal display units 16M, 16L, 16R) for displaying control conditions for cooking based on the recipe data CD,
The control device 40 is
(1) after the communication establishment step SP1, a notification step SP2B of identifying the first specific input key 152L to be used by illuminating the key identification unit 21 (continuous lighting, blinking, etc.) in accordance with advance notice information 1 (201) acquired from the communication unit 51;
(2) a confirmation step SP3 of transmitting selection information A (202) after the input key (151KP) specified by the key specification unit 21 is operated;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, recipe data CD stored in the external communication terminal 200 can be reliably acquired by the cooking appliance 1 and used for actual cooking.
Moreover, in the notification means 90 (display unit 16) of the cooking appliance 1, the second specific input key 151KP that should be operated in advance can be notified by the notification unit 90 (light emitting operation of the key identification unit 21) by advance notice information 1 (201) from the communication terminal 200 in response to the operation of the user US. Therefore, the user US can be guided to perform a correct input operation on the common operation unit 15M in the operation scene, so that the user US can be prevented from making an operation mistake and the usability can be improved.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, similarly to the cooking appliance 1 according to the first disclosure, after the main power switch 20 is turned on, during the initial standby period TP,
(1) Provide the user US with standby common information 60N.
(2) After the voice input mode is selected, recipe data CD relating to the cooperative cooking mode KM1 (including recipe data of the control menus of the combined cooking mode KM2 and the independent cooking mode KM3) is made receivable.
By controlling the timing of obtaining recipe data CD from the outside, recipe data CD for another cooking menu will not be inadvertently received while selecting a cooking mode or setting control conditions.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the input key 151KP for setting the function also serves as the second specific input key. In other words, it also serves to obtain recipe data CD for cooking using the central operation unit 15M, which makes it possible to avoid increasing the number of operation keys (operation units) of the input operation unit 15 and to prevent a decrease in operability for the user US.

In this embodiment 2, similarly to the heating cooker 1 of embodiment 1, the restriction unit 55 is configured to restrict the acquisition of new recipe data CD until the cooking process of the acquired recipe data CD is completed.
That is, when one recipe data CD is selected with the second specific input key 151KP, the reception restriction period TZ1 is set, and the process of acquiring recipe data CD for another cooking menu cannot be started.

This prevents the inadvertent reception of another cooking menu (including the control menu for the combined cooking mode or the control menu for the single cooking mode) during coordinated cooking, and allows the cooking menu of the received recipe data CD to be executed stably.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent problems with the operation of the control device 40 and to prevent misunderstandings or confusion on the part of the user US, which may occur if recipe data CD for a different cooking menu is inadvertently received during the cooking process. This improves usability for the user US.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 2, when the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed and the operation to obtain the recipe data is started, the display automatically switches to the reception operation display screen 16MM, as described in Figures 73 and 74.

In addition, multiple progress marks 16F are displayed on the reception operation display screen 16MM according to the progress of the reception operation, so the user US can easily understand that the operation of obtaining recipe data CD is in progress, which has the effect of preventing unnecessary misunderstandings and operational errors.

In addition to or instead of displaying the progress mark 16F, the progress may be notified by voice from the voice notification unit 51. Furthermore, the progress marks are not limited to those that change in shape or number over time as shown in Figures 73 and 74, and may be in a form in which the display color changes, for example.

In addition to the above, in this second embodiment, the same practical effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained for the same components as those of the first embodiment.

Embodiment 3.
FIG. 79 is a time chart showing the operation between the cooking device 1 and the communication terminal 200 used in the cooking system of the third embodiment in a time series. FIG. 80 is a plan view showing an enlarged operation state of the central display unit 16M, the central operation unit 15M, and the central heating status display unit 17 of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 79. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 79. FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) 200 shown in FIG. 79. FIG. 83 is a time chart showing the operation of the cooking device shown in FIG. 79 in a time series. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 79 in a time series. Note that the same or corresponding parts as those in the configurations of the first and second embodiments described in FIGS. 1 to 78 are given the same reference numerals.

Referring to Figure 79 .
79, steps SF1 to SF2 show the operation of the communication terminal 200. Steps SF3 to SF9 show the operation of the cooking appliance 1.
The memory unit 220 of the communication terminal 200 or the heating cooker database 217 stores identification information 167 corresponding to a cooking menu (e.g., “hamburger steak”) and corresponding information KID that identifies a “specific input key” corresponding to each cooking menu.
In addition, in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 having a plurality of cooking steps, the recipe data CD of the plurality of cooking steps constituting one cooking menu is stored together with identification information of each cooking step (e.g., a unique number of the cooking step).
Therefore, based on the advance notice information (201), the terminal side display unit (terminal side display screen) 216 displays the identification information of the cooking menu and a first screen 216A showing the image display unit 235. Note that this corresponding information KID is not necessarily required. This is because the specific input key that needs to be operated can be identified from the identification information of the cooking menu in the data held by the cooking appliance 1 without transmitting this corresponding information KID.

When the confirmation key (icon) 237A (see FIG. 61(A)) for the cooking menu is pressed in the communication terminal 200, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 transmits the advance notice information 1 (201) that it has obtained and generated from the memory unit 220 or the cooking appliance database 217 to the cooking appliance 400 (step SF2). In other words, it transmits the data of the first part M1 indicating the contents of cooking process 1. Note that FIG. 79 shows that the information stored in the memory unit 220 or the cooking appliance database 217 includes the identification information of the cooking menu, the corresponding information KID of the specific input key, and the identification information of the cooking process.

The operation of the cooking appliance 1 begins at step SF3.
Step SF3 is the stage at which advance notice information 1 (201) is received via the communication section 51.
Step SF4 is a judgment step of the advance notice information 1 (201) for carrying out a process equivalent to the above-mentioned "key identification step SP2A" (see FIG. 64).

In the judgment step SF4, the identification information corresponding to the cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger") and the corresponding information KID that specifies the specific input key corresponding to the cooking menu are compared with the data of the database stored in the storage device 41. As a result, it is judged that the information included in the transmitted notice information 201 is correct information based on the information held by the cooking appliance 1, and the process proceeds to step SF5. Note that the cooking appliance 1 stores the acquired notice information 201 in the storage device 41 in order to store it in association with the reception of the recipe data CD thereafter.
Also, the operation history information stored in the storage device 41 is collated to determine whether or not the specific input key to be operated has been operated.

Step SF5 is a processing step for performing a process equivalent to a part of the "notification process SP2B" (see FIG. 64) described above. In this step SF5, in response to the judgment result of step SF4, information for identifying the specific input key (e.g., 153M) is generated and displayed on the display unit 16 (e.g., central display unit 16M) to be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 80, the specific input key 153M is displayed in text by the operation support information 175. Also, the light emitting unit 21M is flashed to display.

The next step SF6 is a processing step for carrying out a process equivalent to a part of the above-mentioned "notification step SP2B" (see FIG. 64).
Step SF6 is the stage where the user US presses a specific input key (e.g., 153M) displayed in step SF5. This operation is detected by the input operation unit 15. For example, when the input key 153M is operated on the central operation unit 15M, as described in the first embodiment (FIG. 11), the input key identification unit 15A and the input signal analysis unit 52 determine that an input signal corresponding to the input key 153M has been provided to the control device 40 (input processing unit 70) (step SF7).

As described above, when a correct specific input key (for example, 153M) that should be input is operated, the limiting section 55 generates a signal for setting a reception limit period TZ1 for the recipe data CD.
As described in the first embodiment, the limiting unit 55 has a function of limiting acquisition of the recipe data CD. The limiting unit 55 has a function of limiting acquisition of advance notice information related to another cooking menu from the time point when the data acquiring unit 53 acquires the advance notice information 1 (201) via the communication unit 51 and operates a specific input key (e.g., 153M) as a response signal during a standby period before starting cooking in various cooking modes (including the cooperative cooking mode KM1) (i.e., before "cooking process 1").

In other words, if a specific input key is operated in step SF6, any other notice information sent after this will not be treated as a regular signal. However, if, for example, the input key (for cancel) 152M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed on the cooking device 1 immediately after step SF6, steps SF3 to SF7 are all cancelled, and it is possible to send new notice information 1 (201) from the communication terminal 200 after that. Also, once the (final) cooking step of one cooking menu is completed, notice information 1 (201) for new recipe data CD can be obtained from the communication unit 51. As another modified example, notice information 1 (201) for new recipe data CD can be obtained from the communication unit 51 when the (first) cooking step 1 of the cooking menu is started.

In the next step SF8, when a specific input key (for example, 153M) is operated in step SF6, the display unit 16 corresponding to the input operation unit 15 having the specific input key displays that the operation of the specific input key has been accepted. For example, as shown in Fig. 80, the operation support information 175A displays in text that the operation of the specific input key 153M has been accepted.
In the next step SF9, the selection information A (202) of the specific input key is transmitted to the communication terminal 200. This step corresponds to the above-mentioned "confirmation step SP3" (see FIG. 64).
As shown in FIG. 79, counting the elapsed time of the time limit TX starts from the stage of step SF4, which will be described with reference to FIG.

Next, we will explain Figure 80.
FIG. 80 is an enlarged plan view showing the operating states of the central display unit 16M, the central operation unit 15M and the central heating status display unit 17M of the cooking appliance 1 shown in FIG.
80 shows an example in which the specific input key is 153M. The fact that the specific input key 153M needs to be operated is displayed on the central display section 16M corresponding to the central operation section 15M.
Immediately after receiving the advance notice information 1 (201), the necessity of operating a specific input key is displayed. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 80, operation support information 175 is displayed in text such as "Please press the flashing reception key". Note that the audio notification unit 50 may also be used to notify the user by voice.

In synchronization with the display of the operation support information 175, as shown in FIG. 80, the light-emitting unit 21M corresponding to the specific input key 153M blinks, emphasizing the presence of the specific input key 153M with light.

Thereafter, when the user US presses the specific input key 153M, the central display section 15M starts displaying operation support information 175A such as "RECEPTION COMMAND ACCEPTED" as shown in white letters. Note that in addition to or instead of such a display, the voice notification section 50 may start notifying the user.
These displays and audio notifications allow the user US to visually confirm after the fact that he or she has certainly executed the operation of transmitting the selected information 202 by operating the specific input key 153M.

Next, we will explain Figure 81.
FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking appliance 1 shown in FIG.
FIG. 81 corresponds to FIG. 38 of the first embodiment, but differs from FIG. 38 in that a step of whether or not a specific input key is operated is added, and the following description will focus on this difference.
Step SL20 is the stage at which advance notice information 1 (201) is received during connection with the outside (communication terminal 200). That is, this is the stage at which advance notice information 1 (201) announcing the provision of recipe data CD for a specific cooking is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 that has been registered and set in advance. Judgment is started on the content of advance notice information 1 (201) as described in step SF4 of FIG. 79.
The control device 40 starts measuring the elapsed time from this point.

The next step SL21 is a process of judging whether or not the user US has operated a specific input key (for example, 153M). If the user has operated a specific input key, the result of this step SL21 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SL22.
In step SL22, it is determined whether the desired recipe data CD has been received from the communication terminal 200. If the desired recipe data CD has been received, the result of this step SL22 becomes "Yes", and the step of obtaining the recipe data CD is completed.

If a specific input key (e.g., 153M) is not operated in step SL21, the process proceeds to step SL23. In this step SL23, it is determined whether a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SL21. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SL24. Step SL24 is "automatic shutoff process 3" which automatically shuts off the main power supply, similar to step SM6 described in embodiment 1 (Figure 33). The time limit TX in this step SL23 is, for example, 10 minutes.

Also, if recipe data CD is not received in step SL22, the process proceeds to step SL23. In step SL23, as described above, it is determined whether the time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SL21. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SL24. In other words, "automatic shutoff process 3" is performed to automatically shut off the main power. Note that the time limit TX in step SL23 is, for example, 10 minutes as described above, but if step SL23 is reached via step 22, a time other than the time limit (10 minutes) may be set.

Next, we will explain Figure 82.
FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal device) 200 shown in FIG.
Since this FIG. 82 corresponds to FIG. 61 of the first embodiment, the following description will focus on the differences from FIG.
82(A) shows a state where the user US has already found recipe information for one cooking menu desired and has it displayed. 234 is a character display section that indicates the type of display information on the first screen 216A. 237 is a confirmation key (icon) for selecting one cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A.

When the user US touches the confirmation key (icon) 237 for the cooking menu on this first screen 216A, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200 receives the input from the touch operation and switches the display from the first screen 216A to the second screen 216D as shown in FIG. 82 (B).

Second screen 216D of the third embodiment is a pop-up screen that is automatically displayed immediately after touching confirmation key (icon) 237 for a cooking menu, and appears so as to overlap first screen 216A.
The display area of this pop-up screen 216D is slightly smaller than that of the first screen 216A, but is displayed so as to cover the image display section 235 and cooking process information 236 shown in FIG. 82(A).

Next, we will explain Figure 82(B).
In Fig. 82(B), 242 is an image diagram (schematic diagram) that simply shows the appearance of the cooking device 1. As shown in Fig. 82(B), heating port marks (figures) 242L, 242C, and 242R indicating the three heating ports 4L, 4C, and 4R are displayed. Also, a heating chamber mark (figure) 242G indicating the heating chamber 6 is displayed.

Of the heating port marks (figures) 242L, 242C, and 242R, the heating port marks (figures) 242L and 242R corresponding to the left heating port 4L and right heating port 4R are displayed in a red color, unlike the heating port mark (figure) 242C for the center heating port 4C. The reason that only the two heating port 4L and 4R are highlighted in this way is to allow the user US to intuitively understand that either of the two heating port 4L and 4R can be used in future cooking (using recipe data CD).

243L is a left selection mark (icon) that issues a signal to select the left heating port 4L when the user US touches it. When this is touched, advance notice information 1 (201) sent from the communication terminal 200 includes information that the left heating port 4L will be used (selected). In other words, advance notice information 1 (201) includes corresponding information KID indicating that the input key 152L of the left operation unit 15L is the "specific input key" to be operated, and can be provided to the cooking appliance 1.

243R is a right selection mark (icon) that emits a signal to select the right heating port 4R. When this is touched, the advance notice information 201 sent from the communication terminal 200 contains information indicating that the right heating port 4R will be used (selected). In other words, the advance notice information 1 (201) contains information (corresponding information KID) indicating that the input key 152R of the right operation unit 15R is the "specific input key" to be operated, and can be provided to the cooking appliance 1.

Even if the communication terminal 200 does not (cannot) immediately transmit the corresponding information KID, the cooking menu identification information and the cooking process identification information are transmitted together, and the communication terminal 200 may generate advance notice information 1 by adding data indicating "left/right identification information" indicating the right heating port 4R or left heating port 4L to the identification information. For example, in response to touching the left selection mark (icon) 243L, the central processing unit 212 or remote control information generating unit 219 of the communication terminal 200 may generate the advance notice information 1 based on the cooking menu identification information and the "left/right identification information".

Since only one of the left selection mark (icon) 243L and the right selection mark (icon) 243R can be selected, if the left selection mark (icon) 243L is touched first in the state of FIG. 82(B), the left heating port 4L is selected, but if the right selection mark (icon) 243R is touched immediately after this, the selection of the left heating port 4L is canceled and the right heating port 4R is selected. The same rule applies even if the order is reversed, and only the latest selection operation is valid and is grasped by the central processing unit 212. In addition, data indicating the selection operation results of the left and right heating port 4L, 4R is stored in the storage unit 220 or the cooking appliance database 217. In addition, on the cooking appliance 1 side, when a warning signal A (201) including a selection signal of the left heating port 4L and a selection signal of the right heating port 4R is received within a certain short period of time (for example, 5 seconds) "grace period A" as described above, the latest selection signal is adopted and the previous selection signal is ignored.

246 is an operation guidance display section, and in FIG. 82(B), the text "Please select one" and the text "Left" and "Right" are displayed adjacent to the left and right selection marks 243L and 243R. If the left and right selection marks 243L and 243R are operated, the pop-up screen 216D disappears automatically after a few seconds (called the "grace time"), and the screen returns to the original first screen 216A or advances to the second screen 216B. However, if the pop-up screen 216D does not automatically appear and disappear as shown in FIG. 82(B), an input key (icon) 247 for clearing the screen may be provided. During the grace time, the left selection mark 243L and the right selection mark 243R may be touched multiple times, and information on the last touched mark is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 as a confirmation signal when the grace time A (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

Next, we will explain Figure 83.
FIG. 83 is a time chart showing the operation of the cooking device shown in FIG. 79 in chronological order.
TM1 to TM8 indicate timings.
As is clear from Fig. 83, in the cooking device 1 of the third embodiment, the cooperative cooking mode KM1 has an operation pattern including the cooking step 1 in which cooking is performed at a first location (above the top plate 3) by the first heating means HM1, the cooking step 2 in which cooking is performed at a second location (inside the heating chamber 6) by the second heating means HM2, and a heating pause step (heating pause period P3) between the cooking steps 1 and 2. This operation pattern is the same as the "first cooperative cooking mode" described in the first embodiment. It is to be noted that the cooking device 1 also has the function of the second cooperative cooking mode in the reverse order.

Furthermore, the control device 40 presses the first specific input key 152L or 152R to start the cooking process 1 using the data of the first portion M1 in either the left heating port 4L or the right heating port 4R.
During the cooking process 1, the notification means 90 notifies the user that it is necessary to prepare for obtaining data on the second portion M2 (TM4).
Furthermore, when the second specific input key 153M is operated during the heating pause period P3, the cooking process 2 using the data of the second portion M2 can be started.

FIG. 83 will now be described in detail.
83 , "Acquisition notification 1", "Progress notification 1", "Progress notification 2", and "Acquisition notification 2" are operations performed by the display unit 16 of the notification means 90. Also, "Progress notification 1 to communication terminal" and "Progress notification 2 to communication terminal" are notifications made by the control device 40 to the outside (communication terminal 200) via the communication unit 51.

FIG. 83 shows a case where recipe data CD for a cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is obtained from the communication terminal 200 and used for cooking.
The "acquisition notification 1" at the first timing TM1 notifies the user that the first portion M1 including the setting information for cooking process 1 has been acquired.
When the user US starts a cooking operation (TM2), cooking process 1 is started. In Fig. 83, cooking process 1 is performed by the first heating means HM1.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the timing TM2, "progress notification 1" is automatically performed. For example, a notification such as "5 minutes have elapsed since the start of heating" is given.
Furthermore, when the elapsed time A from the timing TM2 exceeds a predetermined time, a "progress notification 2" is automatically performed. For example, a notification such as "Cooking process 1 will soon be completed" is given. The "progress notification" may be performed by detecting the elapsed time from the time when the temperature of the heated object has reached a target temperature (e.g., 180°C).

The "progress notification 2" is also sent to the communication terminal 200 via the communication unit 51 as the "progress notification 1 to the communication terminal".
In the "progress notification 2", the notification means 90 notifies the user that it is preparing to obtain the data (setting information) of the second portion M2. The audio notification unit 50 may also issue an audio alert.
This progress notification 2 is performed for the purpose of smoothly acquiring data on the second portion M2 from the communication terminal 200 during the heating pause period P3. In other words, it is intended to prompt the user US to make preparations so that the cooking process 2 can be started immediately during the heating pause period P3.

Cooking process 1 ends at timing TM5, but this end may be determined by the user US pressing input key 153L or 153R (on left and right operation units 15L and 15R). Also, cooking process 1 may end automatically based on the amount of time that has elapsed since timing TM2 (timer cooking).

When the data of the second portion M2 is acquired during the heating pause period P3, an "acquisition notification 2" is issued at timing TM6. This acquisition notification 2 notifies the user that the data of the second portion M2, including the setting information of the cooking process 2, has been acquired.
Then, cooking process 2 can be started at timing TM7. After that, when cooking process 2 is finished, the series of linked cooking modes KM1 ends at timing TM8. After this, cooking process 3 may be performed again after a heating pause period P3. In that case, data (setting information) for the third portion M3 (not shown) related to cooking process 3 may be acquired during the immediately preceding heating pause period P3.
When the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is completely completed at timing TM8, a "progress notification 2 to the communication terminal" is performed, so that the communication terminal 200 can know that cooking has finished even if the communication terminal 200 is in a remote location.

Next, we will explain Figure 84.
Fig. 84 is a flow chart showing the time series of the operation of the cooking appliance 1 shown in Fig. 79. The operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is explained in more detail with reference to the operation contents of Fig. 83. The operation of the control device 40 in the range from the start of the cooking process 1 to the heating pause process is shown.

In the cooking device 1 of this embodiment 3, when in standby before starting cooking operation, the function setting key 151KP of the input operation unit 15 can be operated to switch to the "function setting" mode and set to "external notification mode." Therefore, as described below, this function is convenient even when the user cannot always be in front of the cooking device 1 and be present to cook.

Figure 84 shows the basic operation program from the start of cooking process 1 to heating pause period P3 when the "external notification mode" is set. This program is also stored in the memory device 41 of the control device 40.

When a cooking process 1 start command is received from the input operation unit 15, the "external notification mode" is activated (step SW1). Note that the external notification mode may be activated from the stage where the first portion M1 of the cooking process 1 is obtained from the communication terminal 200.
Cooking process 1 is started, and measurement of the elapsed time (TN1, TN2) from the start of cooking process 1 is also started (step SW2). This step corresponds to timing TM2 described with reference to FIG.

The display unit 16 also displays the start of cooking process 1, and the audio notification unit 50 also notifies the user of the start of cooking (step SW2). Furthermore, because the device is in the "external notification mode," the communication unit 51 transmits information indicating the start of cooking process 1 to the outside (step SW3).

Here, since the communication terminal 200 is registered in advance as the external notification destination of the cooking appliance 1, information on the start of operation of the cooking appliance 1 is received via the cloud server 300. Also, when the communication terminal 200 is near the cooking appliance 1 (e.g., inside the same kitchen), information on the start of cooking process 1 is transmitted from the cooking appliance 1 to the communication terminal 200 by wireless communication 330BT.

Thereafter, the presence or absence of abnormal operation during cooking process 1 is checked (step SW4), and the presence or absence of exceeding the elapsed time TN1 is checked (step SW5).
These steps SW4 and SW5 are repeated at short intervals, and if an abnormality is detected, the notification means 90 notifies the user of the abnormality (step SW6). As part of the processing in the "external notification mode", the external cloud server 300 is also notified, and the communication terminal 200 is also notified of the occurrence of the abnormality.

When it is determined that the elapsed time TN1 has been exceeded ("Yes" in step SW5), the process proceeds to step SW7, and progress information 1 is notified on the display unit 16 and the audio notification unit 50. At the same time, the progress information is sent to the outside. This progress information also reaches the external cloud server 300 and the communication terminal 200.

In the next step SW8, it is determined whether the elapsed time TN2 has elapsed. If it is determined that the elapsed time TN2 has elapsed ("Yes" in step SW8), the process proceeds to step SW9. The notification in step SW9 is made by the display unit 16 and/or the audio notification unit 50. At the same time, the display unit 16 and/or the audio notification unit 50 advise the outside world to start preparations for acquiring recipe data for the second portion M2 related to cooking process 2. This step SW9 corresponds to timing TM4 in FIG. 83.

It is determined in step SW10 whether or not a command to end cooking process 1 has been received from input operation unit 15. This step corresponds to the process at timing TM5 in FIG.
When it is determined that cooking process 1 is completed ("Yes" in step SW10), the process proceeds to step SW11, and the completion of cooking process 1 is notified by display unit 16 or audio notification unit 50. At the same time, information on the completion of cooking process 1 is transmitted to the outside. This completion information also reaches external cloud server 300 and communication terminal 200. If first screen 216A, second screen 216B, or third screen (see FIG. 78 in the second embodiment) is displayed on communication terminal 200, the completion of cooking process 1 may be displayed on those screens by adding the latest information in a manner such as pop-up screen 216D (see FIG. 82).

In step SW11, for example, the central display unit 16M notifies the user that cooking step 1 has ended, and the communication terminal 200 is also notified of the end of cooking step 1. Furthermore, the communication terminal 200 is advised to proceed with obtaining setting information for cooking step 2 (the content of this advice is displayed on the terminal display unit 216).

When the user US transmits the data (setting information B) of the second part M2 for executing cooking process 2 on the first screen 216A of the communication terminal 200 using the input key 237B, the advance notice information 2 (201) is then sent to the cooking appliance 1 (step SW12).
Then, in step SW13, the contents of the advance notice information 2 are analyzed, and in the next step SW13, a specific input key to be operated is extracted from the recipe data storage unit 42 and displayed on the display unit 16.

As can be seen from FIG. 84, the heating pause period P3 begins from step SW10, during which the user can remove the food from the heating chamber 6 and move it to a heated food (such as a pot) prepared above the left heating port 4L or right heating port 4R. Note that in the case of a cooking menu in another linked cooking mode KM1, the food must be moved from the left and right heating ports 4L and 4R into the heating chamber 6. The length of this heating pause period P3 can be freely determined by the user until the user gives the command to start cooking (cooking step 2) (however, a long pause, such as more than 30 minutes, will result in an error and the linked cooking mode will be automatically cancelled).

Therefore, by utilizing this heating pause period P3, the user can check the cooking results of cooking process 1, obtain recipe data CD for cooking process 2, and consider the control conditions for cooking process 2. If necessary, at this point, the user can check the ingredients stored in the refrigerator 331 (see FIG. 68 in embodiment 2) and ask the residents for their opinions.

If the user presses input key 151M after step SW13 (if cooking process 2 is performed in heating chamber 6), heating pause period P3 ends immediately and cooking process 2 begins.

Summary of embodiment 3.
As is clear from the above description, in this third embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is as follows:
An input operation unit 15;
Heating means HM1 to HM3 for heating one food item in cooking step 1 and cooking step 2;
A communication unit 51 for wirelessly communicating with the outside;
A notification means 90;
A control device 40 that acquires setting information related to the cooking process 1 and setting information related to the cooking process 2 via the communication unit 51;
having
The control device 40 sequentially acquires the setting information of the cooking process 1 and the setting information of the cooking process 2,
When the specific input key A (152L, 152R, 153M) of the input operation unit 15 is operated, the control device 40 proceeds to a step (receiving step SP4) in which the setting information A of the cooking process 1 can be acquired,
When a specific input key B (152L, 152R, 153M) of the input operation unit 15 is operated, the process proceeds to a step (receiving step SP4) in which setting information B of the cooking process 2 can be acquired.
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

As explained in the first embodiment, this configuration allows the setting information for the recipe data CD to be reliably acquired for each cooking step, even in the case of recipe data CD for a cooking menu with multiple cooking steps, through the stages of receiving the advance notice information and confirming the setting information using the specific input key, and is expected to improve the operability of a cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking using multiple cooking steps.

Furthermore, the control device 40 of the cooking device 1 disclosed in the third embodiment is
(1) when the advance notice information 1 (201) regarding the cooking menu is acquired from the communication unit 51, a key identification process SP2A (see step SF4 in FIG. 79 ) is performed to extract a specific input key 153M, 152L, or 152R to be operated based on the corresponding information KID;
(2) a notification step SP2B (see step SF5 in FIG. 79 ) of notifying the notification means 90 of information capable of identifying the specific input key extracted in the key identification step SP2A;
(3) a step of judging whether the specific input key 153M, 152L, 152R notified by the notifying means 90 has been operated (see step SF7 in FIG. 79);
(4) When it is determined that the specific input key 153M, 152L, 152R notified by the notifying means 90 has been operated, a confirmation step SP3 (see step SF9 in FIG. 79) of transmitting selection information A (202) is executed in sequence.

As described above, this configuration allows the display unit 16 to accurately display the specific input keys that should be operated in advance in response to the operation of the user US. In addition, the user US is guided to operate the specific input keys in the confirmation process SP3, which prevents the user US from making operational mistakes and improves usability.

Furthermore, in the heating and cooking system of the third embodiment, the communication terminal 200
(1) In response to an input from the user US, one cooking menu corresponding to a specific recipe data CD is selected from the range of the first menu information and the second menu information and displayed on the terminal display unit (first screen 216A) (see step SF1 in FIG. 79 and FIG. 82(A));
(2) When the cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A is confirmed, the second screen 216D (pop-up screen) is displayed (see FIG. 82B).
(3) The second screen 216D displays input keys 243L and 243R (which also serve as selection marks) for selecting one of the left heating port 4L that can be used with the first specific input key 152L corresponding to the first menu information or the second menu information displayed on the second screen 216D, or the right heating port 4R that can be used with the first specific input key 152R, and an operation prompting display unit 246 that requests a touch operation of the input keys 243L and 243L,
(3) When a transmission command is received at a point in time when the touch input operation of the input keys 243L and 243R is completed, the specific recipe data CD relating to the cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A is transmitted to the cooking appliance 1.
The configuration was characterized by the following.

With this configuration, recipe data CD stored in the external communication terminal 200 can be reliably acquired by the cooking appliance 1 and used for actual cooking.
Moreover, the notification means 90 (display unit 16) of the cooking appliance 1 can present specific input keys 152L, 152R, 153M of the input operation unit 15 that should be operated in advance in response to the operation of the user US according to the data (corresponding information KID) in the storage device 41. Therefore, the notification is made by advance notice information 1 (201) from the communication terminal 200, and the operation of the confirmation step SP3 by the user US can be guided to the correct input operation unit 15.

Furthermore, corresponding to the display unit 16 of the cooking appliance 1, the second screen (pop-up screen 216D) of the communication terminal 200 is configured to display input keys 243L, 243R which also serve as selection marks to select either the left heating port 4L corresponding to the first specific input key 152L or the right heating port 4R corresponding to the first specific input key 152R, and an operation guidance display unit 246 which requests a touch operation of the selection marks 243L, 243L.
These configurations can prevent operational errors by the user US in both the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal 200, and can also improve usability.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, as particularly described with reference to FIG.
In the cooking device 1, at least one of the heating means HM1 to HM3 is configured to be able to perform heating operations independently of each other in a plurality of heating ports 4L and 4R,
On the other hand, in the communication terminal 200, the second screen 216B (pop-up screen 216D) is configured to display input keys 243L, 243R (which also serve as selection marks) for selecting one of the plurality of heating ports 4L, 4R.

Furthermore, the second screen (pop-up screen 216D) is configured to simultaneously display an operation prompting display section 246 for requesting touch operation of the input keys 243L, 243L. This allows the heating cooker 1 to know which heating port the user intends to use before transmitting the recipe data CD.
That is, by touching the input keys 243L, 243L, data indicating whether the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L is to be selected is included in the advance notice information 1 (201) and is provided to the cooking appliance 1 by the corresponding information KID. As a result, the corresponding specific input key is identified in the cooking appliance 1 and displayed on the display unit 16.
These configurations can prevent operational errors by the user US in both the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal 200, and can also improve usability.

The display contents of Figures 82(A) and 82(B) are basically the same for cooking step 1, cooking step 2, and cooking step 3 and onwards, so this is a particularly convenient configuration for a cooking device 1 that requires the user to select the desired one of multiple heating ports 4L, 4R depending on the cooking step.

In addition to what has been described above, in this embodiment 3, the same practical effects as those obtained in embodiments 1 and 2 can be obtained for the same configuration parts as those in embodiments 1 and 2.

Embodiment 4.
FIG. 85 is a configuration diagram of a cooking system according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the center of a cooking device used in the heating system shown in FIG. 85. FIG. 87 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 85. FIG. 88 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the second unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 85. FIG. 89 is an enlarged view 1 of an input operation unit and a display unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 85, seen from the front (front) side. FIG. 90 is a planar explanatory view 1 of the cooking device shown in FIG. 85, seen from above. FIG. 91 is a time chart showing basic operation steps and usage states from the start of the cooking device shown in FIG. 85. FIG. 92 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the usage form (first state and second state) of the cooking device shown in FIG. 85 and the cooking process. FIG. 93 is a time chart 1 showing the operation of the cooking device and the communication terminal used in the heating system shown in FIG. 85 in a chronological order. FIG. 94 is a time chart 2 showing the operation of the cooking device and the communication terminal used in the heating system shown in FIG. 85 in a chronological order. Fig. 95 is a plan explanatory diagram 2 of the cooking device shown in Fig. 86 as viewed from above. Fig. 96 is a plan explanatory diagram 3 of the cooking device shown in Fig. 86 as viewed from above. Fig. 97 is an enlarged explanatory diagram of the input operation unit and the display unit of the cooking device shown in Fig. 86 as viewed from the front (front) side. Note that parts that are the same as or equivalent to the configurations of the first to third embodiments described in Figs. 1 to 84 are given the same reference numerals.

In this fourth embodiment, the overall configuration of the cooking device 400 is different from that of the first to third embodiments, and is a tabletop or freestanding cooking device. In addition, the input operation unit 15 has a plurality of input keys corresponding to a plurality of cooking modes and foods to be cooked.

Before describing the details of the fourth embodiment, definitions of terms and basic configurations will be described in common.
The cooking device 400 of the fourth embodiment is composed of a first unit 401 and a second unit 402 that is placed on top of the first unit 401 when in use.
Furthermore, the first unit 401 can perform cooking without the second unit 402 being placed thereon. That is, the first unit 401 can perform cooking independently without depending on the second unit 402.

The second unit 402 can only cook when placed on the first unit 401 (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"). In other words, it is dependent on the first unit 401. In this fourth embodiment, the state in which the second unit 402 is separated from the state in which it is placed on top of the first unit 401 (the first state) is referred to as the "second state."

In the cooking device 400 of this fourth embodiment, the second unit 1 mainly contains rice, grains, beans, etc. in the inner pot 405, and the cooking menu mainly consists of rice cooking. For this reason, in the following description, the second unit 402 may be referred to as the "rice cooking unit."

The first unit 401 includes an input operation section 420, which will be described with reference to Figures 86 and 87.
The second unit 402, which will be described with reference to Figures 86 and 88, is provided with two input operation units 421 and 429. These three operation units 420, 421 and 429 each have a plurality of input keys corresponding to a plurality of cooking modes and foods to be cooked. The input keys include both touch input type input keys and pressure input keys. This will be described later.

The first unit 401 uses a heating coil (IH coil) 424 based on the induction heating principle to inductively heat objects to be heated, such as commercially available pots and frying pans. For this reason, in the following description, the first unit 401 may be referred to as an "induction heating unit." However, the heat source of the first unit 401 may be a heat source based on other principles, such as a radiant heater, an infrared heater, a sheath heater, or a gas-fired burner.

The second unit 402 is a container that is heated by the first unit 401 and in which operations such as cooking rice, boiling, and other cooking are performed. After cooking, the second unit 402 can be moved from above the first unit 401 to another location (e.g., onto the dining table) by the user US.

The first unit 401 is capable of induction heating cooking by itself, and can also heat the second unit 402. The first unit 401 may be a so-called "built-in" type that is fixed to kitchen furniture such as a sink, since it does not matter whether the first unit 401 can be moved to another location by the user US.

In this fourth embodiment of the cooking device 400, the first unit 401 can receive various control data including recipe data CD from the outside (such as the communication terminal 200).

The control data is roughly divided into two types.
The first control data is recipe data CD related to a cooking program for cooking rice, etc. In other words, it is setting information for determining heating control conditions.

The recipe data CD in this embodiment 4 includes a program A for executing a specific cooking menu using the first unit 401, a program B for executing a specific cooking menu in the second unit 402, and a program C for executing a common heating and cooking operation using both the first unit 401 and the second unit 402.

The other type of control data is remote operation data (remote operation signal). This remote operation data is given to the cooking appliance 400 by wireless communication from the communication terminal 200, cloud server 300, etc. when the user requests (inquires) at any time whether the scheduled cooking (by specifying the cooking time) has been completed or the cooking results (cooking start time, end time, power consumption value, number of times cooked, weight of cooked rice, etc.). Furthermore, it is a command to stop the keep-warm operation after cooking. This command is also given to the cooking appliance 400 by wireless communication.

In this fourth embodiment, "multiple heating cooking" refers to cooking in which the heating locations or heating environments (containers or heating chambers that hold the food) are different for one food item (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.) and the same heating source is used more than once. For example, first, only vegetables and meat are placed in a pot and pre-cooked by adding seasonings, etc., and then the food item containing the vegetables and meat is combined with another ingredient (e.g. rice) and placed in a sealed container or inner pot 405 for cooking rice (described later) and heated (in this case, the food item is also called "seasoned rice"). In this cooking device 400, the operating pattern that performs the multiple cooking is called the multiple heating cooking mode KMM.

The detailed configuration of the fourth embodiment will be described below.
First, we will explain Figure 85.
FIG. 85 shows an overall configuration diagram of a cooking system including a cooking device 400.
The cooking device 400 is composed of two components: a first unit 401 that is placed on kitchen furniture such as a dining table, and a second unit 402 that has a cylindrical or rectangular box-like external shape and is detachably placed on the first unit 401.

The first unit 401 includes a first communication section 430A for performing infrared communication, and the second unit 402 includes a second communication section 431A for performing infrared communication.
By performing infrared communication between the first communication section 430 and the second communication section 431, various types of control data can be exchanged between the first unit 401 and the second unit 402.
The second unit 402 houses an inner pot 405 with a bottom for containing rice, grains, ingredients, etc., to be cooked during cooking (including rice cooking; the same applies below).
The inner pot 405 has an opening on the entire top surface, and is made of a magnetic metal or a high-purity carbon material to be induction heated. The magnetic metal in this case includes a material called a clad material made by stacking thin plates of magnetic stainless steel material or aluminum.
In FIG. 85, 426 is a wireless communication unit (communication module) as described in the first embodiment.

Referring to Figure 86 .
Fig. 86 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the left-right center of the cooking device 400. In Fig. 86, cross-sectional representation (hatching) is omitted for some components.

In the solid arrows in FIG. 86, the "front" direction is the forward (front) direction of the second unit 402 and the first unit 401. "Rear" indicates the opposite rear (back) direction.

As shown in FIG. 86, the second unit 402 is simply placed on the top plate 422 that forms the upper surface of the first unit 401, and is not fixed by any connecting means such as screws, so that it can be easily separated from the upper surface of the first unit 401 by lifting it up.
The first unit 401 is a member on which the second unit 401 is placed, and is configured in an overall truncated cone shape as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 86, the second unit 402 comprises a cylindrical (cubic) body 403, a lid 404 connected to the body 403 by a hinge portion (not shown) centered on a hinge axis 416, a handle (not shown) used to lift the entire second unit 402, a cylindrical inner pot 405 with an open top, an inner pot temperature detection means 406, a power supply means 407 mainly composed of a power transmission coil, a power receiving coil 408, a lid opening/closing button 409, a lid heating means 410, an inner pot side heating means 411, a second display unit 412 which is an example of an alarm means 70, a third display unit 413, a second operation unit 421 into which the user US inputs cooking conditions, etc., and a third operation unit 429.
The third operation unit 429 is disposed on the front side of the second unit 402, and is an operation unit for instructing the measurement of the weight of the food to be cooked, such as rice, which will be described later, and for instructing the calculation of the energy consumption. The inner pot side heating means 411 is disposed in a ring shape so as to surround the entire circumference of the inner pot 405.

The third operation section 429 has three push button type (press type) input keys. That is, a measurement input key 429A (not shown), a display input key 429B (not shown), and a calorie calculation input key 429C (not shown) for instructing the calculation of calories according to the weight of the rice (also called cooked rice) after cooking is completed are arranged. The measurement input key 429A (not shown) is used to issue a measurement start command for measuring the weight of rice, water, etc. before cooking rice.
The display input key 429B (not shown) is an input key for commanding the display of the weight measurement result. The calorie calculation input key 429C is an operation key for commanding the calculation of calories according to the weight of the cooked rice. When the calorie calculation input key is pressed, the calorie calculation result is automatically displayed on the third display unit 413.

In FIG. 86, 404 is a lid body that is pivotally supported on the main body 403 by a horizontally extending hinge shaft 416. The lid body 404, which opens at least to a vertical position around this hinge shaft 416, houses a sub-control device 440 inside.

A second display unit 412 including a liquid crystal display substrate or the like is disposed in the center of the upper surface of the cover 1B, so that the displayed content can be confirmed from above the cover 404.
Reference numeral 423 denotes a large opening formed on the bottom surface of the main body 403, and the entire bottom surface of the inner pot 405 is exposed downward. Incidentally, the opening 423 may be covered with a thin heat-resistant plastic plate or the like instead of being exposed in this manner.

A sensor 437 detects whether the inner hook 405 is properly accommodated in the second unit 402 .
The sensor 437 is fixed to the inside of the lid 404, for example, and is installed in such a position that it elastically contacts the upper surface of the flange (brim) at the upper end of the inner pot 405 when the lid 404 is completely closed. The sensor 437 has a built-in pressure sensor that emits a signal in response to the pressure received from the outside when it abuts against the upper surface of the flange. Therefore, when the lid 404 is completely closed and the inner pot 405 is present, it contacts the inner pot 405 and emits an electric signal corresponding to the pressure. The sub-controller 440 receives this electric signal (detection signal) and can detect the placement of the inner pot 405. The means for detecting the presence of the inner pot 405 is not limited to the sensor 437, and a non-contact sensor such as an ultrasonic sensor that detects the presence of the inner pot 405 may be used.

Reference numeral 418 denotes a first display section disposed on the front (front face) side of the first unit 401, and is composed of a liquid crystal display screen or the like. As is clear from FIG. 86, the first unit 401 has an input operation section 420 disposed immediately below the first display section 418.
The input operation unit 420 will be referred to as a "first operation unit 420" in the following description. The input operation unit 421 will be referred to as a "second operation unit 421" in the following description. The input operation unit 429 will be referred to as a "third operation unit 429" in the following description.

448 is a temperature detection means, which detects the temperature of the top plate 422 upon receiving a measurement signal from a thermistor (temperature sensor) 433 that is in contact with two points, the front and rear, of the top plate 422. This temperature detection signal is input to the main control device 480, which will be described later.

Measuring units 427 of the weight measuring means 428, which will be described later, are located at the four corners of the bottom surface of the first unit 401. There are four measuring units 427 in total. The measurement data of the four measuring units is collected in the weight measuring means 428, which has one measurement circuit (not shown), and the weight is calculated. In the following explanation, the measuring units 427 are referred to as "weight sensors" and the reference number 427 is used.

A control board 434 mounting the main control device 80 is disposed in the internal space of the first unit 401, at a position away from the induction heating coil (IH coil) 424. An inverter circuit 435 is mounted on this control board 434 together with a heat sink (not shown) for dissipating heat. The inverter circuit 435 is a circuit that supplies high-frequency current to the IH coil 424. For this reason, the inner pot 405 generates heat due to the magnetic flux generated by the IH coil 424 interlinking with it.

The first unit 401 has a built-in first communication section 430 for performing infrared communication, but this is not shown in Fig. 86. The second unit 402 has a built-in second communication section 430B for performing infrared communication with the first communication section 430A, but this is also not shown.
A cooling fan (not shown) that is driven and rotated by a drive motor 443 (described later) is built into the first unit 401. Therefore, outside air for cooling is introduced from an intake port (not shown) on the bottom surface of the first unit 401 and exhausted from an exhaust port (not shown) on the back surface, thereby cooling the inverter circuit 435 and the IH coil 424.

Next, we will explain Figure 87.
FIG. 87 is a block diagram showing the configuration related to control of the first unit 401.
Reference numeral 480 denotes the main control device, which is configured around a microcomputer having a central processing unit (CPU: not shown) at its core, and incorporates memory means 480R such as a semiconductor memory device (flash memory, ROM, RAM) and timing means (clock circuit) 480T for calculating the time.

The central processing unit (CPU) holds a control program that determines the operation of the central processing unit (CPU) itself, information on heating sequences for each type of cooking (cooking rice, stewing, boiling water, etc.), and device identification information (IP address, etc.) for identifying the heating cooker 400 on the network NW.
The control program of the central processing unit (CPU) contains control conditions such as heat, current (heating) time, target heating temperature, etc. for each rice cooking sequence such as water absorption process and rice cooking (boiling) process. It also contains a control program for each cooking menu such as stewing. In other words, this central processing unit contains recipe data CD for various cooking methods.

The computer program and various control data tables of the central processing unit (CPU) that controls the overall heating control operation of the main control device 480 are stored in the storage means 480R. Note that, like the storage means 440R, this storage means 480R may also store data of correspondence information KID that identifies one of the two specific input keys 450, 471 for each cooking menu. When configured in this way, when the main control device 480 acquires advance notice information 2 (201) related to the cooking menu (via the second unit 402), as described below, it can generate information (advance notice information 2) that extracts one of the specific input keys 450, 471 using the correspondence information KID that identifies the specific input keys 450, 471.

The sub-controller 440, which will be described later, generates various command signals in response to inputs from the second operation unit 421 and the third operation unit 429, and inputs these to the main control unit 480. For example, the second operation unit 421 selects cooking white rice, and the hardness switch 489 is pressed, and the user's settings are input to the sub-controller 440 as needed.

In other words, for cooking using the second unit 402, the sub-controller 440 generates data corresponding to the input results of the second operation unit 421 and the third operation unit 429. This data is then input to the main control unit 480 as recipe data CD that determines the cooking menu for a specific cooking (in this case, cooking white rice) when the rice cooking start switch (input key) 467 is finally pressed. In response to this, the main control unit 480 refers to the various control data tables described above and determines the control conditions for the IH coil 424.

Next, FIG. 87 will be described.
The heated object temperature detection means 436 is composed of an infrared temperature sensor 436S (not shown) that receives infrared rays radiated from the outer surface of the inner pot 405 when the second unit 401 is placed, and measures the temperature. This temperature sensor 436S can also measure the temperature of general pots and frying pans other than the second unit 402, so that the temperature of the heated object (general metal pot, etc.) can also be controlled by the main control device 480. The infrared temperature sensor 436S is not shown in Figures 86 and 87. The infrared temperature sensor 436S is located inside the first unit 401, and estimates the temperature by receiving infrared rays radiated from the heated object such as the inner pot 405 or a commercially available metal pot through the top plate 422.

Reference numeral 480C denotes a calorie calculation unit which receives data on the total weight of the second unit 402 and the first unit 401 measured by the weight measuring means 428 and calculates the energy consumption corresponding to the weight of the cooked rice.
A calorie storage section 480D automatically stores the calorie value calculated by the calorie calculation section 480C. This storage section uses a non-volatile memory such as a semiconductor memory element.

Note that the first unit 401 shown in FIG. 87 is provided with a calorie calculation unit 480C and a calorie storage unit 480D to calculate the calorie value of cooked rice, but these two are not necessarily required. This is because the calorie value can be calculated by the second unit 402.

Reference numeral 480A denotes a control data storage section. This storage section includes a first storage area for temporarily storing recipe data CD received by the first unit 401 via the communication section 426 of the second unit 402, and a second storage area for reading out the recipe data CD from the first storage area, modifying some control conditions by input from the first operation section 420 or the second operation section 421, and storing the modified recipe data CD.
In the case where cooking steps 1 and 2 are to be performed for one cooking menu, the recipe data CD for that cooking menu is stored in the control data storage unit 480A separately for the setting information for cooking step 1 and cooking step 2.

When a command to start cooking is received, the main control device 480 uses the recipe data CD in the second memory area to control the power supply to the IH coil 424. After receiving the recipe data CD, in order to analyze the contents of the data CD, there is a temporary storage memory that first stores the recipe data CD, but this is not shown in FIG. 87.

The control data storage unit 480A stores a computer program for rice cooking that manages the entire rice cooking control operation, including conditions such as heat and current duration for the water absorption process and rice cooking (boiling) process, and target heating temperature.

A data acquisition section 485 receives recipe data CD acquired by the second unit 402 from the outside via the infrared communication section 430, and stores the recipe data CD in a storage section 480R.
The acquired recipe data CD is stored in units of a "comprehension period" previously selected by the user US, such as one week.

441 is a commercial AC power source with a frequency of, for example, 50 Hz or 60 Hz and a voltage of 100 V or 200 V. A power supply unit 442 receives power from the commercial power source 441 via a power cord and plug (neither shown). The power supply unit 442 has a built-in rectifier circuit and the like, and has the function of converting the power into power of multiple types of specified voltages. It also has a built-in main power switch 460 (not shown) that is opened and closed by the user US.

Reference numeral 435 denotes the inverter circuit, which receives power from the power supply unit 442, generates high-frequency power, and supplies it to the IH coil 424. The inverter circuit 435 is equipped with various electric components such as a semiconductor power control element, a switching element, etc.
Reference numeral 420 denotes the first operation section, which uses the plurality of push-type electronic switches (specific input keys 450 and the like) (see FIG. 89) as input means.

Reference numeral 444 denotes a notification means, which includes a display means 452 and a voice notification means 455 such as a voice synthesizer.
The display means 452 includes a first display portion 418 and a light-emitting display portion 451 .
Furthermore, the display means 452 also includes light-emitting display portions 453 for the specific input keys (input keys for menu selection) 450 .
The first display unit 418 includes a liquid crystal display screen.
The light-emitting display unit 453 uses a laser light-emitting diode element (LED) to illuminate the vicinity of the specific input key 450 from below. The light-emitting display unit 451 also uses LEDs to illuminate four locations, and displays the heat level in four stages depending on the number of illuminated locations (see FIG. 89). The first display unit 418 can display the state and conditions of the induction heating operation (e.g., heat level, heating time) using letters, numbers, figures, etc. Also, the presence or absence of the recipe data CD being received and identification information (160, 167, etc.) indicating the cooking subject to the recipe data CD can be visually confirmed.

The light-emitting display unit 451 and the light-emitting display unit 453 are part of the display means 452, but in FIG. 87 they are shown as being included in the first operation unit 420 because they perform display operations in response to input operations of the first operation unit 420.

Although not shown in detail, the audio notification means 455 includes a buzzer, a voice synthesizer, a speaker, etc. that emits sound. As described above, the first display unit 418 is disposed adjacent to the first operation unit 420, and when the user US operates the first operation unit 20, the user can immediately visually confirm the input result.

The first reference position determination means 430 of the first unit 401 is a component that forms a pair with the second reference position determination means 431 of the second unit 402 .
The first reference position determination means 430 determines whether or not the second unit 402 is placed at a predetermined position on the first unit 401. This first reference position determination means 430 utilizes optical means, and performs infrared communication between an infrared communication section (first communication section) 430A on the first unit 401 side and an infrared communication section (second communication section) 431A on the second unit 402 side, and the main control device 480 determines whether or not the reference position is appropriate based on the communication result.
That is, the main control device 480 can grasp whether or not it is in the “first state” by receiving the communication result between the first reference position determination means 430 and the second reference position determination means 431 .

In this fourth embodiment, a third reference position determination means 454 using magnetic means is also provided. The third reference position determination means 454 uses a combination of a permanent magnet (not shown) installed on the bottom surface of the second unit 402 and a reed switch 447 provided on the top of the first unit 401. When the first unit 401 is placed in the reference position, the reed switch 447 is turned on by the magnetic force of the permanent magnet (not shown), and the main control device 480 detects this ON signal and determines that it is in the reference position.

443 is a drive motor for a cooling fan (not shown). This cooling fan has the effect of introducing cool outside air into the internal space of the first unit 401 and releasing the heat generated in the inverter circuit 435 and the IH coil 424 into the air.

407 is a power transmission coil. This power transmission coil 407 supplies power from the first unit 401 to the second unit 402. Opposite the power transmission coil 407, a power receiving coil 408 (see FIG. 88) is arranged in a non-contact state (close to) on the bottom surface of the second unit 402.

Reference numeral 448 denotes a temperature detection means for measuring the temperature by bringing a temperature sensor into contact with the top plate 422, and the temperature sensor uses, for example, a thermistor. Data on the temperature detection result is transmitted to the main control device 480.
The weight measurement means 428 includes the four weight sensors 427 described above and a processing circuit (also called a "measurement circuit"; not shown) that calculates the weight of the rice cooking unit (second unit) 402 based on the output voltage from those sensors.

Next, we will explain Figure 88.
FIG. 88 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control relationship of the second unit 402.
In FIG. 88, 440 is a sub-control device, which is configured with a microcomputer as its core, and has built-in memory means 440R such as a semiconductor memory device (flash memory, ROM, RAM) and a timing means (clock circuit) 440T that calculates the time.

When cooking rice, the rice cooking computer program that controls the overall rice cooking control operation including conditions such as heat, power supply time, and target heating temperature for the rice absorption process and rice cooking (boiling) process, the weight measurement computer program that measures the weight of the rice, and the self-inspection program and computer program for dealing with abnormalities are not stored in the storage means 440R. The storage means 440R stores various control data tables used by the rice cooking computer program, and "setting data" that sets the control parameters, etc.

For example, when the specific input key 450, which can also set the cooking method as shown in FIG. 89, is operated to change the setting related to the hardness of the cooked rice, the data table of the control parameters corresponding to the "hard mode" and the control parameters corresponding to the "soft mode" are stored in the memory device 440R as the "setting data".

The storage means 440R stores correspondence information KID that identifies one of the two specific input keys 450, 471 for each cooking menu. Therefore, when the sub-controller 440 acquires advance notice information 2 (201) related to the cooking menu, as described below, the sub-controller 440 can determine that one of the specific input keys 450, 471 is the input key that should be operated based on the correspondence information KID that identifies the specific input keys 450, 471. Then, selection information B (202) can be generated.

Reference numeral 440C denotes a calorie calculation unit which receives weight data of the second unit 402 measured by the weight measuring means 428 and calculates the energy consumption corresponding to the weight of cooked rice.
440D is a storage section for automatically storing the calorie value calculated by the calorie calculation section 440C.
Reference numeral 461 denotes a lid sensor that detects the opening of the lid 404, and is installed near the lid opening/closing button 409. When the mechanical lock of the lid 404 is released, a lid opening signal is transmitted from the lid sensor 461 to the sub-controller 440.

Reference numeral 421 denotes the second operating section, which has various push-type switches 488 to 494 and 471 provided on the cover body 404 .
Reference numeral 462 denotes a voice input means for converting voice from a microphone (not shown) into a voice signal and inputting the voice signal to the sub-controller 440 .

463 is a human presence sensor that detects the presence of a person, and is a type of non-contact input means. As is clear from FIG. 86, this human presence sensor detects the presence of a person by irradiating infrared rays from near the upper part of the cover opening/closing button 409 to a certain irradiation range in front of it. The human presence sensor 463 itself may automatically change its orientation left and right so that it can detect people over a wide range in the left and right direction. It may also automatically change its orientation up and down so that it can detect people over a wide range in the up and down direction.

The human sensor 463 is an infrared sensor that detects infrared rays emitted by people, or an ultrasonic sensor. In the case of an infrared sensor, the "jamoji" that the user uses to serve rice becomes hot due to the temperature of the cooked rice, and the sensor can detect this temperature, making it easy to distinguish it from other cold objects.

The human sensor 463 also serves as a "non-contact input means" for notifying calories, and when the lid 404 is opened, it automatically switches to a "non-contact input means" for the sub-controller 440, which will be described later.

465 is a notification means, and includes a second display unit 412, a third display unit 413, and a voice notification unit 466 including a voice synthesis device. Although not shown, the voice notification unit 466 includes a buzzer and a speaker that emit sound.

406 is an inner pot temperature detection means that comes into contact with the inner pot 405 to measure its temperature, and uses a thermistor as the temperature detection element. The data of the temperature detection result is sent to the sub-controller 440 each time.

468 is a power supply means that receives power from the power receiving coil 408 and is composed of a secondary battery. For example, it is composed of a lithium ion battery.

The first reference position determination means 430 determines whether the second unit 402 is placed at a predetermined position on the first unit 401. The determination result of the first reference position determination means 430 is output to the sub-controller 440. Note that the sub-controller 440 may also have the function of the reference position determination means 430.

The first reference position determination means 431 on the second unit 402 side has the second communication section 431 A. This first reference position determination means 431 communicates with the first reference position determination means 430 on the first unit 401 side by using optical means such as infrared communication (via the second communication section 431 A).
An NFC input/output unit 469 for short-distance wireless communication can obtain control data from the outside when the NFC input/output unit 221 (see FIG. 56) of the communication terminal 200 is brought into close proximity or contact with the NFC input/output unit 221.

470 is a light-emitting display unit. This light-emitting display unit 470 is a part of the notification means 465, and illuminates specific input keys 471 arranged in the second operation unit 421 from below with light-emitting elements such as LEDs at a specified timing so that the keys are particularly noticeable.

The sub-controller 440 is not limited to a configuration including a memory means 440R and a clock means 440T. For example, the memory means 440R and the clock means 440T may be configured separately from the sub-controller 440, and the outputs of the memory means 440R and the clock means 440T may be input to the sub-controller 440 from outside.

In addition, in the audio notification means 466, audio (guidance audio) is output at a volume that is preset or set by the user. Furthermore, the volume can be set in multiple stages.

For example, based on the temperature detected by the inner pot temperature detection means 406, the threshold temperature pre-stored in the sub-controller 440, and the temperature detected by the outside air temperature detection means 472, the sub-controller 440 calculates the time required for the inner pot 405 to drop from the initial temperature below the threshold temperature, determines the possible warming time, and displays the possible warming time on the second display unit 412 or the third display unit 413. The higher the temperature detected by the inner pot temperature detection means 406 is above the threshold temperature, the longer the time required for the temperature of the inner pot 405 to reach the threshold temperature when the second unit 402 is removed from the first unit 401, and therefore the possible warming time is set to be longer.

In this way, by displaying the remaining warming time on the second display unit 412, etc., the user US can be prompted to eat the food (rice, etc.) promptly, or to return the second unit 402 to the first unit 401 to keep the food (rice) warm. This reduces the possibility that the temperature of the cooked rice will fall below a threshold temperature pre-stored in the sub-control device 440, causing the taste of the rice to deteriorate.

Next, we will explain Figure 89.
FIG. 89 is a front view of first unit 401 as seen from the front side, illustrating the first operation section 420 and the area near the periphery of first display section 418.
In the first input section 420, the operation sections (push buttons) of a plurality of push-type electronic switches (input keys) are arranged in a horizontal row at regular intervals when viewed from the front side. 418 is the above-mentioned first display section equipped with a liquid crystal display screen or the like. 451 is (four) light-emitting display sections illuminated by LEDs.

Reference numeral 450 denotes the specific input key in the first operation unit 420, which also serves as an input key for selecting a cooking menu. This input key must be operated when obtaining recipe data CD from an external device (such as the communication terminal 200), which will be described in detail later.
By operating the specific input key 450, a cooking menu such as boiling water, stewing, frying, etc. can be selected.

The specific input key 450 becomes a “specific input key” when cooking process 1 of recipe data CD provided from the outside via the communication unit 426 is performed in the first unit 401 .
In this case, it does not matter whether the program is the program A or either one of the programs B and C. Regardless of the type of cooking menu, when only the first unit is used in cooking step 1, an input operation is always required before obtaining the recipe data CD.

The cooking mode according to the program C is the above-mentioned "multiple heat cooking" mode KMM. Specifically, there are two types of cooking steps 1.
The first type is a case where the first unit 401 is in charge of cooking process 1. In this case, as described above, the specific input key 450 in the first unit 401 can be used to instruct the start of the operation of obtaining recipe data for cooking process 1.
The second type is a case where the second unit 402 is in charge of cooking process 1. In this case, the specific input key 471 on the second unit 402 can be used to command the start of an operation to obtain recipe data.

That is, in the case of the "multiple heating cooking mode" KMM in which either the first unit 401 or the second unit 402 is used in cooking step 1 and the other is used in cooking step 2,
1) Receive and operate the setting information for cooking process 1. In this case, the specific input key to be operated in advance is 450 when cooking process 1 is performed by the first unit 401.
In another cooking menu, when cooking step 1 is performed in the second unit 402, the specific input key to be operated is 471.
2) When cooking step 1 is performed using the first unit 401, a command to start cooking is given via the input operation section 420 (input key 476).
When cooking process 1 is carried out using second unit 402, the input operation section 421 (input key 467) is used.

When the second unit 402 is in charge of cooking step 1 of the cooking using program C, the specific input key 450 can be used to instruct the sub-controller 440 via the main control unit 480 to acquire program C. In this case, this can be achieved by operating the specific input key 471 described in FIG. 90 at a specified timing (within a specified time period).

In other words, when cooking using program A is selected, the specific input key 450 becomes the "program A selection section." Similarly, when cooking using program C is selected, the specific input key 450 becomes the "program C selection section."

The specific input key 450 has a single operation section that is touched by the finger as shown in FIG. 89, but has multiple functions as described above (selection of cooking menu, permission to obtain recipe data CD related to programs A and C), which is realized by coordinating with the display of the first display section 418. This point will be explained in detail later.

In FIG. 89, 473 is an input key that commands the weight measuring means 428 to measure weight. This input key can be operated when the second unit 402 is not placed on it, but the weight of the second unit 402 alone cannot be measured. When this input key 473 is pressed, the total weight of the heated items (metal pots, etc.) being cooked or boiled on the top plate 422 and the weight of ingredients, etc. can be measured.

Therefore, by using the input keys 473, the user can conveniently measure the total weight of the pots and containers placed on the top plate 422. In addition, if the measurement is performed in the "first state" where the second unit 402 is not placed on the top plate 422, it can also be used as a scale to weigh the ingredients before cooking begins.

474 is an input key for calorie notification that calculates the amount of energy consumed by food based on the weight measured by the weight measuring means 428.

The input key 473 for commanding the weight measurement and the input key 474 for calculating the amount of energy consumed by food constitute the fourth operation unit 478.

In FIG. 89, 475A and 475B are heat setting switches (input keys) that adjust the output power of the inverter circuit 435 to the IH coil 424. The input key 475A for decreasing the heat is located on the left side, and the input key 475B for increasing the heat is located on the right side.

In this first unit 401, when induction heating is started by selecting a cooking menu with the menu selection input key, a standard heat value corresponding to that cooking menu is determined in advance, and unless the input keys 475A and 475B are operated, the induction heating operation continues at that standard heat. However, the main control device 480 may automatically increase or decrease the heat or stop heating depending on the temperature detected by the heated object temperature detection means 436.

476 is an input key for commanding the start of induction heating cooking. 477 is an input key for canceling the previous input in this first operation unit 420 (including the fourth operation unit 478) or for arbitrarily stopping the operation during induction heating cooking.

In FIG. 89, 460A is an operating part for the main power switch (not shown). By operating this operating part 460A, the main power switch (not shown) in the power supply unit 442 shown in FIG. 87 can be opened and closed.

In FIG. 89, 481 denotes recipe data receivable information (receivable mark), which is displayed in the first display section 418 when the recipe data CD can be received from outside.

482 is a program display unit, and when any of the three types of programs A to C can be specified, it may be possible to make it identifiable by letters such as "A", "B", "C", etc. Note that instead of displaying letters such as "A", "B", "C", etc., identification information, abbreviations, etc. that specify the cooking menu may be displayed using symbols or letters. Note that the information displayed by this program display unit 482 is information at a stage before the cooking device 400 actually acquires the recipe data CD, and after the recipe data CD is acquired, the target cooking menu is displayed in more detail, so such display using symbols such as A, B, C is not performed.

The information displayed on the program display unit 482 is included in the advance notice information 2 (201) when the advance notice information 2 (201) is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 to the cooking appliance 400.

Next, the second operation unit 421 and the second display unit 412 will be described with reference to FIG.
90 is a plan view of the lid 404 of the cooking device 400. A second display unit 412 including a liquid crystal display screen or the like is disposed in the center of the lid 404.

The second display section 412 displays time information, a rice type display section 484, a hardness display section 486, and a menu display section 487. In addition, on the outside and left side of the second display section 412, there are provided a rice type switch (input key) 488, a hardness switch (input key) 489, a menu switch 471 which also serves as a specific input key, an off/keep warm switch (input key) 490, and a cancel switch (input key) 491 for canceling the previous input.

On the outer right side of the second display section 412, there are provided a rice cooking start switch (input key) 467, a reservation switch (input key) 492, a time switch (input key) 493 for setting the time, and a calorie notification switch (input key) 494 (described later).

After the rice cooking operation has started, pressing the OFF/Keep Warm switch 490 will send a command signal to stop cooking to the sub-controller 440. Also, after the rice-keeping operation has started, pressing the OFF/Keep Warm switch 490 will send a command signal to stop keeping the rice warm. In this fourth embodiment, the control program is set up so that the keep-warm process is automatically carried out for a certain period of time (for example, 1 hour, 3 hours, 6 hours, etc.) following the steaming process (depending on the control program for the rice cooking operation stored in the main control unit 480).

In FIG. 90, 495 denotes data receivable information (receivable mark), which is displayed in the second display section 412 when it becomes possible to receive recipe data CD, which will be described later, from the outside.

Reference numeral 496 denotes a program display section, which is displayed after the "preview information 1" 201 of the recipe data CD is received. The "preview information 1" 201 here is information equivalent to the "preview information 1" (201) (see FIG. 64) described in the first embodiment.
The information on this program display section 496 is included in the advance notice information 1 (201) and is received by the second unit 402 from the communication terminal 200.

When the sub-control device 440 is able to identify one of programs A to C as a result of analyzing the preview information 2 (201), it may be possible to make it identifiable by letters such as "A", "B", "C", etc. Note that instead of displaying letters such as "A", "B", "C", etc., the identification information specifying the cooking menu may be displayed as symbols or letters.

After the program display section 496 is displayed on the second display section 412 as shown in FIG. 90, that is, after the preview information 2 (201) of the recipe data CD is displayed, pressing the cancel switch 491 immediately erases the information displayed on the program display section. After this, the specific recipe data CD displayed on the program display section 496 cannot be acquired from the communication terminal 200. To acquire it again, it is necessary to start the operation over from the beginning.

The calorie notification switch 494 is used to command the second display unit 412 to display the calorie value. It also commands the audio notification device 466 to notify the calorie value by voice. In other words, the calorie notification switch (input key) 494 is a switch that commands the sub-control device 440 to notify the calorie value. Basically, when this switch 494 is pressed, the calorie value is displayed on the second display unit 412.

After completing the rice cooking process or steaming process described below, if the calorie notification switch 494 is pressed, the sub-controller 440 performs processing that does not accept input from the various switches (input keys) in the second operation unit 421 (excluding the input key 462A of the voice input means 462 described below and the cancel switch 491). In other words, the rice type switch 488, hardness switch 489, menu switch 471, rice cooking start switch 467, reservation switch 492 and time switch 493 are maintained in a state where they cannot be input.

The cancel switch 491 switches to function as the cancel switch 471 when the calorie notification switch 494 is pressed and the mode transitions to the "calorie notification mode". Therefore, if the cancel switch 471 is pressed after the mode transitions to the "calorie notification mode", the "calorie notification mode" is cancelled.

Furthermore, after the rice cooking process or steaming process is completed, the mode automatically switches to keep-warm mode, but pressing the off/keep-warm switch 490 will cancel the keep-warm mode. Therefore, if you do not want to open the lid 404 and set the mode to keep-warm mode when the rice cooking is completed, you can press the off/keep-warm switch 490. Each time you perform these operations, the audio notification means 466 of the notification means 465 will provide audio guidance on the operation, and the third display unit 413 will also display the corresponding information each time.

As is clear from the above explanation, when the calorie notification switch 494 is pressed, the sub-controller 440 is set to the "calorie notification mode" unless the cancel switch 491 is subsequently pressed. The sub-controller 440 is set to the "calorie notification mode" which sequentially measures the weight of rice, calculates the amount of energy, and notifies the calorie value.

If the "calorie notification mode" is set by mistake, the cancel switch 491 can be pressed, but the "calorie notification mode" can also be cancelled by pressing the cancel key (not shown) provided on the third operation unit 429.

After acquiring control data such as recipe data CD from the outside, if you wish to cancel that control data, you can simply press the cancel switch 491 immediately after acquiring the data and before starting the cooking operation. If you press this, the acquired control data will not be used for subsequent cooking (the corresponding data will be deleted from the storage means 440R and recipe data storage unit 480A).

The third operation unit 429 also has an input key (not shown) equivalent to the calorie calculation key 494, and the "calorie notification mode" can also be set from the third operation unit 429, but a detailed explanation will be omitted. When the calorie notification mode is set in the third operation unit 429, the calorie value is displayed by the third display unit 413 unless the user sets it in advance. If the user performs a specified operation in advance, the calorie calculation result can be displayed simultaneously on both the second display unit 412 and the third display unit 413.

462A is the operation part of the voice input means 462 (see FIG. 88). When this is pressed, the voice notification means 466 issues a message saying "The mode has been switched to voice input mode", after which input can be made by voice utterances (voice information) from the user US. Note that when the operation part 462A is pressed again, the voice input mode is released. The voice notification means 466 issues a message saying "The voice input mode has been released".

469 is an NFC input/output unit that performs near field communication (NFC), and communication can be performed when an information communication processing terminal device (communication terminal 200) equipped with an NFC function is brought close or in contact with the device. An antenna portion is embedded below the case that constitutes the upper surface of the lid 404.

The accumulated amount of calorie values calculated by calorie calculation unit 440C during the period from when second unit 402 is separated from first unit 401 to when it is placed back on first unit 401 can be read by bringing communication terminal 200 close to or in contact with short-range wireless communication unit 469, and the data can be transferred to communication terminal 200. That is, for example, if the weight of rice is measured and the calorie value is notified a total of 10 times, the calorie values of those 10 times can be read in a time-series data format on the communication terminal 200 side. The total value of the 10 calorie measurement results can also be read.

The calorie value data is also included as part of the "cooking execution data" AD sent from the wireless communication unit 426 to the outside.

The wireless communication unit (input/output means) 469 that performs near field wireless communication (NFC) is an input means used to select one of the setting values (parameters) of various rice cooking menus (for example, a total of seven types such as cooking white rice and porridge) using the second unit 402 with one touch using a communication terminal 200 with an NFC function.

In other words, the setting value for the rice cooking menu, for example the rice hardness, can be manually selected using the menu switch 471, which also serves as a specific input key, but the control program (data) cannot be acquired all at once in the form of recipe data CD, as is the case with the wireless communication unit 426.

In this cooking appliance 400, when recipe data CD is acquired from the wireless communication unit 262, cooking can be performed in the following manner.
(1) It is possible to carry out a cooking menu (e.g., "boiling water") in the single cooking mode KM1 using only the first unit 401. However, it is necessary to set the second unit 402 to the "second state" in which it is separated.
(2) It is possible to carry out a cooking menu (e.g., "cooking rice") of the single cooking mode KM1 using only the second unit 402. However, it is necessary to start the heating operation while maintaining the "first state" in which the second unit 402 is placed on the first unit 401.
(3) As in the multiple heating cooking mode KMM, a cooking menu that uses the first unit 401 and the second unit 402 in combination can be selected.

In other words, the various recipe data CD itself is configured so that the first unit 401 cannot acquire it except via the wireless communication unit 26. Then, various cooking methods can be performed by the cooperative operation of the second display unit 412 of the second unit 402 and the first display unit 418 of the first unit 401.

The rice type switch 488 is an input means for setting the type of rice to be cooked. Each time the rice type switch 488 is pressed, the display on the rice type display unit 484 changes to "white rice", "unwashed rice", "brown rice", or "germinated brown rice". Information regarding the type of rice set by the rice type switch 488 is input to the sub-controller 440, which will be described later.

In FIG. 90, the rice type switch 488 is also labeled "brand." This switch 488 can be used to specify a specific brand of rice, but the way switch 488 is pressed allows the selection of only one of two input functions (brand and rice type). A detailed explanation will be omitted.

The hardness switch 489 is an input means for setting the "hardness of the rice" at the end of cooking. Each time the hardness switch 489 is pressed, the display on the hardness display unit 486 switches between "hard", "normal", and "soft" accordingly. Information about the hardness of the cooked rice input to the hardness switch 489 (setting data) is input to the sub-controller 440, which selects the hardness of the cooked rice.

When the above-mentioned "hard" is set, the control parameters corresponding to the "hard mode" described below are selected and the rice cooking operation is performed.
When "soft" is selected, the control parameters corresponding to the "soft mode" described later are selected to perform the rice cooking operation. In the fourth embodiment, the hardness switch 489 and the sub-controller 440 constitute a hardness selection means.

The cooking device 400 shown in this embodiment 4 is capable of cooking at least two different types of rice: a "soft mode" and a "hard mode" that cooks rice harder than the soft mode, but control parameters may be provided to allow for more precise adjustments.

The menu switch 471 is an input means for setting the rice cooking menu. Each time the menu switch 471 is pressed, the display on the menu display unit 487 switches to "Risotto," "Porridge," or "Takikomi." Information about the rice cooking menu set by the menu switch 471 is input to the sub-controller 440.

When the cooking process 1 of the recipe data CD provided from the outside via the communication unit 426 is performed in the second unit 401, the menu switch 471 becomes a "specific input key".
In other words, it does not matter whether the program for implementing the cooking menu is the program A or any one of the programs B and C. Regardless of the type of cooking menu, when the second unit is used in cooking step 1, the input operation of the specific input key 471 is always required before obtaining the recipe data CD.

One of the features of the fourth embodiment is that the menu switch 471 also has a function of permitting the recipe data CD to be acquired from outside when cooking step 1 is performed by the second unit 402 in all cooking fields of the programs (programs A to C). For this reason, the menu switch 471 is called a "specific input key."
Similarly, the first unit 401 also has the specific input keys 450 as described above.

The menu switch 471 has a single operation unit that is touched by the fingertips of the user US as shown in FIG. 90, but has multiple functions as described above (cooking mode selection, permission to obtain recipe data), which is realized by linking with the second display unit 412.

As explained in FIG. 90, the menu switch 471 is a means for selecting one rice cooking menu from among 10 rice cooking menus (white rice, risotto, seasoned rice, etc.) using only the second unit 402. However, the action of operating this menu switch 471 or menu switch 450 (see FIG. 89) triggers the acquisition of recipe data CD from the outside. This point will be explained in more detail later.

The off/keep warm switch 490 is an input means for switching between the end and start of the keep warm operation. The rice cooking start switch 467 is an input means for issuing an instruction to start cooking rice. The reservation switch 492 is an input means for setting a rice cooking reservation, and the time switch 493 is an input means for setting a time such as the current time or the reserved cooking time. Information set by these various switches is input to the sub-controller 440.
The various switches 488 to 494, 462, and 471 are press-type input means, but may be changed to touch-type switches.

In FIG. 90, 470 is a light-emitting display unit. This light-emitting display unit 470 is a part of the notification means 465, and illuminates specific input keys 471 arranged in the second operation unit 421 from below with light-emitting elements such as LEDs at a specified timing so that the keys are particularly noticeable. When illuminating, the keys may be illuminated not only continuously but also flashing. The illuminated state is shown in FIG. 92.

Next, we will explain Figure 91.
91 is a time chart showing basic operation steps and usage states from the start of the cooking device, and is a diagram explaining the mutual operational relationship between the second unit 402 and the first unit 401. The operations and operation steps after the power plug of the first unit 401 is connected to the commercial power source 441 are indicated by symbols SQ1 to SQ9.

Simply connecting the power plug of the first unit 401 to the commercial power supply 441 does not start the induction heating operation or the rice cooking operation (SQ1).
If the power supply unit 442 is provided with a main power switch (not shown), the main power switch (not shown) is turned ON at this stage.

Next, when the second unit 402 is placed on the first unit 401 and put into the "first state" (step SQ2), if the unit is in the correct position, the reed switch 447, which is a placement detection sensor, is turned ON (step SQ3).
Therefore, a signal indicating the determination result of the first reference position determination means 430 is input to the main control device 480. In other words, the signal resulting from the reed switch 447 being turned ON is a signal indicating the determination result, and from this stage, the main control device 480 is in the "second unit only mode", so that even if the user does not perform any input operation or give a heating operation command on the first unit 401 side, an infrared signal for determining the reference position is automatically transmitted from the first unit 401 side within a predetermined time, and the second unit 402 is started up. The power transmitting coil 407 is also started up, and power is supplied to the power receiving coil 408 of the second unit 401 in a non-contact manner.

When the second unit 402 is started up, the sub-controller 440 automatically starts a self-inspection operation (for abnormalities) of each part of the second unit 402 (step SQ4).
At this time, the presence of the inner hook 405 is confirmed by the sensor 437. If the "inner hook detection signal" from the sensor 437 is not received, it is determined to be an abnormality, and the notification means 465 issues an audio notification to check the inner hook 405. Then, when the lid opening sensor 461 detects that the lid 404 has been opened and then detects that the lid 404 has been closed again, the sub-controller 440 has the sensor 437 confirm the presence of the inner hook 405.
In any case, without the inner pot 405, the subsequent control operations cannot be performed, and the recipe data CD cannot be acquired. For example, when the second unit 402 is used to perform the cooking process 2, the inner pot 405 must be accommodated in the second unit 402 in order to obtain the setting information B for the cooking process 2.

On the other hand, since the cooking device 400 has a weight measuring means 428, the weight of the entire cooking device 400 can be automatically measured as part of the self-inspection (abnormality check) operation, and if the weight falls below the minimum weight assuming that rice or other ingredients are placed in the inner pot 405, it can be determined that an abnormality has occurred and an abnormality can be notified at this stage.
Although it depends on the configuration of the weight measuring unit (weight sensor) 427, in the case of a unit that generates a measurement signal from a strain sensor according to weight, it is desirable to avoid external noise when transmitting the signal. Therefore, it is beneficial for accurate measurement to measure the weight at this stage of step SQ4 when induction heating coil 424 is not yet driven by high frequency current and wireless communication has not yet started.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the self-diagnosis result, the sub-control device 440 advances to a stage of requesting a communication connection by sending an infrared signal from the second communication unit 431A to the first unit 401. Then, upon receiving the request, the first unit 401 starts communication with the outside (step SQ5).
If mutual authentication has been performed between communication terminal (information processing terminal device) 200 such as a smartphone and second unit 402 of cooking appliance 400 before reaching this stage, when cooking appliance 400 starts up and transmits a signal for automatic connection (also called a "scan signal"), mutual communication for automatic connection is performed between cooking appliance 400 (first unit 401) and communication terminal 200. Note that the scan signal may be transmitted from communication terminal 200.

When a connection is established between the cooking appliance 400 and the communication terminal 200, the two continue to be able to communicate directly and wirelessly with each other. If the communication terminal 200 moves with the user and moves away from the cooking appliance 400, communication may be temporarily disabled, but when the communication terminal 200 returns to a communication range (distance), the connection is automatically restored. In this way, information can be exchanged between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking appliance 400. As a result, the first unit 401 can obtain the recipe data CD (step SQ6) as in the first embodiment. This will be explained in the next Figure 92. As mentioned above, in the multiple cooking mode KMM, it is necessary to obtain the setting information for both cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 in sequence.

Thereafter, when the induction heating coil 424 of the first unit 401 is driven, the inner pot 405 is induction heated, and cooking such as rice cooking can be started (step SQ7).
Thereafter, when the heating cooking operation is finished (step SQ8), and second unit 402 is removed from above first unit 401 (step SQ9), the second unit dedicated mode is automatically cancelled, and first unit 401 alone can perform induction heating cooking using other cooking utensils such as pots and frying pans. In other words, the mode changes to the first unit dedicated mode.

To completely stop using the cooking device 400, press the operating unit 460A on the first unit 401 to turn off the main power switch (not shown).

Next, we will explain Figure 92.
FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the usage modes (first state and second state) of the cooking device shown in FIG. 85 and the acquisition of cooking steps and recipe data.
In FIG. 92, steps SR1 to SR5A and steps SR1 to SR5B are schematic diagrams showing the configuration and operation steps of the cooking device 400 in chronological order.

The operations from steps SR1 to SR2A to SR5A are cooking steps (of the first type) of the multiple heating cooking mode KMM in which cooking process 1 is performed in the first unit 401.
On the other hand, the operation from step SR1 to step SR2B to step SR5B is a cooking step (of a second type) of the multiple heating cooking mode KMM in which cooking process 1 is performed in the second unit 402.

Step SR1 shows a "first state" in which second unit 402 is properly placed on first unit 401.
In step SR2A, when advance notice information 1 (201) is received from communication terminal 200, specific input key 450 of first unit 401 is operated in advance in response to advance notice information 1. Thus, immediately after this, setting information for first portion M1 of recipe data CD (for multiple heating cooking mode KMM) is obtained (step SR2A).
Next, by placing an object to be heated N such as a magnetic metal pan on the top plate 422 of the first unit 401 and pressing the input key 476, cooking process 1 can be started (step SR3A).

When cooking process 1 is completed, the state is returned to the first state. Then, when advance notice information 2 regarding cooking process 2 is received by first unit 401, specific input key 471 of second unit 402 to be used in cooking process 2 is operated (step SR4A).
After that, the first unit 401 receives the setting information B of the second part M1 of the recipe data CD, and when a command to start the cooking operation is issued by the input key (rice cooking start switch) 467, cooking step 2 is started (step SR5A). When cooking step 2 is completed, the series of cooking operations is completed.

On the other hand, the operation from steps SR1 to SR2B to SR5B is a cooking step of the multiple heating cooking mode KMM, in which cooking process 1 is performed in the second unit 402.

When advance notice information 1 (201) is received from communication terminal 200 while remaining in the first state (step SR1), specific input key 471 of second unit 402 is operated in advance in response to advance notice information 1. Thus, immediately after that, setting information A of first portion M1 of recipe data CD (for multiple heating cooking mode KMM) is acquired (step SR2B).

Next, while the first state is maintained, by operating the input key (rice cooking start switch) 467 of the second unit 402, cooking process 2 can be started (step SR3B).
When cooking step 1 is completed, the second unit 402 is separated from the first unit 401. Then, when advance notice information 2 (201) relating to cooking step 2 is received from the communication terminal 200, the specific input key 450 of the first unit 401 is operated in response to the advance notice information 2. Thus, immediately after this, the setting information B of the second portion M2 of the recipe data CD (for the multiple heating cooking mode KMM) is obtained (step SR4B).

An object N to be heated, such as a magnetic metal pot, is placed on the top plate 422 of the first unit 401, and the food to be cooked contained in the inner pot 405 of the second unit 402 is transferred to the object N to be heated.
In this way, by pressing the input key 476, cooking process 2 can be started (step SR5B).
After that, when the cooking step 2 is completed, the series of heating and cooking operations is completed.

Next, we will explain Figure 93.
93 is a time chart 1 showing the operation of the cooking appliance 400 and the communication terminal 200 in the cooking system of the embodiment 4. In the case of recipe data CD having a plurality of cooking steps, such as the multiple cooking mode KMM, the process of acquiring setting information for cooking step 1 is shown.
In FIG. 93, steps T1 to T23 are main operation steps of the cooking appliance 400 and related operation steps of the communication terminal 200.

FIG. 93 shows the operation when the first unit 401 is used in cooking process 1.
The user US turns on the main power switch of the first unit 401 (step T1). The main control device 480 of the first unit 401 starts up and determines whether the second unit 402 is placed in the correct position. Specifically, the first communication section 430A of the first reference position determination means 430 transmits a predetermined confirmation signal in the form of an infrared signal to the second communication section 431A (step T2).

When in the "first state" described above, a predetermined response signal (infrared signal) is sent from the second communication section 431A back to the first unit 401. Through such mutual confirmation by infrared signal between the first unit 401 and the second unit 402, the main control device 480 judges whether or not the second unit 402 has been placed in a predetermined position on the first unit 401 (step T3).
The determination result of the main control device 480 is output to the sub-control device 440 by an infrared signal from the first communication unit 430. The sub-control device 440 may be provided with a reference position determination function.

In the cooking appliance 400, when the main control device 480 confirms from signals from various sensors that there are no abnormalities, including the state of the second unit 402, it displays the standby initial screen 16MH on both the first display unit 420 and the second display unit 412 to indicate that cooking is ready (steps T6 and T7).

On the other hand, as described above, the communication terminal 200 has already completed mutual authentication with the cooking appliance 400, and therefore can establish a predetermined communication state when it receives a connection request signal from the cooking appliance 400. Note that this "communication establishment step" (preparation step) is not shown. This communication establishment step may be automatically started by the cooking appliance 400.

On the other hand, when the communication terminal 200 establishes a communication state with the cooking appliance 400, it recognizes the cooking appliance 400 and displays a cooking menu search screen, etc. on the terminal display unit 216. The user can then operate the search screen to search for the desired cooking menu (recipe data). That is, the communication terminal 200 can display a search screen 216P on the terminal display unit 216 and display the search results in response to the input operation of the user US (step T5). Note that the search results for recipe data may be presented at a time prior to steps T6 and T7, or at a later time as shown in FIG. 93.

When the user US selects only a specific (one) cooking menu item that he or she wishes to cook, the display of the communication terminal 200 switches to the first screen 216A. At this point, the setting information for executing the specific cooking menu item is temporarily stored in the recipe selection section 232.
The first screen 216A at the stage of step T9 displays the Enter key 237, as explained in Fig. 60(A) of embodiment 1. In the case of a cooking menu of recipe data CD that can display a first portion M1 related to cooking process 1 and a second portion M2 related to cooking process 2, the Enter keys (input keys) 237A and 237B may be displayed for each cooking process, as shown in Fig. 60(A) and Fig. 60(B).

When the user US touches the confirmation key 237, the communication terminal 200 receives the input from the touch operation, confirms the cooking menu (step T9), and displays the second screen 216B on the terminal display unit 216 instead of the first screen 216A.

On the other hand, when the confirmation key (icon) 237 for the cooking menu is pressed, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200 generates advance notice information 1 (201) and transmits it to the cooking appliance 400 (step T11). Note that FIG. 93 shows an example in which step T10 of a transmission command by the user US is provided immediately after step T9, but this step T10 may be omitted and advance notice information 1 (201) may be automatically transmitted by pressing the confirmation key (icon) 237 for the cooking menu as described above.

In the first unit 402 of the cooking appliance 400, when the advance notice information 1 (201) is received via the wireless communication unit 426, the content of the advance notice information 1 (201) is displayed on the first display unit 418. For example, as shown in Fig. 97, the operation support information 176 (176A) is displayed (step T12).
The second unit 402 receives the contents of the advance notice information 1 (201) from the main control device 480 via the first communication unit 430A and the second communication unit 431A. Then, the sub-control device 440 that has received the advance notice information 1 (201) displays the contents of the advance notice information 1 (201) on the second display unit 412 (step T13).

In Figure 93, step T13 is shown with a dashed line, but this means that it does not necessarily have to be displayed on the second unit 402. This Figure 93 shows a case where recipe data CD is obtained by operating the specific input key 450 on the first unit 401. In other words, since it is the stage of step SR2A in Figure 92, the second unit 402 is not in a state where it is placed (first state).

Depending on the cooking menu, as described in FIG. 97, operation support information 176 is displayed on the first display unit 418. The input key specified in the operation support information 176 is the specific input key 450 of the first unit 401 that performs cooking process 1. If operation support information 175 is displayed on the second display unit 412, the input key specified in the operation support information 175 is the specific input key 471 of the second unit 402 that performs cooking process 1 while remaining in the first state (see step SR2B in FIG. 92).

The advance notice information 1 (201) of step T11 includes, as described in embodiment 1, correspondence information KID capable of identifying a “specific input key” that needs to be operated by the user US on the direct heating cooker 400 at a stage before the recipe data CD is acquired.
In this fourth embodiment, the correspondence information KID indicates that the specific input key to be operated by the user US is the input key 450 of the first unit 401, as described above. The process of analyzing the advance notice information 1 (201) and determining that the "input key to be operated" is the specific input key 450 is executed by the main control device 480.

If the second display unit 412 shows that the specific input key to be operated by the user US is input key 471 of the second unit 402, the sub-control unit 440 may determine that the input key is 471.

When the contents of the notice information 1 (201) received by the first unit 401 are transferred to the second unit 402, the transferred notice information 1 may be called notice information 1A on the second unit 402 side. Note that this transfer is not essential. Also, this transfer is only during the period in the first state, and is not transferred from the point in time when the second unit 402 is separated.

Step T13A shown in FIG. 93 indicates that the second unit 402 has been separated from the first unit 401, but the timing of this separation may be other than that shown in FIG. 93. For example, it may be immediately after the initial standby screen T7.

If the input key specified by the operational support information 175 displayed on the first display section 418 is the specific input key 450 of the first unit 401, the specific input key 450 is pressed in accordance with the operational support information 175 (step T14).
In FIG. 93, the white characters "450" displayed in step T14 denotes the specific input key 450.

Then, as a result of the confirmation operation, the cooking device 400 (first unit 401) transmits selection information A (202) via the wireless communication unit 426 (step T15).

In communication terminal 200, the fact that selection information B has been received is displayed on terminal display unit 216 (second screen 216B) (step T16).
Next, when the send key 240 on the second screen 216B of the communication terminal 200 is pressed (step T17), the setting information for cooking step 1 of the recipe data CD for executing a specific cooking menu (for example, "rice seasoned with XX") is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 (step T18). In other words, the "command data" (setting information) for setting the cooking device 400 to a specific state is transmitted in a lump from the communication terminal 200.

In this fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the wireless communication unit 426 of the cooking appliance 400 is housed inside the lid 404 of the cooking appliance 400 in the form of an adapter, so hereinafter, the wireless communication unit 426 will also be referred to as a "communication adapter."

When the communication adapter 426 receives the command data (step T19), it then acquires status information of the cooking appliance 400 itself. This status information is information indicating the status of the main control device 480 of the cooking appliance 400. Therefore, for example, it is information confirming the driving status of the IH coil 424.
In order to collect such status information, since the second unit 402 is not required in cooking process 1 in which cooking process 1 is performed by the first unit 401 alone, the first unit 401 alone collects its own status information (step T20), as shown in step SR2A in FIG. 92.

Furthermore, the communication adapter 426 analyzes the status information provided by the first unit 401 and the contents of the command data received from the communication terminal 200, and determines whether there are any problems with the execution of cooking according to the received command data (step T20).

When the cooking device 400 (first unit 401) determines that there is no problem with carrying out cooking step 1, the communication adapter 426 transmits the status check result to the communication terminal 200 (step T22). At this time, the second unit 402 has already been separated, so the status check result is not transmitted to the second unit 402.

The transmission process of step T22 corresponds to the transmission of the "permission notification" of step SC5 described in embodiment 1 (FIG. 59). If the determination result indicates that there is a problem with the execution of the cooking, the communication adapter 51 of the cooking appliance 1 transmits to the communication terminal 200 a signal (notification of non-permission) containing information indicating that the recipe data CD cannot be received. This corresponds to the process of step SC11 shown in embodiment 1 (FIG. 59).

In the communication terminal 200, the central processing unit 212 analyzes the contents of the "permission notification" or "non-permission notification" from the cooking appliance 1. Then, the communication terminal 200 displays the contents on the third screen 216C (step T23).

The example shown in FIG. 93 is a type in which cooking process 1 is started in the first unit 401 (see step SR2A in FIG. 92).
When data on a specific cooking menu (e.g., "rice cooked with XX") is acquired by the recipe data CD, the cooking menu cannot be changed to another cooking menu. In the first unit 401 and the second unit 402, after the stage where the standby initial screen is displayed on the first display section 418 and the second display section 412 (step T6 or T7), the recipe data CD is limited to only one specific cooking menu. In other words, during the initial standby period TP, only one cooking menu can be acquired from the outside.

When cooking a specific cooking menu based on the received recipe data, the user US can change the control conditions (e.g., adjusting the hardness of the rice) as appropriate using the first operation unit 420 or the second operation unit 421 before starting cooking, but there are some cooking menus for which the control conditions cannot be changed.
In addition, the "allowable setting range" of the control conditions is preset on the cooking appliance 400 side, and even a cooking menu obtained from the communication terminal 200 cannot deviate from the "allowable setting range."

Furthermore, when cooking a specific cooking menu based on the received recipe data, even in the multiple heating cooking mode KMM, there are limitations to the input operation unit where the user US arbitrarily inputs control conditions such as heating time and heat power.
For example, if the cooking menu of the acquired recipe data CD is to execute cooking process 1 in the first unit 401, the control conditions can be adjusted in the first operation section 420.
When the second unit 402 is in charge of cooking process 1, the control conditions can be adjusted by the second operating section 421.

In the "first state" in which the second unit 402 is placed, a cooking menu (for example, "cooking rice") can be performed by pressing the rice cooking start switch (input key) 467 of the second operation section 421 to start heating and cooking.
For a cooking menu performed in the "second state" of the first unit 401 only, heating and cooking can be started by pressing the input key 476 of the first operation section 420.

Next, we will explain Figure 94.
94 is a time chart 1 showing the operation of the cooking appliance 400 and the communication terminal 200 in the cooking system according to the embodiment 4. The time chart 1 shows the process of acquiring the setting information for the cooking process 2 after the cooking process 1 is completed.
FIG. 94 shows the process of acquiring setting information for cooking step 2 in the case of recipe data CD of the multiple heating cooking mode KMM described in FIG.
94, steps T100 to T116 are main operation steps of cooking appliance 400 and related operation steps of communication terminal 200, similar to FIG.

FIG. 94 shows the operation when the first unit 401 finishes cooking process 1 and acquires recipe data CD for cooking process 2 during heating pause period P3.
The user US starts cooking process 1 using the setting information acquired through the process of FIG. 93, and then ends cooking process 1 (step T100).
Since the first part M1 relating to cooking process 1 and the second part M2 relating to cooking process 2 can be displayed on the first screen 216A of the communication terminal 200 which has established a communication state with the heating cooker 400, when the confirmation key (input key) 237B is touched to send the recipe data CD for the part of cooking process 2 (step T101), in response to the input by the touch operation, the communication terminal 200 generates advance notice information 2 (201) in the central processing unit (CPU) 212 and sends it to the heating cooker 400 (step T102).

In the first unit 402 of the cooking appliance 400, when the advance notice information 2 (201) is received via the wireless communication unit 426, the content of the advance notice information 2 (201) is displayed on the first display unit 418. For example, as shown in Fig. 80 of the second embodiment, the operation support information 175 is displayed (step T103).
In addition, the second unit 402 receives the contents of the advance notice information 2 (201) from the main control device 480 via the first communication section 430A and the second communication section 431A.
Then, the sub-control device 440 that has received the advance notice information 2 (201) displays the contents of the advance notice information 2 (201) on the second display unit 412 (step T104). In this case, depending on the recipe menu, the operation support information 175 as shown in Fig. 80 is also displayed on the second display unit 412. The specific input key specified in the operation support information 175 is the specific input key 471 of the second unit 402 that performs cooking process 2.

In this case, the advance notice information 2 (201) transmitted from the first unit 401 to the second unit 402 includes corresponding information KID capable of identifying a “specific input key” that needs to be operated by the user US on the direct heating cooker 400 at a stage prior to acquiring the recipe data CD, as described in the first embodiment.
In this fourth embodiment, the correspondence information KID determines that the specific input key to be operated by the user US is the input key 471 of the second unit 402. The process of analyzing the advance notice information 2 (201) and determining that the "input key to be operated" is the specific input key 471 is executed by the sub-control device 440. For this reason, although not shown in Fig. 94, the main control device 480 transfers the advance notice information 2 (201) to the sub-control device 440 before step T104.

The main control unit 480 may determine that the specific input key to be operated by the user US is the input key 471 of the second unit 402, and transmit this determination result to the sub-control unit 440.

If the input key specified in the operation support information 175 displayed on the second display section 412 of the second unit 402 is a specific input key 471 of the second unit 402, the specific input key 471 is pressed in accordance with the operation support information 175 (step T105).
In FIG. 94, the white characters "471" displayed in step T105 indicates the specific input key 471.

Then, the result of the confirmation operation is transmitted from the second unit 402 to the first unit 401 (step T106), and then the cooking device 400 (first unit 401) transmits selection information A (202) via the wireless communication unit 426 (step T107).

In communication terminal 200, the fact that selection information B has been received is displayed on terminal display unit 216 (second screen 216B) (step T108).
Next, when the send key 240 on the second screen 216B of the communication terminal 200 is pressed (step T109), the setting information for cooking step 2 of the recipe data CD for executing a specific cooking menu (for example, "rice cooked with XX") is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 (step T110). In other words, the "command data" (setting information) for setting the cooking device 400 to a specific state is transmitted in a lump from the communication terminal 200.

When the communication adapter 426 receives the command data (step T111), it then acquires status information of the cooking appliance 400 itself. This status information is information indicating the status of the main control device 480 of the cooking appliance 400. Therefore, for example, it is information confirming the driving status of the IH coil 424.
In order to collect such status information, the unit 401 collects its own status information from both the first unit 401 and the second unit 402 (step T112).

Furthermore, the communication adapter 426 analyzes the status information provided collectively from the first unit 401, including information from the second unit 402, and the contents of the command data received from the communication terminal 200, and determines whether there is a problem with the execution of cooking according to the received command data (step T112).

When the cooking device 400 (first unit 401) determines that there is no problem with carrying out cooking process 1, the first unit 401 transmits the status check result to the second unit 402 by an infrared signal (step T113).

Furthermore, in the case where the cooking appliance 400 (first unit 401) determines that there is no problem with carrying out cooking step 1, the communication adapter 426 transmits the status confirmation result to the communication terminal 200 (step T114). This transmission process corresponds to the transmission of the "permission notification" in step SC5 described in embodiment 1 (FIG. 59). If the determination results in a problem with carrying out the cooking, the communication adapter 51 of the cooking appliance 1 transmits data to the communication terminal 200 as a signal (notification of non-permission) including information that the recipe data CD cannot be received. This corresponds to the process of step SC11 shown in embodiment 1 (FIG. 59).

In the communications terminal 200, the central processing unit 212 analyzes the contents of the "permission notice" or "non-permission notice" from the cooking appliance 1. Then, the communications terminal 200 displays the contents on the third screen 216C (step T115).
In the second unit 402 which starts cooking process 2, the reception result of the setting information for cooking process 2 transmitted from the communication terminal 200 is displayed on the display unit 16, and the unit waits for further instructions from the user US (step T116).

The example shown in FIG. 94 is a type in which cooking process 2 is started in the second unit 402.
When data of a specific cooking menu (for example, "rice cooked with XX") is acquired by the recipe data CD, the cooking menu cannot be changed to another cooking menu even at the stage of cooking step 2. In the first unit 401 and the second unit 402, after the stage where the standby initial screen is displayed on the first display section 418 and the second display section 412 (T6 or T7 in step FIG. 93), the recipe data CD is limited to only one specific cooking menu. That is, during the initial standby period TP, only one cooking menu can be acquired from the outside. In other words, in the case of a cooking menu in which cooking steps 1 and 2 are set as described in FIG. 93 and FIG. 94, it is not possible to change to another cooking menu at the stage of cooking step 2. Note that the execution of the cooking menu can be canceled once the cooking step 1 is completed. As a result, the multiple heating cooking mode KMM being executed is terminated midway.

When cooking a specific cooking menu based on the recipe data CD received by the heating cooker 400, the user US can change the control conditions (e.g., adjusting the hardness of the rice) as appropriate using the second operating unit 421 before the start of cooking process 2, but there are some cooking menus for which the control conditions cannot be changed.
In addition, the "allowable setting range" of the control conditions is preset on the cooking appliance 400 side, and even a cooking menu obtained from the communication terminal 200 cannot deviate from the "allowable setting range."

Furthermore, when cooking a specific cooking menu based on the received recipe data, even in the multiple heating cooking mode KMM, there are limitations to the input operation unit where the user US arbitrarily inputs control conditions such as heating time and heat power.
For example, if the cooking menu of the acquired recipe data CD is to execute cooking step 2 in the second unit 402, the control conditions can be adjusted by the second operation section 421.

When the second unit 402 is placed in the "first state," the cooking menu (e.g., "rice cooked with wild vegetables") is to be cooked, heating and cooking can be started by pressing the rice cooking start switch (input key) 467 on the second operation unit 421, regardless of whether it is cooking step 1 or cooking step 2.

In the above-described Figures 93 and 94, the operational steps for acquiring setting information for cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 for one cooking menu in the multiple heating cooking mode KMM have been described.

That is, in FIG. 93, cooking process 1 uses the first unit 401, and cooking process 2 uses the second unit 402 and the first unit 401 in the "first state", but the multiple heating cooking mode KMM is not limited to this.
In other words, cooking process 1 uses second unit 402 and first unit 401 in the "first state", and cooking process 2 uses first unit 401, so that cooking menus in multiple heating cooking mode KMM can be handled.
In this case, the setting information for cooking process 1 can be obtained through the operational steps shown in FIG. 94, and the setting information for cooking process 2 can be obtained through the operational steps shown after step T10 in FIG.

Next, we will explain Figure 95.
Fig. 95 is a plan view 2 of the cooking appliance 1 shown in Fig. 86, seen from above. The second display section 412 shows both the state of "notification step SP2B" before the recipe data CD is acquired, and the state of "reception step SP4" in the middle of acquiring the recipe data CD. Therefore, cooking has not yet started. Note that the "notification step SP2B" and "reception step SP4" mentioned here are different cooking modes from those described in the first embodiment in the strict sense, but since they are similar, they will be described below with the same names and symbols.
In addition, Fig. 95 will be described assuming the case of multiple heating cooking mode KMM. The contents shown in Fig. 95 are common to both the case of acquiring setting information for cooking process 1 and the case of acquiring setting information for cooking process 2.

As shown in Figure 95, when the second unit 402 receives the preview information 2 (201) via the wireless communication unit 426, it displays the contents of the preview information 2 (201) on the second display unit 412. In this case, the operation support information 175 is displayed as shown in Figure 95.
In this case, the operation support information 175 requests the user US to press the "menu button" before obtaining the recipe data CD. In other words, the operation support information 175 requests the user US to press the specific input key 471. When the operation support information 175 is displayed on the second display unit 412 as shown in Fig. 95 and the corresponding specific input key 471 is highlighted by the light-emitting display unit 470, this means that the user is requested to operate the specific input key 471.

As shown in FIG. 95, the specific input key 471 is illuminated by a light emitting element (not shown) from below in a continuous or flashing state so as to be distinctive from the other input keys by the light emitting display unit 470 .
Furthermore, when the operation of receiving the recipe data CD actually starts after the specific input key 471 is pressed, the display of the operation support information 175 disappears. Instead, the receiving operation display section 174 is displayed in the second display section 412. Furthermore, a progress mark 412F indicating the degree of progress of the receiving operation is displayed. This progress mark 412F corresponds to the progress mark 16F in the first embodiment.

When the specific input key 471 is pressed on the second unit 402, an operation signal is sent from the second communication unit 431A to the main control unit 480 via the first communication unit 430A, and the main control unit 480 transmits the selection information B (202) by wireless signal from the communication unit 51. The contents of the selection information B (202) may be displayed on the first display unit 418. When the operation support information 175 as shown in FIG. 95 is displayed on the second unit 402, the first display unit 418 of the first unit 401 does not display anything that prompts the operation of the specific input key 450. Even if the specific input key 450 is operated by mistake, the selection information A (202) described in step T15 of FIG. 94 is not transmitted.

In FIG. 95, the color of the push button surface of the input key 462A (voice input means 462) in the second operation unit 421 changes as shown in white (by a light-emitting display unit not shown). This indicates that the mode has been switched to voice input mode as soon as the specific input key 471 is operated.

Next, we will explain Figure 96.
Fig. 96 is a plan view 3 of the cooking device 1 shown in Fig. 86, seen from above. It shows the state of the "standby step SP5" after the recipe data CD is acquired. Note that the "standby step SP5" here is a different heating cooking mode from that described in the first embodiment, strictly speaking, but since they are similar, they will be described below with the same names and symbols.

Auxiliary information 179 is displayed on the second display unit 412. In the case of the multiple heating cooking mode KMM, as shown in FIG. 96, the cooking contents are displayed in comparison for each of the multiple cooking steps, allowing the user US to easily understand the cooking arrangements. Note that while the display example in FIG. 96 relates to the second display unit 412, the display contents of the first display unit 420 and the operation of the first operation unit 420 will be explained in the next FIG. 97.

In the example shown in FIG. 96, in the second display unit 412, display unit 181A is a display unit for preparation information that requests preparation for cooking rice in the inner pot 405. Preparation for cooking rice here does not mean that the "first state" is to be maintained, but rather that preparation is to put rice and water in the inner pot 405 in advance. 181P is a supplementary explanation unit for cooking process 1 or cooking process 2, and indicates the heating means to be used, etc.

In the second display section 412, display section 181B, which is displayed in white letters, is a display section for cooking process 1, which displays the contents of cooking process 1. In the example of FIG. 96, cooking process 1 is cooking rice using the second unit 402. Display section 181C is a display section for cooking process 2, which displays that ingredients are simmered in a pot or the like using the first unit 401. Pressing the input key (rice cooking start switch) 467 in FIG. 96 starts cooking process 1. As shown in FIG. 96, the input key 467 may be illuminated (including blinking) to encourage the pressing operation.

Next, we will explain Figure 97.
FIG. 97 is an enlarged explanatory diagram of the input operation section and the display section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 86, viewed from the front (front) side.
Fig. 97 shows the first display section 418 of the first unit 401 at the stage of step T12 in Fig. 93. That is, it shows the stage of obtaining setting information A for cooking process 1 in the first unit 401. In this manner, the main control device 480 displays operation support information 176 on the first display section 418. The operation support information 175 includes information instructing the operation of the specific input key 450, as shown in Fig. 97. In the example of Fig. 97, the guidance text is "Press the menu button", but this "menu button" is only the specific input key 450 in the first unit 401.

When this specific input key 450 is pressed (step T14 in FIG. 93), a command to transmit selected information A is issued from the main control device 480, and in response to this command, selected information A (202) is transmitted from the communication unit 51.

After transmitting the selection information A (202), the first unit goes into a standby state.
After the transition to the standby state in this way, when reception of the recipe data CD starts, the first display section 418 and the second display section 412 start displaying the reception operation display screen 16MM.

During the operation of receiving such recipe data CD, separate operation support information 176A is displayed on the first display unit 418 and the second display unit 412 (see FIG. 97) so that the second unit 402 is not moved from above the first unit 401. Note that the operation support information 176A may be displayed after the operation support information 176, or may be displayed simultaneously. Also, while FIG. 97 shows only an example of display on the first display unit 418, it is preferable to display it simultaneously on the second display unit 412 as well. Note that this operation support information 176A is displayed only in the cases of steps AR4A and SR2B described in FIG. 92.

As shown in FIG. 97, in step T12 (see FIG. 93), the main control device 480 causes the light-emitting display unit 453 to light continuously or blink so as to emphasize the presence of the specific input key 450. This allows the user US, who sees the first operation unit 420, to quickly identify the input key that he or she has been instructed to operate on the communication terminal 200. Note that in steps T12 and T14 shown in FIG. 93, the other input keys (473, 474, etc.) are not guided to operate by lighting or blinking the light-emitting display unit 453 described above.

In addition, while the light-emitting display unit 453 is lit or flashing to prompt the operation of the specific input key 450, the input functions of the input keys 473, 474, 475A, 475B, and 476 that do not require input operation are all disabled. In other words, the main control unit 480 limits the output from the first operation unit 420.

Summary of embodiment 4.
As is apparent from the above description, in this fourth embodiment, a cooking device 400 according to the fourth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device 400 according to the fourth disclosure is as follows:
A first unit 401 incorporating a heating means 424;
a second unit 402 that can be heated by the heating means 424 in a state where the second unit 402 is placed on the first unit 401,
The first unit 401 includes a main control device 480 that controls the heating means 424, a communication unit 526 that performs wireless communication with the outside, and a first operation unit 420 that can perform input operations while the second unit 402 is placed thereon.
The second unit 402 includes a second operation unit 421 and a sub-control device 440 that can perform input operations while the second unit 402 is placed on the first unit 401.
The main control device 480 has a function of acquiring setting information A related to a cooking process 1 and setting information B related to a cooking process 2 of a specific cooking menu via the communication unit 526,
The main control device 480 includes:
(1) When the specific input key A (450) of the first operation part 420 is operated, the process proceeds to a step of acquiring setting information A of the cooking process 1 in which the first unit 401 is used alone,
(2) After the cooking process 1 is completed, when the specific input key B (471) of the second operation part 421 is operated, the process proceeds to a step in which setting information B of the cooking process 2 using the second unit 401 placed on the first unit 401 can be acquired;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, recipe data CD held by external communication terminal 200 can be reliably acquired by cooking appliance 400 and used for actual cooking.
Furthermore, if the user US has previously operated specific input keys 450, 471 on the cooking device 400 that are suitable for obtaining the selected recipe data (cooking menu) CD, the operation of obtaining the recipe data CD will proceed after a confirmation operation by the user US (whether or not the specific input key has been operated), thereby preventing operation errors by the user US and improving usability.

Furthermore, when executing a cooking menu of recipe data CD in which the first unit 401 is used for cooking step 1 and the second unit 402 is used for cooking step 2, the specific input key 450 of the first unit 401 is operated in response to advance notice information 1 (201) from the communication terminal 200. Then, the specific input key 471 of the second unit 402 is operated in response to advance notice information 2 (201) from the communication terminal 200. With such simple operations, recipe data CD relating to cooking steps 1 and 2 can be reliably obtained. Therefore, since recipe data CD is obtained in response to a confirmation action by the user US for each cooking step, it is possible to prevent operational errors by the user US and improve usability.

Furthermore, one form of the heating cooker 400 of the fourth embodiment is as follows:
a first unit 401 incorporating a first operation unit 420, a first display unit 418, a first communication unit 430A, a heating source (induction heating coil 424), a storage means 480R, and a wireless communication unit 426 that performs wireless communication with an external communication device;
a second unit 402 capable of performing a cooking operation by the heat source 424 in a first state in which the second unit 402 is placed on the first unit 401;
Equipped with
The second unit 402 has a second display unit 412, a second operation unit 421, a second communication unit 431A, a storage means 440R, a sub-controller 440, and an inner pot 405 for accommodating food to be cooked.
The first unit 401 includes a main control device 480 that operates according to recipe data CD relating to a specific cooking menu acquired from the wireless communication unit 426,
The first operation unit 420 and the second operation unit 421 each have specific input keys 450 and 471,
At least one of the storage means 480R of the first unit 401 and the storage means 440R of the second unit 402 has corresponding information KID for identifying the specific input keys 450, 471 for each cooking menu,
After the main power switch is turned on, the main control device 480
(1) a detection step SP2 of detecting that one of the specific input keys 450, 471 has been operated;
(2) a confirmation step SP3 for determining whether or not the specific input keys 450, 471 have been operated when advance notice information (201) relating to one of the cooking steps of the recipe data CD is received;
Execute the following in sequence.
When it is confirmed in the confirmation step SP2 that the specific input key has been operated, the selection information (202) is transmitted from the wireless communication unit 426,
The main control device 440 executes the detection step SP2 or the confirmation step SP3 when it detects that the inner kettle 405 is housed.
The configuration was characterized by the following.

With this configuration, recipe data CD held by the external communication terminal 200 can be reliably acquired by the cooking appliance 400 and used for actual cooking.
Furthermore, in either case, when the user US has previously operated specific input keys 450, 471 on the cooking appliance 400 that are suitable for obtaining the selected recipe data (cooking menu), or when the user US operates specific input keys 450, 471 after receiving advance notice from the communication terminal 200, the cooking appliance 400 undergoes a confirmation operation (whether or not the specific input key has been operated) before proceeding to the operation of obtaining the recipe data CD, thereby preventing operational errors by the user US and improving usability.

Furthermore, since the second unit 402 proceeds to a process for acquiring recipe data when the inner pot 405 is housed therein, even if the inner pot 405 is forgotten to be set in the second unit 402, the inner pot 405 can be set at a stage before the recipe data CD is acquired, and the acquisition process can be proceeded with in a correct state.
Although not described in detail, if the presence of the inner kettle 405 cannot be confirmed in step SQ4 (see FIG. 91), an error notification may be issued, and the error processing may be released only if it is detected that the lid 404 has been opened, the inner kettle 405 has been inserted, and the lid 404 has been closed again within a certain period of time (for example, five minutes).

Furthermore, main control device 480 of cooking appliance 400 in embodiment 4 is configured to start reception restriction period TZ1 when selection information (202) is transmitted to external communication terminal 200.
Therefore, when it is decided to acquire specific recipe data CD and input keys 450, 471 are pressed, it is possible to prevent another cooking menu (including a control menu for another cooking mode or a control menu for a single cooking mode) from being inadvertently received during the process of setting the cooking menu, and to stably execute the cooking menu of the received recipe data CD.

Furthermore, the main control device 480 of the cooking device 400 according to the third embodiment is
The specific input keys 450, 471 notified in the notifying step SP2B transmit selection information 202 indicating that they have been operated.

This configuration contributes to creating an environment in which the communication terminal 200 that receives the selection information 202 can check the preparation state of the cooking appliance 400 and transmit the recipe data CD to the cooking appliance 400 at an appropriate time.

Furthermore, the cooking device 400 disclosed in this fourth embodiment can cook an object to be heated placed above the top plate 422 by the built-in heat source (IH coil) 424 using only the first unit 401 .
In addition, the second unit 402, when placed on the first unit 401 (first state), is capable of heating an inner pot containing food to be cooked by a heating source (IH coil) 424.
In this way, the user can select between using the first unit 401 alone or using it together with the second unit 402 depending on the type of cooking.
In addition, the second unit 402 can be separated from the first unit 401 and moved to another location.
These separable forms can improve convenience for the user US.

Embodiment 5.
Fig. 98 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the center of a cooking device used in the cooking system of embodiment 5. Fig. 99 is a time chart 1 showing the operation of the cooking device and the communication terminal of the heating system in embodiment 5 in time series. Fig. 100 is a time chart 1 showing the operation of the cooking device in the multiple heating cooking mode KMM in the heating cooking system of embodiment 5. Fig. 101 is a time chart 2 showing the operation of the cooking device and the communication terminal of the heating system in embodiment 5 in time series. Note that parts that are the same as or equivalent to the configurations of embodiments 1 to 4 described in Figs. 1 to 97 are given the same reference numerals.

Referring to Figure 98 .
The cooking device 400 of the fifth embodiment is similar in overall configuration to the cooking device 400 of the fourth embodiment, but the configuration of the first unit 401 is different.
The planar shape of the first unit 401 is a square, and the size of this planar shape is almost the same as the planar shape of the second unit 402. Therefore, when the second unit 402 is overlapped (first state), the entire upper surface of the first unit 401 is covered by the second unit 402.
In this fifth embodiment as well, the state in which second unit 402 is separated from the state in which second unit 402 is placed on the upper surface of first unit 401 (first state) is referred to as the "second state."

The upper surface of the first unit 401 is covered with a top plate 422, and in the first state, the bottom surface of the second unit 402 faces this top plate 422 either in contact with it or with a small gap therebetween.
A step 445 of a constant width is formed on the front end of the top surface of the first unit 401 and continues to both left and right ends.
The first operation unit 420 and the first display unit 418 are disposed on this step 445. The first display unit 418 is configured by providing touch keys (icons) on a liquid crystal display screen that also serves as a touch input panel.

The first operating unit 420 is disposed within the step 445, and the dimensions are such that a gap of at least a few mm is always maintained between the first operating unit 420 and the bottom surface of the second unit 402 in the first state. Therefore, the first operating unit 420 is not pressed by the bottom surface of the second unit 402 and an input is not inadvertently made.

The first operation section 420 has various input keys arranged thereon as described in the fourth embodiment. However, these input keys are provided on the display screen of the first display section 418.
In the fifth embodiment, the recipe data CD for the cooking process using the first unit 401 is acquired by the specific input key 450 of the first unit 401, whether it is cooking process 1 or cooking process 2.
On the other hand, the recipe data CD for the cooking process using the second unit 402 is acquired by pressing the specific input key 471 of the second unit 402 in the first state, whether it is cooking process 1 or cooking process 2.
Therefore, the specific input key 471 of the second unit 402 and the input key 450 (not shown, see FIG. 97) of the first unit 401 have a function of selecting the cooking menu by touch operation when manually selecting the menu, and a function of generating selection information A (202) as described in embodiment 4 in order to obtain the setting information of the recipe data CD.
Reference numeral 426 denotes a communication section 426 , which is disposed in the internal space on the front side of the first unit 401 .

Next, we will explain Figure 99.
Fig. 99 is a time chart showing the time series of operations of cooking appliance 400 and communication terminal 200. Fig. 99 is similar to the contents shown in Fig. 93 of the fourth embodiment, and therefore the following description will focus mainly on the differences.
The time chart shown in Fig. 99 is for the case where the second unit 402 is used in cooking process 1, and is fundamentally different from that shown in Fig. 93 for the case where the first unit 401 is used in cooking process 1. That is, there are four differences as follows:
The first point is that the "standby initial screen" described in step T6 of Fig. 93 is not displayed. As can be seen from Fig. 98, in the first state, the first display unit 418 is covered from above by the second unit 402, so even if it were displayed, it would not be visible to the user US. Therefore, displaying the standby initial screen 16MH on the first display unit 418 is not performed because it would be a waste.

The second point is that there is no step of displaying the operational support information 176 (176A) on the first display unit 418, as explained in step T12 of Fig. 93. As can also be seen from Fig. 98, in the first state, the first display unit 418 is covered from above by the second unit 402, so even if it were displayed, it would not be visible to the user US. Therefore, displaying it would be a waste, so it is not displayed.
Therefore, the display unit 418 of the first unit 401 does not display the fact that "advance notice information 1 (201)" has been received.

Thirdly, the operation of the "specific input key 450" of the first operation part 420 explained in step T14 of Fig. 93 is changed in Fig. 99 to the operation of pressing the specific input key 471 of the second unit 402. That is, in this embodiment 5, since the recipe data CD of cooking process 1 is obtained after the second unit 402 is set to the "first state", confirmation information A (202) is transmitted by the specific input key 471 of the second unit 402 in the specific input key input step T14.
The fourth point is that there is no "notification" of the status check result as explained in step T20 of Fig. 93. This notification is to display the status check result on the first display unit 418, but as can be seen from Fig. 98, in the first state, the first display unit 418 is covered from above by the second unit 402, so even if it were displayed, it would not be visible to the user US. Therefore, displaying it would be pointless, so it is not displayed. Instead, as shown in Fig. 99, the status check result is displayed on the second display unit 412 of the second unit 402 (see step T24 of Fig. 99).

In FIG. 99, when the cooking device 400 (first unit 401) determines that there is no problem with carrying out cooking process 1, the first unit 401 transmits the status confirmation result to the second unit 402 by an infrared signal (step T21).

Furthermore, in the first unit 401, if it is determined that there is no problem with carrying out cooking step 1, the communication adapter 426 transmits the status confirmation result to the communication terminal 200 (step T22). This transmission process corresponds to the transmission of the "permission notification" in step SC5 described in embodiment 1 (Figure 59). If it is determined that there is a problem with carrying out the cooking, the communication adapter 51 of the cooking appliance 1 transmits data to the communication terminal 200 as a signal (notification of non-permission) including information that the recipe data CD cannot be received. This corresponds to the process of step SC11 shown in embodiment 1 (Figure 59).

In the communications terminal 200, the central processing unit 212 analyzes the contents of the "permission notice" or "non-permission notice" from the cooking appliance 1. Then, the communications terminal 200 displays the contents on the third screen 216C (step T23).
In order to start cooking process 1, in this second unit 402, the reception result of the setting information for cooking process 2 sent from the communication terminal 200 is displayed on the second display unit 412, and the second unit 402 enters a state in which it waits for further instructions from the user US (step T24).

Next, we will explain Figure 100.
Fig. 100 is a time chart showing the operation in the multiple heating cooking mode KMM of the cooking device 400. This Fig. 100 corresponds to Fig. 67 described in the first embodiment, but Fig. 67 is for the case of the combined cooking mode KM1 having the heating pause period P3.

FIG. 100 shows in detail a series of operation steps in the multiple heating cooking mode from the reception of advance notice information 1 of cooking process 1 to the end of cooking process 2.
In the multiple heating cooking mode KMM, there are two types: cooking process 1 is performed by the first unit 401 alone, and cooking process 1 is performed by the second unit 402 placed on the cooking device 401. In FIG. 100, the explanation will be given on the assumption that cooking process 1 is performed by the second unit 402 and cooking process 2 is performed by the first unit 401 alone.

Step SS140 is the stage where advance notice information 1 (201) corresponding to the data of the first portion M1 for executing cooking process 1 is received from the communication terminal 200.
In the next step SS141, the contents of the advance notice information 1 are analyzed. As described above, the advance notice information 1 includes identification information for identifying a cooking menu and process identification information for indicating that it is cooking process 1. Therefore, upon receiving the advance notice information 1, a specific input key that needs to be operated on the cooking appliance 1 side is extracted from the data in the storage means 480A or 440R.

In step SS142, information indicating the extracted specific input key is displayed on the second display unit 412. In addition, the audio notification means 466 may prompt the user to operate the specific input key 471 by audio. The light-emitting display unit 470 may indicate the specific input key 471 to be operated by continuous illumination or a flashing light.

In step SS143, when the specific input key 471 is operated with reference to the information indicating the specific input key 471 displayed on the second display unit 412, the sub-control unit 440 generates selection information (202) corresponding to the specific input key 471 and transmits it by infrared signal to the main control unit 480 on the first unit 401 side. The main control unit 480 transmits a signal that becomes selection information A (202) from the wireless communication unit 426 to the outside. In this Figure 100, the white letters "471" displayed in step SS143 represent the specific input key 471.

In step SS144, the setting information A (for the first portion M1 relating to the cooking process 1) transmitted from the communication terminal 200 is received.
The wireless communication unit (communication adapter) 426 determines whether or not it is in a state in which it can transition to control according to the received setting information A.

If the result of the determination by the wireless communication unit (communication adapter) 426 is "Yes", the main control unit 480 receives the result of the determination from the wireless communication unit 426 and stores the data (setting information A) of the first portion M1 previously acquired by the data acquisition unit 485 in a specified storage area of the control data storage unit 480A in preparation for the heating and cooking that will be performed immediately afterwards.

Next, step SS145 is not a required process as indicated by the dashed line, but is a function that can be added as an option. In this step SS145, the data acquisition unit 485 transmits a signal (status confirmation result) indicating that the data has been successfully acquired from the wireless communication unit 426 to the communication terminal 200, which is the sender of the recipe data CD (data of the first part M1).

Next, in step SS146, the contents of the acquired recipe data CD (data of the first portion M1) are sent to the second unit 402 and displayed on the second display section 412. If the start of cooking is input using the second operation section 421 (input key 467), the main control device 480 will start driving the induction heating coil 424 in response to the input, and induction heating cooking (cooking process 1) will begin. After that, cooking (cooking process 1) will end (step SS147). Note that cooking process 1 can end in two ways: automatically, or by the user operating the second operation section 421 at any time to end it.

At this stage of step SS147, the main control device 480 instructs the second display section 412 to display guidance information to detach the second unit 402 and to enter the "second state".
Furthermore, the main control device 480 transmits a notification signal from the wireless communication unit 426 to the communication terminal 200, urging the communication terminal 200 to transmit the recipe data CD for cooking step 2. At the same time, the first display unit 418 displays operational support information to move the food in the inner pot 405 of the second unit 402 into the food N to be heated, such as a pot made of magnetic metal, and place it in a predetermined position on the top plate 422, and also provides guidance by the audio notification means 455 (step SS147A).

Since the multiple heating cooking mode KMM is in effect, the period from steps SS147 to SS154 is a cooking interruption period PX during which no heating operation is performed.
If the data of the second portion M2 of the recipe data CD is not acquired during this cooking interruption period PX, it is not possible to proceed to cooking step 2.
Therefore, during this cooking interruption period PX, operations similar to those of steps SS140 to SS145 are carried out in steps SS147A to SS154.

After step SS147A, the main control device 480 checks whether the second unit 402 is separated based on the data from the first reference position determination means 430 and the second reference position determination means 454. It then confirms that the second state is reached (step SS147B). Note that a notification signal may be sent from the wireless communication unit 426 to the communication terminal 200 when the second state is reached. This is because the second part of the advance notice information 2 (201) can be sent from the communication terminal 200 in a timely manner.

Advance notice information 2 for the second part M2 for carrying out cooking process 2 is transmitted by the user US operating the communication terminal 200 .
Then, in step SS148, the advance notice information 2 (201) is received from the communication terminal 200.
In the next step SS149, the contents of the advance notice information 2 are analyzed. Then, in response to the advance notice information 2, specific input keys that require an input operation are extracted from the data in the storage means 480A.

In step SS150, information indicating the extracted specific input key 450 is displayed on the first display unit 418. In addition, the audio notification means 455 may prompt the user to operate the specific input key 450 by audio. Furthermore, the light-emitting display unit 453 highlights the operation surface of the specific input key 450 by continuous illumination or blinking light.

In step SS151, when a specific input key 450 is operated with reference to the information indicating the specific input key 450 displayed on the first display unit 418, the main control unit 480 generates selection information B (202) corresponding to the specific input key 450 and transmits it to the outside from the wireless communication unit 426. In this step SS151, the white letters "450" are displayed to indicate the specific input key 450.

In step SS152, the setting information B (for the second portion M2 of cooking process 2) transmitted from the communication terminal 200 is received.
In step SS52, as described in step SS144, it is determined whether or not it is possible to transition to control according to the contents of the setting information B regarding the second portion M2 received by the wireless communication unit (communication adapter) 426.

If the wireless communication unit (communication adapter) 426 judges that the data (setting information B) of the second portion M2 acquired immediately before is stored in a specified storage area of the control data storage unit 480A in preparation for cooking step 2, which is performed immediately afterwards.

Next, step SS153 is not a required process, as indicated by the dashed line, but is a function that can be added as an option. In this step SS153, similar to step SS145, the status check result is sent to communication terminal 200. Therefore, communication terminal 200 can check whether communication has been successful.

Next, in step SS154, the contents of the acquired recipe data CD (data of the second portion M2) are displayed on the first display unit 418, and cooking (cooking process 2) begins when a command to start cooking is input through the first operation unit 420. Note that, at the time of this step SS154, the second unit 402 is not placed, and therefore the first operation unit 420 can be freely operated independently of the second unit 402.
At the point in time of step SS154, the cooking interruption period PX ends.
Thereafter, the cooking process (cooking step 2) is terminated by a stop operation by the user US, or the cooking process (cooking step 2) is terminated automatically after the set heating time has elapsed (step SS155).

Although not explained in steps SS146 and SS154, the user US can modify control conditions such as heat and set temperature as appropriate before the start of cooking process 1 and cooking process 2. However, depending on the cooking menu, there are cases where the control conditions of the received setting information A for cooking process 1 and setting information B for cooking process 2 cannot be changed. In addition, the control conditions can be modified midway through the cooking operation after it has started.

As in the example shown in FIG. 67, the cooking device 400 of this embodiment 5 also starts the "acceptance state of data (setting information A) of cooking process 1" of the recipe data CD from the point immediately before step SS140. The timing of the start of this acceptance state is shown in FIG. 49. That is, it is the point in time when the voice guidance and the display indicating that the recipe data CD can be acquired are displayed (step SA3A). At the start of this acceptance state, the wireless communication unit 426 may notify the outside that the acceptance state of data (setting information A) of cooking process 1 has started (see step SS145). As a result, the terminal display unit 216 of the communication terminal 200 may display information that allows the preparation state of the cooking device 400 to be grasped on the terminal display unit 216.

On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 67, in the cooking device 400 of this embodiment 5, the "end of the state of accepting data (setting information A) for cooking process 1" occurs when the start of cooking process 1 is commanded (step SA7) or immediately thereafter (step SA9), as described in FIG. 49. In other words, it occurs immediately before step SS146 in FIG. 100.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 400 of this embodiment 5, the "start of the state of accepting data (setting information B) for cooking process 2" is step SA12 or immediately thereafter, as described in FIG. 50. In other words, in accordance with FIG. 100, it starts at the point of step SS147B.

As explained in FIG. 50, the "end of the state of accepting data for cooking process 2 (setting information B)" is the time when the command to start cooking process 2 is issued (step SA15) or immediately thereafter (step SA16). In other words, in terms of FIG. 100, it is the time immediately before step SS154.

Next, we will explain Figure 101.
101 is a time chart 2 showing the chronological order of the operation of the heating cooker and the communication terminal of the heating system in the embodiment 5. The time chart shows the main operation of acquiring setting information B related to cooking step 2 for a cooking menu of recipe data CD having two cooking steps.

FIG. 101 shows the process of acquiring setting information B for cooking process 2 after the stage where cooking process 1, which is performed using the setting information of the recipe data CD acquired in FIG. 99, is completed.
101, steps T100 to T113 indicate main operation steps of the cooking appliance 400 and related operation steps of the communication terminal 200, similarly to Fig. 99. Note that some steps are not operations of the cooking appliance 400, but operations/input operations of the user US.

The user US starts cooking process 1 using the setting information A acquired through the process of FIG. 99, and then ends cooking process 1 (step T100).
When cooking step 1 is completed, the completion of cooking step 1 is displayed on the second display section 412 of the second unit 402. The content of this completion display varies depending on cooking step 1 and the type of cooking menu. Furthermore, in order to proceed to cooking step 2, a display is displayed indicating that the second state should be entered. In other words, it is necessary to separate the second unit 402.

When the user US moves the second unit 402 from above the first unit 401 (step T100S), the reference position determination means 454 determines that the second state has been reached (step T100B), and then activates the first display section 418 of the first unit 401 to display the initial standby screen (step T100C).

The communication terminal 200, which has established communication with the cooking appliance 400, can display the second portion M2 relating to the cooking process 2 on the first screen 216A. In order to transmit the recipe data CD for the cooking process 2 portion, when the confirmation key (input key) 237B is touched (step T101), the communication terminal 200 receives the input from the touch operation, generates advance notice information 2 (201), and transmits it to the cooking appliance 400 (step T102).

When the first unit 402 of the cooking appliance 400 receives the advance notice information 2 (201) via the wireless communication unit 426, the first unit 402 displays the contents of the advance notice information 2 (201) on the first display unit 418 (step T103).
At this point, the second unit 402 has already been separated and is not capable of communicating with the first unit 401, so no information is transferred to the second unit 402.

In main control device 480 which has received advance notice information 2 (201), first display unit 418 displays operational support information 176 such as that shown in embodiment 4 (Figure 97), for example.
That is, when the first unit 401 of the cooking appliance 400 receives the advance notice information 2 (201) via the wireless communication unit (communication adapter) 426, the contents of this information are displayed on the first display unit 418.

In this case, it is useful if the advance notice information 2 (201) acquired by the first unit 401 includes correspondence information KID capable of identifying a “specific input key” that needs to be operated by the user US on the direct heating cooker 400 at a stage before the recipe data CD is acquired, as described in embodiment 1, but this correspondence information KID is not essential.
In this embodiment 5, when the corresponding information KID is not present, the main control device 480 analyzes the advance notice information 2 (201) and can determine that the "input key to be operated" is the specific input key 450 in the example of Fig. 101. Therefore, after the main control device 480 receives the advance notice information 2 (201), it displays it on the first display unit 418 in step T103. Furthermore, the light-emitting display unit 453 causes the vicinity of the operation surface of the specific input key 450 to emit light (including blinking) to emphasize the presence of the specific input key 450.

Next, the user depresses the specific input key 450 prompted by the first display section 418 of the first unit 401 (step T104).
In FIG. 101, the white characters "450" displayed in step T104 indicate the specific input key 450.

Then, in response to the input operation, selection information B (202) is transmitted from first unit 401 via wireless communication section 426 (step T105).
In communication terminal 200, the fact that selection information B (202) has been received is displayed on terminal display unit 216 (second screen 216B) (step T106).

Next, when the send key 240 on the second screen 216B of the communication terminal 200 is pressed (step T107), the setting information B for cooking step 2 of the recipe data CD for executing a specific cooking menu is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 (step T108). In other words, the "command data" (setting information B) for setting a specific state for executing cooking step 2 in the cooking device 400 is transmitted all at once from the communication terminal 200.

When the communication adapter 426 receives the command data (step T109), it then acquires status information of the cooking appliance 400 itself. This status information is information indicating the status of the main control device 480 of the cooking appliance 400. Therefore, for example, the status information is information ascertaining the driving status of the IH coil 424.
In order to collect such status information, the communications adapter 426 collects status information of the first unit 401 itself (step T110).

Furthermore, the communication adapter 426 analyzes the status information provided collectively by the first unit 401 and the contents of the command data received from the communication terminal 200, and determines whether there are any problems with the execution of cooking according to the received command data.

When the cooking appliance 400 (first unit 401) determines that there is no problem with carrying out cooking step 1, the communication adapter 426 of the first unit 401 transmits the status check result to the communication terminal 200 (step T111). This transmission process corresponds to the transmission of the "permission notification" in step SC5 described in embodiment 1 (Figure 59).

In the communication terminal 200, the central processing unit 212 analyzes the contents of the notification from the cooking appliance 1. Then, the contents are displayed on the third screen 216C (step T112).
In the first unit 401 starting cooking process 2, the reception result of the setting information B for cooking process 2 transmitted from the communication terminal 200 is displayed on the first display unit 418, and the unit waits for further instructions from the user US (step T113).

The example shown in FIG. 101 is a type in which cooking process 1 starts in the second unit 401 as described in FIG.
When data of a specific cooking menu is acquired by the recipe data CD, the cooking menu cannot be changed to another cooking menu at the stage immediately before this cooking step 2, that is, during the cooking interruption period PX.
In the first unit 401, after the stage of transition to the cooking interruption period PX (step T100 in step diagram 101), the recipe data CD is limited to only one specific cooking menu. That is, during this cooking interruption period PX, only one cooking menu can be acquired from the outside. In other words, in the case of a cooking menu in which cooking steps 1 and 2 are set as described in Figs. 99 and 101, it is not possible to change to another cooking menu at the stage of cooking step 2. It is possible to cancel the execution of the cooking menu once at the stage of finishing cooking step 1. This ends the multiple heating cooking mode KMM that is being executed. For example, between steps T100A and T100C in Fig. 101, the operation can be stopped arbitrarily during induction heating cooking.

When cooking a specific cooking menu based on the recipe data CD received by the heating cooker 400, the user US can change the control conditions (e.g., heating time, heat level, etc.) as appropriate using the first operating unit 420 before starting cooking process 2, but there are some cooking menus for which the control conditions cannot be changed.
In addition, the "allowable setting range" of the control conditions is preset on the cooking appliance 400 side, and even a cooking menu obtained from the communication terminal 200 cannot deviate from the "allowable setting range."

99 and 101 described above, the operational steps for acquiring setting information A for cooking process 1 and setting information B for cooking process 2 for one cooking menu in the multiple heating cooking mode KMM have been described.
The cooking step 1 or cooking step 2 may include a "post-heating leaving step" or a "warming step" in which the main control device 480 forcibly stops the heating operation and keeps it stopped. For example, the main control device 480 may control the operation of heating the food in the inner pot 405 of the second unit 402 (for a time specified by the recipe data) and leaving it to natural heat dissipation, or keeping it warm at a constant temperature (e.g., 80°C) for a specified time. In this case, the "post-heating leaving step" or "warming step" is included in the recipe data CD when the recipe data CD for cooking step 1 is received from the communication terminal 200, so the user US does not need to manually add it.

In Figures 99 to 101, cooking process 1 uses the second unit 402 and the first unit 401 in the "first state," and cooking process 2 uses the first unit 402, but the multiple heating cooking mode KMM is not limited to this.
That is, cooking process 1 uses the first unit 401, and cooking process 2 uses the second unit 402 and the first unit 401 in the "first state", so that cooking menus in the multiple heating cooking mode KMM can also be accommodated.

Summary of embodiment 5.
As is clear from the above description, in this fifth embodiment, the cooking device 400 according to the fifth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device 400 according to the fifth disclosure is as follows:
A first unit 401 incorporating a heating means 424;
a second unit 402 that can be heated by the heating means 424 in a state where the second unit 402 is placed on the first unit 401,
The first unit 401 includes a main control device 480 that controls the heating means 424, a communication unit 526 that performs wireless communication with the outside, and a first operation unit 420 that can perform an input operation in a first state in which the second unit 402 is not placed,
The second unit 402 includes a second operation unit 421 capable of performing an input operation in the first state, and a sub-control device 440.
The main control device 480 has a function of acquiring setting information A related to a cooking process 1 and setting information B related to a cooking process 2 of a specific cooking menu via the communication unit 526,
The main control device 480 includes:
(1) In the first state, when the specific input key B (471) of the second operation part 421 is operated (see step T14 in FIG. 99), the process proceeds to a step in which setting information A of the cooking process 1 using the second unit 402 can be obtained (see step T19 in FIG. 99);
(2) After the cooking process 1 is completed, when the specific input key A (450) of the first operation unit 420 is operated after the first state is released (see step T104 in FIG. 101 ), the process proceeds to a step in which setting information B of the cooking process 2 using the first unit can be acquired (see step T109 in FIG. 101 );
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, recipe data CD held by external communication terminal 200 can be reliably acquired by cooking appliance 400 and used for actual cooking.
Furthermore, if the user US has previously operated specific input keys 450, 471 on the cooking device 400 that are suitable for obtaining the selected recipe data (cooking menu) CD, the operation of obtaining the recipe data CD will proceed after a confirmation operation by the user US (whether or not the specific input key has been operated), thereby preventing operation errors by the user US and improving usability.

In addition to the above, the same effects as those described in the first to fourth embodiments can be obtained for the same parts as those described in the fifth embodiment.

Other embodiments.
In order to explain each circuit, part, and each component of the device that constitutes the cooking device 1, 400 and the communication terminal device 200, data and information are described with symbols (1, 2 or A, B) such as recipe data CD1, recipe data CD2, advance notice information 1, advance notice information 2, selection information A, selection information B, setting information A, etc., but these two may be substantially the same data. For example, one recipe data (e.g., hamburger recipe data CD) that is initially held in the cooking device 1, 400 and recipe data (e.g., hamburger recipe data CD) obtained from the outside via the communication unit 51, 426 may have the same content.

In addition, the communication terminal 200, such as a smartphone or tablet terminal (small portable personal computer), does not necessarily need to provide the recipe data acquired from the cloud server 300 to the cooking appliances 1, 400, and may generate and store the recipe data itself. Furthermore, the relationship between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking appliances 1, 400 does not always need to be such that the advance notice information 201 and the selection information 202 are transmitted by direct communication, and wireless communication may be performed via a relay device or other access point. Therefore, for example, even if it is described that "selection information for the sender of the recipe data is transmitted," it is not intended that the sender is limited to the communication terminal 200 alone.

In addition, in the composite cooking mode KM2, when the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected, a control menu (for example, a heating operation pattern called "defrost") is basically selected, and recipe data CD intended for a specific food to be cooked is not selected. However, the user US may use the cloud server 300 to select recipe data CD intended for one food to be cooked in the composite cooking mode KM2 that can be applied to the cooking appliance 1, and have the cooking appliance 1 acquire this using the communication terminal 200. This is the same for the single cooking mode KM3.

In the above explanation, for the sake of simplicity, reference numbers have been used to indicate corresponding components and signals, but the reference numbers should not be interpreted as indicating that the components and signals are different from one another. In some cases, different reference numbers have been used for the sake of explanation, but this is done for the sake of explanation only, and does not mean that the data, components, or functions are different from one another simply because of the difference in reference numbers.

The circuits, parts, and components of the devices illustrated in the above embodiments 1 to 5 are conceptual in nature and do not necessarily have to be physically configured as illustrated. Furthermore, the functions of the control device 40, heating control unit 43, first heating means HM1, second heating means HM2, third heating means HM3, memory device 41, main control device 480, sub-control device 440, etc. can be distributed and integrated, and the specific form is not limited to that illustrated, and all or part of them can be functionally or physically distributed and integrated in any unit depending on the function, operating status, etc.

The functions of the control device 40 and the heating control unit 43 are realized by processing circuits. The processing circuits that realize the functions may be dedicated hardware or may be processors that execute programs stored in memory. The same applies to the main control device 480 and the sub-control device 440.

When the processing circuit is a processor, the functions of the control device 40 and the heating control unit 43 are realized by software, firmware, or a combination of software and firmware. The software and firmware are written as programs and stored in the storage device 41, which is a memory. The processor realizes the functions of the control device 40 and the heating control unit 43 by reading and executing the programs stored in the storage device 41. The same applies to the main control device 480 and the sub-control device 440.

These programs cause the microcomputer to execute the control procedures of the control device 40 and the heating control unit 43. The storage device 41 is typically a non-volatile or volatile semiconductor memory such as RAM, ROM, flash memory, EPROM, EEPROM, etc.

Furthermore, some of the data and programs in the recipe data storage unit 41 shown in FIG. 10 may not be stored in the cooking appliance 1 but in an external recording medium (such as a storage server). In this case, the cooking appliance 1 accesses the external recording medium (storage server) to obtain the necessary data and program information.

Furthermore, the operating programs of the control device 40, the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the third heating means HM3 may be updated to appropriately modified or improved programs at the request of the user US or at the request of the manufacturer of the cooking appliance 1. In this case, for example, the modified or improved programs may be obtained through the communication unit 51.

One of the heating parts (IH coils 9L, 9M, 9R) of the first heating means HM1 for cooking on the top plate 3 may be replaced with a gas combustion burner. In this case, a gas flow valve is configured to be controlled by the control unit.
Further, a part or the whole of the second heating means HM2 or the third heating means HM3 may be replaced with a gas combustion burner or an induction heating source.

In the first to fifth embodiments, the input operation unit 15 has been described mainly as a "contact input" operation unit in which the user US touches the input keys to give input commands, and a press (push button) type operation unit, but it may also be a "non-contact input" operation unit that detects the movements of the user US's fingers or hands in a non-contact manner to input. In addition, a dial-type input means that the user US inputs by rotating it may be used for the input keys and the specific input keys.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 15 may be changed to a voice input method that recognizes and inputs the voice of the user US. In the case of the voice input method, a microphone and a voice receiving unit for receiving the voice of the user US and converting it into a voice recognition signal correspond to the input operation unit.
Alternatively, a mechanical switch such as a contact type or a pressure type may be used in combination with the voice input method.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 15 in the first to fifth embodiments may give commands to the cooking appliance 1 via an input terminal device equipped with a voice input function, such as a smart speaker or an AI speaker.

In the first embodiment, the nutritional data DD is described as being displayed on the central display unit 16M, but it may also be displayed on a display screen in another position (for example, the right display unit 16R, the left display unit 16L, or the right heat display unit 17R) depending on the display screen of various cooking menus.
In addition, in the first embodiment, the standby initial screen is displayed on the central display unit 16M, but in the second embodiment, if there is another display unit, the standby initial screen 16MH may be displayed on that display unit. For example, in the right display unit 16R for the right heating port 4R, the standby initial screen 16MH may be displayed immediately after the input key 153R is operated. This can also be applied to the left display unit 16L.

In addition, in the first embodiment (FIG. 24), the two types of components, major food components and nutritional components, are displayed on two screens, the food component display screen 16M1A and the nutritional component display screen 16M1B, but these two display screens may be displayed together (on one screen).

The user US may also press the function setting key 151KP to switch to the function setting mode and limit the displayed nutritional components and food components to only specific nutritional components. Furthermore, the user may press the input key 180 to switch to the voice input mode 2 and input by voice, narrowing the range to only specific nutritional components and food components.

Furthermore, when all the heating and cooking steps are completed or during the heating pause periods P3 and P5 of the linked cooking mode KM1, either the food component display screen 16M1A or the nutritional component display screen 16M1B, or both, may be displayed in response to a command from the user US or automatically.

The smart speaker or AI speaker can wirelessly communicate with a support server equipped with a voice translation function and a search function in a network environment, such as the cloud server 300, to transmit and receive information at any time. The voice (natural language) uttered by the user US near the cooking appliance 1 can be acquired as a voice signal, which is converted by the support server into a command signal from the user US, and ultimately a command signal can be generated for the cooking appliance 1. Therefore, even if the user US is near the cooking appliance 1, and both hands are occupied preparing food or processing ingredients, limiting the frequency with which the user can directly touch the input operation unit 15, the user can conveniently operate the cooking appliance 1 with natural speech (voice).

In the first to third embodiments, the input operation unit 15 is used to select the various control menus and control conditions displayed on the first specific screen 16M1, the second specific screen 16M2, and the third specific screen 16M3. However, touch-type input keys may be provided on the display screens of the central display unit 16M and the left and right display units 16L and 16R, which are the display means.

For example, the aforementioned Patent Publication No. 5833699, which proposes a technique for composite cooking, proposes a technique in which a composite cooking display screen is displayed, the names of the composite cooking menus are displayed on the display screen, and the user US directly touches the menu selection section with their finger to select a menu.

Therefore, the menu of cooking options available in the composite cooking mode KM2 or the collaborative cooking mode KM1, the names of the food to be cooked (a type of identification information), etc. may be displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2, and the user US may directly touch the display portion (also called the "icon" portion) with his/her finger to select the menu of the collaborative cooking mode, etc.

In the first embodiment, the communication unit 51 receives command signals and recipe data CD transmitted from outside the cooking appliance 1, and the cooking appliance 1 transmits each operation signal and command signal to the outside (operating state data OS). In addition, information indicating the progress of the start and end of cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 may be transmitted each time. When configured in this manner, the user US can know the progress information (operating state data OS) via the communication terminal 200, etc., improving convenience.

In addition to the cooking appliance 1, a home gateway having a function of receiving search result data on the inventory of the refrigerator 331 may be arranged as an information management device, and the cooking appliance 1 and the refrigerator 331 may be connected by a wireless communication means (LAN) or a wide area network such as the Internet, so that the cooking appliance 1 can obtain inventory information on the refrigerator 331 and use it for cooking.

Furthermore, the cooking appliance database 217 and the remote operation information generating unit 219 are not necessarily required as components of the communication terminal 200 such as a smartphone. For example, the first server 321 or the second server 322 may be provided with functions equivalent to the cooking appliance database 217 and the remote operation information generating unit 219, and each time the communication terminal 200 receives an input (including voice input), it may transmit the input to the cloud server 300 such as the first server 321, and obtain the necessary response information from the cloud server 300.

The cooking appliance 1 receives the recipe data CD and other data directly or via a wireless router from the communication terminal (information processing terminal device) 200, the first server 321, etc., but the cooking appliance 1, 400 may receive the data via another relay device. For example, the remote control of another home appliance (e.g., a water heater) installed in the kitchen may be used as the relay device. Such a remote control is convenient because it is usually always connected to a power source. In this case, it is desirable for the relay device to have a built-in storage device (flash memory, etc.) that temporarily stores various data including commands transmitted from the information processing terminal device 200, the first server 321, etc. Then, the various data transmitted from the cooking appliance 1, 400 is configured to be temporarily stored in the storage device (flash memory, etc.).

Furthermore, in embodiment 1, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200 reads out correspondence information KID capable of identifying a specific input key (e.g., 153M) corresponding to the confirmed cooking menu from the memory unit 220 or the heating cooker database 217, and generates "preview information 1 (201)" or "preview information 2", etc., but such correspondence information KID does not need to be present on the communication terminal 200 side.
In other words, if the cooking appliance 1 (400) holds the corresponding information KID, for example, in the memory device 41 or memory means 440R, 480R, etc., it can compare the corresponding information KID with the cooking identification information contained in the received advance notice information 1 (201) and determine the specific input key (for example, 153M) to be operated on the cooking appliance 1 (400) side.

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The substantial scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The cooking device and cooking system disclosed herein can be widely used not only in the kitchens of ordinary homes, but also in kitchens in public facilities, stores, etc.

REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 1 Cooking device 2 Body 3 Top plate 4 Heating port 4L Left heating port 4C Center heating port 4R Right heating port 5 Exhaust port cover 6 Heating chamber 7 Door 8 Handle 9 IH coil 9C Center IH coil 9L Left IH coil 9R Right IH coil 10 Open/close detector 11 Microwave oscillator (magnetron)
12 Radiant heat heating means 12a Upper radiant heat heating means 12b Lower radiant heat heating means 13 Infrared sensor 14 Thermistor sensor 15 Input operation section 15L Left operation section 15M Central operation section 15R Right operation section 16 Display section 16F Progress mark 16L Left display section 16M Central display section 16M1 First specific screen 16M1A Food ingredient display screen 16M1B Nutrition ingredient display screen 16M2 Second specific screen 16M3 Third specific screen 16MA Guidance screen 16MH Common screen (initial screen during standby)
16MM Receiving operation display screen 16R Right display section 17 Heating power display section 17L Left heating power display section 17M Center heating status display section 17R Right heating power display section 20 Main power switch 20A Button (key) for operating the main power switch
21 Light emitting section 21L Light emitting section 21M Light emitting section 21R Light emitting section 22 First display area 23 Second display area 24 Third display area 25A to 25C Display information 26 Light emission control section 27 Light emitting element (light emitting element group)
28 Fourth display area 29A-29B Display section 29C-29D Candidate display section 30 Group of temperature sensors 30A Temperature sensor 31 Infrared transmitter 32 Bottom wall 33 Installation space 35 Infrared transmitter 40 Control device 41 Display data storage section 42 Recipe data storage section 43 Heating control section 50 Audio notification section 51 Communication section (wireless communication module)
52 Input signal analysis unit 53 Data acquisition unit 54 Permission condition determination unit 55 Restriction unit 56 Audio signal receiving unit 57 Power supply circuit 58 Audio signal analysis unit 59 Human detection sensor 60A Display text 60B Two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code)
60C Two-dimensional information explanation 60E Caution display 60H Recommendation 60N Common information during standby 60P Acquired operation support information 70 Input processing section 90 Notification section 151L-155L Input keys 151M-159M Input keys 151R-155R Input keys 160 Control menu identification information 161 Control menu identification information 162 Control menu identification information 164 Reference information 165 Additional information 166 Additional information 167 Identification information 168 Identification information 169 Identification information 170 Operation support information 171L Heating section identification section 171R Heating section identification section 172 Process information 173 External recipe identification section 174 Reception operation display section 174A Reception support information 174F Non-permission display 174S Reception operation start information 175 Operation support information 175A Operation support information 176 Operation support information 176A Operation support information 177 Reception start information 179 Auxiliary information 179D Display information (voice input mode)
180 Input key (voice input only mode selection section)
181A to 181C Display unit 190 Icon 200 Communication terminal (smartphone) (information processing terminal)
201 Notification information A
202 Selection information A (confirmation information A)
203 Preparation Information A (Preparation Signal A)
210 Transmitter/Receiver 211 Communication Control Unit 212 Central Processing Unit (CPU)
213 ROM/RAM
214 Speaker 215 Touch operation unit 216 Terminal display unit (terminal display screen)
216A First screen 216B Second screen 216C Third screen 216D Pop-up screen (Second screen)
217 Cooking appliance database 218 Orientation detection unit 219 Remote operation information generation unit 220 Memory unit 221 NFC input/output unit 222 Voice input unit 223 Notification data 224 Remote control data 225 Display operation unit 226 Food ingredient/nutritional ingredient data 230 Recipe data acquisition unit 231 Recipe data transmission unit 232 Terminal side recipe selection unit 233 Food ingredient data acquisition unit 234 Character display unit 235 Image display unit 236 Cooking process information 237 Confirmation key (icon)
238 Input key (icon)
239 Character display section 240 Input key (for sending)
241 Cancel input key 242 Image diagram (schematic diagram)
242C Center heating port mark 242G Heating chamber mark 242L Left heating port mark 242R Right center heating port mark 243L Left selection mark 243R Right selection mark 244A to 244C Display unit 245 Identification information (cooking menu name) display unit 246 Operation guidance display unit 247 Input key for clearing screen 248 Recommended information 249 Elapsed time information 300 Cloud server 301 Recipe data providing server 302 Recipe database 310 Light emitting element for microwave oven (LED)
311 Grill light emitting element (LED)
312 Light emitting element for oven (LED)
313 Central IH light emitting element (LED)
314 High temperature warning light emitting element (LED) group 314a Heating chamber high temperature warning light emitting element (LED)
314b IH high temperature warning light emitting element (LED)
321 First server 321A Input/output unit (input/output interface unit)
321C Control unit 321P Food component database 321R Memory unit 322 Second server 322A Input/output unit (input/output interface unit)
322C Control unit 322R Memory unit 326 Food composition information server 330BT Wireless communication 330WF Wireless communication 331 Refrigerator 332 Menu screen display unit (icon)
333 Input key (icon)
340 Wireless router (access point)
400 Cooking device 401 First unit (lower unit)
402 2nd unit (upper unit)
403 Main body 404 Lid 405 Inner pot 406 Inner pot temperature detection means 407 Power supply means 408 Power receiving coil 409 Lid opening/closing button 410 Lid heating means 411 Inner pot side heating means 412 Second display section 413 Third display section 416 Hinge shaft 418 First display section 420 First operation section 421 Second operation section 422 Top plate 423 Opening 424 IH coil 426 Communication section (communication module)
427 Measurement unit (weight sensor)
428 Weight measuring means 429 Third operation unit 430 First reference position determining means 430A First communication unit (infrared transmission/reception unit)
431 Second reference position determination means 431A Second communication unit (infrared transmission/reception unit)
433 Temperature sensor 434 Control board 435 Inverter circuit 436 Heated object temperature detection means 440 Sub-controller 441 Commercial power supply 442 Power supply unit 443 Drive motor 444 Notification means 445 Step portion 447 Reed switch 448 Temperature detection means 451 Light-emitting display unit 452 Display means 453 Light-emitting display unit 454 Third reference position determination means 455 Audio notification means 460A Main power switch operation unit 461 Lid sensor 462 Audio input means 463 Human detection sensor 465 Notification means 466 Audio notification unit 467 Rice cooking start switch (input key)
468 Power supply means (secondary battery)
469 NFC input/output unit 470 Light-emitting display unit 471 Specific input key (menu selection key)
472 Outside air temperature detection means 473 Input key 474 Input key 475A Input key 475B Input key 476 Input key 477 Input key 478 Fourth operation unit 480 Main control device 481 Recipe data receivable information 482 Program display unit 484 Rice type display unit 485 Data acquisition unit 486 Hardness display unit 487 Menu display unit 488 Rice type switch (input key)
489 Hardness switch (input key)
490 OFF/KEEP WARM switch (input key)
491 Cancel switch (input key)
492 Reservation switch (input key)
493 Time switch (input key)
494 Calorie notification switch (input key)
495 Data Receivable Information (Receivable Mark)
496 Program display section 507A Auxiliary information display section A
507B Auxiliary information display section B
525 Transmission information display section 542 Reference information 543 Error notification (error display)
CD Recipe data CD1-CD2 Recipe data DD Food ingredient information NW Network OS Operation status data TB Acquisition period TB1 Recipe data acquisition period TB2 Acquired recipe data cancellation period TB3 Acquired recipe data change period TX First time limit (first limit period)
TY Time limit TY1 Time limit TZ1 Recipe data receiving limit period US User.

Claims (14)

An input operation unit;
A heating means driven in at least one of cooking step 1 and cooking step 2;
A communication unit that wirelessly communicates with an external device;
A notification means;
A control device that acquires setting information A of the cooking process 1 and setting information B of the cooking process 2 via the communication unit;
having
The control device sequentially acquires the setting information A and the setting information B, and when a specific input key A of the input operation unit is operated, the control device proceeds to a step of acquiring the setting information A,
proceeding to a step of acquiring the setting information B when a specific input key B of the input operation unit is operated;
A heating cooker characterized by the above. The cooking device according to claim 1, characterized in that the control device starts a reception state for receiving the setting information A or the setting information B when the specific input key A or the specific input key B is operated, and cancels the reception state when the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 is started. 3. The cooking device according to claim 1, wherein when the specific input key A is operated, the control device does not accept an input from the input operation unit for acquiring setting information of cooking processes related to other cooking menus. The specific input key A and the specific input key B have a function of selecting a voice input mode,
2. The cooking device according to claim 1, wherein the control device goes into a standby state in the voice input mode to accept an input from outside when a command to acquire the setting information A is received by the specific input key A or when a command to acquire the setting information B is received by the specific input key B. The specific input key A and the specific input key B have a function of setting a voice input mode according to an operation state,
The input operation unit has a start key for instructing the start of cooking and a stop key for instructing the end of cooking,
2. The cooking device according to claim 1, wherein when a cooking start command is issued by the start key, the voice input mode is cancelled. The cooking device according to claim 1, characterized in that, when the control device receives a command to acquire the setting information A, it determines whether the permission conditions are met, and if the permission conditions are not met, it does not acquire the setting information A. A plurality of input operation units;
A notification means;
A communication unit that acquires recipe data relating to one cooking object from an external device;
A control device that controls a cooking process according to the recipe data acquired via the communication unit;
having
When the recipe data includes setting information for a plurality of cooking steps, the control device sequentially acquires the recipe data divided for each of the cooking steps, for each of the cooking steps;
the control device, when acquiring the recipe data for each of the cooking steps, operates specific input keys arranged for each of the input operation units in an order determined by the recipe data;
A heating cooker characterized by the above. The cooking device according to claim 7, characterized in that, when one of the specific input keys is operated, the control device starts a reception state for receiving setting information for the heating means used for each cooking process, and when one of the cooking processes is started thereafter, the reception state is cancelled. The cooking device according to claim 8 , wherein the control device transmits information indicating that the reception state has started for each of the cooking processes from the communication unit to an outside. A first unit incorporating a heating means;
a second unit that can be heated by the heating means in a state where the second unit is placed on the first unit,
The first unit includes a main control device that controls the heating means, a communication unit that performs wireless communication with an outside, and a first operation unit that allows input operation in a state where the second unit is placed on the first unit,
The second unit includes a second operation unit capable of performing an input operation in a first state placed on the first unit, and a sub-controller that receives an input from the second operation unit,
The main control device has a function of acquiring setting information A related to a cooking process 1 and setting information B related to a cooking process 2 of a specific cooking menu via the communication unit,
The main control device includes:
(1) proceeding to a step of acquiring the setting information A for using the first unit alone when a specific input key A of the first operation section is operated;
(2) after the cooking step 1 is completed, when a specific input key B of the second operation section is operated in the first state, proceeding to a step of acquiring the setting information B for using the second unit;
A heating cooker characterized by the above. The heating cooker according to claim 10, characterized in that, when the specific input key A or the specific input key B is operated, the main control device starts a reception state in which the setting information A and the setting information B for the heating means are received, and, when the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 is started, the reception state is released. A first unit incorporating a heating means;
a second unit that can be heated by the heating means in a state where the second unit is placed on the first unit,
the first unit includes a main control device that controls the heating means, a communication unit that performs wireless communication with an external device, and a first operation unit that allows input operation without placing the second unit thereon;
The second unit includes a second operation unit and a sub-controller that can perform an input operation while the second unit is placed on the first unit,
The main control device has a function of acquiring setting information A related to a cooking process 1 and setting information B related to a cooking process 2 of a specific cooking menu via the communication unit,
The main control device includes:
(1) in a state where the second unit is placed on the first unit, when a specific input key B of the second operation section is operated, the step proceeds to a step of acquiring the setting information A for using the second unit in the cooking step 1;
(2) after the cooking step 1 is completed, when a specific input key A of the first operation unit is operated, proceeding to a step of acquiring the setting information B for using the first unit in the cooking step 2;
A heating cooker characterized by the above. The heating cooker according to claim 12, characterized in that, when the specific input key B is operated, the main control device starts a reception state for receiving the setting information A for the heating means, and when the cooking process 1 is started, the reception state is released. The heating cooker according to claim 12, characterized in that, when the specific input key A is operated, the main control device starts a reception state in which the setting information B for the heating means is received, and, when the cooking process 2 is started, the reception state is cancelled.

Images